The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About143-95 RESOLUTIONRESOLUTION NO. _43-95 A RESOLUTION AWARDING BID NO. 95-66 1N THE AMOUNT OF $465.000 TO HUNNICUTT CONSTRUCTION, CO., INC. AND AUTHORIZING THE EXECUTION OF AN AGREEMENT IN SAID AMOUNT FOR PHASE II CONSTRUCTION; AND APPROVING A BUDGET ADJUSTMENT. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THF CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE., ARKANSAS: Section 1. The Council hereby awards Bid No. 95-66 in the amount of $465,000 to Hunnicutt Construction, Co., Inc. and authonzmg the execution of an agreement in said amount for Phase 11 construction. A copy of the contract is attached hereto marked Exhibit "A" and made a part hereof. Section 2. The Council hereby approves a budget adjustment in the amount of $215,000 increasing Building Cost, Acct. No. 5550 3960 5804 00, Project No. 95073.0001 by decreasing Use of Fund Balance. Acct. No. 5550 0955 4999 99. A copy of the budget adjustment is attached hereto and made a part hereof. PASSED AND APPROVED this 21st day of November , 1995. APPROVED: f LitkA red Hanna, Mayor Traci Paul, City Clerk to City of Fayettevtile, altilsnssi Budget Adjustment Point' " • • w. • Budget Year (Department 1995 Division: Program: General Government Airport Capital Date Requested 11-3-95 Adjustment # Project or Item Requested: Funds for Phase II Terminal Expansion Project or Item Deleted: N/A. Use of Fund Balance / PFC. Justification of this Increase: Phase 'I was originally anned to be constructed with Federal Funds. .e FAA has chosen not to participate in project riding through AIP Program. Use of Fund lance will supply funds for this much needed provement requested by terminal tenants. rrent space is insufficient for tenant needs, strooms are insufficient for public requirement are ground transportation access and ilding temperatures. Justification of this Decrease: Fund Balance is sufficient to fund the project and maintain the City's 10% Fund Balance requirement. Reimbursement of the funds will occur through collections of approved Passenger Facility Charges. s Account Name Amount Increase uilding Cost 215,000.00 Account Name se of Fund Balance 4/4 df App val Sigma .= Re 'es -d : - Amount Account Number Project Number 5550 3960 5804 00 95073 0001 Decrease 215,000.00 Bu. get Co dinator Department Director Account Number Protect Number 5550 0955 4999 99 Budget Office use Only Type: A BCD i Date of Approval Posted to Gener l Ledger Bnteredan'Category log • Budget Office Copy • THE A M E R I C A N I N S T• : T: TE OF ARCHITECTS • AIA Ik,('ument A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor u here the basis of put+tent is a STIP( 'LA TED St 31 1987 EDITION THIS DOCUMENT RAS LilPOR7A.\7' LEGAL COXSEQI T.\'CES: 0 ).\;c(L74'1'1O \ u"1771 91"ATTORNEY IS E\(.Ol RAGkn 1X77'11 RESPECT TO ITS C(WPLE77O ' 01? ?I 1(N)IFICATI()X. The 1'VN- Fditi•m n/ AIA !Nt UM( .:t A101 General andilronc W the Contract Jnr construc ta.n, r.s adopted ur tins d''eumcntt h; reference Dotett nce u1th otter general rnndilrnns unle,.e tins d•'r ument ;, modified Thr. dncun:en:::a, 1.,,n apary wed anti rutilised h1 The .11/2.4tcnc.atcd Gencr 1 ( nnraculrs id Amen. a AGREEMENT made as Of the Nineteen hundred and BETWEEN the (honer 1 \a,nt' and addrt..., and rhe Contractor: 1,10 me and arldrt .., The Protect is: • \, rnn and 1 a arr•n. The Architect is: ;Aan;t a'rd t.;hlre•'. second Ninety- Five The Owner and Contractor agree ciao (tf November City of rayetteville, Arkansas 113 W. Mountain Fayettevil'e, Arkansas 72701 Hunnicutt Construction Co., Inc. 23C1 S. School Street Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 Terminal Expansion Phase 2 Fayetteville Municipal Airport Fayetteville, Arkansas Wittenberg, Delony & Davidson, Inc. :09 West Center, Suite 102 Fayetteville, Arkarsas 727C1 as set fottl: helot-, in the year of or} ng It Ni S. 1'11!. .•`ee ' •i 1951 ]9c8 ton, 1'a 1 . , "-' .111: .1/2 nil le:n.nt n' Ark .11 RA t . 1-4S Nr v. \ in •% It ri"t.t \ \1 \la •91:12.o" II ( ]nnnh Rrl'rnda. ' 1.'n. 11 .ht null ti'I huci i •:r ••ta 11 a . t.u'alnr: .11.1/4 1 iu•0o'• wn^„n ,.-;ry hr -v ++ nn n ...IC AI 411,1a • rlt, nl,t ,phi aUS,1 I he 1 x11(11",.t •a' d,1'l h: v,h t. ka..l : r..•c. 1111 r AIA DOCUMENT A101 • 41'\'R. t:\TR4' :R 4;., 11 l l•E\ 1 • 1U 111 iN 1 U IC 0.; • 4:41 • P,?". - EU \ WA a"81111641 ANINST 11 h.,1 wi 11:1111• I-i<\1U KIRK 1+N:` \U U++•4I\t.1J\:`t Dinar, WARNING: Unlicerseo photocopying violates U.S copyright laws and is subject lo legal prosecution. A101-1987 1 • • ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1 lie( :tract Jin ..me-t't nn,;,'. 111 his.\4•reen18n' t „n.lmi tinsel the t ':.tint l (Gt nrlal \np;+lercnl.ul ant.t.thr l 4:11C1;1( n• . 1 )ra\i".ngs. ,pit .li: atiorls. ad.ierda I,'...ed .lr 1:r ti 1 t \( t W.1111 Of 1: I, Aen'etnt'111 All r dtic un ('nn hsVV'. r th . \g" rrrrnt end MI )ditieati 11'.ssued afttx: (xel Ira Ca cal;kiss Aj2xt meUl CM' ti ' 11 `En the ; int IA. I:lnd ale as link ap:ll:. 11111: 111.11.41 .1+ fati.ir hid I1Ehm s\green-eilt r •r rt']'t aret]ie c111 .'e<.)' troll rein is 111.eilltaf:d anew iter; ag:t to rnl'3.t tut t n lh: h: reit, anti ,11.,e1 -4-d:, pen )':a:', r -s. rep est nip: 11:.,1 n „pav'ment • e the: a 1 flea 111 I nal \etc- tenet n.)11 o' }: 1 n --Iia.: 1 )i , c.n1enn. aper ;: an \1'toll' t au. 'ns. apt': ars :n \-tlt .e ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT the 1. t) :Itat to: steal] exec utr 1110 entire U t :rk first fined III die1Ly.1all'�.ru'Ir icl Dn. I.mrn:s, exerpt :o ^•c rxn 1 1 ,pet .Grain indleat:.1 r. .) :tie CcflhIarl o(urntn,> tn'It the :ctison lhlhl\ of iiher,, 1/{XXJCDOAX ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 'rht Gate e 1(('mater:;;men: i, the 1at;'rani uht tl the('nnlr..tt'1'me,r:P..ra4rapl:;2" cr easers,ant. ,hall be Ihr .ian c:t :his Agreement. as lint n cit t en ahn) C. a -.less a 3.1:11ert n:.late i, sued helms or pros rico s rr a.ic ''.r ".e da•r :11 ,t In ed I': d ran'.t t pr lceed ihwet. In the ; )u ner bei .:forint y • .n.n.I 11/4 n. ni C i( Me' r•: u.i Nv auto •1.1.•1t Cate of comrenceTer.t will he fixed in a written notice to proceed. . nlrss rhe t.at:• of •; )ln it nr 'Ciller( Is rstall.s'-ed hl a flout e s I :ri weed Issues: I-) the On ner the (. r'tra•a'r kh,.l r,,: I} Ilk )lv tie rfin ), rt::nK ..n: L,s Ila- fit c Ca) s I)eh 'ret 1 •ln erit:ng the \\ I'rk tc aerin t ;"e ;.nick hhnv a - 1 )r gages, FLrt h rots sit Alta rnhri stti.r:r\ m:erekts 3.2 he (:v Ir s tri: shall at Mese \t.hstantta. 1 L r p car al i11 the 1,74. re \X or[ net Inti r than P3.1' tat 1:11V0 iiuto• ^.1..'r i! n(Iln JN'•4:. .1i •..... n.�w e., lr•� ai gill' R e .l 1 nn lrl 141.1(41 ,..•:n .: n.' bn•( 1iri.n•': (11(t d •.L ,1 tl .! t....1 P., r. hi., u.:l•. r< .rd' ei' r....inlnri. . One hundred eighty (IRC) consecutive calender days from date of written notice to proceed. U 11ek :n ad'1r1: 't I1,' Y laps (1:'.Ir.,t t ]Irl( a• prnl Idl ti 11 :' r l.3:1 it :it 1 1)1 ((':lent, • Cne hundred dollars (5100.00; per ca'endar day according to Secticn 01010, Paragraph 1.07 of the Project Manua'. AIA DOCUMENT A1D1 • 1 \\\i'N 1 'n HAL 11.1: 1..1+11.411,1 • \ill 1 Ii •:•::1c1,. • \Ill• • 11114 VIRI' r\'\s 1'I r: 4141 IIIA' k 2.\I \44F 1'I+II \U 31,9'11.' n 11 .dlhn WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A101-1987 2 • ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 -he c )carer sha.l pax the c o.•trat to: n t u:n 11' lu:•S fin the tonna( t,r.'s 14 110:":1 11171' Cr Ihr t ntlInict :"t e >ntrh \urt (It Thfour Hundred Sbcty - ----nd D0/100-- ")•>I''rs ($ G55 000 CO 16 a \--i-•u1-11C1I Ic, glrifilniTCMIT.'->jttIlr'I1rTc 717rrRKRIPAYi Nu t 1,.. I tact 7 en:r n is //t 4.2 ']'lie (.>I tra.: 'Un1 .s -13\ed tap' in the x.11:>w ng aaernates It a -v which are ce'cnhed in the c;l:nt rec t 1 R c wnents Jilt: a:t herehc acceptec h1 Ilk Ow-er •cLYe 10 a nunihor.... •pel letennp ulp 7, • • a• 1151 .1 a7 , 'JIM 1' d. n-• c. 9•n ai:1 'nate an P. n, nl,ld. b. Nv ' id Ill.n• NIA . ...1. 1 A ...1 ... WI' AR. inif11. .lid,..]•. l `duo. •14. r. dh.. dirt •a a't •. •. P$ (J al•Y.d....uLl•a'nl:hi.i l4 ro,J u i'.% l d id itm•1•+11,.1.14 No alternates are accepted. 4.3 l ::1:.or1, es. is am . a:e as t Ca; s No unit prices. AIA DOCUMENT A101 • M. NI- RIcnW1/2J'X \4Rh:'1:V •• Idl:• 11>11,1\ • 1��' • 1111 4V1 -1711\\I\' 11. 11 •n 1R, n < ' \• N .i .. .'.\;0. >:� 1'.1 1 \d %li W1 \ n. WARNING: Unlicensed pholacopying violates U S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecuuor. A101-1987 3 4. ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1 Baset: dp1 ,n Appl•eauons for Pavn-cn: subm tied t 1 ::'r Arc" he the t: mtrac:ur and Ce:tilt ales fun Pavnhnt issued be the A:: lute.: tilt ( ;u nc' sha 1 Trak: pmgrtss p.. vnte"ts on aca.tint o: the (a 1rtract Sum to the Contra( t. 1r a< prinided her iu Inc: else" :ere In :ht Lonna( Documents 5.2 ']1"-c ocn, td cnccre(' :,v eac" k: p:i: atio:: tin- Pay mea stia]] be on.& calendar month ening on the lac dal' of the rim nth. a• as ft llnu s for the period ending the twenty-fifth or each month. 5.3 rnn iced an..Apnhcatinn n,e tenth (Oth) Art h itet t after the app.', anti dal,' alter the :II car wen: is re, elvrc hl the Architect nal leer t"an the twenty-fi ft h (25th cart •f a nn +tic's the (u tie: sha I make pa) men: 10:. c (i m: -act or nn: rat .1 ). al 1Iunon' h "f a:' App.lcaunn for Payment ,s as fist d date fist ah, we payment at t�t AP? � Oin the Owner not latt r than fifteen (15 ) 9-, hitec: re, encs the 9pl lilt aur •n fin Par n,rnt lr than hr the 5.4 1 ac" a:TN am 111 Inr }'a\ trent silt.]] he hast d up( ti (Ih sc"edii:t i+1 ra:u: s ,uhnulled 121 :`'t (.r'(reclo: 'n au infant t w'n1• I hr (l )11tract I)1 It. irk n:. 1hese. c-tiu t of, a ties gull al u, re the cul:te ,r-uat1slant aroung the vanods pl,r cm of 1 lit Ui tic at,d he p:: lucre. :n .u, 11 ti m .11 14.1 \„IT( mrd hr sn, h data 1osu1-s'int al ns sours,, as the\:. hit t t ma\ rt spirt' Fhs M Insul0 11111es uhp-r:ed t., 1'i' the A'. I' , t, .hi 1 hr used a, .1 l'ai'rs fill :_r len .tig the Contra( t:, 's Et qaa aur 'i 11 n ]'e) Ilan] 5.5 Appht aro-. fu: Par mem s1.2]]] •ndl. ale the pelt entage tit 1 or.1p:t tion tit eat nortinn 1f the R,+rk a, of the end of :lit lx til Id .JYeled 1+v Ila Ap]'I't anon "or Pa)rren: 5.6 suhlect to :re p. n -is ins '+1 the t rot:^ac: is ur'e n•‘, •in amount of r rh yoga's pa} trent shall :,e computed as a' lows 5.6.1. Lake"'at put tam l d the ( ort race Siam hn:pe-1‘a!Ioca1'Ie it tompleted\Xiorksdererne:ed b\mu.tip:\.ng tie preenlage conlaeuo'• eft a. h nu:til 'n,1: du Unrk b\ the shay: 10: ••'r lo•.al (Ontra; t Sum alit cated to dui poi to ,n ,of 1ht \Cork n the schedu e cf val'i s less :rta:nage 1 it ten lelce'l ( 10 . .1'ending11-alt:etern-ma(11"1 ' ift List tt '1 he hi ner •ftlunges 111 the ',o: k, amt wits net in the dtsputc mav'1e :m Indic, as pou\ Iced in suhpa: agraph - 3 - 14f tilt ( rrneral ( ondi:.Ins even though the C1 total, t Sum :as 1114 vet hien at.lusted 1-) Change ( 5.6.2 And :`at pnrlI ,n 1)1 the t 1 at::ac: sur p• marls ail waft& It, m:nena:s ant: & quil•ment de.ir erect ,tits: suitah:v s:'+red al the site lor subsequent Inorp frau' min the Corp e It ti co-is-heu1+n (u:, if apprnr ed it ado antethe e )ry::rr. suitably sti red cff the site AI a 11 u'ancn agrt &.1 hp in in u ming) .t ss ieiar'agt of ten percent; 10 5.6.3 subtrac:.'r exgregatt 4 :wen 1lepnx"ts'n rd& b} the OA n& r. ar d 5.6.4 sn:itra(t aa: pants, f am 101 uh t h :b& Ai; hate, t ::a, u iahead +r nullified a ten ifirate for Pavelent a, prnvicle,1 in Pa-a- gi:.ph S a: tilt t ovists] ( til alga 5.7 1 he prngress .'d' meat ant' m-' t lacer -mit d '11 at & .xdance urn 1, Pal aglal•h S h oral] he further nladltic 1 tinder 11w it Low:1w & c... ms; sat e, 5.7.1 Add open 41,..bstaraial icip;etinn of the sum 1,11:(101011: :4) MCI r'a,ethe :uta pavnents to One hundred pccenl ( 100 r,);f the Ca innact Suan. Tess such an•muntc as the A-chdec: shall tit tt mune to meomp:ete Rork and ,:nsettled ctainn: and 5.7.2 Add. 1. 1 nail carp t to in ,r' :he U irk is then ealu r nlal er:a]r delayed through ro fault ,11 the C nnrde:4 •r. anv acrd t +nail anoints p,nal:le In aeconlan, r lex nh 4i+p:a aguph b,1:l 2 01 the t ;t Ill "AI C tindnP ins. 5.8 Recut tin:: 01 Idnita:.nr. (.1 rrtamage. il atm shat he a. 1.1111 \ a .1 ' '• /. id 11 f m •t • v(h,l nr,.• (' n.f •4 • )71 •., INN rah• i. • tit n, paint 1 t Irml; IJICtel taeeg, rt trattn,t..:lr •m ll', pin •rare•.• t 111/ v• •rd.J,els etied •, • • I_421.21 „214 tin t• i'+1 f i f 'Mf•'a (.• uJ a, It. f(.•' n„nr. a: ,t Pn.,na' ra, rf h•r1' •,1r,ntnf..'at /1 P.A4410% r'r r.•.1..wIta.r„ , After fitty percent (5C") of the contract and with written consent of the Owner and cease. work has been satisfactorily completed, Architect, additional retainage will AIA DOCUMENT A101 • 0411.1: t•11 R4, 1(P A(,PF1+1`..11: • 10.. 1111111%1TUN • 41A• • '11 \M'PIt AN11.111 F CF 44• II 11(TI•• \•NI\I1 /Rh A\h\ 1 1U44NIIN&, D 1N 1.1 11,4' 2111H 111 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution A101-1987 4 ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT r.nal pa} men: a instituting 1 ] it ear 1t r.n; lam: ''phare .1:: •' c t 1 nr"ac: •11111 .hal tie made he the t )n rc r to the C. nttrac it \. `.en :: ) the ( o: tract has tr-en tui\ ]' rfo::•11 d :iv the (on: rar ex, ill rr the (.r"tra.air s :e.pnnsibility to Carrel t nonCunh'nrung Work as p:tx-nded In Stilp:aagi:Ip; 1.'. 1. 2 of the (r ur1.:1 (011.111 um. and to sal lslr r[her regbirerlernS n: all. W 11.1 h ne_essaril\ sd n -:ye 1ina; pa. ment. and t2 a find: (.e- link ate fol 1'::y n: m Las been''t d by the Art httec: such f na. pa% men: shad he made n\ the Owner n n mare the: 3c age' :• e I.s:la:•t t n: }t Archil t 1'4" finals Cerl ificate for Paynenl. ar as 1' Loa.. Before issuance of the final certificate, the Contractor shall obtain in writing from the bonding company, approval of such payment. No certificate issued nor payment made to the Contractor, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the contract work by the Owner, shall be acceptance of any work or materials not in accordance with this contract. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 \\']l r( -efe-ence n made 111 ars \gret ar or toe 'rrcr.l•,n el ilk it n. al Oink.l l)'1.r ancthel ( antra.: 1)., umer.t. ;he rel event:: rcicrs 111.11 pro\ hi( n .Is .1111C -4141. or supl'Irme..n d •n' other pie 1 11in. of :::t t a::trak: 1 )ot urx 111. 7.2 ]'at ru11' tale and .:n"ani andt 1 the t ..-Ira; t sh.J. hear r'f; resl frim ::'c crate Ira\ •'1en1 is duo .11 the rale stated Ix Icy , or Al 1h: a'tsent e [here. •I. a1 the legal rate pre. ailing :-am : me• 10 ume ..t the plate who -t• t• t P -'ICC s :o4 r..1 lq.r• ,rll.'•./'rl•'ry'.. c4.4411/ r{ •r .1:, N/A .1 .rola,.. an/ rkgcr, ti•v1• v . ...te .. .. 1.1. 11:11 kind : .n ..i.. hitt, ..1.11+1• etv . 11. Aha .r.tI •l rrn. Tat*, A. kink ....1, .111.11.] .t.r nd •.ul�. v 1�,.ny11t� • 'rt%p a...r r N�+d...P r..n .a0 .4'anu4 ora °.f•Y t r.dna(..r.• 0.1 .jJ'. 4.1 11. 4,',11. p-dJ r.1.•....r.. %1i.... 1.. .,11.11.. . Irk n 1.v...•. 7.3 Other pia\ 15ftns N/A ARTICLE 8 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8.1 the t.. n a. t ma. •le ICI111 tri 1i ;Ce ( lane: n ire • a n riellr as p- -e de% r" irtle.t 11 1,f the tit 11t7 a] t •' 1 t1 •11' 8.2 1 hr \k. •rk rlat he suspended h% the t h\u.; a. 1]111th. d al \r: t 1e : a of :"e ( .e'cral t t ncSnon' AIA DOCUMENT A101 • i .\\NI 6. '1\ kat ;.lh \. x11 \. N. • 14 111 10 11•:\ • 1 1' • 1 1 \'llhlt'\ Ns:l l : t a Kt 1111 . -14. NI t\ ` ;RN k; V 1 \t\ Uq.n1. It 17\ I1, WARNING: Unlicensed pholocapying violates U S. copyright laws and is subject to legal proseculior. A101.1987 5 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 ult. Contract Documents except for Sioth.9e a::ons Icued atter executer' of :ho- Agreement. arc enu:nera:es] as follows 9.1.1 T`e kgree'nrnt is this executes Standard turns e.f Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. AIA Document A:01 198' Edition 9.1.2 the General Conditions are :ht (-enera ( ordail ms of the ( ontrac: for Construction AIA Document A2131. 198- Edition. 9.1.3 the Supplementary and otter Condioo::s , if the (tmirae: are those contained In the Pr' led Sr n.lai dated art: an a. toaowe Document Title Pages 0002C Aldvertise,rent for bids 2 0010C Instruction to Bidders 3 00300 Bid Form 3 00700 General Conditions 25 C0800 Supplementary Conditions 14 9.1.4 The specifications ate these contained n Ttt 1''t qct: \l:nual dared a' in Sul>par graph 9 1 3. a':d Ire :Ls filLows :the Is, r,t y,t. •n,,,n..n' R1 ., „t , c,' .1•,>..i,r,.a. 1 t'.;m. ,l:,t,.,,ert Section Title Pages Division 1 through 16 as listed in the Table of Contents in the Project Manual. AIA DOCUMENT A101 • l:w'NI R e - Inc 1(111 4e.R11 I1/41:2N: • l u : l l l - I1> T] " • A:>• • 1:4I AMIRIt AN:'.` 1'111 ell AR:li112( 1N 1-2•51,14 1 /Rh MEV 1 \U 0.4'111S471 N lle :1•N+, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. A101-1987 6 9.1.5 nn 133.1:3 r.},L Ire .I' 1„131 3,. .I ,i.1, J. It 1 Number Title Date See attached "Exhibit A" - CONTRACT DOCJMENT PLAN L1S- 9.1.6 IL 1[113!: n, ., n. .I 1 .r 1.111, •W. Number [14 Ll 333.331 31A Date Pages Addendum No. 1 October 12, 1995 3 with attacments: Crawing ADD 1, ADD 2, Section 10150 (3 pages) m •1 ..ILL'nJ.. do^:; • 1'u'.: ::p re,11.uU1 ru;• ,ie n• 1 ra:l , I Il'. I , a: .1n 1 I1(, un:,"rn unll•g• ;•;e '11.1, 11"k :z ,',ren.' 'r. a:: .11‘ 1 rn..ine .I1: .1 D .;1 tit g"1 AIA DOCUMENT A101 • I i• 113\ kt 111N.111411 vi\ • u•; 1'1;•, 111\•• • • r•••, 1111 111 hl' q\,\'1':I II ih, •1 f •' -''\fU 3.! 433 :, \, I 33 1•11I\ 3IC1\ 1 i WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is si.blect to legal prosecution 1(10 I pi A101-1987 7 9.1.7 )the: documents, if an}, f vming par 14. the f,1 rn::zt t :r. wuments are as fol:on-s: 11, V h10 urn adchtu al do. ument•Ihn. I. an Wt. ndl de•t•em per t y the •nat-a1'l1•x unen's 171.t•amrra!'i.rda bnnprol tde that haLona, r Nina rl minas wiI a� �xdr,+tr,n[7n „r in' r'air• n f„ nrd ,n•trua n. •m III B'ade's aamfn. !•tars, yid dr or•n o -m nm • 1nd un' not part •,J th : .nt au • 1r•x'tm.mn utaea I nine+a:ed ,n fn,• •tR' cement :Tari ,a.0 td M 1.•a 14 ro :l uate redid '1 nr;•art • thea ,.t. it art n„ u mods NONE 1 ha Agreement is cote: eJ i20 l as of the dal and vc..t fest u rC:e:' dl:.l\r am: I} e.ecure'c. In at ]east tr.ree .ury�ne1 (11 sirs i rf w hl, h One .st.) he dela e: e.1 ton. -uIf-Lime :a\lit At. hated:] •r .ae In The adman sIrat a m:e tae I1rV raa t, and the renler'de: to the c;wnc•r City of Fayetteville, Arkarsas Fred Hanna, Mayor IP* Mil el ]•alma as.a t•rle• c a7\. fiAt 7O1i Hunnicutt Construction Co., Inc. . \.Feauan 470414' ,6. /Cos - i'• vre.1 warn.' Dna AIA DOCUMENT A101 ••%w\1R t(IN:R\• 1lrN U Il1'f•\' • TUI II I:' FI11Ins • \A` • 1:41 +\'i RI' \N '.':i:l IJ 111 \N11111:1 �_:'\S\IA `:11th \\I\ 1 \\\ ‘A•11 NI 11r\ U. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyrlghl laws and is subject to legal prosecution 1 xT' r111< A101-1987 8 • • WITTENBERG. DELONY& DAVIDSON INC, .- I.:;.. •h -e r:11 1,4 r n• Ge y yo \ • rt•-e,es; 4r•a •,.•. n • cr 1:0C \\ : r••r. If• 0. • 7,2,1.A/0.11e Al :qtr.' JA 511 :.4.13 95; 5 • '.0 .1.41 EXHJB'IT "A" CONTRACT DOCUMENT - PLAN 'LEST FAYETTEVILLE :MUNICIPAL :AIRPORT ' 'FERMI NAT . EXPANSION:PHASE 2 FAYE TEVILI F, ARKANSAS PROJECT JOB #950.14 All sheets dated September :26.:11995 SHEET NUMBER TITLE C1..1 Site Plan & Details A:1.1 Jtoor Plan A1.2 Reflected Ceiling Plan & Details Al.3 Roof Paan & Details .A2.1 Building Elevations A3. 1 Wall Sections A4. 1 Toilet Plan & U.L. Rated Partitions A5..1 Door, Window.. Finish Schedules & Millwork Elev. A5.2 Door & Window :Details S1.01 Foundation Plan S2.01 Foundation :Details 53.01 Roof Framing Plan S4.01 Roof .I•,raming Details M1.1 Mechanical Plan M2.1 :.Mechanical .Schedules & Details M2.2 :Mechanical Controls & :Details P 1. 1 Plumbing Supply Plan P1.2 Plunibing:Drain Plan P2.1 Plumbing .Scl edu:es & Details Fl :1 Electrical Power Plan E 1:2 Lighting Plan E 1.3 Co. riniuniiation Plan E2.1 Eectrica] .Schedules & ..Detai1A STAFF REVIEW FORM • AGENDA REQUEST X CONTRACT REVIEW GRANT REVIEW For the Fayetteville City Counc'_: meeting of N/A FROM: Dale Frederick Airport General Gvmt. Name Division Department ACTION REQUIRED: Request review for the Mayor's signature of a deductive contract change order with Hunnicutt Construction for the north end terminal improvements. Several items were reconfigured and deleted with two additional items added (light pole fixture & sanitary vending machine). This change order results in a net deduction of $182.27 below total approved contract costs. COST TO C:TY: $ -182.27 $465,000 Phase II Terminal Expansion Cost of this Request Category/Project Budget Category/Project Name 5550-3960-5804.00 $464,400 Capital Account Number 95073.0001 Project Number Funds used to date Program Name $600 Airport Remaining Balance Fund BUD ET R VIEW: 4 X Budgeted Item ;fidge`t Coordinator Budget Adjustment Attached Administrative Services Director CONTRACT/GRANT/LEASE cy� A pfitn keit; le ty Att iseR Purchasing Officer REVIEW: 4-9-94 Date I) .1 % Date -_% Date GRANTING AGENCY: Date Date STAFF RECOMMENDATION: Staff Recommends Approval Division Head Department Director 12-2g \IN Admini.'tratiServices D %6c:& Mayor actor 9/06/96 Date Cross Reference Date New Item: Yes No Da't1N U, Prev Ord/Res#: g Orig Cont. Date: FAYETTEVILLE AIRPORT DEPARTMENT THE CITY OF FAYE'TEVILLE ARKANSAS TO: Contract Review Personnel FROM: Dale Fredenck. Airport Manager DATE: September 6. 1996 SUBJECT: Review/Approval of Change Order jfl with Hunnicutt Construction Attached please find Change Order #1 (deductive)to the Phase II Terminal Expansion Project. Several items were reconfigured and deleted with two additional items added (light pole fixture & sanitary vending machine). This change order results in a net deduction of <$182.27> 'below total approved contract costs. Should you have any questions or require additional information. please do not hesitate to contact :his office. Staff recommends approval. ATTACHMENTS: Three (3) Original Change Order Documents Contract Review Form 450C SOUTH SC -IOCL AVENUE. SUITE c . AIR' CRT TERMINAL BUILDING • FAYE"EVIL-1 AR 777C1 "IONE 5C1 -321-475C • FAX 501.521.1735 WITflNBERG, DELONY & DAVIDSON,,INC, Northwest Arkansas Office 130 West Center, Suite 102 Fayetteville, AR 72701 Te]: 531 443-6666 Fax: 501-443-9515 • CHANGE ORDER PROJECT: FAYETTEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT TERMINAL EXPANSION PHASE 2 T0: H;,^_6NICUTT CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. 2331 SCUTH SCHOOL AVENUE FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS CHANGE ORDER NO: 001 FRCJECT NO: 95014 DATE: 8-20-1996 CCNTRACT DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1995 CCNTRACT FOR: General Construction Ycu are directed to make the following changes; in this Contract: Project Value Engineering adjustments. Light fixture and pole furnished and tc match existing. 3) Furnish and instal'_ feminine product in location approved by Owner. installed vender -$ <1,837.00> 1,2C4.10 $ 450.63 < 182.27> CONTRACT RECAP .. .r: a:ra. ..ntt rant Slum. was Ne- -`a :ate by prev17,usly aut cr: zeal .:hanger .rders: c..tract ..nn ur:cr Change -rde-: The ...._Tact dun w.:: ne DECREASED by tnIs 'Mange ardel. _. - new Czntract 9..n c-ad_ra ,...-s _i: anye .,_der wi:: he: ..._-_.axact __me w.f: be INCREASED by FOt1RTY-SIX •46: days $ 464,817.73 Nn -.;i signed by Snth the Owrer am Arthatect 3-�.iat.xe of "he Tont rar-Dr Indtcatee r_a agreement herew_th rncl..dIng any ad7eatment an the Contract Sur or '2. race T:me. WITTENBERG, DELONY & DAVIDSON, INC. CONTRACTOR 103 West Center. Suite 102 Faye:tevulle. AR 72701 OWNER . WITTENBERG, DELONY & DAVIDSON, INC. • Northwest Arkansas Office 00 West center, Suite 102 Fayetteville, AR 72701 Te 5C' 443-5666 pax 501 443 95' 5 • PROPOSAL REQUEST PROJECT: FAYETTEVIL_E MUNIC.PAL AIRPORT PHASE 2 pqoposA REQUEST NO: OWNER DA -E. : C.TY OF FAME -TEV LLE 6 24 1996 1 1 3 WEST MOUNTAIN FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS �. I-JNNICLTT CONSTRJCT CN CC. 2301 SOUTH SCHOOL FAvETTEVI_E. ARKANSAS FRCJEC- NO CONTRACT FOR: General :orstr..ct;cr P'ease subm.t an :emized qucta:icn acr charges in the Cor:rac: Sun arc.cr T'me irc,Cer.tal to proposed moci'ications to the Contract Dccuments deserted hereir.. Quotation must oe received by the Architect with n fourteen calencar days from date of P•cposal Request. THIS IS NOT A CHANGE CRDER NOR A DIRECTION TO PROCEED WITH THE WCFK DESC=.9ED HERE N. Desc••ot:o^: ^E 'Sc S TE °A DING LAY OL.-. DELETE AMOUNT OF CONCRETE PAV NC AS SHOWN ON SKETOI A__ PAVING TO BE EX2CSED AGGREGATE TO MATCH EXISTING. EXCEPT ACCESS `JVALKWAv CN EAST SIDE CF ACDIT'CN PRCVICE RECWOCD ST= PS FOR CCN -PCL CIN -STN PATTERN AS SHOW. Attachments: NG REV SED SITE PAVING WITTENBERG, DELONY & DAVIDSON, INC. Richard Alderman, Pnnc:pal Northwest Arkansas Office •• q t r. • • _'' N, . Y 1 ye --'777-7:4`131 J/ 1 \ F VIk r .Ora :::$487rr-ri +7.0 Na;,Gb`c -NEW -41,CCITI L .. --.y..- Y.t s:: .. :. :_:::. • • L4v. --x- yreai « r a L, -.I • .. Ls -e-; • I, 141 1 i r--- I. = C.:5:117rti .e4 I -• - �.— .o Se •I ' "Tel f J . 7 ••• J/ d• ^' •• .` ''.e • lt� �. E_� • Esc... �L„a, .; � -.., �, r" • /2 �. �n —ma=r fi�u L - C } • a4r— {J-1— —f Si" — t 4C—c t Cif \C, ---' C• eft / 1 gfefrct CC its 1(.) OrlSte S ftflu-UV WITTENBERC BELOW & DAVIDSON_INC R E E F ONTE CONTENITS 244t of 'tE PROIECT TITLE aid tea `Lttt VC m (d,UKaPret, _pert TO HUNNICUTT 'CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. 2301 S School St. FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS 72701 (501) 442.0662 WITTENBERG, DELONY b DAVIDSON, INC. 100 WEST CENTER -SUITE 102 FAYETTEVILLE, AR 72701 443-6666 FAX 443-9515 We hereby agree to make the change•si spec lie belcw • We off r a cred't to our contract price 1,837.00) for the be ow liste changes: ELECTRICAL CREDITS -- OMIT WALLS OF CAR RENTALS -- OMIT PAINTING OF CAR RENTALS -- ADD STEEL FOR OLD CANOPY SUPPORT -- ADD EPDM ROOF AND FLASHING -- PIER AND GRADE BEAM CHANGES --- ADD DOOR FRAME AT OFFICE *2 -- ADD FOR HIGH SECURITY KEYING -- ADD FOR TESTING ABOVE $1,500 -- OMIT LANDSCAPE ALLOWANCE -- OMIT SINAGE ALLOWANCE -- ADD EXPOSED AGGREGATE WALKS -- DEDUCT PAINT ON VINYL WALLS -- OMIT PORTIONS OF WALKWAYS -- NET ALL CHANGES CHANGE ORDER REQUEST • Number 444E ..[4— 08 6/24/96 FAYETTEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT TERMINAL EXPANSION PHASE II FAYETTEVILLE AIRPORT FAYETTEVILLE, AR 72701 A B N1.MRLQ E' S' \.a in the amount of (3,041.00) (595.00) (460.00) 640.00 797.00 756.00 93.00 425.00 206.00 (1,800.00) (1,000.00) 5,244.00 (1,200.00) (1,902.00) (1,837.00) VCTE This Cha-ige Order becomes oar' a` arC n :cn`ornance with the ex ship ccrtract WE AGREE hereby tc make the change (s) specified aoove at this price 6/24/9* R._a SX'Nh PF C \ �pC"/moi -ACCEPTED —The above prices and spec fications of this Change Order are satisfactory anc are hereby ac- ceptec. All wcrk tc be pe•fcrmed ..nde• same :erns and cordit:ons as specified in angina contract un•ess other Signature w se stlpulatec. PREVIOUS CONTRACT AMOLNT PEVSED CCNTRAC—TO—AL Date of acceptance OWNER $' 11/02/W 'Ac W1TTENBERG, DELONY & DAVIDSON, INC. • Northwest Arkansas Office 100 West center, Suite 102 Fayetteville, AR 72701 Li. 443 t655 tar5G' 443 95' 5 PROPOSAL REQUEST PROJEC—: FAYETTEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT PHASE 2 PROPOSAL REQUEST NO: OWNER DATE: : C TY CF FAYETTEVILLE 7-31-1996 1 1 3 WEST MOUN—AIN FAYET—EVILLE. ARKANSAS HUNNICUTT CONSTRUCTION CO. 2301 SOUTH SCHOOL FAYE—TEVILLE, ARKANSAS PRO..ECT NO: CONTRACT FCR: General Construction Please submit an itemized quotation for charges in the Contract Sum and/or Time incidental .0 proposed modifications to the Contract Documents describec herein. Quotation must be received by the Architect within fourteen calendar days from date of Proposal Request. THIS 'S NOT A CHANGE ORDER NOR A D'RECION TO PROCEED WIT -1 THE WORK JESCFIBED HEREIN. -,esr rip• nn' Provide, install and wire rew parking lot light fixture and ode to replace existing unit used oy owner for otner locator. New pole anc fixture to match existing. At women's toilet provide and install sanitary rapkinitampon vendor. Vendcr to be Boorice model #352-25 for semi -recessed app ication. Install at location to be field verified with owner. Attachments: rental booth per attached df PEILTIO to- existng worth cerrental booths -per attached T drawing; revisions to existing car rental ccunters WITTENBERG, DELONY & DAVIDSON, INC. Richarc Alderman, anncipal Northwest Arkansas Office • r 1 St' I 4.- Obor.2 .hurr;ela' Frax:42.2-41?1 TEL V.. -`C.1 41-2-0 .w r rv, nya e,,, 46.0 • 416.0 • V b +20 irrel renter, - c.••. - 'WI 44Y my N.Irn • Wto LW HUNNICUTT CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. 2301 S. School St. FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS 72701 ANG :5.9E 11:nS Ne.Un1 r..1 (501) 442.0662 TO WITTENBERG, DELONY & DAVIDSON, INC. 100 WEST CENTER -SUITE 102 FAYETTEVILLE, AR 72701 43 443-6666 FAX 6-9515 We hereby agree 10 make the change fel euecit'ed be ow • • �.+ v v r �s CHANGE ORDER REQUEST Number r of N.,wt'LO n -,i N rAymfu LLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT NAL 1XPANSION PHASE 1I :FAYETTEVILLE AIRPORT ..xa & v-ILLE-r -AR. 7 X91 - -- -- —AD J bn-i 8/15/96 1 LI•1SI. M1U QON'na,. N I� 1'1Y/027 -'95u" YISay We reggugstpgan0increase to our contract price in the amount of for the belllow2211st0ed changes: Furnish and Install a new 20' Steel light pole. Electrical price 1,129.81 5% Overhead & Fee-- 56.49 1,129.81 Subtotal all costs and fees-- 1,186.30 Bond Premium-- 17.79 TOTAL THIS REQUEST-- 1,204.10 NOTE. Ib s Change Crdei be( ernes Leri of end in r on'armnnce win We emetine co,bect WE AGREE hereby to make the chargers) speclfled above at this price U $ 8/115196 — -- PaEvcous CONTRACT AMOUNT $ REVISED CONTRACT TQTAL $ • /'NCF Sfn.'1f.Na' Jnk (7LWir4 T• )p. ACCEPTED — The above prices end specifications of ihla Change Order are satisfactory and are hereby ac cepted. All work to be performed ander Sarre torms and conditions a9 specified In original cot -tract unless other- wise stipulated Signature Date of acceptance OWN k 11 501 4.0 ; r,:,2 Hunn;:.utt =a,:442-4919 T -_:1-`10:-442-T652 R1.g 19,95 11:,, Nr.002 c.':1 Fold ell >I1al; 111 ou0 VW"' r.n- q. ✓ V v Is' V v v V V V V v atild wow, l'1rnitar—t_ •S nein .y1R1 • M Tn-.i • CF1*NSE ORDER HUNNICUTT CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. 2301 S School St FAYETTEVILLE. ARKANSAS 72701 (501) 442-0662 TO WITTENBERO, DELONY 6 DAVIDSON, INC. 100 WEST CENTER -SUITE 102 FAYETTEVILLE, AR 72701 4436666 - FAX x443-9515 ho•eby agree 10 make the change lel asecIlled below • REQUEST Number .OU ti -..I let 8/19/96 PYETTEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT TERMINAL EXPANSION PHASE II- 1t,AYETTEVILLE AIRPORT F,AZUSESIEdV 1 LLE 1 1 ,1 r, 11/02=/0 . We reque$t5pin0increase to our contract price in the amount of for the below wS44listed changes: INSTALL A SURFACE MOUNTED COMBINATION FEMININE NAPKIN - TAMPON VENDOR LABOR -- MATERIAL -- 12% Overhead 6 Pee -- $65.00 331.40 396.40 47.57 Subtotal all costs and fees-- 443.97 Bond Premium- - 6.66 TOTAL THIS REQUEST-- 450.63 NCIt Th s Change .C1 dor brr,•mes omit of and in COntolmarce wen ihn o• sling con!rnot WE AGREE hereby to make the change(s) specified above at this price r $ P1 -ti VIOUS CONIRAGI AMOUNT 1 $ ACCEPTED — The above prices and specifications 01 Ibis Change Order are satisfactory and are hereby ac- cepted. All work to be performed under same farms and conditions as specified In original contract unless other w.ae stipulated. REVISED CONTRACT TOTAL $ Date of acceptance 5•gnature • PROJECT MANUAL FOR FAYETTEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT TERMINAL EXPANSION PHASE II FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS PROJECT NO. 95014 SEPTEMBER 26, 1995 Ii I WITTENBERG, DELONY & DAVIDSON, INC. ARCHITECTURE & INTERIOR DESIGN 320 W. CAPITOL AVE., SUITE 840 LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72201 (501)376-6681 Mechanical -Electrical Engineers GREEN -ANDERSON ENGINEERS, INC. 2233 GREEN ACRES ROAD FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS 72703 (501)442-4682 Structural Engineers ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS, INC. 209 WEST CAPITOL AVE., STE. 423 LITTLE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72201 (501)376-3752 I PROJECT MANUAL FOR FAYETTEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT TERMINAL EXPANSION PHASE II FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS PROJECT NO. 95014 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION SECTION TITLE BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00020 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00220 SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA 00300 BID FORM 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK AND PROCEDURES 01020 ALLOWANCES 01030 ALTERNATES 01100 SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01300 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02072 DEMOLITION FOR ADDITION AND REMODELING 02100 DEMOLITION AND SITE PREPARATION 02200 EARTHWORK 02282 TERMITE CONTROL 02380 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02514 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02700 STORM DRAINAGE 02900 LANDSCAPING DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03500 CEMENTITIOUS DECKS DIVISION 4 - MASONRY I I 04100 MORTAR 04150 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04200 UNIT MASONRY Ll -1- (Continued) DIVISION SECTION DIVISION 5 - METALS 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05200 METAL JOISTS 05300 I METAL DECKING 05500 i. MISCELLANEOUS METAL DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06400 ARdHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07150 DAMPPROOFING 07200 H INSULATION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07270 FIRESTOPPING 07411 METAL ROOFING 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07900 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08210 PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS 08400 ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMING 08700 HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING DIVISION 9 - FINISHES - 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09260 GYPSUM SHEATHING 09310 TILE 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 09680 CARPET 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10800 . TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES -2- TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) DIVISION SECTION TITLE DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (No Work Under This Contract) DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS (No Work Under This Contract) DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (No Work Under This Contract) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (No Work Under This Contract) DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15411 SANITARY DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 15412 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 15510 HYDRONIC SYSTEM 15855 AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS 15891 LOW AND MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15933 FAN POWERED VAV BOX AND HOT WATER HEATER 15950 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16110 RACEWAYS 16120 WIRES AND CABLES 16130 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16450 GROUNDING 16473 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS, 277/480 VAC 16481 MOTOR STARTERS, FULL VOLTAGE 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS I I TERMINAL Sealed bids for Phase II Add. Building at the Fayetteville 71 North, Fayetteville, Arka Local Time on Thuesday Octot Building, Room 306, loca Fayetteville, Arkansas and aloud. The work includes Site Improvements, Building D Remodeling, Mechanical Wox under one prime contract. The City of Fayetteville encourages disadvantaged bL Part 23 to participate in I The City of Fayetteville bids, and to waive any interest of the City. Each bid must be accompaniec in the amount equal to five bond to be issued by a sure the State of Arkansas, sae damages in case the successfi enter into the contract fo: furnish the necessary bonds1 the date of the Notice of At TO BIDDER 95-66 MUNICIPAL AIRPORT ?ANSION PHASE II ion & Remodeling of the Main Terminal Municipal Airport, Drake Field, Hwy. sas will be received until 4:00 P.M., r 17, 1995 at the City Administration :d at 113 West Mountain Street, ien will be publicly opened and read Demolition and Preparation, Site Dlition, General Construction and and Electrical Work, all to be let an Equal Opportunity Employer and iess enterprises as defined in 49 CFR s project. s the right to reject any and all ities deemed to be in the best by a surety bond -(proposal Guaranty) percent (5%) of the whole bid, said r company licensed to do business in bond to be retained as liquidated bidder fails, neglects or refuses to the construction of said works and thin fifteen (15) days from and after rd. The successful bidder will be required to furnish separate performance and payment bonds in favor of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, in an amount equals to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount, at the time of the award of the contract. All bidders shall conform to Licensing Law for Contractc General Assembly. The Owr informalities in, or to rej withdraw his bid within 60 thereof. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II the requirements of the Arkansas State :s set forth in Act 150 of the 1965 sr reserves the right to waive any 2ct any or all bids. No bidder may days after the date of the opening 00020-1 I II 95014 ' II Copies of drawings, specification and other proposed contract documents are on file and are open to inspection at the following places. Wittenberg, Delony & Davidson, Inc., 100 West Center Street, Suite 102, Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701. ABC Plan Room `/o Ozark Flooring, 930 North College, Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 ABC Plan Room c/a P.C. Hardware, 2901 McKinley Ave., Fort Smith, Arkansas 72903 F.W. Dodge Corporation Plan Room, 1701 Centerview Drive, Suite 110 Little Rock, Arkansas 72211 Construction Market Data, 1501 North Pierce, Suite 101, Little Rock, Arkansas 72207 Joplin Bidding Service, 1220 W. 13, Joplin, Missouri 64804 Prime Contractors may obtain up to three (3) sets of contract documents upon deposit of a check in the amount of $75.00, made payable to Wittenberg, Delony & Davidson, Inc.. The deposit will serve as a guarantee of the return within seven (7) days after the bidding of all three (3) sets of the documents in a usable condition. Additional sets or partial sets of bid documents may be obtained for the actual cost of printing, which is not refundable. All sets and partial sets of bid documents may be ordered from and paid for at Southern Reprographics, Inc., 901 West 7th, Little Rock, Arkansas 72201 (Phone 501-372-4011). Arkansas Prevailing Wage Rates as determined by Department of Labor, will be paid for work done under this contract. By: Peggy Bates. Purchasing Officer City of Fayetteville, Arkansas ' TERMINAL EXP PHASE .. 00020-2 95014 U 1. E 3. SECTION 00100 BID FORMS A. Bids must be sub 00300 of Project B. Place Bid Docume labeled with wor number, name of C. In case of discr bidder and amoun written out rath D. Attention of Bidd Alternates in Div Project Manual wh completion of the INTERPRETATIONS A. No interpretation documents will be for such interpre to Wittenberg, De, Suite 840, Little rior Design, and 1 received at least for opening of bi4 B. Interpretation a in form of writt contract bidders addendum or inte from obligation da so issued sha A. Bid must be accomp than five percent option of bidder m bid bond secured b bank draft must be guaranty shall ins nishing of perform successful bidder. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS on forms included in Section Submit one copy. s, sealed in envelope, and clearly "Bid Documents". Show job name and dder, date and time of opening. ncy between written amounts shown by in figures on bid form, the amount than amount in figures shall govern. is called to Section 01030- n 1 - General Requirements of this will affect the manner of Form. f plans, specifications or other bid ade to any bidder orally. Requests tion should be in writing addressed ny & Davidson, 320 W. Capitol Ave., ock, AR 72201, Architecture & Inte- be given consideration must be ive working days prior to date fixed supplemental information is issued addenda mailed to prospective prime Failure of bidder to receive any etation shall not relieve bidder er his bid as submitted. All adden- become part of contract documents. nied by bid guaranty of not less 51) of the amount of bid, and at y be certified check, bank draft, or • surety company. Certified check or made payable to order of Owner. Bid re execution of contract and fur- nce and payment bond or bonds by TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1,00100-1 95014 I I II I1 I II I 4. OPENING OF BIDS A. At time and place fixed for opening of bids, every bid received within time fixed for receiving bids will be opened and publicly read aloud, unless the bid contains irregularities in statutory requirements. Failure of bidder to respond to statutory requirements listed on the bid form may result in the bid being declared nonresponsive and the bid will not be read nor will the bid be considered for the purposes of awarding a Con- tract. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS PRIOR TO BID OPENING A. Bids may be withdrawn on written or telegraphic request dispatched by bidder in time for delivery in normal course of business prior to time fixed for opening; provided, that written confirmation of any telegraphic withdrawal over signature of bidder is placed in the mail and postmarked prior to time set for bid opening. Negligence on the part of bidder in preparing his bid confers no right of withdrawal or modification of his bid after such bid has been opened. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER A. Owner may make such investigations as he deems neces- sary to determine ability of bidder to perform Work, and bidder shall furnish to Owner all such information and data for this purpose Owner may request. Owner reserves right to reject bid of any bidder who has previously failed to perform properly, or to complete on time, contracts of similar nature; who is not in position to perform contract, or who has habitually and without just cause neglected payment of bills or other- wise disregarded obligations to subcontractors, materi- almen, or employees. 7. POWER OF ATTORNEY A. Attorneys -in -fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney. LAWS AND REGULATIONS A. Bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State laws, municipal ordinances, and rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over construction of project shall apply to contract throug- hout, and they will be deemed to be included in TERMINAL EXP. PHASE I1 00100-2 95014 I contract the same cific attention o Arkansas State Li of 1965). 9. CONDITIONS OF THE WORK A. Bidder must infor to construction o Failure to do so his obligation to to carry out prov possible Contract employ such metho of or interferenc 10. BID INFORMALITIES AND A. Owner reserves r bid or to reject 11. _CONDITIONAL BIDS A. Conditional bids 12. ORDER OF DEDUCTING s though written out in full. Spe- bidder is called to requirements of nsing Law for Contractors (Act 150 himself fully of conditions relating project and employment of labor. es not relieve successful bidder of urnish material and labor necessary ions of his contract.-. Insofar as in carrying out his -Work, must or means not cause any interruption with Work of any other Contract. OF BIDS to waive any informalities in a or all bids. not be considered. TES A. _ In accordance with provisions of Act No. 370 of the 1977 Arkansas State Legislature, deductive alternates, if required to mare an award within the available project funds, will be taken in numerical sequence starting with No. 1 and continuing numerically until a contract amount iS reached within available project funds. Apparent low bid will be based upon the proce- dure as set forthuin Act 370. 13. "CALL BEFORE YOU DIG" A. An Arkansas State Session requires 1 be given by callii construction prof( is a free service penalty ranging u] aw passed by the 1991 Legislative at at least two days advance notice • 1-800-482-8998 before digging on a t using mechanized equipment. This Failure to do so can result in a to the amount of $10,000. SECTION 00100 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1 00100-3 95014 SECTION 00220 - SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SOILS REPORT A. A geotechnical investigation of the site has not been made for this Project. Test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by Contractor, at his own expense; however, no change in the Contract Sum will be authorized for such exploration. Architect and Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn by Contractor from his own investigations. PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 00220 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00220-1 95014 I II SECTION 00300 - BID FORM FOR ½YETTEVIL �E MUNICIPAL AIRPORT TERMINAL iLXPANSION PHASE II FAYETTIVILLE, ARKANSAS PROJECT NO. 95014 Proposal of - (hereinafter called "Bidder" -Inapplicable Items) 1. An (State) 2. A Partnership, or 3.- An Individual doing To: Gentlemen: Bidder, in compliance with Additions and Remodeling of Fayetteville Municipal Airp Fayetteville, Arkansas, hay with related documents and familiar with all condition including availability of m furnish labor, materials, a accordance with Contract Do therein, and at prices stat expenses incurred in perfor Documents, of which this pr Bidder hereby agrees to c before date specified in fully complete project wi (Strike Out Following Corporation, less as vertisement for bids for Phase II he Main Terminal Building at the t, Drake Field, Hwy. 71 North, g examined plans and specifications to of the proposed Work, and being surrounding proposed project, erials and labor, hereby proposes to supplies, and construct project in ments, within time set forth below. Prices are to cover all - ng Work required under Contract osal is a part. nce work under this contract on or ten "Notice to Proceed" by Owner and time stipulated in specifications. -- Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: No. ___ Date: No. ___ No. ___ Date: No._ BASE BID: Bidder agrees to Preparation, Site Improveme: TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II No. ___ Date: e• No. ___ Date: rform all Site Demolition and Building Demolition, General 00300-1 95014 11 II II II II II Construction and Remodeling, Mechanical Work and Electrical Work for the sum of lars LIST OF DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATES (Refer to Section 01030 - Alternates for detailed description) DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE NO.1: For changing ceramic paver tile at Lobby to Carpet Type II, deduct the sum of Dollars ($ LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS I, the undersigned General Contractor, certify that proposals from the following subcontractors were used in the preparation of my proposal. I agree that if I am the successful bidder, and if following subcontractors are approved, I will not enter into contracts with others for these divisions of the Work without written approval from Architect and Owner. MECHANICAL: PLUMBING: ' ELECTRICAL: I I I I I NAME: ROOFING AND SHEETMETAL: LICENSE NO. In accordance with Act 291 of 1993 of the Arkansas State Legislature, the Contractor has reserved the sum of Dollars ($ for trench or excavation safety systems as defined and described in Section 01100 of this Project Manual. Bidder understands that Owner reserves right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding. Bidder agrees bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for period of sixty (60) days after scheduled closing time for receiving bids. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00300-2 11 1. For drilled concrete piJers, in place. Refer to Section 02380: Deduct/Add: $ per L.F. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to review and or negotiate Unit Prices that are deemed to be not in accordance with current market value of proposed services. Upon receipt of written no execute formal contract wi bond or Bonds as required General Requirements. Bid base bid is to become prop and bond are not executed liquidated damages and add Date: Ark. License No. (Seal - If bid is by a TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II e of acceptance of bid, Bidder will n ten (10) days and deliver Surety Paragraph 1 in Section 01100 of curity attached in amount of 5% of y of Owner in event above contract hin time set forth above as onal expenses to Owner. (Signature) (Title) (Business Address) 00300-3 95014 l I I SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. GOVERNING STANDARD DOCUMENT A. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", Document No. A201 of American Institute of Architects, Fourteenth Edition dated 1987, Articles 1 through 14 inclusive, consisting of twenty-four printed pages, are hereby bound and incorporated into these specifications and is to be used as the General Conditions for this contract. 2. AMENDED PROVISIONS A. Where any article or articles of above A.I.A. General Conditions are supplemented by Supplementary Condi- tions, provisions of such articles shall remain in effect and supplementary provisions shall be considered as added thereto. Where any such article or part of such article is amended, voided or changed by Supple- mentary Conditions, provisions not specifically so amended, voided or changed shall remain in £ull effect. Where provisions of Supplementary Conditions are at variance or conflict with provisions of the A.I.A. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions shall govern. A.I.A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work in every Division or Section of these Specifications. END OF SECTION 00700 I ' TERMINAL EXP PHASE II 00700-1 95014 I AMERICAN I N S T I T U T E I,- ARCHITECTS AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUME,VT HAS IMPORTAVT LEGAL CONSEQC&VCES• CONSUL TATIO.V WITH AN A 7TORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS .I(ODIFIG-ITIO:V 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. OWNER 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION • 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11. LNSURANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF \YORK ' 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SEPARATE CONTRACTORS ' 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK CONTRACT - - This document has been approved and endorsed by the Assoca:ed General Contractors cf America. Copyrigbr 1911. 19:5, 1918, 1925, :937, 1951. 1958, 1961. 1963. 1966. 1967. 1970, 19r6, ©:987 by The American Institute of Archnecrs. 175 New York Avenue, NW.. Wash;ngton. J.C. 20006. Reproduction of the mmeriaf hcre:n or subsrannal quotation of i•rs provslons without wri:ren permisson cf the AIA violates the copyright laws of the Cnired States and wilt be subject to legal prosectiions. ' AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOCRTEENTH EDIT'.ON AIA' •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N\t.VASHI?GTON,D.C 20006 A201-1987 1 Ii I INDEX - Acceptance of Nonconforming Work ......... 9.6.6, 9.9.3.12.3 Building Permit ................................... :.". i Acceptance of Work ........... 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3 Capitalization.......................................1.4 Access to Work ........................... 3.16, 6.2.11 12.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion ....................98.2 Accident Prevention .............................. 4.213, 10 Certificates for Payment....... 4.2.5.4.2.9, 9.3.3.9.4, 9.5.9.x4. i. Acts and Omissions ... 3.2.1,3. 2.2, 3.33.3.12.8.3.18, 4.2.3. {4.32, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7. 14.1.1.3. 1t2. 4.3.9, 8.3.1, 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7,)114.1 Certificates of Inspection,TestingorApproval ..... 3.12.1!.13.54 Addenda ...................................... 1.1.113.11 Certificates of Insurance .................. 9.3.2, 9.10._2. 11:1.3 Additional Cost, Claims for ......... 4.3:6, 4.3.7.4.3.9.6.1.1110.3 - Change Orders...... I.I.1,2.4.1, 3.8.2.4.3.11.4.2.8.4.3.3. 5.2.3. Additional Inspections and Testing ....... 41.6,9.8.2,123.1,13.5 - 7.17,2,7.3.2.8.3.1.9.3.1.1.9.10.3.11.3.13. Additional Time, Claims for ............. 4.3.6, 4.3.8, 4.3.9,8.3.2 11.3.4, 11.3.9. 12.!._2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ....... 3.3.3, 4, 9.4.9.5 Change Orders. Definition of .......................... Advertisement or Invitation to Bid ...................... 1.1.1 Changes........................................... 7.1 Aesthetic Effect ...............................4.2.13.4.5.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK ..3.11.4.2.8.7,8.3.1.9.3.1.1.!9.1.3 Allowances........................................3.8 Claim. Definition of .............................. . 4.3.1 All-risk !nsurance.................................1113.1.1 Claims and Disputes ................ 4.3, 4.4.4.5.6.2.5.3.3.2. Applications for Payment .. 42.5, 7.3.7,92.9.3,9.4.9.5.I. 9.6.3, 9.3.1.2. 9.3.3, 9.10.4. 10.1.4 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.1.3, 141.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims ................ 4.5.6 Approvals .... 2.4, 3.33,3.5,3.1O.2,3.12.4 3.10.2, 3.12.4 through 3.12.8, 3 18.3, Claims for Additional Cost ........ 4.3-6.4-3.7,4.3.9.6.1.1. !0.3 4.2.7. 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4, 13.4.2,113.5 Claims for Additional Time ............ 4.3.6.4.3.8,4.3.9.83_' Arbitration .....................4.I.4,4.3.2,4.3.4,4.4.4,4.5, Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions........... 4.3.6' 8.3.1, 10.1.2, 11.3.9. 11.3.10 Claims for Damages...3.18. 4.3.9,6.1.1,6.2.5. 8.3.2, 9.5.12. 10. i.4 Architect ...:..................................... 4.1 Claims Subject ro Arbitration................. 4.3.2.4.44.4.5.! Architect, Definition of...............................4.1.1 Cleaning Up...................................3.15,o.3 6.3 Architect, Extent of Authority ........ 2.4, 3.12.6, 4.2.4.32. .3.6, Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period ..........13.7 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.12, 73.1, 7.3.6, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to ....... 2..2. 9.4, 9.5. 9.6.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.10.1.9.10.3. 12.1, 12.2.1. 2.2.1. 3.2.1.3.2.2. 3.7.1, 3.10.1. 3.12.6. 4.3.'. °1:. 13.5.1. 13.5.2. 14.2.2. e4.2.4 6.2.2. 8.1-2. 82.2. 9.2. 11.1.5. I I.9 ,•.:: Architect, Limicaions ofAuthority and Responsibility . 3.33.3112.8, Commencement of the Work, Definition of .............. ..: 3.12.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 411, 42.3, 4.2.6. 42.7, 4.2.10. 412.12. Communications Facilitating Contract 4.2.13, 4.3.22, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2. 9.6.4, 9.6.6 Administration ........................... Architect's Additional Services and Expenses .......... 2.4, .8.2, Completion, Conditions Relating to ....... 3.1 L 3.:5.4.2.2. 11.3.1.1, 122.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 4.3.2. 9.4.2, 9.8. 9.9.1. 9.10, 11.3.5. 12.2.2. Architect's Administration of the Contract .......... 4.2, x.3.6, COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND ........................S 4.3.7, 4.4, 9.., 9.5 Completion. Substantial ......... 4.2.9.4.3.5_. 8.1.1.3.1.3. .2... Architects Approvals 2.4,3:5.(,3.10.2,3.12.6,3.12.8,3.18.314.2.7 9.8.9.9.1.12.2.2.:' Architect's Authority to RejectWork .... 3.5.1, 42.6, 12.1.2. 112.2.1 . Compliance with Lies ...... 1.3.3.6.3.7.3.13.4.1. t. 10.2.2.:..1. Architect's Copyright ................................. 1.3 I t.3.-13.1, 135.1. 13.5_'. 19.6. 14.1.1. 14.2.:.3 Architect's Decisions.......... 4.2.6, 4.2.7. 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 42.13, Concealed or Unknown Conditions .....................4.3.0 4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4.1, 4.4.4, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8. 8.1.3. 8.3.1, Conditions of the Contact ................... 1.1.1. 1.I.'. c.!.1 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2 14.22;-1}4.2.4 Consent, Written ................ 1.3.1.3.12.8. i.l4.?. +..i_'. Architect's Inspections ........... 4.22, 42.9, 4.36, 9.4.2.9.8.2. - 4.3.4. 4.5.5. 9.3.2. 9.8.2. 9.9. L 9.10.2. 9.10.3.I0.1.2. ; 0.1.3. 9.9.2. 9.10.1113.5 11.3.1. 11.3.1.4. 11.3.11. 13.2.:3.4.' Archfect'slnsrructiotis.. 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,4.3.7,7.4.1,12.1,13.53 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE Architects Interpretations .................41.11.4.2.12.14.3.7 CONTRACTORS............................... 1.1.4,6 Architect's On -Site Observations ........ 4.21, 4.2.5.4.3.6, .4.2, Construction Change Directive. Detnition of .............. • 9.5.1. 9.10.11, 13.5 Construction Change Directives .... 1.l.I.-i.2.8. 7.1,7.3,9.3.1.} Architect's Project Representative ..................... 4.2.10 Construction Schedules. Contractor's ...............3.10.6.1.3 Architect's Relationship with Contractor ....... 1.1.2, 3.2.1. Ji2.2, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts ................5;4 3.3.3, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 3.12.11, 3.16, 3.18, 42.3. 4.2.4, Continuing Contract Performance ....................4.3.4 4.2.6. 4.2.12, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7.3.4, 9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Contract, Definition of ...............................1.1.2 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors .... 1.1.2,4.2.3. .2.4, . CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR _ 4.2.6. 9.6.3. 9.6.4. 1tL3.7 SUSPENSION OF THE .................. 4.3.7.5 4.1.1.14 Architects Representations ................. 9.4.2.9.5.1.9-10.1 Contact Administration ..................... 3.33, 4.9.4.9.5 Architects Site Visits ........ 422.42.,, i2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, Contract award and Execution. Conditions Relating to ........7.i. 9.8._ 9.9._ 9.10.11 13.5 3.10. 5.2, 9.2. 11.1.3. 11.3.6. 11.4.1 Asbestos ......................................; ... 10.1 Contract Documents, The .......................1.1, 1.2.- Attorneys' Fees ........................ 3.18.1.9.10.2, 10.1.4 Contract Documents. Copies Furnished and Use of... I.3. 2.2.5. 5.: Award of Separate Contracts ........................... .1.1 Contact Documents, Definition of . . 1.1.1 .................... Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Contact Performance During Arbitration............ 4.3.+.4.5.3 Portions of the Work ..............................5.2 Contractsum ................... 3.8.4.3.6, 4.3.:.4.4.4. 5-2-3. Basic Definitions...................................1 1,1 6.1.3, 7.2, %3. 9.1.9.-, 11.3.1, 123.4: 12.3. 14.2.4 Bidding Requirements ................ 1.1.1,1.1.7.5.2.1.11.4.1 Contract Sum, Definition o(......... 9.1 .................. Boiler and Machinery Insurance ..................... 11 .3.2 Contact Tune ................. 4.3.6.5.3.8.4.4.4.7.2.1:3. .3. Bonds. lien......................................9.10.2 8.2.1. 8.3.1.9.-. 12.1.1 Bonds. Performance and Payment..... 7.3.6.4, 9.10.-.11.3.9 11.4 Contact Time, Definition of .......................... 8.1.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION •' FOURTEENTH EDITION 2 A201-1987 AIA•©198: THEA?IERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORKAvENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20n;IK' Ii I I CONTRACTOR ............... ............ ......... 3 Contractor, Definition of ... ....... ............. 3.1, 6 1.2 Contractor's Bid .............. ....... ..... ....... 1.1.1 Contractor's Construction Schedules ....... ..... 3.10, 6.1.3 Contractors Employees ....... 3.3.2,3.42,3-8.1 3.9, 3.18.4.2.3. 42.6. 8.1.2, 10.2. 10.3. 11.1.1. 14.2...1 Contractor's Liability Insurance .. ...... ....... ..... 11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces ..... 23b. 3.125.3.14.2, 4 2.4.6, 12.2.5 Con tractor's Relationship with Subcontractors ........2.4, 3.3.2. 3.18.1. 3.:8.2. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 96.2. 11.3.7. 11.3-8, 14.2.1.2 Contractor's Relationship with the.Architect .... 1.1.2, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.3.3. 3.5.1, 3.7.3.3 11, 3.12.8 3.16. 3.18, '*2.3. 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.12, 5.2, 6.2.2;7.3.4, 9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Contractor's Representations.. 1.2.2, 3.5 1, 3.12 7,6 2.2,8.2.1.9 3.3 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Perforating the Work ................. 3 32, 3 18, 4.2.3, 10 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents .. . . 1 22.32, 3.7.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work .......... ....... . 9.7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract . ....... 14.1 Contractor's Submitals ....... 3.10, 3.1 1.3 12. 4.2.7, 5.2 1, 5 2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2.9.31, 9.82,99.1, 9.10.2, 9.:0.3. 10.12, 11.4 2, 11.4 3 Contractor's Superntendent ....... .... ....... 3 9 10.26 Contractor's Supervsion and Construction Procedures...... 1 2.4, 3.3. 3.4. 42.3. 8.2.2, 8.2.3. 10 Contractual Liability Insurance. - - - ...... .... 11.1..7, i:.2 1 Coordination and Corrcbcior.. ....... .... :.2.2, 12.4.3.3.1, 3.10,3.117,61.3 6.2_.: Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications ... 1.3, 2.2.5.3.11 Correction of Work . ..... ...... .... 2.3,2.4.4.2.1, 9-8.2, 9.9.1, 12.11. 12.2. 13.7.1.3 Cost. Definition of ..... ...... ............... 7.3 6. 14 3-5 Costs .... 2.4, 3.2.1.3.7.4.3 8.2.3 15.2. 4.3.6, 4.3 7, 4.3.8.1, 5._ 3, 6.1.1.6.2.3,63,7.3.3.3,7.36,7.37.9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2,11.3.12. 11.3.13,113.4,11.3.9,12_.1,12.2.1,122.4,12.2.5.13.5.14 Cutting and Patching ........................... 3:14, 6.2.6 Damage to Construction of Owner or5eparate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4.9.5.15.10.2.1.2,10.2.5,103.11.1,1.3,12.2.5 Damage rothe Work 3.14.2.9.9.1. 10.2.1.2. 13.2.5. 10.3.:1.3 Damages, Claims for.. 3.18.4.3.9,61.1&,6.2.5,8.32.9.51.2.10.1.4 Damagesfor Delay .................... 6.1.1.8.3-3.9 5.1.6, 9 7 Dare of Commencement of the Work. Definaion of ...... 8.1 2 Date of Substantial Completion. Definition of. ....... 8.1 3 Day. Defmiuon of ................. .............. 8 1 1 Decisions of the Architect ... .. 1.2.6 4.2.7, 4.2.: 1.43.:2,42.13. 4-32, 4.3-6, 4.4.1, 44.4,4.5,63, 4.4, 4.5, 6 3, 7 3.6, 7.3.8. 8.13. 8 3.1, 9.2, 9.4. 9.5 1. 9.8.2, 9.9.1. 50.1 2.:3.5 2, 142.2. :4 2.4 Decisions to Withhold Certification .......... 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work. .Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of ....... ... 2 3, 2 4. 3 5 1.4.2.1, 4.2.6. 4.3.5. 9-52, 9.8.2, 9 9-1. 10.2.5. 12, 13-7 1.3 Defective Work, Definition of ......................... 3 5-1 Definitions...... 1.1, 2.1.1, 3 1, 3.5 1, 3.12.1, 3.121, 3.12.3. 4.1.1, 4.3.1.5.1.6.12,72.:,73.1,7.3.6,8.1.9.1,98.1 Delays and Extensions of Time . .... . 1.3.1, 4.3.8 1.4 3.8 2. 6.1.1.6.23.72 1.7.3.1 7.3.4,73.5,%.38, 7 3.9.8.1 1, 8.3, 103-:, 14.1 1.4 Disputes ............4.L4,4.:.4.4.3,4.4.4-5.6-,.5,63,7-38,93-1.2 Documents and Samp.cs at tnc 5nc ... ...... ........ 3.1 1 Drw'.ngs, Definition of ...... ....... ..... ..... 1.1.5 Draw.ngs and Spec.frcations. Use and Ownersh.p of..... 1 1.1.1.3, 2 25.3.11, 5.3 Duty to Review Contract Documents and Fie:d Cordit.ons - - - - - 3 2 Effective Date of Insurance ........... ...... .. 8,2.2. 11.1 2 Emergencies ......... ............ ..... 4.3 10.3 Employees. Contractor's .......... 3.3.2. 3.1.2, 3.8 1,3.9. 3.18.!, 3.18.2.4.23,426.8.1_2. 10.2. 103, 11.1.1.14_2.1.1 Equipment. Labor Materials and ....... 1.1 3.:.1.6.3.4. 3.5.1, 3.8.2,3.123,3.:2_.-.312.::,313.3.15.1,4.2.', 6.2 1.'36. 9.3.2.9.33. 11.3. 12.2_.4. 14 Execution and Progress of the Work .... 1 1.3, 1.2.3, 3.2. 3.4.1. 35.:,4,,.,.2.3 4.34.4.38.6_2_2.'.1 3. .3 9. 82, _2, 83.9.). 9.9.1. 10.2, 11_2. 14.3 Execution, Correlation and Intent of the Concoct Documents .. ............. .. .. 1.2, 3.'.1 Extensions of Time ........ . 4.3 1.4.3 8. '.2_.1 3.8.3. 10.3 1 Failure of Payment by Contractor ...... .... 9.5 1.3. 14.2.1 2 Failure of Pj men; by Owner ................ 4.3.7, 9 14.1.3 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment ........ 4.2.1.,.2.9.4.3.2. 43.5, 9.10, 11.1_2, 11.1.3.:1.3 5. 12.3.1. 13.' Financial Arrangements, Owner's .......................2.2.1 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance . ....... ...... . 11.3 GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................... ......... 1 Governing Law ...... ............ .............. 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties; Haardous Materials .................. ...... .. 10.1. 10.'_.1 Identification of Contact Documents ............ ...... l 2.1 ldenufiadon of Subcontractorsand Suooners ..... ...... 5 2.1 Indemnification ..... 3.1-.3.18, 9.10.2. 1•).1 4. 11.3.1.'_.11 3.- Inlormation and Services Required of the Owner.... 2.1.2.2.2, 4 3 4. 6 1 3. 6 1.4. 6.2.6. 9.3.2. 9.6.1. 9.6.4. 98.3.9.9:. 9.103. 10.1.1. 11.2. 11.3. :3.5.1. 13.5._ Injury or Damage to Person or Property .. ............. 4.3.9 Inspections... ..... ........ 3 3.3,3.3.4.3. 1.4._2.2. 1' 6.-.2.9. ...36, 9.4.2. 9.8.2.99.2.9.10.1.:35 Instructions to Bidcers ........ ....... .......... 1.1 I Instructions to the Contractor.. 3.8.!. 4.2.8, 5.2.1, 7,12.1.13.5.2 , 12.1. 13.5.2 Insurance ...... 4.3 9.6.1 1.7.3.6.4.9.3 2, 9.8.2.9.9.1, 9.10.2. 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery ......... .......... 11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor's Liability . ............ . 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of .................... 8.2.2. 11.11 Insurance, Loss of Use .......... _ 11.33 Insurance, Owner's Liability .......... ............... 11.2 Insurance, Property ........ . . ...... ..... 10.2.5. 11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials . .. 9 3.2 11.3.1.4 INSURANCE AND BONDS ... . . . . .. . 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy ..9.9.:. 11.3.11 Insurance Companies, Settlement vi(ti ...... ..... .... 11.3.10 Intent of the Contract Documents .. ... 1.73. 3.E.-i. 4.2.6. 4.2.7. 42.12. 42.13. L1 Interest ....... ....... . . ..... 13.6 Interpretation ........ 1.2.5.1.4.1.514.:.1.4 3.: , 5.1, 6. i .2, 8.1.4 Interpretations. Written ...... . . ..... 4.2 I t. 4.2.12. 13 - Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Recurred .... ..... .. 1 56 Judgment on Final Award ........ . 4 5. i, 4.5 4 1. 4.5.7 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1 3,1 1 6.3.4,3 5-1 3.82. 3.122. 3.12.3.3 12 7. 3.:2.11, 3.13- 3.15.1. 4.2.7, 622.E 36.932.933, 12.2.4. 14 Labor Dsputa ......... ....... ... .. .. ... 8 3.: Laws and Regulations 1 3,36,3.7 3:3.4 !1,4.5.5.457. 9.9.1, 10.2.2. 11 �1, ::.3. 13 1, 13 4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2. 13.6 Liens ................ . 2.1 2, 4.3_2, 4.3.5.1.8 2.2, 9.3 3.9 10.2 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder .. ..... 4.5.5 Limitations. Statutes of .... ........... ,5.4.2, 12.2.6, 13.7 Limitations of Authority ....................3.3 1, 4.1 2.4 2 1. 4.2.3.4.27,42.10.5222.52.4.7.4.113-10 I AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AL\n • © 1987 THE A.MERICAN:N5T1TI1TE or ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W.. WASHINGTON. DC 201106 A201-1987 3 I L I Limitations of Liability ..... 2.3.3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7.3.3.12.8, 3.11 3.17,3.18,4.2.6.4.2.7,4.2.12.6.2.2,9.4.2.9.6.4,9.: 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1. 11.3.7, 13.4.2, 1: Limitations of Time, General ............ 22.1.22.4, 32.1.3 3.8.2,3.10,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2.1,4.2.7.4.2.11.4 4.3.3, 4.3.4,4.3.6, 4.3.9, 4.5.42, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.4, 7.3.4. 8.2, 9.5, 9.6.2, 9.8. 9.9, 9.10,11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.-', 11 1173.6. 122.1, 12.2.2. 13.5. Limitations of Time, Specific ..........2.1.2. 22.1, 2.4.3.10.: 3.15.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.11, 4.3, 4.4. 4.5. 5.3, 5.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.9. 9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1, 9.1',9.8.2.9.10.2. 11.1.3. It 11.3.10,11.3.11,1222,122.4.122.6,13.2 Loss of Use Insurance .............................11 11 Material Suppliers .............. 1.3.1, 3.12.1, 42.4, 4.2.6.5 9.3.1. 9.3.12.9.3.3,9.4.2,9.6.5.9. Materials, Haardous .................... ... 10.1, 11 Materials, Labor, Equipment and ..... 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3 3.122,3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13,3.15.1,4.2.7,6 _7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 122.- Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction ......-.... 3.3.1, 4.2.3, 4.2.7. t. Minor Changes in the Work ..........1.1.1.42.8.4.3.7.7.1 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ....................... Modifications, Definition of .. . ....................... . Modifications to the Contact ........... 1.1.1, 1.1.2.3.7.3.: 4.1.2. 4.2.1. 5_23. 7. 8.3.1 Mutual Responsibility ..................._ ........... . Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of .................. !Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of ........ 2 4.3.5, 9.5.2. 9.8.2. 12. 13.: Notice ............. 2.3, 2.4,3.2.l,3.2.2.3.7.3. .7.4. 3.9, 3. 3.12.9,3.17,4.3,4.4.4,4.5,5.2.1,5.3,5.4.1.1.8.22.5 9.5.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.1.2. 10.2.6, 11.1.3. 11.3. 12 122.4. 13.3. 13.5.1, 13:5.: Notice, Written ............... 2.3, 2.4, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.12.9 4.4.4,4.5,5.2.1,5.3.5.4.1.1,8.22,9.4.1,9.5.1,9.7,' 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3. 12.22, 12.2.4. 13.3, 13.5.: ,Notice of Testing and Inspections ................ 13.5.1, 1 Notice to Proceed ................................... Notices, Permits, Fees and .. 22.3.3.7, 3.13.7.3.6.4. 1 Observations, Architect's On -Site .................. 4.2.2.. 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1. 9.10.1, Observations, Contractors .......................1.2.2. Occupancy ......................... 9.6.6, 9.8.1, 9.9, 11 On -Site Inspections by the Architect .......... 42.2.'.2.9,- 9.4.2.9.8.2.9.9,2.9 On -Site Observations by the Architect ......... 4.22, 42.5. - 9.42, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, Orders, Written ............ 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.7, 7, 822, 11.3.9, - 122, 13.52, I OWNER ........................................... Owner, Definition of ................................ Owner, Information and Services Required of the....... . 2.2, 4.3.4, 6, 9, 10.1.4, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 14.1.1.5, 1 Owner's Authority ......... 3.8.1, 4.1.3, 4.2.9, 52.1, 52.4, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.2. 11.4.1, 12.2.4, 13.52, 14.2, 1 Owner's Financial Capability ...................2.2.1, 14. Owner's Liability Insurance ........................... Owner's Loss of Use Insurance ........................ 1 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ............... 5.2.1, 5.4.1, .4, .5, .1l, 8.2, 14 7.4 13 .1.1 II. 9- 6.2 2.3 3.1, .1.3 ,14 4.3, .10. . 14 ill 3.6. 0.1 3.6, 3.5 2.1, .3.1 .2 2.1 12, .1.3 4.1, .3.1 .1.5 1.2 .3.3 1:2, Owner's Right to CarryOut the Work ........ 2.4, 12.2.4, 14.12.22 Owner's Right to Clean Up ........................... 1 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts ......................... 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work ................... 2.3, 4.3.- Otcnei s Right to Suspend the Work ..................... 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ................. 14.2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents . ............... 1.1.1,1.3; 2.2.5. 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use .................. 9.6.6.9.9, 11.3.1 Patching, Cutting and .......................... 3.14, 6.2.6 Patents, Royalties and ..............................3.17 Payment, Applications for ................ 4.2.5, 9.2.9.3, 9.4. 9.5.1, 9.8.3. 9.10.1. 9.10.3. 9.10.4. 14.2.4 Payment, Certificates for ........... 4.2.5, 4.2.9,9.3.3.9.41 9.5. 9.6.!. 9.6.6. 9.7.!, 9.8.3. 9.10.1, 9.10.3. 13.7. 14.1.r.3. 14.1_4 Payment, Failure of..........................4.3.7.9.5.1.5. 9.7, 9.10.2. 14.1.1.3. 14 2.1.2 Payment, Final ............ 42.1, 4.2.9.4.32, 4.3.5, 9.10. I L 1.2. 11.1.3, 11.3.5. 12_.3.1 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and ...............3.6.4. 9.10.3. 11.3.9. 11.4 Paymens, Progress ..........................4.3.4.9.5.9.6. 9.8.3. 9.10.3. 13.6. 14.2.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ...................... 9, 14 Payments ro Subcontractors ....................5.4.2.9.5.!.3. 9.6.1 9.6.3. 9.6.4. 11.3.8. 14 2.1.2 PCB................................................. :9.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond ................. '.3.6.4. 9.10.3. 11.3.9. 11.4 Permits, Fees and Notices ....... 2.2.3.3.7, 3.13. 7.3.6.4. in.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF ............ 10 Polvchlorinated Biphenyl ............................. 10.1 Product Data. Definition of ........................... 3. i _.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings .... 3.11.3.12, 4.2.. Progress and Completion ................... 4.2.2, 4.3.4.8.2 Progress Payments ............................ 43 1.9.3. 9.6, 9.8.3, 9.10.3, 13.6. 14.2.3 Project, Definition of the ............................. 1.1.4 Project Manual, Definition of the ......................1.1.7 Project Manuals ...............:.................... ? 2.5 Project Representatives ............................. 4.2.10 Property Insurance ........................... 10.2.5.11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ............. 10 Regulations and Laws ............ 1.3.3.6,3,7,3.I3,43.!. 4.5.5. 4.5'. 10.2.2. 11.1. 11.3, 13.1. 13.4. 133.1, 13.5.2, 13.6. 14 Rejection of Work ......................... 3.5.1.4.2.6. 122 Releases of Waivers and Liens ........... . ............. 9.10.2 Representations ......................... 122,3.5.1. 3.12.:. 6.2.2, 8.2.1. 9.3.3. 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10:1 Representatives .......................... . . 2.1.1.3.1.1.3.9. 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 42.10,5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes ..................7 4.4, 4.5 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work ............ 35-2. 4.2.3, 6.1.3. 6.2. 10 Retainage ............... 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2.9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor ............ 122, 3.2, 3.7.3, 3.12.7 Review of Contractor's Submittals by_ Owner and Architect ............. 3.10.1, 3.10.2.3.11. 3.12. 42.7, 4.2.9. 5.2.!. 5.2.3,9.2. 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor ........................ 3.12.5 Rights and Remedies ............. 1.12.2.3,2.4.3.5.1, 3.15-2. 42.6,4.3.6,4.5.5.3.6.1,6.3.7.3.1,8.3.1'.9.5.1,9.7, 102.5. 10.3, 12.2.2, 122.4, 13.4, 14 Royalties and Patents ............................... 3.17 I I L I Li I I I I I L_' AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 4 A201-1987 AIAO • © 1987 THE AMERICAN1*STITLTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 200')6 Rules and Notices for Arbitration .............. ..... 4.5.2 Safety of Persons and Property .... ............... 10.2 Safety Precautions and Programs ........ .. 4.2.3,4.2.7,10.1 Samples, Dcfmf lion of ............. ..... ......... 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and ... 3 11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and .. ...... ........ 3.11 Schedule of Values ............. .............. 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction .. ....... ................... 3.10 Separate Contracts and Contractors .... . 1.1.4, 3.14 2.4.2.4, 4.5.5, 6, 11.3.7. 12.1.2. 12.2.5 Shop Drawings, Definition of . ...... ...... ........ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples .. _. 3.1:.3.12, 4.2.7 She, Use of ... .................... .... 3.13, 6.1.1.6.2.1 Site Inspections... .1 2.2, 3.3.4, 42.2.42 9, 4.3.6, 9.8.2.9.10.1. :3.5 Site Visits, Architect's .......... ...... 42 2,4.2.5.4.2.9. 4.3.6, 9.4.2. 9.5.1. 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.:0.1. 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing ...... ...... 4.2.6,12.24,. 13.5 Specifications, Definition of the.......................1.1.6 Specifications, The ..........1..1.1.1_6, 1.1.7, 1.2.4,1.3.3.11 Statutes of Limitations ......... ........ 4.5.4.2, 122.6. 13.7 Stopping the Work.............2.3, 4.3.7, 9.7, 10.1.2, 10.3. 14.1 Stored Materials ........... 6.2.1.9 3.2,10.2.1.2.11.3.1.4,12.2.4 Subcontractor, Deftnkfon of .......... ................ 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS ......... ....... ................ 5 Subcontractors, Work by ........ ...... . 12.4, 3.3.2.3.12.1, 4 2.3. 5.3, 5.4 Subcontrsetual Relations ..... . ..... 5.3, 5.4.9 3.1.2.9 6.2, 9.6.3. 9.6.4. 10.2.1. 11.3 7, 11.3.8, 14.1.:. 14.2.12, 14.3 2 Submittals ......... :.3.3.22.3.3.10.3.11 3 12.42 7.52.1.5 22.3. 7.3.6. 9.2. 9.3.1. 9.8.2, 9 9.1, 9.:0.2. 9.10.3, 1012. 11.1.3 Subrogation, Waivers of ..... ........... 6.1.1. 11.3.5.11.3.7 Substantial Completion..... ...... 4.2.9.4.3.5.2. 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.8, 991, 122. 1, 2, 121 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of ... .:.1:. .......... 9 8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors ... ............... 52.3, 5 2.4 Substitution of the Architect .. ....... ................ 4.1.3 Substitutions of Matemis ............ ................ 3.5.1 Sub -subcontractor, Definition of ...... ....... ...... 5. f .2 Subsurface Conditions ....... ...... ............... 4.3.6 Successorsand Assigns .... ...... .............. 13.2 Superintendent ............................... 3.9,10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures ...... 1.2.4.3.3, 3.4. 4.2.3. 4.3.4. 6.1.3, 6.2 4. 7 1.3. 7.3.4. 8.2. 8.3.1, 10, 12. 14 Surety ............ .. 4.4.1.4 4.4, 5.4.1.2, 9.10.2, 9.0.3. 14.2.2 Surety, Consent of ........... ...... . 9.9.1, 9.0.2, 9.10.3 Surveys .......... ...... ....... ...... 222,3.18.3 I I Li Suspension by the Owner for Convenience ............. 14.3 Suspension of the Work . ........... 4.3.7, 5.4 2, 14.1..,. 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract .. ... 4 3.7. 5.4.1.1. ii ..... Taxes .................... ...... 3.6:5, Termination by the Contractor ....... ...... .........' 14.1 Termination by the Owner for Cause .. ....... .. 5.4.1.1 14.2 Termination of the Architect ................... ...... 4.1.3 Termination of the Contractor ................... .... 14.2 2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT ...... 14 Tests and Inspections ..... 3.3.3, 4.2.6.4.2.9.94.2. 12.2.1.13.5 TIME............. ............ .................... a Time, Delays and Extensions of . .......... 4.3.8. .2.1.8,3 Time Limits. Specic .... .... 2.12, 22.1.2.4.3.10, 3.11.3.13.1. 4.2.1.4.2.11,4.3,4.4.4.5.5.3.5.4.7.35.7.39,8.2.9_2.9.31. 93.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7.9.8.2, 9.:0.2. 11.1.3, 11.3.6. 11.3.10. 11.3.11. 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6. 13 -. 14 Time Umfts on Claims ......... 4.3 2.4.3.3, 4.3 6.4.3 9.4.4.4.5 Tide to Work .......................... ...... 93.2.9.3; UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK ....... .. .. 12 Uncovering of Work ................................ 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions ..................... 4.3.6.8.3 1.10 1 Unit ?nces................................. 7.14. - 3.3 2 Use of Documents ................. 1.1.1, 1.3, 22.5. 3.12.-.55 Use o1 Slte . . ... . . . . . . ... .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. 3.13, 6.1.1.6 2 1 Values, Schedule of ..................... .. 9.2,9.3.; Waiver of Claims: Final Payment ........ .. 4,3.5, 4.5.1.9.10.3 Waiver of Clauns by the.Archftect... . :3 , 2 Waiver of Claims by the Contnc:or. ...... 9.10.4. 11.3 .13 , = Waiver of Claims by the Cw-ner ........ ... 43.5.4.5.1.9.93. 9.:0.3, 1:.33, 11.3.5, 11.3'. 13.4.22 Waiver of Liens ....... ........... ...... ........ 9.10._2 Waivers of Subrogation .............. .... 6.1.1, 11.3.5. 11.;. - Warranty and Warranties ............... ......... 3.5, 4.2.9. 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3. 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 12.2.2. 13--J 3 Weather Delays ..... ............................. 4 3-88 2 When Arbitration May Be Demanded .................. 4.5.4 Work, Definitional ............................ .... 1.1 3 Written Consent .............. 1.3.1.3.12.8.3.14.2.4.1.2. -1.3... 4.5.5. 9.3.2. 9.8.2. 9.9.1. 9.10.2, 9.10.3. 10.1.2. 10.1.3. 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4. I 1 3.11. 13.2. 13.,._ Written Incerpreurlons ....... ........ 4.2.11, 4.2.12.4.3' Written Notice ........... 2.3.2-4.3 9, 3.12.8, 3.12.9. 4.3. 4.44. 4.5, 5.2.1. 5.3. 5.4.1.1, 8.2-22 9.4.1. 95.1, 9 7. 9 10. 10.1 2. 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3. 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5_2. 14 Written Orders .... ....................... 2.3. 3.9. 4.3.-- 7.8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2. 13.52. 14.3.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL COND17nONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEE\TH'EDIT.ON ' ALAa .®1987 THEAMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS.1735NEW YORK AVENGE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1987 5 I GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I H II The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement her Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). Condi of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Candid Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to executic the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Mi cation is (1) a written amendment to the .Contract signe both parties; (2). a Change Order, (3) a Construction Ch Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated. i Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include t documents such as bidding requirements (advertisemet imitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bic requirements). 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construc The Contract represents the entire and integrated agree between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negodat representations or agreements, either written or oral. The tract may be amended or modified only by 2 Modification. Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a car real relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or subcontractor or (3) between any persons or entities other the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, howeve entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations u the Contract intended to facilitate performance of Architect's duties. 1.1.3_ THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and s required by the Contract Documents, whether comply partially completed, and includes all other labor, rm equipment and services provided or to be provided Contractor to fulfill the Contractors obligations. The may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which; may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. ten 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT n o)pray , f 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and and Contractor .as provided in the Agreement. If either the difi- Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract by Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu- rage means upon request. 'ork 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- the sentation that the Contractor has visited the site, become famil-' Cher iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per - or formed and correlated personal observations with require - the ments of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are comple- on. mentarv, and whit is required by one shall be as binding as if .ent required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be Ins, required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- on- merits and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary the to produce the intended results. mo- on- 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections ub- and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the pan Contractor in dividing the `,Work among Subcontractors or -in be establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. der 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. the words which have well-known technical or construction indus- try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- ance with such recognized meanings. or the The Project is the total construction of which the Woirkper- formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a pan and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. '1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con- tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing .the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched- ules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equip - 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the \Cork. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac- tor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on ocher proj- ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the I I L II I H I I L I AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 6 A201 -1987 AIA' •@198"/THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1:35 NEW YORK AVENUE. NW.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 I I I I I I F I II II ii 1_ I I Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The Contractor. Subcontractors. Sub -subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limed license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw- ings. Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for use in the cxecuticn of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con- rection with this Project is not :o be construed as publication. .n derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved rights. 1.4 CAPITALIZATION 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in :r ese General Conditions nclude those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num- bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs. Subpara- graphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the to es of ether documents published by the American :nstitute of A:c,itects. 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre- quently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any'- and arti- cles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in anctcer is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as itch 1 . the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term. "Cu net' merit_+ the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shat- furnish to the Contractor in writing information which is recessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred :o as -he site, and the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Agreement and, within five days after any change, Information of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor. pr.or to execution of the Agreement and prompt y from time :o time thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the On ner's obligations under the Contract. (iVote: finless such recuambfe evidence were furnished on request prior to the exec ution of We Agreement, the prospecttre contractor irorrfct not be required to execute the Agreement or to commence jbe Work J 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing p^ys.cal characteristics, legal limitations and utility .orations lor;he site of the Project. and a :egal description of :he s,ce. 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees wh;rh are :he responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assess - merits and charges required for conscr ction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes :n existing facilities. 2.2.4 Inforrnat.on or services under the Owner's control shad be fur .fished by me Owner with reasonabae promptness to avoid de.ay in orderly progress of the Work, 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. the Contractor will be furnshed. free of charge, such COpLCS of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably :ecessan- for execution of the Work. 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon- sibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors). Article 9 (Payments and Comp,etion) and Article 11 (:nsurance and Bonds). 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is nor at accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently falls to care- our Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner. by written order signed personally or by an agent specificulc so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contrac- tor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the 'art of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- trac:cr or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 if the Contractor defaults or neglects :o care- out t e Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fact withrt a seven-day period after receipt of written notice fro.-: the Owner to commence and: continue correction of suc default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a seconc written notice to correct such deficiencies within a seconc seven-day period. If the Contractor within such second seven- day period after receipt of such second notice fails to com- mence and continue to correct any deficiencies. the Owner may, without prejudice to ocher remedies me Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such del: ciencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure- Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Art h;- tecr If pavrr.ents then or thereafter due the Contractor are no: sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay- the cifference to the Ow-,er. - ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Contractor is :he persor. or entity iderti.`.ed as such in the Agreement an is referred to threug lout the Contract Documents as if singular In number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Coctractor's author:red representative. I AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AL{a 0 * 1987 THE AMERICAN INST;TLTE OFARCHrTECTs.1-35 NEW 'CORK AVENUE, N W. ':ASHINGTON, DC-,DX,6i I 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compat Contract Documents with each other and with inforr furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2: shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistent omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable i Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inc tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unto; Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or am and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the tractor performs any construction activity knowing it !m a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Co. Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Co tor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such p mance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attribc costs for correction. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that the materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be don of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit - and red by the Contract Documents,, that the Work will be free s or from defects not -inherent in the quality required or permitted. the and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Isis- Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these require - the ments, including substitutions not properly approved and ;ion authorized. may be considered defective. The Contractor's ;on- warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by Ives abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper net or insufficient maintenance, improper operation; or normal rat- wea and tear under normal usage. If required by the architect. for- the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind able and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 _TAXES - 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such fieldImea- surements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commehcing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered! shall be reported to the Architect at once. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- suant to Paragraph 3.12. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over con�truc- tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con- tract, unless Contract Documents give other specific ' truc- tions concerning these matters. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations tb per- form the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the ArchAect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. I 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of por- tions of Work already performed under this Contract to deter- mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docur the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, t ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery,' heat, utilities, transportation, and ocher facilities and se necessary for proper execution and completion of (he' whether temporary or permanent and whether or not inc rated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and order among the Contractor's employees and other pe carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not f employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in • assigned to them. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • 8 A201-1987 AIAa • O1987THEAME 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con- tractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or rego- tiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws. ordinances, rules, regulations and Lwr; i orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3.7.3 -It is not the Contractors responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regula- tions.. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. I II II II I El I I II II 3.7.4,If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be con- trary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner. the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. - 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all - allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. Irpo- 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be ;pod selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delis}- in the sons Work; - :rmit .2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of tasks materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; RAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C.'-0006 II n F I I I I I I I I I I I .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and ^andling at me site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit anC other expenses contemplated fcr stated allowance amounts shall be included it..:he Contract Sum anc not in the alowances, .4 whenever costs are more than or less thari allowances. ^e Contract Sum shall be adjusted accorcingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order sr.ali reflect (1) the difference between- acnial costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.3. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superinten- dent shall represent the contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- tractor. Important communications snail be confirmed in writ- ing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3,10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Con- tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under me Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate :ntervas as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and pr cti- cable execution of the Work 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current. for t: e Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals wrich is coordi- nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and :.Lows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings. Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made durng construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings. Prod- uct Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- tect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Con:ractor or a Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor, manufacturer. supplier cr distributor to illustrate some portion of the Worti. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard sir iodides, per- formance charts, instructions, brochures. diagrams and ot.`.er information fumshed by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which :Ilustrate matenals, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged 3.12.4 Shop Drawings. Product Data, Samples and similar sub- mivals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their sub- mittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submatas are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents Review by' a ArcruzeCt is sub•ec: to the .imitations of Subpangrap t 'i.2.7. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to :.^e Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- able prcmotness and ,n such sequence as to cause no den in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- tractors. Submiaals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without acZioc. 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the \Coax requiring submuta. and review of Shop Drawings. Product Data. Samples or similar subminals until :he respective submit- tal has been approved by the Architecc. Such Wcrk shall be i, accordance with approved submittals. 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings. Product Data. Samples and similar-submttals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materialsf:eiC measurements and field constructor. criteria related thereto. Cr will do so, and has checked and coordinated the irfornauon contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.8 The Contractor shall net be relieved of responsibdi:v for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documen:5 by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings. Product Da.:,. Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has soecically unformed the Architect in writing of such Cemtron at the inc of submittal and the Architect has given write-.. approval :c ire specific deviation. The Contractor shall no: ice relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shoo Dra - ings. Product Data. Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- tect s approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct speafic attention, in wT:wna or or. resubrmtted Shop Drawings, Product Data. Samples or similar submruas. to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in. the Contract Documents. 3.12.11 When professional certification of pe:for nance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and cer.:f - cations. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the s:te with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsiNe for cutting. fines or patching required to cemp.ete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. -3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endange. a pomon of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cu:ring, patching or other- wise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contrac- tor shat not cut or otherwise alter such construction bra the ' AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONCI a IONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRLCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA°•@19RJTHEAMERICANINST:TL7EOFARCHITECTS,t'35NEWYORK AVENUE. NW. WASHINGTON. DC. 20106 A201-1987 n Owner or a separate contractor except with written con the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consci not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contrac Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construihtion equipment, machinery and surplus materials. nt of tea's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them shall arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings. sea- opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specific - the tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or 'ork. instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to dean up as provided ita the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and access to the Work in preparation and progress located. 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringeme patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect hat from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsib such defense or loss when 2 particular design, process or• uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is requin the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor ha son to believe that the required design, process or product infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsib such loss unless such information is promptly furnished I Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Conti shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect,; tea's consultants, and agents and employees of any of from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, it ing but -not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or res from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sin disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible erty (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resi therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in p: negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, 2 Subcontn anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyor whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether o such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by 2 indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be cons to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obfgatio indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a parry orp described in this Paragraph -3.18. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemi under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contrac Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indent tion obligation under this Paragraph 3-18 shall Dot be limit 2 limitation on amount or type of damages, compensatii benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subconu under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disc benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Panl 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the i I 1 AIA DOCUMENT A20t • GENERAL CONDITIONS or THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 10 A201-1987 AIAO •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW.. WASHINGTON, D.C.?0006 ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4,1.1 The Architect.is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- tified as such in the. Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect' means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties. responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the ecs- . Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- d of sonably withheld. - - less for 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect. rod- the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con - I by tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under rea- the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 for shall be subject to arbitration. the 4.2 ARCHrrECTSADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract ,tor as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the :hi- Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final em payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from ud- time to time during the correction period described in Pan- ing graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the tm- Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the ss, Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. op- unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance ing with other provisions of the Contract. by .or 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to for the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the not progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine my. in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat- ied ing that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with of the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not'be on required td -make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check quality or quantity -of the Work. On the basis of on - site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the led Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to r, a guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Ira- 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and by will nor be responsible for -construction means, methods, or techniques, sEquences.or procedures, or for safety precautions tor and programs in connection with the Work, since these arc lily solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract tph Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge :hi- of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con - I I I I I El L I I H I I I I H I ::actor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any ether persons performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra- tion. Except as otherwise providec in :he Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially autho- rized, the Owner and Contractor shad endeavor to cornmunt- care through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Commu- cicadons by and with Subcontractors anc material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect w 1! review and certify the amounts due :he Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment :n such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contact Documents Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for irnplementa- uon of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspection or teswig of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5 3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or competed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decsion made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Arch: - tea to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons perform- ing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals sue as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for :he limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu- ments. The Architect's action will be taken with such reason- able promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other derails such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of whicn remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractors submit - tats shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction, means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shah nor indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Corstruc- :on Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7 4 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to ceterr..ine t .e date or dates of Substantiat Comple:.on and the date of fina. completion. wiil receive and forward to the Owner for :he Owner's review and records writer warranties and related documents required by the Co r act and assembled by the Contractor, anc will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requ:reme:as of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 if the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will pro- vide one or more project representa::ves to asss: in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at :he sue. The dudes. responsihiit.es and Irm;tit:.os of authority of such project representatives snail be as set for:h in an exhibit to be incorpo- raced in the Contract Documents, 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern- ing performance under and requirements of the Ccmnet Documents on written request of ei:ner the Owner or Centnc- tor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time :limits agreed upon. if no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shalt be fur- nished in compliance wh the Paragraph 4.2, then delay shat' not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur- nish such interpretations unit: 15 days after written request is made .for them 4.2.12 Interpretations and decsions of the Architect wilt be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions. one Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be :iable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architects decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Cairn is a demand or assertion by one of the par,:es seeking, as a matter of right, ad'ustment Cr into c -e tataon or Contract terms, payment of money, extension cf time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. -ire term "Claim" also includes ocher disputes and matters in cu:' son between the Owner and Contractor arising our of or r: ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written ne-.. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with :;.e party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Clams, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred initially to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4. A deco- sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4. shai: be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or Gugat:on of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to a3 such matters arising prior to the dare final payment s due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Worx or (2) die extent to which the Worx has been corn - pieced. The decision by the Architect in response to a Cairn shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in the event (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect has not received evidence or nas failed to render a decis.on within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take action required under Subparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 days after the Claim is made, (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a mechanic's tie::. 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Churns by either party mist be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim orwitnin 21 says after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise ro :he Cairn, whichever .s later. Claims must be made by written notice. An addi::onal Cairn made after :he initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless submi::ed in a timely mannrr. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOLH TE ENIH EDITION AIA• • 01987 THE AMERICANINSTr'LTE OF AP CHI;EC:S,:735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW. ¢'ASF'l"G:ON'. Dr %(Iq(vA201-1987 11 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final I lution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise erg in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with pe mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to r payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment The making of payment shall constitute 2 waiver of Cairns by the Ot except those arising from: .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances ing out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirerr of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Con • Documents. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If ditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurfac otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ m: ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents O unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, whirl fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and gene recognized as inherent in construction activities of character provided for in the Contract Documents, then ni by the observing party shall be given io the other E promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The A tea will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they c materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Concrac cost of, or time required for, performance of any part o Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Con Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines the conditions at the site are not materially different from t indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change ii terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so n the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the real Claims by either parry in opposition to such determin: must be made within 21 days after the Architect has E notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor ca agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract T the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial d mination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Pang 4.4. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wist make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written r as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to ex the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating emergency endangering life, or property arising under graph 10.3. If the Contractor believes additional cc involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a w interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owr stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a ten order for a minor. change in the Work issued by the i tect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination Contract by the Owner. (6) Owner's suspension or (7) reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance wit procedure established herein. 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an in in the Contract Time, written.notice as provided herein sl given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. , 4.3.8.2 if adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Maim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by l data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated. and chat weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either pain• to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, of any of the other party s employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within 2 reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first observance. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other pain to investigate the matter. If 2 Claim for addi- tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted. it shall be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.7 or 4.3.8. on- 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES :or 4.4.t The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of (2) the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a dif- Claim: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant. ally (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- the tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in rice pan, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of arty the Claim by the other pain or (5) suggest a compromise. The ester Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety. if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. ffer ors 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare or the obtain appropriate documentation. tact 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Ihat Claim shall. within ten days after the Architect's preliminary ose response. take one or more of the following actions: (1) submit the additional supporting data requested by the Architect (2) rtify modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Architect that the initial aro' Claim stands. to ice we an fin- is ten • to rit- :hi- the her the axe be ost the 4.4.4 If a Claim has nor been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parch in writing chat the Architects decision will be made within seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architects written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's default. the Architect may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. 4.5 ARBITRATION 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the. Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor- dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided. for in Subparagraph 4.3.5. Such controversies or Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4 shall be subject to arbitration upon written demand of either party. Arbitration may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and no decision has been rendered. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 12 A201-1987 AIAa •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS. NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 2rxxJ6 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Class between the Owner and Contractor not resolved under Paragrap : y.4 shalt if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4.5., be deeded by arbitration in accordance with the Construc:.on industry Arbaration Ruies of the American Arbitration Association c:.r- ren:.y n effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise Notice of demand for arbitration shall be Sled in writing with the other party to the Agreement between the Owner and Con- tractor and witn the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 4.5.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration. During arbi- tration proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comp:v with Subparagraph 4 3.4. 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded. Demand for arbi tration of any Claim may not be made until the carter of (1) :tie date on which the Architect has rendered a final written deci- sion on the Claim, (2) the tenth day after the pares have pre- sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a f.anal written decision by that date, Cr (3) any of the five events described in Subparagraph 4.3.2. 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decisions final but subject to arbi:.a::on and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision. then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renCers a decision after arbitration proceedings have been iri::ated. suer. decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arb.trauon pro- ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to al. parties concerned. 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitratienshafl be mate within the tame limits specified in Subparagraph's 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 an Clause 4.5.4.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no even: shall a be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.5.5 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration ars:ng our of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the architect, the Architects employees or consu:tanis except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree- ment and signed by the Architect, Owner. Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contrac- tor as described in Article 6 and other persors substantiaiy nvo:ved in a common question'bf fact or law whose presence is required :f complete relief is to be accorded in arbitrtion No person or entity other than :he Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in An.cle 6 sha3 be :nc!uccd as an orig- inal third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsib.litys insubstantial. Consent to arbtraticn nvo,v:ng an additional person or entity shall net constitute consent to arbitration of a dispute not described :!retain or w:th a person or entity not named or described ihrre.n. The fore- going agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additions: person or entity duly consented to by parrs to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under app I. cableraw in any court having jurisdiction thereof 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A parry who :des a notice of demand for arbitration must assert :n tne cemand all Claims then known to that party on which arbura- ton is permitteC to be demanded. When a parry .fags to ineuCe a Ca.m through eversignt, inadvertence or excusable neglect. or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently. the arbitctor or arbitrators may permit amendment 4,5.7 Judgment an Final Award. The award tendered by the arbitrator or aroitrators shall be final, and judgment ma' be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is 2 person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the \Cork at the site. The term "Subcontractor' is referred to throughout t.`.e Contract Documents as if singular in number ant means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon- tractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at t`e site. The term "Sub -subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular :n number and means a Sub -subcontractor or an autnonec representative of the Sub -subcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements. the Contactor, as soon as prac- tiable after award of the Contract. shat) furnish in wriurs to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or en:: - ties (inducing those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal por- tion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Con- tractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation. has reasonable objection to am- such proposed person or entity. Fahure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason.• able ob:ec:.on. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract wvi:1 a proposed per- son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea- sonable and timely objection The Contractor shall na be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonab!e objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or decresed by the difference in cost occasioned by such charge and an appropriate Change Order shall be ssuec. However, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be a lowed for such dirge u -less the Contractor has acted promptly a,.d resoors vch i.. submitting names as required. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected :f the Owner or Architect rnane� reasonable objection to such change. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CCtir.IT.ONS OF : HE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FO:.RTEEs'TH EDITION I CIA{ .©c 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCH1;ECs. 17 5NE.W YORK AVENUE.N...UASHNGTO'. DC. ?0000 A201-1987 13 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally rei for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontrac the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subconu to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract. ments, and to assume toward the Contractor all the oblig and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these ments, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each st. tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents respect to the Work to be performed by the 5ubcon[rac that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such right shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically pre otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor th Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has again Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall requite Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sji contractors. The Contractor shall make available to eac posed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subec agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to whit Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and lions of the proposed subcontract agreement which mal variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractor similarly make copies of applicable portions of such docu available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontracioi 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the '0( assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant cc graph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agree which the Owner accepts by notifying the St tractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the if any, obligated under bond relating to the Co 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 3C the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adj ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construc operations related to the Project with the Owner's own and to aware separate contracts in connection with orb bons of the Project or other construction or operations site under Conditions of the Contract identical or subst similar to these including those portions related to in: and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims tha or additional cost is involved because of such action Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provide where in the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for diffcre. Lions of the Project or other construction or operations site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents case shall mean the Contractor who executes each s Owner -Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi- aired ties of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with )r, to them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- ctor, tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- LON- ules. when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any [ions revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum Iocu deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. icon- f the The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules with to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. Dr so and Tided 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. tf all when the Owner performs construction or operations related [ the to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be the deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the each same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Condi• •sub- tions of the Contract, including, without excluding others. dt those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10. II pro- and 12. [ tract I the 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY f the 9ndi- 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con - be at tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of shall _ their materials and equipment and performance of their acti3i- tents ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- • struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. )rk is 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the f the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior cc Para- proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to ants the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such ocher icon- construction chat would render it unsuitable for such proper - execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to tenor shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or seoa- ire[v, rate contractors' completed or partially completed construction tract' is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to jays, defects nor then reasonably discoverable. sted. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsi- ble therefor. - 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong- fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 Claims and ocher disputes and matters in questidn m or between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub- rces, ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4.3 provided the separate nor- _ contractor has reciprocal obligations. 3 the tially 6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the ante same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described relay for the Contractor in Paragraph 3.14. r the - else- -6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate con: por- . tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their i the respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround - each ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in crate Paragraph 3.15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. AIA DOCUMENT A201 14 A2014987 AR • ©198; THEAME RAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. NW.. WASHINGTON. D.C.-'0tMx> ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu- tion of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Charge Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Constriction Change Directive requires agreement by t .e Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in t^.e Work s: all be performed under appli- cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order. Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con- templated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating :heir agreemenr upon all of :.he following: a change in the Work: .2 the amount of the adjustment in theContractSum, if any; and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Tirne, if any. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre- pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment. if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both The Owner may by Co:straction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Wore: within the general scope of the Contract consisting of addi- tions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- tract Time being aGjusred accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change D.rective shall be used in the ' absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. I 7.3.3 if the Constructio^ Change Direc:ve provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the fol:owing methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lamp sum, proper.v itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per- mit evaluation: .2 unit prices stared in the Contrac: Documens or sub- sequently agreed upcn, .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the panics and a mutaaily acceptab:e fixed or percent. age fee; or .4 as provided :n Subparagraph 73.6. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Corstn:ction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement Cr disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Constriction Change Directive for determining the pro- posed adjustment in the Contract 5.:m or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the ConUac- tor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, includ- ing adnutment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does nor respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum. `e method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- tect on the bass of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. includ- ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shat' keep and present. in such form as the Architect may prescribe. an itemized accounting together with appropnate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided m the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph. 73 6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and Lnemplovmenr insurance. fringe benefits required by agreement or custom. and workers' or vcrkmen compensation insurance .2 costs of mareriials, supplies and equipment. mciuc- :na cost of transoenat:on. «nether incorporated or consumed: .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive cf hand tools. whether rented from the Contractor or others: ,4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and safes. use or similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person- nel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner. amounts not in dispute may be included in Appticarions cur Pavmenr. The amount of credit to be glowed by :he Conmc- tor to the Owner fora deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as ton - firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shat be figured on the basis of net increase, if anyt with respect to that change. 7.3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment :n Contract Time or the method for determining it. the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Arc ii;ect for determination 7.3.9 When the Owner and Comractcr agree with the deter- mination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments it.. the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agree rrenr upon the adjustments. sdch agreement shall be effective immediately and shad be recorded by preparation and e.ecu- tion of an appropriate Change Order AA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIOvs OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION ' AIAs • © 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTF OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVEYUE. N W. WASH INGTO`+. DC 21XtYv A201-1957 15 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor i in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent s intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes a effected by written order and shall be binding on the and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such orders promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the p of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work or the be 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the (date established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postptned by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are o- the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by lee. ment or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article Ii to be famished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Ownler in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with ade- quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress c Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or employee of either, or of a separate contractor employe the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries,.unavoidable casu or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by 4 authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by r causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for reasonable time as the Architect may derermine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and. includ- ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under - the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect. shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica- tions for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting rerainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been property authorized by Construction Change Directives but net yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay- ment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of 2 dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably scored at the site for subsequent incor- poration in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner• payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. an 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that tide to all Work covered by by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than ar the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that tes upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for lay which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued let and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the en Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and ch clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor. Subcontractors, material suppliers: or ith other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of ilam- agcs for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION 16 A201-1987 AIAa • © 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 L I I I 11 I Owner a Ceai.5cate for Payment- with 2 copy to the Contrac- tor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reason for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicted and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor- dance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representa- tions are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor devat:ons from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment i-i the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Pay- ment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other dam requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- tor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in :.he Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Archi- tect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such agent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of - .1 defective Work not remedied; ' .2 third parry claims filed or reasonable evidence indica: - ing probable filing of such claims; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or ' equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Co :tract Sum. I .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work wta not be com- pleted within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certiicauon are removed, certification will be made for amounts previoasly withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued -a Certificate for Payment. the Owner shall make payment is -the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so -oury the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor. upon receipt of payment from the Owner, cut of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shad, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub -subcontractors in similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subconcrac- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.o.+.. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment. a -progress payTnenL Or panb or entire use or cccupancy of the Project by the Owner s;.=.: not cons ate acceptance of Work not in accordance w:u-.::.e Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 if the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Pa•: men:. through no fault of the Contractor, within seven c.:} -s after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment. or :f th-, Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer- tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Con- tractor may, upon seven additional dayswritten notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut -down, delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress Jr e Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi- ciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers tat the Work, or a por tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is subsantaav complete, the Contractor shall prepare arid subm.r to the Archaect a comprecensive list of items to be completes or corrected The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- plete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does nor alter the responsibility of the Contractor tC complete all Work in accordance wish the Contract Docu- ments. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Worx or des,g ' AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AlA" •(D 1987 THE A.MER:CANIN5T7UTE OFARCHITECTs.: 735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W, WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A201-1987 17 nated portion thereof is substantially complete. If Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accorda with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Cont tor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial O pletion, complete or correct such item upon notification by Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request another inspection by the Architect to determine Substat Completion. When the Work or designated portion theret substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certifi' of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of; stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utili damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the t within which the contractor shall finish all items on the accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substat Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof ur otherwise provided; in the Certificate of Substantial Com Lion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be ; rnitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written no tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certifica 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or design portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payn reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or tion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or daily completed portion of the Work at any stage when s portion is designated by separate agreement with the Com tor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3.11 and author by -public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. S :partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibil assigned to each of them. for payments, retainage if any, s rity, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and in ance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for rection. of the Work and commencement of warrar required by the Contract Documents. When the Contra considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor; prepare and submit a -list to the Architect as provided ur Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial o, pancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stag the progress of the Work shall be determined by written ag rent between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreeme. reached, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, -Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the; to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in orde determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute act tance of Work not complying with the requirements of Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is r for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of 2 Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly I such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work accept- able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per- formed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and•-betief, and on the basis of the Architects observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with.terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- ments and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- tor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor, any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have'been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidenc- ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety., if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts. releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcon- tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after pave ents are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such Hen, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 'r- 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final corn-. 'es pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the or Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall. let upon appliation by the Contractor and certification by the u- Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed re- and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully com- is pleted or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con- tract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por- tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit - a ted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of to such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. The making of final payment shall se constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub- paragraph 4.3.5. 9.104 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Sub- contractor or. material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to the waiver described in Subparagraph 4.3.5. 18 A201-1987 AIADOCUMENT A201 • GENE. ©1997 THE AMERICAN CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION TITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, main- taining and supervising all safety precaucons and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.1.2 :n the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably behevee to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to :he Owner and Architect in writing. The Work '.n the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in tact the material is asbestos or polychlorinared biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered `armless. The Work ;n the affec:ec area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- nated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance with final determination by the Architect on which arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under Article 4. 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by taw, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect, Archi- tect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses.:nclud- ing but nor limited to attorneysfees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in far, the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease -or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts the Owner may be liable. regardtess of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in pan by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shat: not be construed to negate, abridge. or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Subparagraph 10.1.4. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work an other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- rated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care. custody or ccntrol of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcorumctors or Sub -subcontrac- tors. and .3 other property at :hr site or ad:acent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns. walks. pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relo- cation or replacement in the course of ccnswctien. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or ;heir protection from damage. injury or :p5s 10.2.3 The Contractor shah erect and maintain, as required by existing concitiors and performance of the Contract. reason- able safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hanrds, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazudous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and :oss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1 2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in pan by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a sub -subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10 2.l.2 and 10.2.1'.3. except damage or loss anriburable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of deem may be Sable- and not attributable to the fauk or negligence of :he Contraccr. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are :n addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.1$. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organizltion at :he site whose our shah e the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contrctor in writing to the Owner and Archtect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or proper the Contactor shall act, a1 the Contractor's discretion, to nr. . vent threatened damage, injury or 'Loss. Additional compcn:. Lion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided :n Panvaph 4.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain .n a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business .n the ursd1ction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under :he Contract and for whit:: the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Sebcontractor or by anyone direcdv or ind:recdy employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them maybe :table: 1 claims under workers or workmen's compensation. d_sabihty benefit and other similar embloyee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed: ' NA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDTIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION ALA' • ®1987 THE A,MFRICANINSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006, A201-1987 19 .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, oc tional sickness or disease, or death of the Contra employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury. sic or disease, or death of any person other than the tractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a � as a result of an offense directly or indirectly rela employment of such person by the Contractor, by.another person; • .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work because of injury to or destruction of tangible erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom: :spa- other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property tors required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner. the :ness Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the Con- Work. to (2) .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of oisner- ship, maintenance or use of 2 motor vehicle: and .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli- cable to the Contractor's obligations under Par4raph 3.18. . r 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 st written for not less than limits of liability specified in the tract Documents or required by law, whichever cover greater. Coverages, whether written on an occuiren claims -made basis, shall be maintained without intern from date of commencement of the Work until date c payment and termination of any coverage required to be tamed after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owns be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the These Certificates and the insurance policies required Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that co, afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or alto expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has beer to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coven required to remain in force after final payment and are ably available, an additional certificate evidencing contir of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Appl for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Infor concerning reduction of coverage shall be fumishcd Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordances' Contractor's information and belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasir maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. Opti the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance I protection against claims which may arise from ope under the Contract. The Contractor shall nor be resp for purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's I insurance unless specifically required by the C Documents. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall pc and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully autl to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Prc located, property insurance in the amount of the initia tract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis withe untary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be tamed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Doct or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entitle are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment hs made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person of all be Con- ge is e or final shall ork. this ages :d to liven s are 11.3.1.1 Property insurahce shall be on an all-risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse. false - work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop- erty insurance required by -the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner -shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractorsand Sub - subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contrac- tor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur- chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reason- able costs properly attributable thereto. 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deduct: bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. If the Owner orinsurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary. deduc- tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are nor identified in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles. augn 11.3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- tanon ments, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work the stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the .h the value established in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall and purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance nally, required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall r self- specifically cover such insured objects during installation and itions until final acceptance by the Owner: this insurance shall include Bible interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- tbtttty subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor ntract shall be named insureds. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will chase insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property )rized due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner ect is waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use Con- of the Owners property, including consequential losses due to >t the fire or other hazards however caused. - it vol- 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for main- risks other than those described herein or for other special haz- nents ards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner who shall, if possible, ihdude such insurance, and the cost thereof been shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change entity Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • 20 A201-1987 AIAO •O1987 THEAMIE :RAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION i INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVFaW E. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 II 1 I I 1 1 I I I I I II 11 r I I] I I 11.3.5 If during the project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, acjoming cr adja- cent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the P:o;ect, or if after fnai payment prep- er:y insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring are Proj- ect during the construction period, the Owner shad waive all rights in accordance with the terns of Subparagraph 1:.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate property insurance. Al] separate policies shall provide t: is waiver cf subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy chat includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, defini- tions. exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each poLcv shall contain a provision that tne po.tcv will nor be cancelled or allowed to expire until at :east 30 dayspr.o: wra- ten no:.ce has been given to the Contractor. 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcon- tractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architects consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their sub- contractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and employees. for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant :o this Paragraph i 1.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner cr Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect. Architect's consu:rants. separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontrac- tors. sub -subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them. by appropriate agreements. written where legally required for validity: similar waivers each in favor of other parties enum- crated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- gation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even thoug.^t cat per- son or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to :he Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as :heir interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applic:b.e mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, writ:en where legally required for validity, shall require Sabcontr:ctors to make payments to their Sub -subcontractors in similar manner. 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured :oss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. T`.c cos: of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received s fiduciary- The Owner shad deposi: in a separate accctn: pro- ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accor- dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of cam: aged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order. 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shat: nave power to aejust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the partes in interest shall object in witting within five days after occurrence cf .oss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such ob:ection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 1.5 - The Owner as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement w.th insurers in accordance wits directions of sach arbitrators. If cistribuuor. of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required. the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragnpn 9 9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com- panies providing property insurance have consented to such par.:al occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractorshall take reasonable steps to obtain co.^.sent of the assurance company or companies and shall. without muual written consent, take no action with respect to pa.^:al occupancy or use that would cause cancellation. !ao_c cr reduction of insurance. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 The Owner shall have z e right to require the Contrac- tor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Con- tract and payment of obligations arsmg thereunder as stipu- lated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contra:. 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potencal beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obliga- itons arising under the Contract. the Contractor shall promot:v furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be mice. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to ire Architect's request or to requirements specificaliv expresses the Contract Documents, it must. if required in writing by :t e Architect, be uncovered for the Architects observation anti ce replaced at t.^.e Contractors expense without change in the Comma Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior O being covered. the Architect may request to see such \t ori, an._ :t shall be uncovered by the Contractor.:f such Work accordance with the Contract Documents. costs of uncover- .ng and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order. hr charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance wit r. :`e Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such o:' unless the condiz.on was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejec;:: by the £ chitect or failing to conform to the requireme.rls �. the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Ccmp:erien and whether or no: tabricated..nsta.let: o: completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testrg and inspec- tions and compensation for the Architect s services and expenses made necessary thereby. 12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substanua. Comple- tion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date MA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT rOR CONS: Ru'CLON • FOURTEENTH EDIT,ON A:A0 • C 1987 THEA,SIERICANtNSTITCTE OF ARCIHITECTS-173SFEw' YORK AVENUE, Y2', WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A2O1-1987 21 for commencement of warranties established under paragraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special wai required by the Contract Documents. any of the Work is I to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Co Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly receipt of 'written notice from the Owner to do so unit, Owner has previously given the Contractor a written a tance of such condition. This period of one year sit extended with respect to portions of Work first performec Substantial Completion by the period of time between Sul tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive 7 Lance of the Work under the Contract and termination e Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly aftt covert' of the condition. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site panic the Work -which are not in accordance with the requiter of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected b Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in dance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not prP with correction of such nonconforming Work within a rt able time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the C may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipm the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay of such removal and storage within ten days after w notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' w notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at p sale and shalt account for the proceeds thereof, after dedi costs and damages that should have been borne by the tractor, including compensation for the Architect's servict expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of s: not cover costs which the Contractor should have born Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payi then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference I Owner.. ARTICLE 13 Puna MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS tract after 13.1 GOVERNING LAW the 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place l be where the Project is located. after 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Stan- 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind them - This selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal represenca- cep- -tives to the other party hereto and to partners. successors. f the assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect dis = to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Con- tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If is of either parry attempts to make such an issignment without such ents consent. that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible the for all obligations under the Contract. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 'art cor- 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duh- :eed served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of son- the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it veer. was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or ce iced it at mail to the last business address known to the parr- giving :osts notice. tten tten 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES vate ;ting 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu-ments and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in and addition to and not 2lmitation of duties, obligations. rights and �^ do remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. the 13.4.2 No action or failure to act, by the Owner. Architect or dents Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded aver _ them under the Conran nor shall such action or failure to act he constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder. except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of %t'ork which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to obligations which the Contractor might have under the tract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one as described in Subparagraph 12 2.2 relates only to the spt obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and ha relationship to the time within which the obligation to coi with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enfoi nor to the time within which proceedings may be comme to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the `tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the IX 12.3 ACCEPTANCE70F NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 11 the Owner prefers to accept Work which is nc accordance with the requirements of the Contract-DocumP the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduce appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effe whether or not final payment has been made. no 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws. ordi- nances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless other- wise provided, the Contractor shall make, arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent test- ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce- dures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. ""' 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub - t inparagraph 13.5.1,. the Architect will, upon written authorization rats, from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements tor- for such additional testing,. inspection or. approval by an entity as acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely :ted notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. AlA DOCUMENT A201 • GENE 22 A201-1987 AIA ©19S7 THE AMERICAN 1L CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION SSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W, WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 I The Owner stall bear such costs e. cept as provided in Sub- paragraph 13.5.3. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract: Documents. the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated -procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall. unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tars. inspecons or approvals requ:red by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to (he Con- tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ments shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or. in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time w time at the p.ace where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substan- tial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certifi- cate for Payment. As to acts or fai:uses to act occur- ring subsequent to tie relevant date of Substant:al Completion and prior to issuance of the final Cer.:fr- cate for Payment. any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issu- ance of the final Cenif.cate for Payment, any appl: cable statute of I:mitacons shall commence :o run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to h.tve accrued in any and al: events not t5ter than the date of any act or failure to act Sv the Contractor puau:.nt to any warranty provided under Paragraph 3 5, the Case of any correction of the"t ork or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Cor.tracror or Owner. whichever occurs last ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the `,cork is stopped for 2 period of 30 days through no act or fault of :he Contr_ctor or a Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasors .1 Lss.ance of an order of a court or other public author- ity having jurisdiction; .2 an act of govemment, such as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4-:. or because the Owner has nor made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time staled in the Contract Documents: .4 :f repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute :n the aggregate more than 10O percent of the total num- ber of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365 -day period. whichever is less; or .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Conrractor's.request. reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2-1- 14.1.2 if ore of the above reasons exists, the Contractor lacy. upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner an_ Archirec:. terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner paymeot for Work executed and for proven loss with rescec: to materials, equipment, tools, and.construction ecuipme.^: and machinery. including reasonable overhead, profit rd damages. 14.1.3 if the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or the?: agents or employees or any other persons performing pomons of the Work under contract with the Contrctor because the Owner has persistently P,:iled to fulfill the Owner's obligarioro under the Contract Documents with respect to matters impor- tant to the progress of the \Cork, the Contractor may. upon seven additional dayswritten notice to t to Owner and time Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from :he Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate :tie Contract if the Contractor .1 persistently or repeatedly -refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials. .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreement. betneen the Contractor and the Subcontractors: .3 persstendv disregards Laws. ordinances. or rules. rr2- ulations or orders of a public aut.'.ority hat tang lus- diction; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substan::al beach of a prov'a.m of ire Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exut, :he Owncr. upi:n certifiariun by the Architect (ha: sufficient cause rsuts to ,te- ' AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CO'DIT OX' OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOLRTEFNTii EDI7:O' AIAt •©1987 THEAy!ERICAN:NsTITLTF OF ARCHITECTS.:'3sNEw YORKAyE\uE.,wy. WASlliNC.TON DC._',$AA A201-1987 23 tify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor ani the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, t:rmi- nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equip -- merit, tools, and construction equipment and mal in -- cry thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para- graph 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one If the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 lithe unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Archi- tect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, ouch excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon appli- cation, and, this obligation for payment shall survive rermina- tion of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused bbv suspension, delay or interrup- tion. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance -is, was or would have been so sus• pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract. 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. 24 A201-1987 AlA DOCUMENT A201 • GENEAAL CONDITIONS OF THRA E CONTRACT FOR. CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 YEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 3/87 SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1. REFERENCE DOCUMENT A. These Supplementary Conditions are included as a part of the contract documents for this project to amend the standard provisions of the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", Document No. A201 of the American Institute of Architects, Fourteenth Edition, dated 1987, as required for this project. Reference herein to articles of the General Conditions refer to said Document A201. See Section 00700, GENERAL CONDI- TIONS, preceding this section. 2. GENERAL PROVISIONS (EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT) A. Delete subparagraph 1.2.1 in Article 1 of the General Conditions and substitute the following: "1.2.1 The Architect shall identify those contract documents which are a part of the Agreement". 3. CONTRACTOR (SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES) A. Add subparagraph 3.3.5 under Paragraph 3.3 of Article 3 of the General Conditions as follows: B. "3.3.5 Contractor (1) shall review any specified construction or installation procedure (including those recommended by manufacturers); (2) shall advise the Architect (a) if the specified procedure deviates from good construction practice, (b) if following the proce- dure will affect any warranties, including the Contractor's general warranty, or (c) of any objections the contractor may have to the procedure; and (3) to propose any alternative procedure which the Contractor will warrant." 4. CONTRACTOR (LABOR AND MATERIALS) A. Add Subparagraphs 3.4.3 and 3.4.4 under Paragraph 3.4 of Article 3 of the General Conditions as follows: "3.4.3. All contractors and subcontractors engaged in the Owner/Contractor Agreement shall conform to the labor laws of the State of Arkansas and the various acts amendatory and supplementary thereto; and to all other laws, ordinances and legal requirements applic- able thereto." TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-1 95014 I "3.4.4. All work shall be performed in the best and most workman like manner by the mechanics skilled in their respective trades." 5. CONTRACTOR (WARRANTY) A. Refer to subparagraph 3.5.1 in.Article 3 of the General Conditions and addl the following: "The Contractor shall guarantee and warrant his and his subcontractor's work and materials (including the materials and work of suppliers of the Contract and his subcontractors) for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the project by the Owner. This Warranty shall be for a longer period on certain items if so designated in the'Specifications. The foregoing one-year guaranty and warranty shall not in any way limit, restrict o• affect the liability of the Contractor, or his subcontractors, for indemnity as provided for in this Contract, nor shall it in any way shorten the period of limitation fixed by law for the filing of any action against the Contractor for enforcement of the or breach of any provision of the contract documents. Should. the Contractor elect to use any of the equipment in -the building during the construction period, he shall make arrangements with the subcontractor or supplier of the equipment for -any extension of warranty of that equipment made necessary by such use. TheIWarranty period for such equipment to the Owner shall not be reduced by the use of equipment by the Contractor',. ' 6. CONTRACTOR (SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES) A. Add to subparagraph 3.12.5- under Paragraph 3.12 in ' Article 3 of the deneral Conditions after the second sentence the following: "Incomplete or podrly prepared shop drawings or other submittals shall }be returned to the Contractor to be revised or redrawn prior to resubmittal. The Contractor will hold the Architect and Owner harmless against claims for losses or injury caused by errors or omis- sions in the shop drawings or other submittals for the Work made by the Contractor, a subcontractor, any lower tier subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distribu- tor." 1 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-2 95014 I I B. Delete Subparagraph 3.12.8 in Article 3 of the General Conditions and substitute the following: "The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Docu- ments by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect of such deviations in a separate writing or by submitting a separate written request for change at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof". ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT (ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT) A. Add sub -subparagraph 4.2.4.1 under subparagraph 4.2.4 of Article 4 of the General Conditions as follows: "4.2.4.1 Any direct communications between Owner and Contractor that affect the performance or administra- tion of the Contract shall be made or confirmed in writing, with copies to the Architect, and any such communications that represent a modification of the Contract requirements will be documented appropriately. Any communications among the Architect and Subcontractors shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor." 8. ADMINISTRATION OF THE A. In the 12th line the General Cond either party" to arbitrate". 9. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT (ARBITRATION) of subparagraph 4.5.1 in Article 4 of itions change "upon written demand of read "if both parties agree to CONTRACT (ARBITRATION) A. In Subparagraph 4.5.2 of Article 4 of the General Conditions, after the words "Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Associa- tion currently in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise," add the words, "subject to applicable laws of the State of Arkansas." ITERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-3 95014 Ti 10. SUBCONTRACTORS (AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK) A. Add subparagraph 5.2.5 in Article 5 of the General . Conditions as follows: "5.2.5 Where any of the provisions of this Paragraph 5.2 of Article 5 conflict with Act 477 of 1961 of the State of Arkansas, as amended, the provisions of Act 477 and amendments thereto shall govern. 11. CHANGES IN THE WORK (C DIRECTIVES) - A. Refer to subparag cle 7 of the Gene changes: ORDERS/CONSTRUCTION CHANGE s 7.2.2, 7.3.3 and 7.3.6 in Arti- Conditions and make the following "7.2.2 Change the- last two words in this paragraph "Subparagraph 7.3.," to Subparagraph 7.3.6." "7.3.3 Omit subparagraphs 7.3.3.1 through 7.3.3.3. Retain subparagraph 7.3.3.4." "7.3.6 The value bf any such extra work for change order/construction[.change directive changes performed by the contractor using his own forces shall be deter- mined in one or more of the following ways: a. By estimate aLd acceptance in a lump sum, computed as follows: (1) Net cost of materials, plus state sales tax. (2) Net delivery cost. (3) Net placing cost, plus W.C. Insurance premium and FICAI tax. (4) Overhead and Profit charge not to exceed 12% on items 1, 2 and 3. (5) Allowable bond premium on items 1, 2, 3, and 4. Credit for work omitted, which was included in the original contract, shall be computed on the same basis, except that the Contrac- tors share of overhead and profit percentage is 7%..1 The Contractor shall be required, if called , upon, to furnish the original bills and pay- rolls and support the statement with proper • affidavits. The burden of proof of the costs rests upon the Contractor. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II -00800-4 95014 II ADDENDUM NO. 1 - issued October 12. 1995 to project Manual and Drawings for FAYETTEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT TERMINAL EXPANSION PHASE 1] FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS PROJECT NO, 95014 WI [I DELONY & DAVIDSON, INC. ARCHITECTURE & INTERIOR DESIGN 100 WEST CENTER, SUITE 102 FAYETTEVILLE'. ARKANSAS 72701 (501) 443-6666 This addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies or interprets the Specifications and/or Drawings as noted herein. REFER TO THE PROJECT MANUAL: Section 00020, Notice to Bidders: Change bid date to Wednesday October 18, 1995. Section 09900, Painting: Add the followirg Article 2.02 and include in Sid, all Gyp. Bd. Vinyl Wrapped is to be painted. "2.02 SPECIAL WALL FINISH SYSTEM A. Provice "Mult:spec Fine FlecK" pa:nt system as manufactured by Multcoior Specialties_ inc., 2101 South 54th ANenue. Cicero. Illinois, 60650. (708) 656-5586. or approved equal system. Finish color to match existing in Terminal. Application is to be in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations." Section 10150, Compartments and cubicles: Inc'.ude the attached Addendum Specification Section in the Project Manua:. Section 05300, Metal Decking: Sub-sect:on 2.01 - Change roof deck from 9116" to i", 24 gauge, Type C. Slotted Decking. Page 1 of 3 REFER TO THE DRAWINGS: Sheet A5.1 1. Refer to Finish Schedule - At car rental counter - East wall is to be taped, floated and painted. Sheet S1.01: 1. Change dimension between Grids A.3 and A.9 from 11'-9-3/ 8" to 11'-10". 3. Change dimension between Grids A.9 and B.5 from 10'-1-5;8" to 10'-1". 3. Foundation Note #1 - Add the following: "Bottom of piers shall bear on stiff reddish tan and gray sandy clay with occasional gravel. Overrn or underrun of pier length of up to plus/minus 3 feet from estimated length to achieve required bearing capacity and bearing strata shall not constitute a change in contract price." 4. Foundation Note #3 - Delete void forms beneath floor slabs. Sheet 52.01: Detail 11/S2.01 - Change ver:icadimension from 1'-0" to 1'-2". I Base Plate BP 3 - Change vertical dimension from 2i,20 and 2-1 :o 2" and 3" respectively. Sheet 53.01: Add a continuous bent plate 1 »" x 4" x 4 at all hips and valleys similar to Detail 3 S4.01. '_. See Partial Plans ADD 1, ADD 2 for revised framing and dimensions. Sheet M1.1: 1. Refer to Men s Restroom - Add 1-1/»' Auxiliary Condensate drain to A11U-1. Route Auxiliary Condensate Drain above ceiling to north wall, turn down inside wall and stub out 1'-0" above grade and turn down. Pipe is to be of material called out in Mechanical Piping Schedule on Sheet M2.. Mechanical Schedules and Details. Page 2 of 3 2. Refer to Mechanical Notes - Add the following to Mechanical Notes - "Note 18" - to read: "Existing Chilled water piping under new addition is to remain. Contractor to locate and protect existing piping, repair or replace and piping damaged by new addition". Sheet M2.1: Refer to Detail "A" - Add Auxiliary Drain Pan and Auxiliary Condensate Drain Pipe. Route Auxiliary Condensate Pipe separately from primary pipe and to a conspicuous point. ADDENDUM DRAWINGS - Addendum Drawings ADD 1 and ADD 2 all dated 10-12-95 and attached hereto, are hereby made a part of this addendum ADDENDUM SPECIFICATION SECTIONS - Addendum Specification Sections 10150 attached hereto, are hereby made a part of this addendum. END OF ADDENDUM NO. I Page 3 of 3 C I 1p o 7 I I I� -�! 01 I I III • G I �, W! -7x26 1� yy LI A VKI • 1 I: ' _ 4♦ yI 1 SI I j rv•sk_o k, k W sK3 t;c r -l___ �y .y WI." T I T ' >c— ter— I II n N y C 1\.il vl U L It ICI 1 ec; i w yk�i •, I \V, I AD l0 I2.MS • • rTRt2trVi L- ga SIoNS i4`{ fleJILE MOM C4PAL 412r 1 ft 50141 1 AINA t3wtws,tJ P I ----------- v I I I I 51/Z' I -- I25Y5. IC. 7G MATCH EX5'IMU I _ S� U - i -I Y J' X11 I'1 I AI(i: i\ i—`Zir. F • _CIS I .v �` 1; i�5{EKED. P c_'-. 'I IJv • ___ ___ 6 '/l \� L1 e-� •� ,hr y• a Ci r. II I. ice: ;'5 ---- - --------- -.---- • • I I .Ll h11• - S •••••C -i-A'• _ • L J •• b se'co a a'-3' L v_G o may_ P. •u /,. •• emirs"w aG Y J At . . Srt�L'G,O9AL-gevISICNs FAYSTFEMLL MUNIG ,LArg'og - 2 g5oi4 TazMlr.flsIoN # SEC_:ON 1C15C - COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish and install toilet partitions and urinal screens specified. 1.02 QUAL=lY ASSURANCE A. Use persc nne:. familiar wit: installation, of this work. skilled in wcr manufacturer's and thorouLlhly t req iced, completely reccrnmended methods of familiar wtt recuirerr.e:.ts 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Subtit. color c:_ips r'.rese---- " -- range ..t standard Sub , - .,... _ _ _ � r u r _ colors available fro:r: selected cuality r� m6..vaal.l l.r=r -n s✓eca_iec.. :- SubS.._Lutic_ s. 1. or he =Yq Products s.,ec_r_ d l 0c -S.- -. a aualr'-v standard for ccmparlso, by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may -.: Y..Y oC �.:r t: OSe 30ec F:,�,.:. 1-preln on an Ye s' "-°d .-_.. .1 ... ... r .-w♦�__rr_ .J II r''' u -.•all, basis uV - _,_ prppo.C..e the sub- :f�vYvv .. u�.. A _c ur_-. --s -;:at do of meet cr exceed. the ..ar_ry standardsJ_a.._rJned __ -. s'. ecS__- product. Products prcpcsed as equivalent MI:ST be submitted t hrcuchhthe c e i 4 Y/-7_ F,v - e ea rar/--- ac_.,_ view by the Arc__r_e..t after _-_ - •__ '.2 a- r. = or. is awarded. - str...t_ DC 1TC. re _.es,- a� ovar ct products prior tc the awardi:g the co aract. �..p r __ Yo Y samples putlished 2. J pC__.. .- a_a, specif1caticrs and t::e hike must be submitted t r comparison. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, wili provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified rein. 104 PRODUCT F'.AND:.INC A. Protection: Protect t e par itions aid o . er �e s under this Section before, during, a:d after iastalla for-. Pr ot- Prot' --- arse- CY.t and material of %..4. __.race s - 10150 B. Replacements: In event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ',2.01 .METAL TOILET PARTITIONS AND URINAL SCREENS A. Toilet Partitions: Provide floor mounted overhead braced type with baked enamel finish in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color line and constructed as follows: 1. Doors: Furnish 22 gauge steel, with reinforce- ments for hardware. Hardware includes controlled action hinges, top pivot assembly or post hinge, throw latch, strike and bumper, hinge bracket for post, and coat hock. 2. Partitions: 1 -inch thick, made of 2 sheets of 20 gauge steel, assembled over and cemented to dense, sound deadening insulation core. Seal formed edges of panels with continuous oval -crown locking strips. 3. Pilasters: 1-1/4" thick, made of 2 sheets of 20 gauge steel, anchored at floor with adjustable fittings. Width of pilasters to fit installation layout. 4. Hardware: Fu.=ish door hardware of polished stainless steel or chromium plated finish cn non- ferrous metal. Attach partitions and pilasters with extruded polished and anodized aluminum brackets and stirrups. Use concealed attachment of pilasters to floor including 3'' polished stain- less steel trim. Provide combir_atior. hook and bumper on water closet stall doors. B. Construct urinal screens as specified for toilet stalls and as dimensioned cn drawings. Anchor securely. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials, nct specifically described but recuired for complete and proper installation of speci- fied items, selected by Contractor subject to approval of Architect. 10150-2 PART 3 - EXECV:ION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that work is complete to point where this installation may properly commence. B. Discrepancies: Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until discrepancies are fully resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet partitions and other items specified in this Section, anchoring components firmly in place fcr long life under hard use and in complete accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT A. Jpon completion of installation and as a condition cf acceptance, visually inspect entire work cf this sec- tion, ac ust components for proper operation and straight alignment, and touch-up scratches and abra- sions to be completely invisible. - END OF SECTION 10150 10150-3 b. By unit prices named in the contract or subse- quently agreed upon. c. By cost and percentage or by cost and a fixed fee, to be computed according to above formula. 7.3.6.1 The value of any.such extra work for change order/construction change directive changes performed by a subcontractor shall be determined by the Sub- contractor computing his cost as outlined in Subpara- graph 7.3.6 above and to which said cost the Contractor shall add an Overhead and Profit Charge not to exceed Five Percent (5%)." 12. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION (APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT) A. Delete Paragraph 9.3 through 9.9.3 of Article 9 in the General Conditions and substitute the following Para- graphs 9.3 and 9.4 in lieu thereof: "9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT AND PAYMENT CERTIFICATES I I I I I The Contractor shall present to the Architect an appli- cation for payment on or before the twenty-fifth day of each calendar month. These periodical estimates for partial payment shall be submitted on special forms, prepared at the Contractor's expense and conforming to A.I.A. Document G702. An original and a requested number of copies of such estimate shall be tendered to the Architect. In preparing estimates, the material delivered and suitably stored on the site and prepara- tory work done may be taken into consideration. The Architect shall review the Applications for Payment in accordance with the general observations of the work and the percentage of completion of each category before submitting them to the Owner for payment. No later than the 10th day of each calendar month, the Owner will make partial payment to the Contractor, but the Owner will retain 10% of the amount of each such estimate. There shall be retained 10% on the estimated amounts until final completion and acceptance of all work covered by the contract; provided, however, that the Architect may at any time after 50% of the Contract Work has been completed, if he finds that satisfactory workmanship and progress has been attained and with written consent of surety, recommend that any of the remaining partial payments be paid in full. The retai- nage will be placed in escrow and will be paid to the Contractor within 30 days after substantial completion of the project. No retainage shall be held on materi- als properly stored at the site or in the Contractor's warehouse. Before issuance of the final certificate, TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-5 95014 !Ti the Contractor shall obtain in writing from the bonding company approval of such payment. No certificate issued nor payment made to the Contractor, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Contract Work by the Owner, shall be an acceptance of any work or materials not in accordance with this contract." "9.4 PAYMENTS WITHHELD In addition to other appropriate justification there- fore as authorized by law, the Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole •or a part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary in his reasonable opinion to protect himself from loss on account of: a. Defective Contract Work not remedied. b. Claims filedOr reasonable evidence indicating probable fiii nng of claims. c. Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors or for material or labor or equipment. d. A reasonable oubt that the Contract Work can be completed f or1 the balance then unpaid of the contract sum. e. Damage to another Contractor or to the Owner. f. Reasonable evlidence that the Contract Work will not be complelted within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or g. Persistent failure to carry out the Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents." 13. INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Article 11, deletelparagraph 11.1 through 11.3.11 and the following shall be substituted in lieu thereof: 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contra in a company or cc business in the ju located such insur from claims -set fc result from Contra and for which the whether such opera Subcontractor or b employed by any of any of them may be TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II tor shall purchase from and maintain parties lawfully authorized to do isdiction in which the Project is nce as will protect the Contractor th below which may arise out of or tor's operations under the Contract ontractor may be legally liable, ions be by the Contractor or by a anyone directly or indirectly them, or by anyone for whose acts liable. 00800-6 95014 1. claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the work to be performed; 2. claims for damages because of pational sickness or disease, Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of sickness or disease, or death than the Contractor's employe bodily injury, occu- or death of the bodily injury, of any person other -s 4. claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by another person. 5. claims for damages, other than to the work itself, '• because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting there- from; 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; 7. and, claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obliga- tions under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims -made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commence- ment of the work until date of final payment and termi- nation of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.2.1 The insurance required by subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less thhn the following, or greater if required by law: 1. Workers' Compensation: ' (a) State: Statutory (b) Applicable Federal: Statutory (c) Employer's Liability: $500,000 per • ' accident; $500,000 disease limit, policy; $500,000 disease limit, individual TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-7 95014 I 2. Commercial General Liability (including premises - operations); independent contractors protective; products and completed operations) as follows: (a) 1986 In urance Service Office Occurrence Form. Coverage should apply at each work site. Limits required as follows: (1) General Aggregate $2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 Personal Injury & Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Fire Damage -Legal Liability (any one fire) $ 50,000 Medical Payments (any one person)$ 5,000 ' (2) Products and Completed Operations to be maiIntained for one year after final Patent. atent. (3) Property Damage Liability Insurance will provide X, C, or U coverage as applic- ablle . (b) Comprehensive General Liability. Coverage provided1 will be on the Comprehensive General Liability form with the Broad Form General Liability Endorsement. Limits provided as follows: • (1) Combined Single Limit: $1,000,000 each occlu-rrence and aggregate ' (2) Products and Completed Operations to be maintained foroneyear after final payment. (3) Property Damage Liability Insurance will provide X, C, or U coverage as applic- able. (4) Contractual Liability: Bodily Injury: Combined Single Limit Pro{�erty Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occur - (5) Personal Injury, with Employment Exclu- sioh deleted: Combined Single Limit $1,000,000 Each Occurrence TERMINAL EXP.- PHASE II 00800-8 95014 II (6) Bodily Injury and Property Damage (Com- bined Single Limit) (any auto, including Owned, Hired and Non -Owned Autos): Bodily Injury: Combined Single Limit Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commence- ment of the work. The certificates and the insurance policies required by this paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final application for payment as required by subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. 11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy of each certificate of insurance herein required for each copy of the agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by subparagraphs 11.1.1 and 11.1.2. The form of the certificate shall be AIA Document G705. Furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage of limits. 11.1.3.2 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance with responsible insurance companies satisfactory to the Owner required under this article, and such insurance has been accepted by the Owner. Nothing in this article shall create any obligation on the part of the Architect to see that the specified insurance is main- tained. 11.1.4 All Subcontractors shall be required to main- tain contractors liability insurance the same as required to be maintained by the Prime Contractor as specified in 11.1.1 and the limits of liability shall be not less than those required to be maintained by the Prime Contractor unless their operations are covered to the specified limits by the insurance maintained by the Prime Contractor. 1 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-9 95O4 I 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1. The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the term of this contract, Owner's Protective Liability Insurance with an endorsement to the policy to include as additional insured, the Architect, with limits not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence and • $1,000,000 in the aggregate for property damage liabil- ity. • 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall - purchase and maintain, in a company or companies law- fully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the project is located, property insurance in the amount of the initial contract sum as well as subse- quent modifications thereto for the entire work at the site on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be main- tained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,. until final payment has been made as provided in para- graph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the • Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Architect, Subcontractors an Sub -subcontractors in the work. 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage• including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, falsework, temporary buildin}s and debris removal including demo-. lition occasioned1by enforcement of any applicable - legal requirementS, and shall cover reasonable compen- sation for Architact's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss: Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11.3.1.2 If the Contractor does not intend to purchase such property.insnrance required by the contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Contractor shall so inform the Owner, in writing, prior toIcommencement of the work. The Owner may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Architect, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the work, and by appropriate TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-10 95014 I. ' change order, the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. If the Owner is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Contractor to purchase or maintain ' insurance as described above, without so notifying the Owner, then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. ' 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deductibles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay costs not ' covered because of such deductibles. If the Owner or insurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified of if the Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deductible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered because of such increased or voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are not identified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of deductibles. ' 11.3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, this property insurance shall cover portions ' of the work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also portions of the work in transit. ' 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance - The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's ' property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards, however caused. 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that ' insurance for risks other than those described herein or for other special hazards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if ' possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate change order. ' 11.3.5 If during the project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adjacent to the site by property insurance ' under policies separate from those insuring the project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed project through a ' policy or policies other than those insuring the project during the construction period, the owner shall TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-11 95014 I waive all rights graph 11.3.7 for covered by this s separate policies tion by endorseme 11.3.6 Before shall file with that includes i paragraph 11.3. generally appli exclusions and en Each policy shall will not be cance least 30 days' pr the Contractor. 11.3.7 Waivers o Contractor waive any of their Subc and employees, ea Architect, Archit Contractors descr their Subcontract employees, for da to the extent coy pursuant to this insurance applica they have to,proc Owner as fiduciar priate, shall req consultants, sepa 6, if any, and th agents and employ agreements, writt validity, similar parties enumerate such waivers of s wise. A waiver o a person or entit would otherwise h tractual or other um directly or in person or entity property damaged. 11.3.8 A loss in insurance shall b fiduciary and mad fiduciary for the appear, subject t mortgage clause a TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II n accordance with terms of subpara- amages caused by fire or other perils parate property insurance. All shall provide this waiver of subroga- t or otherwise. anlexposure to loss may occur, the Owner the Contractor a copy of each policy rance coverages required by this ach policy shall contain all le conditions, definitions, orsements related to this project. contain a provision that the policy led or allowed to expire ufitil at or written notice has been given to Subrogation - The Owner and 11 rights against (1) each other and ntractors, Sub -subcontractors, agents h of the other, and (2) the _ ct's consultants, separate bed in Article 6, if any, and any of rs, Sub -subcontractors, agents -and ages caused by fire or other perils red by property insurance obtained aragraph 11.3 or other property le to the work, except such rights as eds of such insurance held by the The Owner or Contractor, as appro- ire of the Architect, Architect's ate Contractors described in Article Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors, es of any of them, by appropriate n where legally required for - waivers each in favor of other herein. The policies shall provide brogation by endorsement or other - subrogation shall be effective as to even though that person or entity ve a duty of indemnification, Ion- ise, did not pay the insurance premi- irectly, and whether or not the ad an insurable interest in the ured under Contractor's property adjusted by the Contractor as payable to the Contractor as insureds, as their interests may requirements of any applicable d of subparagraph 11.3.10. The 00800-12 95014 I H H C I I I I L I I I I H I I I Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub -subcontractors in similar manner. 11.3.9 If required in writing by a part in interest, the Contractor as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Contractor's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Contractor shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Contractor shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Contractor shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in para- graph 4.5. If after such loss no other special agree- ment is made, replacement of damaged property shall be covered by appropriate change order. 11.3.10 The Contractor as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Contractor's exercise of this power; if such objection be made, an arbitrator shall be chosen as provided in paragraph 4.5. The Contractor as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with direc- tions of such arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorse- ment or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. ' TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 00800-13 95C14 n 14. INSURANCE AND BONDS (PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND) A. Add the following to Subparagraph 11.4.3 in Article 11 ' of the General Conditions: "The performance -payment bond shall be in compliance with the laws of dhe State of Arkansas and as stipulated in Section 01100, SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS of these specifications." 15. MISCELLANEOUS PROVI A. Add Paragraph 13 General Conditic "13.8.1 Where a not the intent to product of anothe set a definite st but in all cases, all proposed subs for comparison an Architect. No su authorized in wri Contractor intend shall make this f Architect as soon contract. 13.8.2 Should a the substitute ma unsatisfactory fo guaranty period, material or equip specified by name 13.8.3 After exe proposed substitu is no decrease in or through the Ge be submitted prom for checking and delaying the proj will not be appro tutions. No subs Architect's aDoro hi0h; (SUBSTITUTIONS) "Substitutions" in Article 13 of the as follows: efinite material is specified, it is discriminate against any equal manufacturer. It is the. intent to ndard. Open competition -is expected, complete data must be submitted on itutes and samples shall be submitted test when requested by the stitution shall be made unless ing by the Architect. If the to substitute an equal product, he ct known, in writing., to the as possible after the award of the bstitution be accepted and should rial prove defective or otherwise. the service intended and within the e Contractor shall replace this nt with the material or equipment ution of the contract agreement, ion will be considered only if there quality, and only when submitted by eral Contractor. Such request shall tly in order to allow adequate time tudy by the Owner/Architect without ct. Requests for time extensions ed for delays due to rejected substi- itution will be allowed without the al "in writing." SECTION 00800 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II I 00800-14 - 95014 SECTION 01010 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT BASIS OF WORK AND PROCEDURES A. Work is based upon conditions at site, Project Manual, contract Drawings for Project No.95014, dated September 26, 1994, all addenda issued and the Contract executed between Owner and Contractor; 1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES OF A. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the con- tract, Contractor shall provide and pay for all materi- als, labor, tools, equipment, water, light, heat, power, transportation, superintendence, temporary construction of every nature,, taxes legally collectible because of the Woik and all other services and facili- ties of any naturd necessary to execute Work as shown and/or specified under the contract and deliver it complete in every respect within specified time. a. Americans with Disabilities Act Compliance: 1. The objective of the ADA is to make accessible to persons with disabilities all buildings and other facilities o en to the general public on the same basis that taose buildings and facilities are available tolpersons without disabilities, and to integrate persons with disabilities using places of public accommodation with persons who are not disabled. 2. Design Standards: It is generally accepted that the most stringent of the following standards must govern. a. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 with b. Americans National Standards Institute, lat- est edition with -amendments. C. Applicable Building Codes, latest accepted. editions with amendments. 3. General Contractor Responsibilities: If, during the course of` construction of this project, the Contractor discovers errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents when compared TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01010-1 95014 II to guidelines set forth in the above mentioned standards, the Contractor shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable for damage resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognizes such errors, inconsistencies or omissions and knowingly fails to report them to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recog- nized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume responsi- bility for such performance and shall bear attrib- utable costs for correction. 1.03 OWNER A. Wherever term "Owner" or "Owners" is used in Project Manual it refers to The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas. All papers required to be delivered to Owner shall be delivered to Mr. Dale Fredricks, Airport Manager, Drake Field, Fayetteville Municipal Airport, Hwy. 71 North, Fayetteville, Arkansas. 1.04 ARCHITECTS A. Wherever term "Architect" or "Architects" is used in these specifications it refers to Wittenberg, ➢elony Davidson, Inc., Architecture & Interior Design, 100 West Center Street, Suite 102, Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701. 1.05 TIME FOR COMPLETION A. Time for completion of all Work under this contract is 180 consecutive calendar days from date of written notice to proceed. 1.06 DESCRIPTION OF BID A. BASE BID: Work includes Site Demolition and Prepara- tion, Site Improvements, Building Demolition, General Construction and Remodeling, Mechanical Work and Electrical work as shown on the drawings and described herein, all to be let under one prime contract. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 0:.010-2 95014 II 1.07 1.08 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. It is understood Contractor and Owi for completion of contract; and it agreed that Contri this contract on Proceed and fully calendar days. Cc larly, diligently, rate of progress i specified. It is and between Contri tion of Work desc: tion of same, tak: tic range and usu< this locality. Ii es to complete wo: any proper extens: does hereby agree, this contract, to day, not as a pen such breach of co each and every ca default after tim ing Work. Said a between Contracto would in such eve to be the amount SEQUENCE OF WORK. A. Construct new add much of the work walls where new a building. Instal before starting r Coordinate work s without delay. B. EXISTING BUILDING work required- in I scheduled by arrai tractor so that of will not be disru) disrupt any utilil this work must be advance with the the hours of 12:01 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II nd mutually agreed, by and between er, that date of beginning and time Work are essential conditions of the s further mutually understood and ctor shall commence Work embraced in ate specified in Written Notice to complete Work within 180 consecutive ntractor agrees to prosecute regu- -and uninterruptedly said Work at s will complete Work within time expressly understood and agreed, by ctor and Owner, that time for comple- ibed is reasonable time for comple- ng into consideration average clima- 1 industrial conditions prevailing in Contractor neglects, fails or refus- k within time specified, or within on granted by Owner, then Contractor as a consideration for awarding of pay Owner the amount of $100.00 per lty but as liquidated damages for tract as hereinafter set forth, for endar day that Contractor is in _stipulated in contract for complet- ount is fixed and agreed upon by and and Owner because of damages Owner t sustain, and said amount is agreed f damages which Owner would sustain. ion in such manner as to complete as possible before removing existing ition connects to the present temporary dust proof partitions oval of existing work to be changed. connection can be made weathertight Perform remodeling and modification he present building at such times .gement made between Owner and Con- erations of the existing terminal ted. If it becomes necessary to y service to the existing facility, scheduled at least two (2) weeks in wner and will be performed between midnight and 6:00 AM. -01010-3 II II II II II I II II I I I U I I I Li 95014 ' J C. BUILDING EGRESS: Contractor is responsible for maintaining or redirecting the egress path(s) from the existing terminal building as directed by local building code officials. Contractor must use whatever means necessary to meet requirements of code official. 1.09 TESTING A. Allow in Base Bid, the amount of $1,500.00 to cover cost of field and laboratory testing required by various sections of Technical Divisions of these specifications. Included is fill and site work compaction tests, concrete strength tests, roofing tests and other testing as required. In event actual cost of testing is more than allowances, change will be made in contract amount to cover the difference and, if less, credit difference to Owner on contract amount. Contractor is responsible for the cost of any and all retesting that may be necessary due to failure of materials in initial testing. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Architect to furnish 9 sets of contract drawings and specifications, without cost, to General Contractor for use in constructing Work. General Contractor to supply all contract drawings and specifications to his subcon- tractors or material suppliers. Additional sets or portions of contract drawings and specifications, beyond 9 sets furnished by Architect, requested by General Contractor, will be furnished for actual cost of printing at General Contractor's expense. B. Contract Documents (including all drawings, specifica- tions, addenda and supplemental information) will not be made available on computer disk or on reproducible sepia to Bidders or Sub -bidders before the award of a Contract nor will they be made available to the Con- tractor or Sub -contractors after the award of a Con- tract. Only conventional, paper reproductions of such information will be made available to parties listed above. Conventional reproductions of Contract Documents may be obtained by means described in Section 00020 or as directed by Architect in the case of negotiated bids. 1.11 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT A. During the construction of this project, if work in- volving friable asbestos is suspected, or encountered, Contractor shall notify Owner or Owner's representative immediately and Owner, with his own forces or by sepa- TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01010-4 95014 rate contract is responsible for complete investiga- tion, removal and disposition of friable asbestos hazard in accordance with applicable laws and regula- tions. B. Before beginning demolition work, the Contractor is re- quired to contact the local office of the Environmental Protection Agency and advise the E.P.A. of his intent to proceed with demolition as necessary to fulfill re- quirements of his Contract. 1.12 EXISTING HAZARDOUS MA ERIALS A. During the construction of this project, if work in- volving hazardous materials.existing on the site is suspected, or encountered, Contractor shall notify Owner or Owner's representative immediately and Owner, with his own forces or by separate contract is respon- sible for complete investigation, removal and dispo- sition of hazardous materials in accordance with appli- cable laws and regulations. 1.13 GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General.Conditions and Supplementary Conditions are an integral part of all sections of Project Manual. Their contents and provisions shall be carefully noted in performance of Work. B. General requirements specified in this division of Project Manual apply to all specification sections. 1.14 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise noted, references throughout Pro- ject Manual to Codes, Federal Specifications, ASTM Standards, Association or Industry Specifications and other published standards, are to latest edition or publication of such standards. 1.15 PERMITS A. Utilizing the con Drawings) prepare tants, along with his Consultants, securing permits project. This re permit and coordi: TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II ract documents (Project Manual and by the Architect and his Consul - information provided by the Owner or he Contractor is responsible for equired to successfully complete the ponsibility includes payment for the ation of all submittals. 01010-5 95014 ' I II II 1.16 FIELD ENGINEERING A. The Contractor will employ and pay a competent, independent, Registered Professional Land Surveyor with demonstrated ability to perform the layout work required. B. The Contractor will be responsible for the Surveyor's work of establishing points, lines, elevations and verifying the same, as necessary to complete the work in this project. C. For use in establishing starting points for layout, existing benchmarks and property corners are shown on the Drawings. D. If site conditions vary from those indicated, the Contractor shall notify the Architect immediately. 1.17 WAGE RATES A. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall conform to the Arkansas State Prevailing Wage Law if public funds are involved and where applicable to the project. The prevailing wage determination where applicable to this project and as established for the project by the Arkansas Commissioner of Labor is bound herein follow- ing this section. Not less than the wage rates listed therein shall be paid for work performed on this pro- ject. B. The contractor and each subcontractor, and the officer of the public body in charge of the project (the Owner's representative), shall keep an accurate record showing names, occupations, and hours worked of all workers employed by them, in connection with the public works, and showing the actual wages paid to each of the workers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01010 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01010-6 95014 101 V � David Rogers Wittenberg., Delony & Day 320 West Capitol Ave., S Little Rock, AR 72201 Dear Mr. Rogers: OF ARKANSAS ANSAS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR WEST MARKHAM • LITRE ROCK, ARKANSAS 72205-2190 82.4500 • FAX: (501) 682-4532 • TDD: (800) 285-1131 n, Inc. 840 August 30, 1995 James L salk&d Dketlm' RE: Municipal Airport Terminal' Expansion Phase II Fayetteville, Arkansas Washington County In response to your request, enclosed is Arkansas Prevailing Wage Determination Number 95-059 establishing the minimum wage rates to be paid on the abve-referenced project. These rates .were established pursuant to the Arkansas Prevailing Wage Law, Ark. Code Ann. §§ 22-9-301 to 22-9-313(1987) and the administrative regulations promulgated thereunder. If the work is subje every specification shall for each craft or type of ._Department of Labor Ark. public body awarding the the contract a stipulatio. prevailing hourly rate of performing work under the to the Arkansas Prevailing Wage Law, nclude minimum prevailing wage rates orker as determined by the Arkansas de Ann.§§22-9-308(b)(2). Also, the ntract shall cause to be inserted in to the effect that not less than the ages shall be paid to all workers ontract. Ark. Code Ann. §22-9-308(c). Additionally, the scale of' wages shall be posted by the contractor in a prominent and easily accessible place at the work site. Ark. Code Ann. §22 -9I -309(a). Also enclosed is a "Sitatement of Intent to Pay Prevailing If you have any ques (501) 682-4533 or through please feel free to contact me at at (501) 682-4508. Sincerely, Ann Sanders Prevailing Wage Supervisor enclosure II II II ii II II II II ii I I ii Page 1 of 2 ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATION - BUILDING RATE DATE: August 30, 1995 DETERMINATION #: 95-059 PROJECT: Municipal Airport Terminal COUNTY: Washington • Expansion Phase II EXPIRATION DATE: 3-1-96 • Fayetteville, Arkansas SURVEY #: 695-AR05 CLASSIFICATION BASIC HOURLY RATE FRINGE BENEFITS Asbestos Worker/Insulator 10.20 Bricklayer/ Pointer, Cleaner, Caulker 15.15 Carpenter 11.00 Concrete Finisher/Cement Mason 9.55 Electrician/Alarm Installer 10.85 Glazier 11.50 .85 HVACR Mechanic 9.80 1.60 Ironworker 11.35 Laborer 7.65 Painter/Sheet Rock Finisher 9.95 Plasterer 12.50 Plumber/Pipefitter 13.00 2.15 Roofer 10.70 Sheet Metal Worker 10.15 Sprinkler Fitter 17.25 6.23 Truck Driver 9.70 Power Equipment Operators: Group II 11.45 Group III 11.10 Group IV 10.15 .50 2.50 Welders --receive rate perscribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Certified July 7, 1995• Classifications that are not listed, but that are going to be working on this project, should be requested from the Arkansas Department of Labor, Prevailing Wage Division. These written requests should be made as soon as you notice that a required classification is missing, normally this would be during the bid process. Page.2 of 2 ARKANSAS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATION - BUILDING RATE DATE: August 30, 1995 DETERMINATION fi: 95-059 PROJECT: Municipal Airport Terminal COUNTY: Washington Expansion Phase II EXPIRATION DATE: 3-1-96 Fayetteville, Arkansas SURVEY q: 695-AR05 Operators engaged in oper performing work relative Hydraulic cranes, cherry lifting capacity less tha manufacturer, backhoes, t traveling cranes, or trac gradealls above equipment (engineer), hydraulic or Group III Heavy Equipment Operators following equipment: bul .skytracks, push tractors trenching machines, regar backfillers, central mixi machines, boiler fireman hydro truck crane, multip power, rotary, cable too and foundation drilling m of motive power and dredg Group IV Light Equipment Operators following equipment: Oil hoists, winches and air t winch or A frame trucks, tractors, regardless of s outside when used for car handling building materia and mortar or concrete mi pumperete, spray machine compressors, regardless o machines, light plants, p portable pumps space heat power, equipment greaser, machine helper, asphalt d boat operator and deckhan ing the following equipment or the engineer's jurisdiction: ckers, backhoes, and derricks with a 50 tons, as specified by the ctor or truck type, overhead & rs with swinging boom attachments, rrespective of motive power, leverman cket dredges, irrespective of size. Operators engaged in operating the ozers, front end loaders, sidebooms, pull scrapers, motor graders,. ess of size or motive power, plants, 10S and larger, finishing gh or low pressure, asphalt. spreaders, drum hoist, irrespective of motive "-core drill or churn drill, water well hines, regardless of size, regardless tender operator. Operators engaged in operating the driver motor crane, single drum gers, irrespective of motive power, rklifts, rollers of types and pull e, elevator operators inside and ing workmen from floor to floor and Lad-A-Vator, conveyor, batch plant, rs, below 105, end dump euclid, d pressure grout machine, air size. All light equipment, welding ps, well point system dewatering and s, irrespective of size, and motive iler, mechanic helper, drilling tributor and like equipment, safety I H IJ I I [1 G •--1 Em W 01 m H C ro 3 a 0 O d C P I -0 Ti O1 U 6 ri '-IC ,-. M 0 O m > u aura •'1 L � () .a G T m 7 m N � w 3 U 04 >1 a0 Co O 4J I .44 a u 3 ao �i 0�1 ++ 00. C'1O\ >yc0 14�+C0 a e y E ro W•u74•H3 U �, y N H U N U roc•ti� ac CU 3 0 0 0 ro Q)0 --10Q N 1i+1 W O 4 a m C u y a a41Y'O UUbhro3� m c mJwW b' 1 o 14 o Q U b H ½-1 H G H ro 1 0 3 -1 3 C. 4i 41 'b Cu 9 W U ti a NOW y 3 b1G S.r-H a Oro may G y-4 0 by -i"W W c '-i U 0 •ti >� -U Q)' -Q =41 w tu ru a N U >ays�a as a 14m a 4 y+J 0•Q 3 a ti O U ^r G c y •G y imi > • si 4 0 0 a m �Y y ro•ti iai ,G y 4J a c 4043 r a 0 W aC O tn a •U O41b bl b1 a Cu m y y G E 3 3 •tiu CU c •C O r. b1 y a 44 4.1 G c N O 14 Sa 14 G 3 a a S. 11 Ur U 0 CU 4 U G C 3m UO O h U L -0 O L i 43 y y Q G '-C U m ro U U N EI O O U 0) a I :tJ .. Z E< ^m+ 10 :•: JI Et V.i TOWo; �.: 1 Nv .!-4 SECTION .01020 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIR A. Definitions and.E related to each a contract document in lieu of additi further requireme time. B. Cash allowances s project shall not agreement by Cont services stipulat Architect. For a tion under a subc mental specificat subcontract bids lanations: Requirements of work owance are shown and specified in The allowance has been established al requirements for that work, and s thereof will be issued at a later pulated in specifications for this e a made part of:any subcontract ct until materials, work and/or have been selected by Owner or owances for materials and installa- tract, Architect will issue supple- ns to Contractor to receipt of r work under the..allowance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable) OF ALLOWANCES Section Amount A. Testing 01010 $1,500.00 B. Landscaping 02900 $1,800.00 C. Carpet Type I 09680 $20.00 / S.Y. Installed D. Carpet Type II 09680 $35.00 / S.Y: (Alternate No.1) Material Only E. Signage 10400 $1,000.00 END OF SECTION 01020 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01020-1 95014 ' I II SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Type of Alternates: The alternates for this project are deductive type. The work schedule under the alter- nates shall be included in the Contractor's base pro- posal and indicated as set forth on the Bid Form. B. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by the Contractor and stated in the proposal to the Owner that will be deducted from the base proposal amount if the Owner decides to accept the corresponding change in either scope of work or in products, materials, equip- ment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. C. Coordination: Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as required to ensure that work affected by each alternate is complete and fully inte- grated into the project. D. Description: A description of the alternates are included at the end of this section. Specification sections referred to in the description contains re- quirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work described under the alternates. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devic- es, appurtenances and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESCRIPTION OF DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATES Deductive Alternate No.1: Change ceramic paver tile at Lobby to Carpet Type II as described in Seciton 09680. 4" rubber base noted on Finish Schedule is to remain. Allowance for Carpet Type II includes carpet, taxes and delivery only. Labor and materials for complete and proper installation are to be calculated by Contractor and included in this alternate. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01030-1 L•l.YIi[1 II SECTION 01100 - S PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTY A. Contractor shall in amount equal t for faithful perf payment of all in furnished or perf tract= Bond shal has qualified and State of Arkansas local agent who i local agents and Commissioner to r bond and filing w as his authority. not be sufficient Owner,_ and execut 1953 of the Arkan original and two power of attorney dated prior to da file (not record) Circuit Court of formed is located incident the fili should be certifi original, and the 1.02 EXAMINATION OF PROJECT REQUIREMENTS rnish "Performance and Payment Bond" 100% of contract price, as security mance of this contract and for btedness for labor and materials med in connection with this con - be written by surety company which s authorized to do business in the nd must be -executed by a resident entitled to full commission paid o is licensed by the Insurance resent surety company executing said h said bond, his power of attorney Mere countersigning of a bond will Bond shall be written in favor of pursuant to terms of Act 351 of s State Legislature, as amended. An pies of bond must be furnished, with ttached to each. Bond must not be of the contract. Contractor shall he original with the Clerk in the e County in which Work to be per - Contractor to pay all expenses of bond. Remaining two copies by the Clerk to evidence filing of two copies submitted to Architect. A. Before submittinglhis quotation, Contractor will be held to have examilned the premises and satisfied him- self as to existing conditions under which he will be obligated to operate, or that -will in any manner affect Work under this contract. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE' A. Parties quoting requirements and Law of the State of the 1965 Gene 1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION A. Either before or (but in any event Contractor or his TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II this Work must comply with all gulations of Contractor's License Arkansas, as set forth in Act 150 Assembly, as amended. oon after actual award of Contract prior to start of construction), representative shall attend Precon- 01100-1 11 II II C L u 11 I u I I C 95014 ' struction Conference with representatives of Owner and Architect. Conference will serve to acquaint partici- pants with general plan of contract administration and requirements under which construction operation is to proceed, and will inform Contractor, in detail, of obligations imposed on him and his subcontractors. 1.05 SPECIAL FORMS A. Monthly estimates for partial payments and change order breakdowns to be submitted on special forms, prepared at Contractor's expense conforming to A.I.A. Document G702. Tender original and five copies to Architect for approval and distribution. Immediately after execution of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, without delay, submit for approval a carefully considered Job Cost Breakdown in the form shown on sample form fur- nished by Architect. 1.06 PROJECT SIGN A. General Contractor shall furnish and erect one tempo- rary construction sign at job site and remove sign at end of construction period. Sign of 3/4" thick, exterior grade plywood, 4'-0" x 8'-0" in size is re- quired. Paint and letter as directed by Architect to identify project, Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1.07 OTHER SIGNS A. Subject to prior approval of Owner as to size, design, type, location and to local regulations, Contractor and his subcontractors may erect temporary signs for pur- poses of identification and controlling traffic. 1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK A. General Contractor to give special attention for coor- dination of work by various trades to provide uniform and symmetrical layout and spacing of exposed compo- nents which affect the finished architectural design and appearance. Where spacing and related locations are not specifically shown on the drawings, or where in doubt, Contractor's Superintendent shall consult Architect's Representative prior to installation of that part of the Work. Location of electrical and telephone outlets shall be verified with Architect prior to installation. ' TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01100-2 95014 1.09 REQUEST FOR A. It shall be the r timely requests o other additional session, which he tion of the Work. the need is appro in ample time to by all parties in 1.10 JOB OFFICES AND A. Contractor anti hi and storage facil the proper conduc no interference t by Owner or to Ow tect regarding to INFORMATION ponsibility of Contractor to make Architect for color schemes and .formation, not already in his pos- rill require in planning and produc- Such requests may be submitted as hed, but each request shall be filed rmit appropriate action to be taken ilved so as to avoid delay. subcontractors shall maintain office ies on site as may be necessary in of the work... Locate so as to cause any work to be performed on the site is operations. Consult with Archi- tions. B. Upon completion of, project, or as directed by Archi- tect, Contractor shall remove temporary structures and facilities from the site, same to become his property. Leave the premises in condition required by Contract. 1.11 SECURITY MEASURES A. Contractor is ri the site and bu: Administration management. It to contact all project and to agencies during. ?sponsible for coordinating access to Llding with the Federal Aeronautics (F.IA.A.), the Owner and the airport is the responsibility of the Contractor igencies having jurisdiction over this er'form all measures required by these a]J1 phases of the work. 1.12 SANITARY ARRANGEMENTS A. Contractor, at es suitable tem of workmen on j Maintain in san of Work or when 1.13 TEMPORARY UTILITIES beginning of Work, to provide on premis- porary convenience and enclosure for use ob.l DO NOT USE EXISTING FACILITIES. itary condition and remove at completion directed by Architect. CONSTRUCTION A. Provide all gas arid electric service forheating, cooling, lighting and power required for construction purposes. B. Provide all water required for construction purposes. Run temporary lines and provide necessary stand pipes. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01100-3 95014 C. Contractor to pay all utility charges until time of substantial completion. 1.14 TEMPORARY HEATING A. Provide temporary heating, coverings and enclosures necessary to protect operations and materials against damage by dampness and cold, to dry out work, and facilitate completion of Work. B. Provide adequate equipment, fuel, materials and methods for purpose intended, and to the satisfaction of Archi- tect. C. Maintain critical installation temperatures required in separate Sections of the Specifications. Repair or replace at no additional cost to Owner, any materials and work damaged by dampness, insufficient or abnormal heat. 1.15 WINDOW WASHING A. Contractor shall employ services of a professional window washer at completion of all work to wash glass which has been installed under this contract, removing all stains. 1.16 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall adhere to all applicable codes re- quired by state, local, or other officials who have jurisdiction of this project. 1.17 DEFINITION A. The word "Provide", as used throughout these specifica- tions, means furnish and install. 1.18 FINISH COLORS & MATERIAL SAMPLES A. All interior and exterior materials and finishes required for this project shall match existing materi- als and finishes as closely as possible. Contractor shall provide job samples indicating the finish color selections for any and all items requiring a finish color for the project. Place all samples on the project for review by Cwner and Architect. Written approval from Owner is required before the work for anything requiring color review is begun. ' TERMINAL, EXP. PHASE II 01100-4 95014 B. Contractor to provide in Base Bid the cost for all custom work and finishes necessary for New Construction to match existing construction. In all instances, whether indicated Ito match existing or not, Contractor is responsible fo]F identifying and matching existing materials and finishes. If failure of Contractor to include cost of custom work or finishes in Base Bid results in delay of the project or additional cost, no• time extension will be given and Contractor will bear all additional cots. 1.19 EXCAVATION SAFETY PROCEDURES A. In accordance wita Act 291 of 1993 of the Arkansas State:Legislature) the Contractor shall include a separate pay item�for trench or excavation safety systems for any tench or excavation which equals or exceeds five (5) feet in depth and this pay item shall be a part of -the vase bid. A current edition of Occupa- tional Safety and�Health Administration Standard for Excavation and Tr nches Safety System, 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P has been incorporated into this Project Manual following dhis Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used), PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not END OF SECTION 01100 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1 01100-5 95014 Subpart P —Excavation. Sec. 192&850 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. 192&651 General requirements. 192&652 Requirements for protective systems. Appendix A to Subpart P —Soil Classification Appendix B to Subpart P —Sloping and Benching Appendix C to Subpart P —Timber Shoring for Trenches Appendix D to Subpart P —Aluminum Hydraulic Sharing fat Tkencbas Appendix E to Subpart P —Alternatives to 79mber Shoring Appendix F to Subpart P—Selectku of Protective Systems Subpart P —Excavations Authority: Sec. 107, Contract Worker Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333b Seca. 4, & 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 833, 655, 657): Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (38 FR 8754), 6-76(41 FR 25059). or 9-83 (48 FR 35736). as applicable. and 29 CFR part 1911. ¢ 1926.850 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart. (a) Scope and application. This subpart applies to all open excavations made in the earth's surface. Excavations are defined to include trenches. (b) Definitions applicable to this subpart. Accepted engineering practices means those requirements which are compatible with standards of practice required by a registered professional engineer. Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring means a pre-engineered shoring system comprised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders (crosabraces) used in conjunction with vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal rails (walers). Such system is designed. specifically to support the sidewalls of an excavation and prevent cave-ins. Bell-bottom pier hole means a type of shaft or footing excavation, the bottom of which is made larger than the cross section above to form a belied shape. Benching (Benching system) means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating the sides of an excavation to form one or a series of horizontal levels or steps, usually with . vertical or near -vertical surfaces _ between levels. Cave-in means the separation of a mass of soil or rock material from the side of an excavation, or the loss of soil from under a trench shield or support system, and its sudden movement into the excavation, either by felling or sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it could entrap. bury, or otherwise injure and immobilize a person. Competent person means one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. Cross braces mean the horizontal members of a shoring system installed perpendicular to the sides of the excavation, the ends of which bear against either uprights or wales. Excavation means any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by. earth removal. Faces or sides means the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of excavation work Failure means the breakage, displacement or permanent deformation of a structural member or connection so as to reduce its structural integrity and Its supportive capabilities. Hazardous atmosphere means an atmosphere which by reason of being explosive, flammable. poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen deficient toxic. or otherwise harmful. may cause death. Illness, or injury. IGckout means the accidental release or failure of a cross brace. Protective system means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins. from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of adjacent structures. Protective systems include support systems, sloping and benching systems, shield systems, and other systems that provide the necessary protection. Ramp means an inclined walking or working surface that is used to gain access to one point from another, and is constructed from earth or from structural materials such as steel or wood. Registered Professional Engineer means a person who is registered as a professional engineer in the state where the work is to be performed. However, a professional engineer, registered in any state is deemed to be a "registered professional engineer" within the meaning of this standard when approving designs for'rnanufactured protective systems" or "tabulated data" to be used in interstate commerce. Sheeting means the members of a sharing system that retain the earth in position and in turn are supported by other members of the shoring system. Shield (Shield system) means a structure that Is able to withstand the forces Imposed on it by a cave-in and thereby protect employees within the structure. Shields can be permanent structures or can be designed to `,- portable and moved along as w:. progresses. Additionally, shields either premanufactured or job-bc accordance with ¢ 1929.852 (c)(3) .. (c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usually referred to as "trench boxes" or "trench shields." Shoring (Shoring system) means a structure such as a metal hydraulic. mechanical or timber shoring system that supports the sides of an excavation and which is designed to prevent cave- ins. Sides. See "Faces." Sloping (Sloping system) means a method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating to form sides of an excavation that are inn(ined away from the excavation so as to prevent cave-ins. The angle of incline required to prevent a cave -(n varies with differences in such factors as the soil type, environmental conditions of exposure, and application of surcharge loads. Stable rock means natural solid mineral material that can be excavated with vertical sides and will remain intact while exposed. Unstable rock is considered to be stable when the rock material on the side or sides of the excavation is secured against caving -in or movement by rock bolts or by another protective system that has been designed by a registered professional engineer. Structural ramp means a ramp built of steel or wood. usually used for vehicle access. Ramps made of soil or rock are not considered structural ramps. Support system means a structure such as underpinning, bracing or shoring, which provides support to an adjacent structure, underground installation, or the sides of an acceptable means to locate utility when such equipment is required to excavation. - installations are used approach the edge of an excavation, and Tabulated data means tables and (3) When excavation operations the operator does not have a clear and charts approved by a registered approach the estimated location of direct view of the edge of the professional engineer and used to design underground in.Atallations, the exact excavation, a warning system shall be and construct a protective system. location of the installations shall be utilized such as barricades, hand or Trench (Trench excavation) means a determined by safe and acceptable mechanical signals, or stop logs. If narrow excavation (in relation to its means. possible. the grade should be away from length) made below the surface of the (4) While the iexcavation is open, the excavation. ground. In general, the depth is greater underground inatallations shall be (g) Hazardous atmospheres —(1) than the width, but the width of a trench protected auppbrtad or removed as Testing and controls. In addition to the (measured at the bottom) is not greater necessary to safeguard employees: requirements set forth in subparts D and than 15 feet (4.6 m). If forms or other - (c) Access and egress (1) Structural E of this part (29 (.FR 1920.50-1928.107) structures are installed or constructed in ramps. (I) Structural ramps that are used to prevent exposure to harmful levels of an excavation so as to reduce the solely by employees as a means of atmospheric contaminants and to assure dimension measured from the forms or access or egress from excavations shall acceptable atmospheric conditions, the structure to the side of the excavation to be designed by la competent person. following requirements shall apply: 15 feet (4.6 m) or less (measured at the Structural ramps used for access or (i) Where oxygen deficiency bottom of the excavation), the egress of equipment shall be designed (atmospheres containing less than 19.5 excavation is also considered to be a by a competent person qualified in percent oxygen) or a hazardous trench, structural design, and shall be atmosphere exists or could reasonably Trench box See "Shield." constructed in accordance with the be expected to exist, such as in Trench shield. See "Shield" design. excavations in landfill areas or Uprights means the vertical members (ii) Ramps and runways constructed excavations in areas where hazardous of a trench shoring system placed In of two or more btructural members shall substances are stored nearby, the contact with the earth and usually have the structural members connected atmospheres in the excavation shall be positioned so that individual members together to prevent displacement. tested before employees enter do not contact each other. Uprights (iii) Structural members used for excavations greater than 4 feet (1.22 m) placed so that individual members are ramps and runways shall be of uniform in depth • closely spaced in contact with or thickness. (ii) Adequate precautions shall be interconnected to each other, are often (iv) Cleats o i other appropriate means taken to prevent employee exposure to called "sheeting-" used to connect runway structural atmospheres containing less than 19.5 Wales means horizontal members of a members shall a attached to the bottom percent oxygen and other hazardous shoring system placed parallel to the of the runway r shall be attached in a atmospheres. These precautions include excavation face whose sides bear manner to prevent tripping. providing respiratory protection against the vertical members of the (v) Structural ramps used in lieu of pr dig proper o inrespiratory accordance with shoring system or earth. steps shall be provided with cleats or subparts ti and E of this part other surface ts~eatments on the top § 1926.65.1 General requirements, surface to prevent slip ing. respectively. (a) Surface encumbrances. All surface (2) Means of egress from trench (ui) Adequate precaution shall be encumbrances that are located so as to excavations. I stairway, !adder, ramp taken such as providing ventilation, to create a hazard to employees shall be or other safe means of egress shall be prevent employee exposure to an removed or supported as necessary, to located in trench excavations that are 4 . atmosphere containing a concentration safeguard employees. feet (1.22 m) or, more in depth so as to of a flammable gas in excess of 20 (b) Underground installations. (1) The require no more than 25 feet (7.62'm) of percent of the lower flammable limit of estimated location of utility lateral travel far employees. the gas. installations, such as sewer, telephone, (d) Exposure to vehicular traffic (iv) When controls are used that are fuel, electric, water lines, or any other Employees exiiosed to public vehicular intended to reduce the level of underground installations that traffic shall be provided with, and shall atmospheric contaminants to acceptable reasonably maybe expected to be wear, warning vests or other suitable levels, testing shall be conducted as encountered during excavation work, garments marked with or made of often as necessary to ensure that the shall be determined prior to opening an reflectorized of high -visibility material, atmosphere remains safe. excavation. (e) Exposure to falling loads. No (2) Emergency rescue equipment. (i) (2) Utility companies or owners shall employee she be permitted underneath Emergency rescue equipment, such as be contacted within established or loads handled by lifting or digging breathing apparatus., a safety harness customary local response times, advisedequipment. Employees shall be required and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be of the proposed work, and asked to to stand away from any vehicle being readily available where hazardous establish the location of the utility loaded or unloaded to avoid being atmospheric conditions exist or may underground Installations prior to the struck by any spillage or falling reasonably be expected to develop start of actual excavation. When utility materials. Opdrators may remain in the during work in an excavation. This companies or owners cannot respond to cabs of vehicles being loaded or equipment shall be attended when in a request to locate underground utility unloaded wheit the vehicles are use. installations within 24 hours (unless a equipped, in abcordance with (ii) Employees entering bell-bottom longer period is required by state or § 1926.601(b)(8), to provide adequate pier holes, or other similar deep and local law), or cannot establish the exact protection for he operator during confined footing excavations, shall wear location of these installations, the loading and uAloading operations, a harness with a lifeline securely employer may proceed provided the (f) Worninslsystem for mobile attached to it. The lifeline shall be employer does so with caution, and equipment. When mobile equipment is separate from any line used to handle provided detection equipment or other operated adjacent to an excavation, or materials, and shall be individually I - attended at all times while the employee wearing the lifeline is in the excavation. (h) Protection from hazards associated with water accumulation. (1) Employees shall not work In excavations in which there is accumulated water, or in excavations in which water is accumulating, unless adequate precautions have been taken to protect employees against the hazards posed by water accumulation The precautioae necessary to protect • employees adequately vary with each situation, but could include special support or shield systems to protect from cave-ins, water removal to control the level of accumulating water, or use of a safety harness and lifeline. (2) If water is controlled or prevented from accumulating by the use of water removal equipment, the water removal equipment and operations shall be monitored by a competent person to ensure proper operation. - (3) If, excavation work interrupts the natural drainage of surface water (such as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means shall be need to prevent surface water from entering the excavation and to provide adequate drainage of the area adjacent to the excavation. Excavations subject to runoff from heavy. rains will require an inspection by a competent person and compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and (h)(2) of this section. (1) Stability of adjacent structures. (1) Where the stability of adjoining buildings. walls, or other structures is endangered by excavation operations, support systems each as shoring, bracing, or underpinning shall be provided to ensure the stability of such structures for the protection of employees. - (2) Excavation below the level of the base or footing of any foundation or ' retaining wall that could be reasonably expected to pose a hazard to employees shall not be permitted except when: (i) A support system, such as underpinning, is provided to ensure the safety of employees and the stability of the structure: or (ii) The excavation is in stable rock. or (III) A registered professional engineer has approved the determination that the structure is sufficently removed from the excavation so as to be unaffected by the excavation activity: or (iv) A registered professional engineer has approved the determination that such excavation work will not pose a hazard to employees. (3) Sidewalks, pavements, and appurtenant structure shall not be undermined unless a support system or another method of protection is provided to protect employees from the possible collapse of such structures. (j) Protection of employees from loose rock or soil. (1) Adequate protection shall be provided to protect employees from loose rock or soil that could pose a hazard by falling or rolling from an excavation face. Such protection shall consist of scaling to remove loose material: installation of protective barricades at intervals as necessary on the face to stop and contain falling material or other means that provide equivalent protection. - (2) Employees shall be protected from excavated or other materials or equipment that could pose a hazard by falling or rolling Into excavations. Protection shall be provided by placing and keeping such materials or equipment at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of excavations, or by the use of retaining devices that are sufficient to prevent materials or equipment from falling or rolling Into excavations, or by a combination of both if necessary. (k) Inspections. (1) Daily inspections of excavations, the adjacent areas, and protective systems shall be made by a competent person for evidence of a situation that could result in possible cave-ins, Indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres: or other hazardous conditions. An inspection shall be conducted by the competent person prior to the start of work and as needed throughout the shift. Inspections shall also be made after every rainstorm or other hazard increasing occurrence. These inspections are only required when employee exposure can be reasonably anticipated. (2) Where the competent person finds evidence of a situation that could result in a possible cave -In, indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions, exposed employees shall be removed from the hazardous area until the necessary precautions have been taken to ensure their safety. (1] Fall protection. (1) Where employees or equipment are required or permitted to cross over excavations, walkways or bridges with standard guardrails shall be provided. - (2) Adequate barrier physical protection shall be provided at all remotely located excavations. All wells. pits, shafts, etc., shall be barricaded or covered. Upon completion of exploration and similar operations. temporary wells, pits, shafts, etc., shall be backfl lled. f 1929.952 Requirements for protective systems. (a) Protection of employees in excavations. (1) Each employee in an excavation shall be protected from cave- ins by an adequate protective system designed in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section except when: (I) Excavations are made entirely in stable rock: or (Ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet (1.52m) in depth and examination of the ground by a competent person provides no indication of a potential cave-in. (2) Protective systems shall have the capacity to resist without failure all loads that are intended or could reasonably be expected to be applied or transmitted to the system. (b) Design of sloping and benching systems. The slopes and configurs:.ons of sloping and benching systems shall be selected and constructed by the employer or his designee and shall be In accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(1): or. In the alternative, paragraph (b)(2): or. In the alternative. paragraph (b)(3). or. In the alternative. paragraph (b)(4), as follows: (1) Option (1) —Allowable configurations and slopes. (i) Excavations shall be sloped at an angle not steeper than one and one-half horizontal to one vertical (34 degrsss measured from the horizontal), unless the employer uses one of the other options listed below. (u) Slopes specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be excavated to form configuraticn ' are in accordance with the sic - for Type C soil in Appendix B subpart (2) Option (2)—Determmatic ., slopes and configurations using Appendices A and B. Maximum allowable slopes, and allowable configurations for'sloping and benching systems, shall be determined in accordance with the conditions and requirements set forth In appendices A and B to this subpart. (3) Option (3) —Designs using other tabulated data. (i) Designs of sloping or benching systems shall be selected from and be in accordance with tabulated data, such as tables and charts. (ii] The tabulated data shall be in written form and shall include all of t%o following: - (A) Identification of the paramett that affect the selection of a sloping c r benching system drawn from such data: (B) Identification of the limits of use of the data, to include the magnitude and configuration of slopes determined to be safe; (C) Explanatory information as may be necessary to aid the, user in making a correct selection of a protective system from the data : (iii) At least one copy of the tabulated data which. identifiesthe registered professional engineer who approved the data, shall be maintained at the jobsite during conatruction.nf the protective system. After thattime the data may be stored off the jobsite. but a copy of the data shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. (4) Option (4) —Design by a registered professional engineer. (i) Sloping and benching systems not utilizing Option (1) or Option (2) or Option (3) under paragraph (b). of this section shall be • approved by a registered professional engineer.. (if) Designs shall be in written form and shall include at least the following: (A) The magnitude of the slopes that were determined to be safe for the particular project: (B) T)ie configurations that were determined to be safe for the particular • project: and - (C) The identity of the registered professional engineer approving the design. (iii) At least one copy of the design • shall be maintained at the jobsite while the slope is being constructed_ After that time the design need not he at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made available to thefl Secretary upon request • (c) Design of support systems: shield systems, and otherpnotective systems. Designs of support systems shield systems, and other protective systems shall be selectedand.constrrctedby the employer or his designee and shall lie in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(lh or, in the alternative. paragraph (c)(2): or. In the eltemative, paragraph (a)(3): or. in the alternative. (ii) Deviation from the specifications, damage or detects mat augnr impair recommendations, and limitations their proper function. issued or made by the manufacturer (2) Manufactured materials and shall only be allowed after the equipment used for protective systems manufacturer iitsues specific written shall be used and maintained in a approval• manner that is consistent with the (iii) Manufe 's specifications, recommendations of the manufacturer, recommendations, and limitations, and and in a manner that will prevent manufacturers approval to deviate from employee exposure to hazards. the specifications, recommendations, and limitation shall be in written form (3) When material or equipment that at the jobsite during construction of the is used for protective systems is protective system. After that time this damaged, a competent person shall data maybe stored off the jobsite, but a examine the material or equipment ant copy shall be made available to the evaluate its suitability for continued use. Secretary upon request. If the competent person cannot assure (3) Option (.$—Designs using other the material or equipment is able to tabulated datd. (I) Designs of support support the intended loads or is systems, shield systems, or other otherwise suitable for safe use, then protective systems shall be selected such material or equipment shall be from and be in' accordance with removed from service, and shall be tabulated data, such as tables and evaluated and approved by a registered charts. I professional engineer before being (ii) The tabulated data shall be in returned to service. written form and include all of the (e) Installation and removal of following: support —(1) General. (i) Members of (A) Identification of the parameters support systems shall be securely that affect the selection of a protective connected together to prevent sliding. system drawn from such data; falling, kfckouts, or other predictable (B) Identification of.the limits of use of failure. the data: I (C)Explanatoryinformation as may (ii) Support systems shall be installed be necessary to aid the user in making a and removed in a manner that protects correct selection of a protective system employees from cave-ins, structural from the data.l collapses, or from being struck by (iii) At least one copy of the tabulated members of the support system. data, which identifies the registered (iii) Individual members of support professional engineer who approved the systems shall not be subjected to loads data, shall be eraintained at the jobsite exceeding those which those members during constriction of the protective were designed to withstand. system.'After that time the data may be (iv)Before temporary removal of stored off the jobsite, but a copy of the individual member begins, additional data shall be trade available to the precautions shall be taken to ensure the Secretary upaii request safety of employees, such as installing (4) Option (4) —Design by a registered other structural members to carry the professional engineer. (i) Support loads imposed on the support system. systems, shield systems, and other (v) Removal shall be ' at and naravranh fdf4l as fnllnwa: t ti E t til'' Opti (1) Option (1) --Designs using appendices A. C and D. Designs for timber shoring In trenches shall be determined in accordance with the conditions and requirements set forth in appendices A and C to this subpart. Designs for aluminum hydraulic shoring. shall be in accordance with'paragraph (c)(2) of this section, but if manufacturer's tabulated data cannot be utilized designs shall be in accordance with appendix D. (2) Option (2) —Designs Using Manufacturer's Tabulated Data. (i) Design of support systems, shield . systems, or other protective systems that are drawn from manufacturer's tabulated data shall be in accordance with all specifications. recommendations, and limitations issued or made by the manufacturer. pro ec ve sys ems no u rzuig an 1, Option 2 orOption 3, above, shall be approved by a registered professional engineer. (ii) Designs hall be in written form and shall inch de the following: (A) A plan indicating the sizes. types, and configurations of the materials to be used in the protective system: and (B) The identity of the registered professional engineer approving the design. (iii) At leas one copy of the design shall be maintained at the jobsite during construction of the protective system. After that time, the design may be stored off thejobsite, but a copy of the design shall be made available to the Secretary upon request. (d) Materials and equipment. (1) Materials and equipment used for protective systems shall be free from progress from. the bottom of me excavation. Members shall be released slowly so as to note any indication of possible failure of the remaining members of the structure or possible cave-in of the sides of the excavation. (vi) Backfilling shall progress together with the removal of suppert systems from excavations. (2) Additional requirements for support systems for trench excavations. (i) Excavation of material to a level no greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of the members'of a support system shall be permitted. but only if the system Is designed to"resist the forces calculated for the full depth of the french. 'and there are no indications while the trench is open of a possible loss of soil from behind or below the bottom of the support system. _' El II I r Li I I I I I I I L C U (H) Installation of a support system shall be closely coordinated with the excavation of trenches. (f) Sloping and benching systems. Employees shall not be permitted to work on the faces of sloped or benched excavations at levels above other employees except when employees at the lower levels are adequately protected from the hazard of falling. rolling, or sliding material or equipment (g) Shield systems —(1) Cenral. (i) Shield systems shall not be subjected to loads exceeding those which the system was designed to withstand. (H) Shields shall be installed in a manner to restrict lateral or other hazardous movement of the shield in the event of the application of sudden lateral loads. (ill) Employees shall be protected from the hazard of cave-ins when entering or exiting the areas protected by shields. (iv) Employees shall not be allowed in shields when shields are being installed, removed, or moved vertically. (2) Additional requirement for shield systems used in trench excavations. Excavations of earth material to a level not greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of a shield shall be permitted, but only if the shield is designed to resist the forces calculated for the full depth of the trench, and there are no indications while the trench is open of a possible loss of soil from behind or below the bottom of the shield. Appendix A to Subpart P Soil Cfassificaton (a) Scope and apph'cotion—(1) Scope This appendix describes a method of classifying soiland rock deposits based on site and environmental conditions and on the structure and composition of the earth deposits The appendix contains definitions, sets forth requirements and describes acceptable visual and manual tests for use In classifying soils. (2) Application. This appendix applies when a sloping or benching system is designed in accordance with the requirements set forth in 1192&&52(b)(2) as a method of protection for employees from cave -bit This appendix also applies when timber shoring for excavations is designed as a method of protection from cave-ins in accordance with appendix C to subpart P of part 1928, and when aluminum hydraulic shoring G designed In accordance with appendix D. This Appendix also applies if other protective systems are designed and selected for use from data prepared in accordance with the requirements met forth In } 1928.652(c), and the use of the data is predicated on the use of the soil classification system set forth in this appendix. (b) Definitions. The definitions and examples given below are based on. in whole or in part the following: American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards Da53-85 and D2488; The Unified Soils Classification System, The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) Textural Classification Scheme; and The National Bureau of Standards Report BSS -121. Cemerted soil means a soil in which the - particles are held together by a chemical agent, such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand -size sample cannot be crushed into powder or individual soil particles by finger pressure. Cohesive soil means clay (fine grained soil?, Cr soil with a high day content, which has cohesive strength. Cohesive mail does not crumble, can be excavated with vertical sideslopes, and Is plastic when moist. Cohesive soil Is hard to break up when dry, and exhibits significant cohesion when submerged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt sandy day, silty clay, clay and organic clay. Dry soil means soil that does not exhibit visible signs of moisture content. Fissured means a soil material that has a tendency to break along definite planes of fracture with little resistance. or a material that exhibits open cracks, such as tension cracks. in an exposed surface. Granular soil means gravel. sand, or silt. (conne grained soil) with little or no clay content Granular soil has no cohesive strength Some moist granular soils exhibit apparent cohesion. Granular sod cannot be molded when moist and crumbles easily when dry. Layered system means two or more distinctly different soil or rock types arranged in layers. Micaceous seems or weakened planes in rock or shale are considered layered. Moist soil means a condition In which a soil looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into small diameter threads before crumbling. Moist granular soil that contains some cohesive material will exhibit signs of cohesion between particles. Plastic means a property of a soil which allows the soil to be deformed or molded without cracking. or appreciable volume change. Saturated soil means a soil in which the voids are filled with water. Saturation does not require flow. Saturation, or near saturation. is necessary for the proper use of instruments such as a pocket penetrometer or sheer vane. Soil classification system means, for the purpose of this subpart. a method of categorizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy of Stable Rock. Type A. Type B. and Type C. In decreasing order of stability. The categories are determined based on an analysis of the properties and performance characteristics of the deposits and the environmental conditions of exposure. Stable rack means natural solid mineral matter that can be excavated with vertical sides and remain intact while exposed. - Submerged soil means soil which is underwater or is free seeping. Type A means cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength of tS ton per square foot (tef) (144 kPa) or greater. Examples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty . clay, sandy clay, clay loam and in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Cemented soils such as caliche and hardpan are also considered Type A. However, no soil Is Type A It (1) The soil Is fissured; or (ii) The sod is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects; or (iii) The sod has been previously disturbed; Cr (iv) The soil Is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation an a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4Ii1V) or greater, or - (v) The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be dassitiedas a less stable material. Type B means: (I) Cohesive sod with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0.5 tai (48 kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or (if) Granular cohesionless soils including angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), silt. silt loam. sandy loam and, In some cases. silty day loam and sandy clay loam. , (iii) Previously disturbed soils except thole which would otherwise be classed as - t soil (iv) Soil that meets the unconfnee compressive strength or cementation requirements for Type A but is fissure. subject to vibration or (v) Dry rock that is not stable; or (vi) Material that is part of a sloped layered system where the layers dip into :L excavation an a slope less steep than four horizontal to one vertical (4Ii.-1V), but only the material would otherwise be classified as Type B. Type C means: (I) Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tai (48 kPaJ or less: or (u) Granular soils including gravel. sand. and loamy sand: or (iil) Submerged soil or soil from which water is freely seeping; or (iv) Submerged rock that is not stable. or (v) Material in a sloped, layered system where the layers dip Into the excavation or a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H;1V) or steeper. Unconfined compressive samigth means the load per nit area at which a soil will fail in compression. It can be determined by laboratory testing. or estimated in the field nsing a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetration tests and other methods. Wet soil means soil that contains significantly more moisture than moist and. but In such a range of values that cohesive material will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. Granular material that would exhibit cohesive properties when moist will lose those cohesive properties when wet (c) Requirements --(l) Classification of soil and rock deposits. Each soft and rock deposit shall be classified by a competent person as Stable Rock. Type A. Type B. or Type C in accordance with the definitions set forth In paragraph (b) of this appendix (2) Basis of classification. The classification of the deposits shall be made based on the results of at least one visual and at least one manual analysis Such analyses 0 shall be conducted by a competent person (2) Manual resits. Manual analysis of soil granular material. To distinguish between the •= using teats described In paragraph (d) below, samples is conducted to determine two, pulverize the dried clumps of the sample or in other recognized methods of soil quantitative m 'ell as qualitative properties by hand or by stepping on them. U the chimps w classification and testing such as those of soil and to provide more information in do not pulverize easily, the material is adopted by the America Society for Testing order to classifylsoil properly, cohesive with fissures. If they pulverize Materials, or the U.S Department of - (f) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet sample easily into very small fragments, the material Agriculture textural classification system. of soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into is granular. (3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual threads as thin as %-inch in diameter. Appendix B to Subpart P and manual analyses, such as those noted as - Cohesive materiel can be successfully rolled PP P being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this into threads without crumbling. For example. Sloping and Benching appendix, shall be designed and conducted to if at least a two inch (50 mm) length of V.- provideThis sufficient quantitative and tear thread can is oheheld iv one end without contains specifications for sloping and to Identify wprsatlan an pert bees necessary tearing, the yr strength is cohesive benching, when used as methods of protecting aidcondi ions a le tin the ls, fcation. (it) les itsb U the sail Is dry and and conditions effecting the classification of mumbles on ire awn or with moderate employees working in excavations from cave - the deposits. pressure into individual grain or fine ins. The requirements of this appendix apply (4)foyered systems. In a layeredsystem, powder, it Is granular (any combination of when the design of sloping and benching the system shall be classified in accordance gravel, sand, or hilt). If the soil Is dry and falls protective, systems is to be performed In. with its weakest layer. However. eachlayer into clumps which break up into smaller ' accordance with the requirements met forth in may be classified individually where a more clumps, -but the smaller clumps can only be 4 1928.652(b)(2). stable layer lies ender sins stable layer. broken up with Iiffictilty, it may be clay in . (b) d alit Definitions means the slope Reclassification If, after classifying a any combination with gravel, sand or silt U Acteto which an deposit. the properties, factors, or conditions the dry soil breaks into clumps which do not excavation face is excavated. ds:eiaselficatloa in any Way, Distress means that the soil is in a theme s shall be evaluated a . break up into nmell clu ce and and h ran condition where a cave-in is imminent or is by only isbel i broken {vth soil Ifis there is no competent person. The -deposit shall be visual iadicetiab the is fissured, the wil likely to occur. Distress is evidenced by such reclassified as necessary to reflect the may be. considered unfissured. phenomena as the development of fissures in changed circumstances (iii) Thumb pdnetration The thumb the face of or adjacent to an open excavation (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests.— the subsidence of the edge of an excavation (1) Visual teats. Visual analysis Is conducted penetration test can be used to estimate the the slumping of material from the face or the to d nequalitative analysis information unconfined compressive strength of cohesive bulging or heaving of material from the _ regarding tha excavation site in general. the soils. (This testa based on the thumb bottom of an excavation the spelling of soil adjacent to the excavation, the soil penetration taxi described in American material from the lace of an excavation and Society for testing and.Materials (ASTM) the soil the n sides ampe open excavated excavation, and ravelling, s or small amounts of material such Standard nded l ractt a for Description Standrd the soil taken as samples from as pebbles p little dumps the of maternal m (I) O l Recommended anus a for of suddenly separating from face of an (I) Observe samples of soil that are Soils (Visual —Manual Procedure). j Type A excavation and trickling or rolling down into excavated and soil in the sides of the soils with an unconfinedcompressive - the excavation. exavation. Estimate the range of particle strength of 14 tsf can be readily indented by Maximum allowable slope means the sizes and the relative amounts of the particle the thumb: however, they -can be penetrated steepest incline of an excavation face that is sizes. Soil that Is primarily composed of lino- by the thumb oAly with very great effort acceptable for the.mest favorable site grained material is cohesive material. Soil Type C soils with an unconfined compressive conditions as protection against cave-ins, and composed primarily of ensue -grained sand strength of OS thf can be easily penetrated is expressed as the ratio of horizontal or gravel is grander material - several inches liy the thumb, and can be distance to vertical rise (H:V). (ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil that molded by light' finger pressure. This test Short term exposure means a period of remains in clumps when excavated 4 should be conducted on an undisturbed soil time less than or equal to 24 hours that an cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does sample, such ads large clump of spoil, as excavation is open not stay cl®I.is rnuir, soon as practicable after excavation to keep (c) Requirements —(1) Soil classification. (Ili) Observe the side of the opened to a minimum the effects of exposure to Soil and rock deposits shall be classified in excavation and the surface area adjacent to drying influences. lithe excavation Is later accordance with appendix A to subpart P of the exnvatiaa: Qnck-llks opedzs such es exposed to wetting influences (rain flooding). part I=&. tension sucks could Indicate fissured the classificatid¢ of the soil must be changed . (2) Maximum allowable slope. The material If chunks of soil spell off a vertical accordingly. . maximum allowable slope for a soil or rock side, the soil could be fissured. Small spells (iv) Other strength tests. Fstfmatei of deposit shall be determined from Table B-1 are evidence of moving 5nj•••d and are unconfined compressive strength of soils can of this appendix. Indications of potentlall>'hazardaus also be obtained by use of a pocket (3) Actual slope. (I) The actual slope shad situations, penetrometer or by using a hand -operated -not be steeper than the maximum allowable (lv) Observe the area adjacent to the shearvane. G The slope. excavation arnilnd the exnvation itself for (v) Drying basic purpose of the. (ii) The actual elope shall be less steep evidence of existing utility and other drying test is to differentiate between than the maximum allowable slope, when underground strucares, and to identify cohesive material with fissures, unfissured there are signs of distress. U that situation previously disturbed soil cohesive material, and granular material The occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an (v) Observe the opened side of the procedure for the drying lest involves drying actual slope which is at least i5. horizontal to excavation to Identify layered systems, a sample of sod that is approximately one one vertical (34H:1V) ten steep than the Examine layered systems to identify if the inch thick (2341 cm) and six inches (15.74 cm) maximum allowable slope. - layers slope toward the excavation. Estimate - in diameter un(II it is thoroughly dry: (iii) When surcharge loads from stored .the degree of slope of the, layers. (A) If the sarhpie develops clacks as it material or equipment, operating equipment, (vl).Observe the area adjacent to the dries. significant fissures are indicated.' or traffic are present, a competent person excavation and the sides of the opened ' . (B) Samples that dry without cracking are shall determine the degree to which the excavation forevidence of surface water, to be broken bk band. If considerable force U actual slope must be reduced below the . water seeping from.the sides of the necessary to break a sample, the soil has maximum allowable slope. and shall assure exca"ticu..or the location of the level of the significant cohesive material content. The that such reduction is achieved Surcharge water table. soil canbe classified as a unfissured . loads from adjacent structures shall be (vii) Observe the area adjacent to the cohesive material and the unconfined evaluated in accordance with 119¢B.USI(i). . excavation and the area within the compressive strength should be determined. (4) Configurations Configurations of excavation for sources of vibration that may jC) If a samp'Ia breaks easily by hand it is sloping and benching systems shall be in affect the stability of the excavation face, either a fissurei cohesive material or a accordance with Figure B-1. TABLE B-1 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES SOIL OR ROCK TYPE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES(H:V)(1l FOR EXCAVATIONS LESS THAN 20 FEET STABLE ROCK VERTICAL(9O) TYPE A (2) 3/4:1 (53r) TYPE B 1:1 (45') TYPE C 1½:l (34) NOTES: 1. Numbers'shown in parentheses next to maximum allowable slopes are angles expressed in degrees from the horizontal. Angles have been rounded off. 2. A short-term maximum allowable slope of 1/2H:1V (63°) is allowed in excavations in Type A soil that are 12 feet (3.67 m) or less in depth. Short-term maximum allowable slopes for excavations greater than 12 feet (3.67 m) in depth shall be 3/4H:1V (53°). 3. Sloping or benching for excavations greater than 20 feet deep shall be designed by a registered professional engineer. Figure B-. Slope Configurations (All slopes stated below are in the aorizontai to vertical ratio) B-LI Excavations made in Type A soil 1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of %!L 20' Max. \\<\__•_____,///// 3/4 Simple Slope —General Exception Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or lees (short term) and which are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a 'maximum allowable slope of %a. 12' Max. I.: 1/2 Simple Slope —Short Term L'M benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall ha&ie a maximum allowable slope of i'. to t and maximum bench dimensions as follows! . •• . 20' Max. ♦ 20' Max. 5' Max. 4' Max & All excavations a feet or less in depth which have u a% feet. ,a 1 al 3/4 � 1 Bench i // 1 3/4 1 1 t Bench " vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum vertical side of t • 1 I 1 C iT 1 I 1T 8' Max. I ' Max. /Al 33/JL Unsupported Vertically Sided Lower Portion —Maximum 8 Feet in Depth All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall :nave a maximum allowable slope of 11 and a maximum vertical side of 3% feet Unsupported Vertically Sided Lower Portion. Maximum 12 Feet in Depth All excavations 20 feet or less In depth which have vertically sided lover portions that are supported or shielded shall have a madmum allowable slope of %1. The support or shield system most extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. 20' '..ax. $jspport or shield s7ster Nt 1 3/S " Min. Total height of vertical side Suported or Shielded Vertically Sided Lower Portion 4. All other simple slope, compound slope. and vertically aided lower portion excavations shall be in accordance with the ours- option permitted under 11928.652(b). B-12 Excavations Made in Type B Soil 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall bave'a maximum allowable slope of 1:1. I 1 • 20' Max. _ l Simple Slope 2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall than. a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as ' follows: This bench allowed in cohesive soil only. I •�• 20' Max A 1 i � This bench ,il 20' Max. 4' Sax 4 j ax. 3. All excavations 20 feet or less In depth which have aches above the top of the vertical side. All such excaval 4 Single Bench ' red in cohesive soil only - � L dultiple Bench :ally sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least IS rhaH have a maximum allowable slope of ti. 1 Support or shield system 20' Max. S Min. :: I - Total height of vertical side ' ' Vertically Sided lower Portion 4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 11928.852@). 1-13 Excavations Made. in Type C Soil 1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1'.'L _ 1 J ! 1 20' Max. 1 �l Simple Slope - 2. All excavations 20 feet or less In depth which have vertically aided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 11 Inches above the top of the vertical aide. All such excavations than have a maximum allowable slope of 1%d. Sup fort or shield system _ 1 20' Max. NN V t I 18" Min. ' total height of vertical side Vertical Sided Lower Portion -• 3. AL other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 11928.652(b). B-114 Excavations Made in Layered Soils 1. An excavations 20 feet or less in depth made Ind layered soils shall have a maximum allowable slope for each layer as set forth belo• . . : . B OVER A C OVER A C OVER d J a a. I AA1 1 8 �1 1 I A OVER B AZ `Qi 17 A OVER C I • • fl a l_ i C � 1 lea I B OVER C 2. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in 1192&652(b). Appendix C to Subpart P feet (6.1 m) in depth. This appendix must be systems must be designed in accordance with used when design of timber shoring the requirements set forth In 11926.852(b) Timber Shoring for Trenches protective systems is to be performed in and 4 1928.652(c). (a) Scope. This appendix contains accordance with. 1 1928.652(c)(1). Other (b) Soil Classification. In order to use the information that can be used timber shoring tlmbek shoring configurations,: other systems data presented in this appendix. the soil typ is information as a method mber from of aujiport such as hydraulic and pneumatic or types in which the excavation is made P protectionsystems; and other protective systems such must first be determined using the soil cave -Ins in trenches theldd not exceed 20 as sl ing, benching, shielding, and freezing classification method set forth in appendix A of subpart P of this part. (c) Presentation of Information. Informatioais presented in several forms as follows: (1) Information is presented in tabular form in Tables C-1.1. C-13, and Cr1.3, and Tables C-2.1. C-2.2 and C-2.3 following paragraph (g) of the appendix. Each table presents the minimum sizes of timber members to use in a shoring system, and each table contains data only for the particular sod type in which the excavation or portion of the excavation is made. The data are arranged to allow the -userthe flexibility to select from among - several acceptable configurations of members based on varying the horizontal spacing of the aosebreces. Stable rock is exempt from shoring requirements and therefore, no data are presented for this condition. (2n. Information concerning the basis of the tabular data and the limitations of the data Is presented in paragraph (d) of this appendix. and on the tables themselves. (3) Information explaining the use of the tabular data is presented In paragraph (e) of this appeudfx (4) Information Illustrating the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of this npp.—&x. (5) MIscellaneous notations regarding Tables C -t1 through CF1.3 and Tables C-LI through C-2.3 are presented in paragraph (g) of this Appendix. (d) Basis and limitations of the dmtr.—(1) Dimensions of timber members. (ii The sizes of the timber members listed In Tables C-1.1 through C -t3 are taken from the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) report. "Recommenried Technical Provisions for Construction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of Trenches and Excavations.' In addition. ornate Nag did not recommend specific sizes of members. member sizes are based on an analysis of the sires required for use by existing codes and an empirical practice. (ii) The required dimension3 of the members (fated in Tables C-li through C-1.3 refer to actual dimensions and not nominal dimension of the limber. Employee wanting louse nominal size shoring are directed to Tables Ce-,2.1 through C-tt or have this choice under 11928.&52(c)(3), and are referred to The Corps of Engineers. The Bureau of Reclamation or data from other acceptable sources. (2) Limitation of application. (I) It is not Intended that the timber shoring specification apply to every situation that may be experienced in the field. These data were developed to apply to the situations that are most commonly experienced In current trenching practice. Shoring systems for use in situations that are not covered by the data in this appendix must be designed as specified in 11926852(c). (ii) When any of the following conditions are present the members specified in the tables an not considered adequate. Twitter an alternate timber sharing system must be designed or another type of protei.+ive system desiaped in accordance with 11S 852. (A) When loads imposed by sa uctu es or by .&. .4 material adjacent to the trench weigh in exr— of the load imposed by a' two -foot soil surcharge. The tern "adjacent" as used here means the area within a horizontal distance from the edge of the trench equal to the depth of the trench. (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross braces exceed a 240 -pound gravity load distnbu:ed on a one -foot section of the center of tne cosscrace. ;C) When surcharge toads are present from equipment weighing :n excess of 20.000 pounds. (D) When only the lower portion ofe trench is shored and the remaining portion of the trench :s sloped or benched urtiess: The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less steep than three horizontal to one vertical: or the members are selected from the tables for use at a depth which is determined from the top of the overall trench, and not from the toe of the sloped pertion. (e) Use of Tables. The members of the shoring system that are to be selected using this information are the cross braces, the uprights, and the wales, where wales are required. Sfim.num sizes of members are specified for use m different types of soil. There are six tab.es of irjcrmation. two for each soil type. The soil type must. first be determined in accordance with the soil classificenon system described in appendix A to subpart P of part 1928. Using the appropriate table, the selection of the size and spacing of the members is then made. The selection is based on the depth and width of the trench where the members an to be installed and in most instances, the selection is also based on -the horizontal spacing of the crosabracee. Instances where a choice of borizontal-spacing of crossbracing is available, the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces must be chosen by the user bef9re the size of any member can be determined. When the soil type, the width and depth of the trench, and the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces are known, the size and vertical spacing of the crosabraces. the size and vertical spacing of the wales. and the sue end horizontal spacing of the uprights can be read from the appropriate table. (I) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C-i.l through C -l.3. (1) Example i. A trench dug in Type A soli is 13 feet deep and five feet wide. From Table C -1.i. for acceptable arrangements of timber can be used. Arrangement Si Space 4X4 aossbraces at six feet horizontally and four feet vertically. Wales are not required. Space 3x 8 uprights at six feet hcrizontally. This arrangement is commonly called "skip shoring." Arrangement *2 Space 4X8 crossbraces at eight feet honzcntal!y and four feet vertically. Space 8Xa wales at four feet vertically. Space 1x0 uprights attcur feel no"-.'' 'aiy _4mrngen. ert =1 Space 8x8 aossbraces at 10 feet horizontally and four feet vertically. 'pace 8x17 w3'.es at four feet vertically Space 2 s.0 uprights at five feet horizontally. Arrangement :t Space exe crossbraces at 12 feet horizontally and fcur feet vertically. Space 10XI0 wales at four feet verticaily Spaces 3X8 updghis at six feet hcrzonta:y. (2) Example 2. A trench dug in Type B soil in 13 feet deep and five feel wide. From Table C-1.2 three acceptable arrangements of members are listed. Arrangement +1 Space 8x0 crossbraces at six feel horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 8x8 wales at five feet vertics;ly. Space 2X 8 uprights at two feet horizontally. Arrangement =2 Space 0x8 crossbmces at eient feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 10XIo wales at five feet ve.tically. Space 2x6 uprights at two feet horizontally. Arrangement =3 Space 8X8 aossbraces at 10 feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space tOX 12 wales at five feet vertically, Space 2x 0 uprights at two feet vertically. (3) Example 3. A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep and five feet wide. From Table C-1.3 two acceptable arrangements of members can be used. Arrangement #1 Space 8X8 crossbraces at six feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space IOX12 wales at five feet vertically. Position 2s. 6 uprights as closely together as possible. If water must be retained use special tongue and groove uprights to form tight sheeting. Arrangement #2 Space 8xio crosabraces at eight feet horizontally and five feet vertically. Space 12X12 wales at five feet vertically. Position 2xe uprights in a close sheeting configuration unless water pressure must be resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where water must be retained. (4) Example 4. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep and11 feet wide. The size and spacing of members for the section of trench that is over 15 feet in depth is determined using Table C- 1.3. Only one arrangement of members Is provided. Space exio crossbraces at six feel horizontally and five feel vertically, Space 12x12 wales at five feet vertically. Use axe tight sbeeling. Use of Tables C-2.1 :h: sash C-:3 wot!d fc low the same prnrrdums. fgl i\'ores for all Tables. 1..\fember sizes al spauags other than indicated are to be determined as speuEed in a 1925.652(c;,'esigr. of Prolectve Systems" 2 When conditions are saturated or 3. All I spacing Indicated Is measured center shall not exceed 42 Inches. Mudsilla are submerged use Tight Sheeting Tight Sheeting to tenth•. wales that are installed at the toe of the refer to the use of specially -edged timber 4. Wiles to be installed with greater trench side. planks (e.g.. tongue and groove) at least three dimenj on horizontal. - I ... - - • e. Trench f acks maybe used in lieu of or in inches thick, steel sheet ilin , or similar 5. If the vertical distance from the center of combination with timber crossbraces. P 8e to7. Placement af crossbraces. When the construction that when driven or placed in the ch 6xt ads two a d the hattom of theofpositionprovide a t wall to resist the trearh bxceedbewo end embedded be feet, verticallactspacing ss race no more a than ear feet. � uprights shall be firmly or a place the top mvssbrace no more two lateral pressure of water and to prevent the mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are feet below the top of the trench. When the loss of backfill material. Close Sheeting mien embedded, the vertical distance from the vertical spacing of enssbraces is five feet. to -the placement of planks side -by -side canter bf the lowest crosabrace to the bottom place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5 feet allowing as little space as possible between of the trench shall not exceed 3e inches. below the top of the trench. them. When mudsills are used, the vertical distance BILtaaa CODE I&1ara-Y 1 = 1 1 1 1•.• 1 1 s 1 i . 1 1 • 1 1 I: -•----- - - ,_ - --. - .—e r _f_•_.._. Ct-t- - .1 - - - - - -. - - -' ------..- - — - - - C O N S WU., W N W LL J 3 O x N G x C x x • - ti W 1 1 $ e C e e C N Q O a O N2 +,- -4-i- m Y� m - m m __0000- 'C x o x >C x x x x Ln.,. Z Z� m Z m O C m m O C C CJ^ 2 F W Q LL e e e e e e e e e e N C O O O m x x x x x x x x x x x l0 'C .0 .0 b .O CO b q W NJ O F ►- W N l0 lC l0 t0 l0 Cm m m m m w a x x x 3< x x x x x x x LL 7 C0 CD 'C C0 CC cC Co C0 b CCM— W C_jx O U F- a0 .C a 10 CO a b CO .0 m m w x x x x x x x x x x x d� e e V .0 a CO b CD CO 'C m C 7 LL O O F- C- z b e .0 U, .0 .0 10 m m c: m x x 3< x x x x x x x x x L e V e e e 10 'C b .0 co m I - fl 0 3 G F- c .o e m .o e e .o m m e x x x x x x x x x x x x e e e e e .0 .c m m Cm .. w F- t7 • N N=F- O O O co O 0 O O O O O O Z ••+ W F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F - C O W '0 C0C N .0 m O N 'C m O N W O Q LL 0 a o C.— o. a c .- a .-. a n a a..-. w VI c s LL .n. Co Ca F C Z W U ,. V m H u 'w w N W • W • H O F • N • N H U • F H I 0 C C. U CH W a r w H O F • � . I I I V ru n I j, I I I F Z y a.. F O F •0 xwe+ x x V W N N N H w W a a G C .O .C N N - N N a. H O > x x i ¢ U n � r+ V Z ^ rH H aV W V1 vt VI Vl Vt In N h in paw y '- 6 W is C O O N O N N 3 N Z 00 — -.• . r . ti — �• H H x x yv .0 0 O. W O O y O N U: - 0's' Z r h v\ UI In. V1 V1 V1 Vt v1 IC G w > G v y O I C O 0 F of x % x' >4 % DC X x x G .r .D .O C .O 0 a 00 W O 0 I 0 F N .n 0 0 0 0 0 H x x x x % x x x G .D .O .C 'O W - cO OD ao oxo o a F a X 70 x x % ft x x R1 b .O .D .d .0 .d 0 0. 7 O 0 0 y % 0 ( j v .O 0 a0 I o S v % X % x X X% x .O .O ..d .0 .0 0 0 H -I.- — F NZ F O O O O O O —0 0 O H Z 1-11-414 F F F F H F F F F a V w .O a0 O co .6 CO Cd •O 00 O d W 14 S G v G G G~ d C G G C. O O G G C. do N U) 7 7 y > > n y Z > > 0 y Z x -^ OH a d Z ) O C O h N -. O > 01 CM 4] Z 10 z L J U J I. a J M Ca J1 14 u w a N w v C zu- 0 Fn • x N V - Z + w «+ r Y _ 1 ix 00 z y N I I III I. III lIIG N I „ i• 1 1 I F Z d y a O F S 0 6 w w 1.. a a G m 0< O E E C > C X X X N N N N N /1 Z N v1 tfl N GCs. y v Z ^ .L O N N N N N N r X . r - X X x x K N O N O N N Z F� F w6 w N 1!1 N IC, N >Gw EO O O O O O N x - r r 'y - Q_ x x x x x x „-1, y O y O O F C F O 0 w N m w ... m — v .•. m X X Ca'— aX0 Goo GO W V V O O• co ao j.x m m y F C U, a O F O O ao C ^. x m x >4 x F `G 0 0 C Goo G] 3 F O O O x x C C N C .. Ca z H H H H F .. y o H a 0t4 .e y O .o co Cl m .o 0 01 u 01r 01 11 p U 01 u Ol L 01 J w G. OI O G G 0 0 01 o G OI C o o JO w y ... yZ > > y,Z y Z y y Z Ca Z y OH G l..zw ,n C n C O It C 0 -. F-"-' 1 i 1 a { zea CL Is A u O to W a a W i x v H c • = N t` U z z F 1 x U vn Z N ap I La J % Z Q F W F 0 F - - Z •v C 0- N N a HOE I = 07 Ui Wa. W a a G an 0< " rpl -1 T�x v v - DC C n nen n U U Z 'O •O F . J O a U O - C .: c zaa'. za v Z0: v C - v a vcv >n. tn. W • L S O - O N - C.N O O- 0 o• a0 r. c0 to 00 Zd Za! DC x Z41 X X X x x >4 a a W m of •O ao W •o w 07 W U (C-- ( v. - ' v .. "( v '. ' > a u to C I-. b .O b •O b •O .O � x x k x x x x x x x >4 x 'C •O •O 'O •O 'C •O C 'C 'C r w pp., v '0'C•o .o �o co x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x. DC o, v v •O 'C 'O 'o .o ro v .o .o U F V v d 0 v .0 .O •O 'C •G '0.O x x X x x x x x x x x v v v V 'S •O '0 •O •O •o x K O F '7 - 'o 'CV •D •o •D 'C%0 •O U .O x x x x x x x x x x x x F v -� v v v •O •O 'C '0 •O -NO 7 r. I - b •o .'0 .o •c •o 'C v x x be x x x x x x x x x x x x W • U p O O p O p O O O O 0 Z F F F F FZ 1�� D7 N`O00 OC 0' N' 0E- tr, Q O C C V` •n C O J C Via: p _i W H — .-r H — — C! J N F v a I a I - - - - - Ii V z fV v � Ln v ( i z I N aI- O F N S 4 l rm m 41[V.. (fl V r1 o O O O .4. N QO x x x x n J v v r y .4 x X X bC X X V n n n v v i U .y n F t N in u't h in N in v1 Yl 'U41 C 7 L Cl) 41 N 7+ Q Q N C N v o N v % m r m r r T x x x x x x x O V m m com O O co 0 r r r o Z F u w G 1 v z FN m co m m m m m m a..-. x >4 X x x X X X X = .0 `0 .0 .0 co m co m m O h ^• w N •O .0 .0 co m m m m m Vl w ar >4 x x x x x x x x .0 '.0 .O .0 m m .0 m m V F {zil aP .0 .O .0 .0 m m m m co F x x >4 v .o .x o .o m '.0 .o m O H '0 0: x x x X x x % % x Cd .O .0 .O .O .0 m u 3 F ' .? .0 .D .0 •0 m m m m m x x x x x x x x x v v v .e .a .a .o •o m ... o 0 0 0 o Q o 0 o 41 F N -- F F .. F IV C O W .. d J r C J r :J J 47 ... a w a. a a m o a a as a o n• c. a Nv O = O vlz > > > Vl O = N CO2 N .:. F u F a d w S fal fat Q fl r C C 4c F 00 z s u >a r 7 Cl) J °L a C Lsl N m ._. P. r^J • i n N ` I 2 U• X I O Z .+ t • O N Or U Z U 67 F P 111-1 O Fes] Z N m/ F O F H xxm v N 61 W a a� a m O - Z I .+ N v a N n n v U U •Z C U tFsl N N41 in v1 v1 >aa� a N _ , r N m p O O O N r r •r r •+ z Cf E w L V1 N N V1 I N V7 's1 6 W N EO• m aD W c0 O K .In x x x x x y— m m m m m o N O a % — X K - X X X .o co m OO c0 >4 G W a0 d N U O F ' 0 .O co c0 - m ' � =0. co m F D 3 ro c C X X k k X — M 'O 'O 'O •O c0 CO O .0—a OF N N z F r r r r Z 41 a U m .a m 0 u m m a .o v w a O -cc w r N L OL d L d L VU QI L p .G v y L G G =• =• J0 C. QC OU, O :J 0 N > > > NZ > > v1Z O Z NZ = VZ NZ N F O - C C ut vi C' O s0 O C C I II Appendix D to Subpart P Aluminum Hydrvulic Shoring for Trenches (a) Scope. This appendix contains �a^haucti L:at can tie used ire. d.. hydraulic ,horng is provided as a method Mf protecuon against cave -ms in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (B.im) in depth. This appendix must be used when design of the aluminum hydraulic protective system cannot be performed in accordance with 1 19z&es2(c)f2). (b) Soil Classification. In order to use data presented in this appendix, the poll type or types in which the excavation is made most first be determined using the sail classification method set forth in appendix A of subpart P of part 1926. (c) Presentatiatr of Information laformadon is presented in several forms as follows: (I) Information is presented in tabular form in Tables fl -IA, D-12 D-13 end F-1.4. Each table presents the maximum vertical and horizontal spacings that may be used with various aluminum member sins and various hydraulic Cylinder Sizes EacSS table contains data only for the particular soil type in which the excavation at portion of the excavation is made. Tables D-1.1 and D-1,2 are for vertical shores in Types A end B soil. Tables D-1.3 and D1.4 are for horizontal wale: systems in Types B and C soil (2) Information concerning the basis of the tabular data and the limitations of the data!, presented is paragraph (d) of this appendix. (3) Information explaining the use of the tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of :ms appendix. (41 Information illustrating the use of the tabular date is presented in paragraph (f) of this appendix. (5) Miscellaneous notations (footnotes) regarding Table D-i.i through D-1.4 are presented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. (8) Figures. illustrating typical installations of hydraulic shoring, are included Just prior to the Tables. The (llustratlons page is enfitied "Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring Typical Installations." (d) Basis and limitations of the data. (1) Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales are those that meet the Section Modulus requirements In the D-1 Tables. Aluminum material Is Boat 1V or material of equivalent strength and properties. (2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (t) 2- u:ch cylinders shall be a minimum 2 -Inch inside diameter with a minimum safe working capacity of no less then 18.000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension Maximum extension Is to include full range cf cytinde: extensions as recommended by product manufaturer. ;ii) 3 -inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3 - inch inside diameter with a safe working capacity of not less than 30.(X1() po.mda axial compressive load at extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. "...-.!a:;cc of app;icaticn. .: a n,: i-:a-ded :ha: the an, :.-m hydrau.ic specification apply to every situation that may be experienced :n Lie field. These data were developed :o apply to the s,tuatinns that are most commonly experienced in current trenching ;ract:ce Shoring systems for use in situations that are not covered by the data in this appendix must be otherwise designed as specified in 3926.652(c. f:;3 Wben ary if the rcl'owire :n-d:':or..9 are present. :.^.e !embers scec.aed :n 'cs Tabes are ant xnstaered aaequa:e.:.i case. a-i alternative atucunim hyarauuc shoring system or other type of protective system must be designed :n accordance with 11925.852. (A) When vertical ioads unposed on cross braces exceed a 190 Pound gravity load distributed on a one foot section of the center of the hydraulic cylinder. (B) When surcharge loads an present from equipment weighing in excess of 20, pounds. (C) When only the Iower.portion or a trench Is shored and the remaining portion of the trench is sloped or benched unless: The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less sleep than three horizontal to one verticab or the members are selected from the tables far use at a depth which is determined from the top of the overall trench, and not from the toe of the sloped portion. (e) Use of Tables D-1.1. D -1.Z D-1.3 and D-1.4. The members of the shoring system that are to be selected using this information are the hydraulic cylinders, and either the vertical snores or the horzontal wales. When a waler system :s used the vertices umber sheeting to be used is else selected from these tables. The Tables D-1.1 and D-12 for verbcai shores are used in Type A anti B soils ':he: do not requue sheeting. Type 3 sobs that may require sheeting. and Type C sods that a -ways require sheeting are fcuaa in :: e horzontal wale Tables 3-1.3 and D-1.4. The sail type must first be determined n accordance with the soil classification system described in appendix A to subpart P of part 192& Using the appropriate table, the selection of the size and spacing of the members is mane. The selection is based on the depth end width of the trench where the members are to he installed In these tables the vertical spacing is held constant at four feet on center. The tables show the maximum horizontal spacing of cylinders allowed for' each size of wale in the wafer system tables and to the vertical shore tables the hydraulic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as the vertical shore spacing. (f) Example to Wustmte the Use of the Table! - (1) Example 1: A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep and 3 feet wide. From Table D-1.1: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinder spaced a feet on center (o.c.1 horizontally and 4 feet on cen:er (o.c.) verticaLy. (See F:vures 1 a 3 for typical installaticns.) (2) Example 2: A trench is dug in Type B soil that does not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet wide. From Table I7-1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced AS feet a c. .:cean:a,i; sit 4 :e3.0.:rr:p See (3) A trench is dug :n Type B soil that does not requite s: ee'ing. but does experience some minor raveling of the trench face. The trench is 16 fee: deep and 9 feet wide. From Tab e 3-1.2: Find vertical shores tine 2 inch diameter cylinder (wuth special cversieeves as designated by footnote =2; spaced 5.5 feet o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically. plywood [per footnote fg)(71 to the 3-1 Tablet 3:.n. L:.: .;e used ]e' d'ra -r •es •C �a .Rite, 2 a] for rya sa..ns a. a .nns t4;r.xamp,e 4.A ::encn IS 3.13 in previously disturbed Type Bsod. with characteristics of a Type C soil, and will require sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep and 12 feet wide, a foot horizontal spacing between cylinders is desired for working space..From Table D-13: Find horizontal wale with a section modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally. 3x 12 timber sheeting is required at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical installation.) [5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C sod. 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet a desired for working space. From Table D-1.4: Find horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at &5 feet o.c. horizontaby. Or. find horizontal wale with a 14.0 section moda:us and 3 inch diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet ox. horizontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet O.C. vertically. 3X 12 timber sheeting is required at close spacing vertically (See Figure 4 for typical installation.; (g) Footnotes, and geneml notes. for Tables D -Li, D-1.2. D-1.3. and D-1.4. (1; For aopica:inns other than those asters in the moles. refer to § 1926.552fc;(21 for use ci manufacturers modeled data. Fcr:-each depths in excess ai 20 feet. reher :a - ?I 1926.652(c12) and l 1926.652fc`I3). (2) 2 Inch diameter cylinders. at this width, shall have structural steel tube (3.5X3SXo1875) oversleeves. or structural oversleeves of manufacturer's specification. extending the hail. collapsed length (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities (i) 2 inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2 -inch inside diameter with a safe working capacity of -not less than 18.000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (if) 3 -inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3 - inch inside diameter with a safe work capacity of not less than 30.000 pounds axial compressive load at maximum extension. Maximum extension is to include full range of cylinder extensions as recommended by product manufacturer. (4) All spacing indicated is measured center to center. ;5) Vertical shoring rai:s strait nave a minimum section modulus of 3 40 inch. (6i When vertical shares are tsed.there must be a minimurn of three shores scacec equally, horizontally, in a group (7) Plywoca shall he 1.125 in. th ck ..).Cacao Sr DJ .nc: LLB. :; - ..... _ :.hs F -a _ .. plywood is not intended as a st a,.:'.ra: member, but on:y for prevertinn of :ocal raveling (sloughing of the trench face) between shores. (a) See appendix C for timber _ _ - - specifications. (9) Wales are calculated for simple span conditions. (10) See appendix D. item (d), for basis and limitations of the data. aILU h CODE 4510.2a -Y 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS FIGURE N0. I VERTCAL UU M MYNA'• ^ NMDRRIY 1OT ERACNOI j JY HORIZONTAL SPACIMG 15• MAX. VERTICAL SPACIMG 4 MAX. w RLI. 2' MAX. FIGURE NO. 3 VERtCAL ALIWMW MYp NMORNO *G LSTACM) 4% ,LO ,p0 VERTICAL SPACING 4' MAX. rL 2' MAX. VERTICAL RAIL HYDRAULIC CYLINDER VERTICAL RAIL 'no RAJLIC CYLINDER FIGURE NO. 2 VERMLL Smoam Vt TCAL SMMMO (WRR PLYIYOCOI HORIZOMTAL SPACING VERTICAL RAIL 1d• MAX. VERTICAL SPACING L' Y-2' MAX. FIGURE N0.4 ALINMJM MTCRAW JMORNO NLLER fvs f U m, HORIZONTAL SPACING .4 2 MAX. VERTICAL SPACIMG I HYDRAULIC CYLINDER PLY WOOD UP R I NT SHEETING HYDRAULIC CYLINDER z nn -O . U C Qav�F v Q x E I - cnQ O C] wW U WA' zoo F Wo NO. O 0= C 3 0p T LU z N Q C U A U z F Q Z X a > N ._. am _c.. O azz F O U W 00 00 N O L L"' Z O o LQ W) LLI W) C L' a O > C. N A IWL a Q— > O _ .. --------- I - ---- IM -w - /2 .I - m< \ E k j- =§E I~ § LU �/§ o O °§z I § \ 7 k § / §§ \ §w■ I r CQ■� ( _ . �< # �)§& E C I. -' I= � - k� q§} E @ » W �. 4 ' . \ ( f aE§ §/k p a2a \§< ® \\ (3E \j} $< I.(\ / 3 /c )c/_ «�\ § ) § > § / § \ § / ' �� ° \ - iZ I - I I O z -O cnctp e„U�c:1 a t-�ao rz_3` p V N N z (y ^ � Qa I oz en m=0 O z z z z z z z z z •.. O z .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. [-. — en en en en en en en en en .7 CJ O � O O q 0 O WO W C+ N %0 eb .O. in %6 C' x 0., eA O z [S� J7-. {7.i z Z (:� '.L z 4.. .Z Z N E - N O en N O en en N O M en u W zI z z z ' .O u, w' =z o c o o c 0 'fl :O O a O w o< Ci eT N'4 ado i � eT A Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z co j Q N N en N en en N en en 5 r. • o cacao h F- ep fT N ' CO O h %C CA za O • z i v v r en n vi ewi v taO _ _ W � ►J a az > jca� �'aN fl CD O a O >O 1 I I Li "Z J = o z `V =O N N N v U-- - F -O en en en t a or z z zI.C4� z z z z z 0 Z - — — — F a en en en en enen en en on N ' z O r, C••in ex en in 'G -y z i — em 3 G G a cU O NW a N N N N x _ Q Z ZWZW Z z E- _ _ i-. Z ZZW z z Z U i F z F - - F- _ _ - F .aa NQNQ m NQ en en NQ M en x n o U Q U In Z Z Z Z ro u U -- E Os oo CJ a �? V' N Z C N CO N C in a O ¢ V aF } ¢ Q >O< 'OO r en in o oP Q H v C ? �cz ( i - y F �+ Q '•� pp ,--� N N en N to en N en en = v - C N d 0 — t C C 'n O v h O In C C to o C Q O< C C In to " A u U) Z In a a U 1 O O h O z en r V c+i N v ri r; h „ ^ `o en m O ' ^ W rn � o ea 04 a¢cz.r v v p p N v 27 7 3 U G G G C p Q N O = O N v u a t z W v i—o C'rv� L nFo oenv� >—c_— J— .N Lt1 /.1 L 0 o U Z Z .. 'a Appendix E to Subpart P —Alternatives to Timber Shoring Figure 1. Aluminum Hydraulic Storing IS* MAX. VERTICAL SPACING 4. MAX. a rm�lW�f 2' MAX. Figure 2. Pneumatic/hydraulic Shoring .14 VERTICAL RAIL 4TDRAULIC CYLINDER 0 0 0 0 Figure 3. Trench Jacks (Screw Jacks) Figure 4. Trench Shields Appendix F to Subpart P —Selection of Protective Systems The following figures are a graphic summary ofd the requirements contained in subpart P for excavations 20 feet or less- in depth. Protective systems for use in excavations more than 20 feet in depth must be designed by a registered professional engineer in accordance — with 11929.652 (b) and (c). Is the excavation more than 5 feet in depth? Is there potentiate Is the excavation for cave-in? entirely in stable rock? � M1 Excavation may be ' NO made with vES vertical sides. I YES Excavatio' n:must besloped, sh, or ' shielded Sloping Shoring or shielding ' selected. selected. Co to Figure Go- to Figure 3 , FWURE I — PRELIMINARY DECISIONS SIttING COO°. 4t0 -M -N , 1 Sloping selected as the method of protection Will soil classification be made in accordance with 1926.652 (b)? Excavation must comply with one of the following three options: Option I: .� 1926.652 (b)(2) which. requires Appendices A and B to be followed Option 2: 11926.652 (b)(3) which requires other tabulated data (see definition) to be followed. Option 3: 51926.652 (b)(4) which requires the excavation to be designed by a registered professional engineer. Excavations must comply withf1926.652 (b)(l) which requires a slope of 1`H:IV (341). FIGURE 2. - SLOPING OPTIONS .TIFF.�._.,r,eT•.,1-�'•v-s3S,::S1ti—_J--. —._, v...:. _r-. _. . .. Shoring or shielding selected as the method of protection. Soil classification iS required A _ when shoring or shielding is used. The excavation must comply with one of the following four options: Option 1 51926.652 (c)(1) which requires Appendices A and C to be followed (e.g. timber shoring). I. Option 2 §1926.652 (c)(2) which requires manufacturers data to be followed (e.g. hydraulic shoring,trench jacks, air shores, shields): Option 3 51926.652 (c)(3) which requires tabulated data (see definition) to be followed (e.g. Iany system as per the tabulated data). Option 4 31926.652 (c).(4) which requires the excavation to be (designed by a registrrPd professional engineer 'e.g. any designed system). FIGURE 3 - SHORING AND SHIELDING [FR Doc. 89-25217 Filed 10-30-89; 8:45 am] BILLING CODE 4610-2FC •U.S. G.P.O. 1990-262-287126748 SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Make submittals required by Contract Documents; revise and resubmit as necessary to establish compliance with specified requirements. Submittals which are received from sources other than through the General Contractor's office will be returned -by the Architect without action. Submit at least one original of manu- facturer's product literature. The remainder of the number of copies required for submittal may be repro- ductions of manufacturer's literature. FAX submittals B. Contractor's submittal of (and Architect's acceptance of) shop drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of Contract Documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Detailed individual requirements for submittals are described in pertinent Sections of these Specifi- cations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination of Submittals: Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted. By affixing Contractor's approv- al stamp to each submittal, certify that coordination has been performed. B. Verify that each item and submittal for it conform in all respects with specified requirements. 1.04 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS A. General: Make submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates of installation to provide required time for reviews, securing necessary approvals, possi- ble revision and resubmittal, placing orders and secur- ing delivery. B. Owner will not bear costs of delays due to late submit- tals. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01300-1 95014 1.05 COORDINATION AND A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance cif work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. B. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submit- tals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of Architect's revievl with another. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 7 days aft, tect bar -chart ty bar for each trade formed. Time bar perly sequenced a: pletion of Work. B. Distribute progre Architect, Owner, tors, and others requirements. Pc 2.02 APPLICATION AND CERTI A. Submit applicati G702-1992 and G7 2.03 SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS A. Submit request fo incorporate subst have been reviewe sion has been iss a part of the con B. If any substituti adjacent construc contractors, the affected work wil tion, to be accom Owner, if and whe C. Under no circum any such substi full and proper TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II r Notice to Proceed, submit to Archi- e progress schedule indicating time or operation of work to be per - shall demonstrate planned work, pro- d intermeshed, for expeditious corn - Identify phases if required. schedule including all updates to ubcontractor, suppliers, fabrica- th need -to -know schedule compliance copy in field office. FOR PAYMENT for payment on standard AIA Forms 1992 (or computer equivalent). substitutions in writing. Do not utions into Shop Drawings until they by the Architect and written permis- d to make the proposed substitution • will affect a correlated function, on, or work of other trades or cessary changes and modifications to be considered as part of substitu- ished without additional cost to accepted. shall Architect's acceptance of relieve Contractor from timely, mance of Work. 01300-2 95-014 ' I II 2.04 CHANGE ORDERS A. Use AIA forms for submitting Change Order proposals. 2.05 COPIES A. Except as otherwise specified, or requested by Archi- tect, submit 5 copies of items specified above in Articles 2.01 through 2.04. 2.06 REQUEST FOR SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION A. Make timely requests of Architect for additional infor- mation required in planning and production of Work. B. File requests in ample time to permit appropriate action by all parties involved and avoid delay in performance of Work. C. Owner will not bear costs for delays due to Contrac- tor's failure to request information in a timely man- ner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTAL PREPARATIONS A. Permanently mark each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other sub- mittals. Show Contractor's executed review and approv- al marking. B. Indicate project, date, "To:"; "From:"; names of sub- contractors, suppliers, manufacturers, required refer- ences, category and type of submittal, purpose, de- scription, distribution record and signature of trans- mitter. C. Indicate drawing number and specifications section number to which submittal applies. 3.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide newly -prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with graphic information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated), with name of preparer indicated (firm name). Do not duplicate Architect's construction drawings. Show dimensions and note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in work shown. Indicate compliance with standards, and special coordination requirements. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01300-3 95014 J B. Shop drawings must bear Contractor's approval stamp C. Submittals are reviewed by the Architect for design intent only. ThelContractor is responsible for verifi- cation of dimensional requirements, compliance with contract documents and local codes, quantities and coordination of ail affected trades. D. Under no circums shop drawings or timely, full and 3.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect required of work or system and options are a: AVAILABLE FOR SEL TIONAL COST. NO COST OF ANY CHOIC. TRACTOR FOR SELEC SHOWN AS NOT AVAI. shall Architect's acceptance of tals relieve Contractor from performance of Work. to into one submittal for each unit mark each copy to show which choices Plicable to project AND WHICH ARE TION BY THE ARCHITECT WITHOUT ADDI- .YMENT WILL BE MADE FOR ADDITIONAL OR OPTIONS SUBMITTED BY THE CON - ON BY THE ARCHITECT AND NOT CLEARLY BLE WITHIN THE CONTRACT. B. Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application acid use, compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements which have been checked, and special coordination requirements. C. Maintain one set at project site, and others. D. Do not submit quirements of Contractor. E. Copies: 1. Submit 5 c review for tion secti 2. Five copies data. roduct data (for each submittal) lable for reference by Architect uct data until compliance with re- ract documents has been confirmed by of product data for Architect's specified in various specifica- red for mechanical and electrical F. Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products or systems until final copy of applicable product data is in possession of installer. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01300-4 95014 3.04 SAMPLES A. Provide units identical with final condition of pro- posed materials or products for the work. Include "range" samples (not less than 3 units) where unavoid- able variations must be expected, and describe or identify variations between units of each set. B. Provide full set of optional samples where Architect's selection is required. DO NOT INCLUDE OPTIONS REQUIR- ING ADDITIONAL COST. SEE 3.03A. C. Include information with each sample to show generic description, source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards. D. Samples are submitted for review and confirmation of color, pattern, texture and "kind" by Architect. Architect will not "test" samples (except as otherwise indicated) for compliance with other requirements, which are therefore the exclusive responsibility of Contractor. E. Submit 3 sets of samples in final submittal. F. Quality Control Set: Maintain returned final set of samples at project site, in suitable condition and available for quality control comparisons by Architect and others. G. Reusable Samples: Returned samples which are intended or permitted to be incorporated in Work are so indicat- ed in individual work sections, and must be in undam- aged condition at time of use. 3.05 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Unless precise color and pattern is specified in Con- tract Documents, submit accurate color and pattern charts to Architect for selection. Refer to pertinent sections of specifications for detailed submittal requirements. B. Make all submissions affecting color selection within sufficient time to allow selection without causing delay in Work. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01300-5 95014 J I 3.06 FINISH COLORS & MATERIAL SAMPLES A. Furnish two sets Jo Architect and assemble one set on site. When all samples are on site, Owner and Archi- tect are to reviev$. Contractor shall provide job samples indicatin4 finished color selections for any and all items requiring finish color for project. Place all samples on the project for color coordination by Architect and ifeview by Owner. Written approval from Owner is required before the work is begun for any finish requiring dolor review. 3..07 WARRANTIES - A. Refer to specific sections of Project Manual for gener- al requirements on warranties, product/workmanship bonds, and maintenance agreements. In addition to copies desired for Contractor's use, furnish 2 executed copies, except funish 2 additional copies where re- quired for maintenance manuals. 3..08 ARCHITECTS ACTION A. Architect will respond to submittals from Contractor by completing the "LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL" form. B. Architect's Submittal Review: Submittal review does not relieve Contractors) of compliance with Contract Documents or locals codes. Review is only for confor- mance with the design intent of the Project and compli- ance with information given in the Contract Documents. The..contractor is responsible to coordinate and to confirm all dimensions for use at the site. The con- tractor is responsible for coordination of the work of all -trades. 3.09 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS A. Architect's Action: Where action and return is re- quired or requested, Architect will review each submit- tal•and mark per the following, and where possible return within fifteen (15) working days of receipt. When a submittal must be coordinated with submittals of other trades, Contractor is responsible for gathering all information and forwarding to Architect as a single submittal. l r El I I FL I I I I I L I H I I J TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01300-6 - 95014 ' 11 I B. Architect's Response: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, ' provided it complies with notations and correc- tions on submittal and with Contract Documents, when submittal is returned with the following: Marking: "Reviewed". 2. Final -But -Restricted Release: Work may proceed, ' provided it complies with notations and correc- tions on submittal and with Contract Documents, when submittal is returned with the following: Marking: "Reviewed and Noted". 3. Returned for Resubmittal: Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with nota- tions thereon, and resubmit without delay to ob- tain a different action marking. Do not allow submittals with the following marking (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the Work: Marking: "Revise and Resubmit". 4. Other Action: Where submittal is returned for ' other reasons, with Architect explanation includ- ed, it will not be marked or marked "Revise and Resubmit". 3.10 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS IA. Upon completion of Work and prior to final payment, the following items must be submitted to Architect in a three ring binder, tabbed in accordance to the CSI Masterformat with a Table of Contents: ' 1. Subcontractors: Listing of all subcontractor for project, including portions of Work done, address ' and telephone number of firm, and contact at firm familiar with project. 2. Guarantees and Warranties: Two fully executed copies of each guarantee and warranty specified. 3. Certificates: One fully executed copy of each certificate specified. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01300-7 95014 4. Instructions nance manual requested by ner's use. B. Project Record Do 1. The Contract one reproduc documents pr 2. For this pur set of repro upon which t from install cord final 1 from finishe offset dista. such as buil 3.11 FILE DRAWINGS A. At completion of furnish to Archi final copies of of project. One operating, service, and mainte- instruction sheet for each item as ecifications and required for Ow- ments: • shall provide the Architect with ale set of accurate project record it to final payment. se, the Architect will furnish one .cible drawings to the Contractor,. Contractor shall record all changes ions originally indicated, and re- ations of underground lines by depth grade and by accurate horizontal es to permanent surface improvements ngs, curbs, edges, or walks. s project, General Contractor shall for the Owner, a complete file of shop drawings used in construction END OF: SECTION 01300 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 01300-8 95014 SECTION 02072 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: required for con existing buildin Work also includ salvage of items to become proper trash and debris 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIF 1.03 FOR ADDITION AND REMODELING erior demolition and removal work uction and connecting new Work to nd for remodeling, existing building. barricades, temporary protection, be reused, turned over to Owner or of Contractor, and removal from site om demolition work. IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Exterior Demolition; Section 02100 B. Reinforcing, cut ing structural s C. Disconnecting, mechanical and piping, and wir , and other modifications of exist - and/or relocation of existing cal work, including equipment, A. Before commencinglany alteration work, submit for review and approval of the Architect, a schedule show- ing the commencement, the order, and the completion dates for the various parts of this work. Comply with phasing requirements specified in Section 01010. B. Before starting a that will tempos ing building, not obtain the Owner' phase of work. I without Owner's X PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BARRICADE AND SUPPORT A. Where suitable, used for constru cades, temporary • barriers and for • al supports. Wh able from demoli type and constru above. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II • work relating to existing utilities ly discontinue service to the exist - y the Owner 5 days in advance and approval before proceeding with this not disconnect or disrupt service or approval rials from demolition work may be n of temporary protective barri- titions, noise barriers and dust porary structural and non-structur- suitable materials are not avail - work, furnish materials of proper n to perform function specified 02072-1 95014 • ii I I _ 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials, not specifically described but ' required for proper completion of work of this Section, selected by Contractor subject to Architect's approval. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Make such explorations and probes as are necessary to ascertain required protection measures before proceed- ing with alteration work. Give particular attention to ' shoring and bracing requirements so as to prevent any damage to existing construction. B. Provide, erect, and maintain catch platforms, lights, barriers, weather protection, warning signs, and other items as required for proper protection of the workmen engaged in alteration operations, and adjacent con- ' struction. C. Provide and maintain weather protection at exterior openings so as to fully protect the interior premises against damage from the elements until such openings are closed by new construction. ' D. Provide and maintain temporary protection of the exist- ing building where demolition, removal, and new work is being done, connections made, materials handled, or ' equipment moved. E. Take necessary precautions to prevent dust and dirt ' from rising by wetting demolished masonry, concrete, plaster and similar debris, or by other adjacent means. Protect unaltered portions of the existing building ' affected by the operations under this section by dust - proof partitions and other adequate means. G. Do not close or obstruct walkways or passageways with- , out the authorization of the Owner. Do not store or place materials in passage -way or other means of egress. Conduct operations with minimum traffic inter- ' ference. 3.02 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE A. Provide alteration work as indicated on the drawings or required for the work of this Contract. Be responsible for any damage that may be caused by such work to any • part or parts of existing structures or items designat- ed for reuse or salvage. Perform patching, restora- TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02072-2 95014 I tion, and new work in accordance with applicable tech- nical sections of he Specifications. B. Retain existing sinage and graphics and other materi- als or items designated to become the property of the Owner. Remove such items with care and store them in a location at the silte to be designated by the Owner. C. Execute the work ih a careful and orderly manner, with the least possiblel disturbance to the public and to the occupants of the b ilding, D. Where alterations occur, or new and old -work join, cut, remove, patch, repair, or refinish the adjacent surfac- es or as required by the involved conditions, and leave in as good a condition as existed prior to the commenc- ing of the work. Refinish painted surfaces from inter- section to intersection unless indicated otherwise. Materials and workmanship employed in the alterations, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall conform to that of the orilginal work. Materials not specifi- cally described but requiredfor a complete and proper installation of the work, shall be new, first quality of their respecti 1e kinds, as selected by Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. Alteration work shall be performed by the various respective trades that normally perform the particular items of work. - E. Finish new and adjacent existing surfaces as specified for new work. Clean existing surfaces of dirt, grease and loose paint before refinishing. - F. Where alterations occur in areas to be completed during later phases of the work only prepare adjacent surfaces as necessary and complete finishing during proper phase of the work. 3.03- TEMPORARY BARRICADES A. Before starting and erect necess vide for safe pa protection to ke Dust proof areas to permit necess cess of demoliti supports and bra TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II SUPPORTS molition and removal work, furnish y barricades. Barricades shall pro - age at all times. Provide temporary existing building weathertight. hat are to be kept in use in manner y passage for personnel. During pro - and removal, install temporary ng, to prevent building damage. 02072-3 Li J J I J J J I C I J J I 95014 ' 3.04 SALVAGE A. Certain items and materials removed from existing building in demolition work are to be relocated or reused by Contractor in new construction work under this Contract. Items and materials for relocation or reuse and which are damaged by careless handling in removal may be rejected by Architect if considered unsuitable for re -use. Replace rejected items at Contractor's expense. Salvable materials, removed in demolition work and not for relocation or re -use, or to be turned over to the Owner for disposition, become property of Contractor and shall be hauled away from site as they are removed. 3.05 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS AND CLEANING A. Remove and legally dispose of rubbish and debris found in demolition area at start of the Work that resulted from demolition activities or were deposited on site by others during the duration of contract. Keep project area and public right-of-way reasonably clear at all times. Upon completion of work remove temporary con- struction, equipment, salvaged materials, trash and debris leaving entire project area in neat condition. END OF SECTION 02072 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE ;I 02072-4 95014 SECTION 02100 - PART 1 - GENERAL ITION AND SITE PREPARATION 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Site preparation includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Temporary fencing and protective barricades. 2. Removal of obstructions which interfere with Work 3. Removal of concrete and removal of asphaltic con- crete pavement. 4. Demolition arid removal of buildings or building elements. 5. Protection of active utilities and removal of utilities abandoned. 6. Salvage of existing landscaping material to be turned over to Owner. B. Related Work 1. Interior I 2. Earthwork: 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Al Workmen Qualifica clearing and grub with types of tre and limbs where r B. Codes and Standar regulations, plus providing coverag 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust Control: Pr mance of• Work. T prevent dust nuis rent performance B. On -site Burning: C. Protection: Pro moved. In event and replacements Contractor's exp TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II bed Elsewhere: ition: Section 02072 Section 02200 ions: One person present during tree ing operations, thoroughly familiar s involved.: Direct trimming of roots cruired. Comply with pertinent codes and equirements of insurance carriers for Work. vent spread of dust during perfor- oroughly moisten surfaces required to nce to public, neighbors, and concur - f other work on site. Will not be permitted. ct existing objects not to be re- f damage, immediately make repairs ecessary to approval of Architect at 02100-1 - 95014 II PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BARRICADES AND FENCE MATERIALS A. Materials required for barricades, tree protection and related fencing furnished by Contractor. 2.02 FILL MATERIAL A. Fill Dirt: Clean dry soil approved by Architect. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.01 PREPARATION A. Notification: Notify Architect at least two full working days prior to commencing work. B. Site Inspection: Ii. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect entire site and objects designated to be removed or preserved. ' 2. Locate existing utility lines to be abandoned and determine requirements for disconnecting and cap- ping. ' 3. Locate existing active utility lines which are to remain and determine requirements for their pro- • tection. C. Clarification: 1. Drawings do not purport to show all objects exist- ing on site. 2. Before commencing work of this Section, verify with Architect all objects to be removed and all objects to be preserved. D. Scheduling: 1. Schedule work in a careful manner with necessary consideration for neighbors and public. 2. Avoid interference with use of, and passage to and from, adjacent buildings and facilities. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 021CC-2 95014 E. Disconnection of tion or removal, disconnect or arr service connectio and telephone, to with regulations sewer lines in ac Conduct operation manner to presery demolished. If u tions are require with removal and and other oertine F. Preserve in oper dering or traver tect property, i boxes, poles, gu damage to active to satisfaction 3.02 DEMOLITION A. Demolish portions tion. Remove exi designated to be B. Salvageable mater unless otherwise promptly removed C. Fill holes and tr removal, to groun masonry construct depth of 1 foot b materials are mix for top 1 foot of debris. tilities: Before commencing demoli- nd if not already accomplished, nge for disconnection of utility s, including water, gas, electricity, buildings to be demolished complying f utility concerned. Plug sanitary ordance with local requirements. at Contractor's expense and in service to areas and structures not derground utility services disconnec- in public thorough -fares, comply estoration of pavement requirements t matters. ng condition active utilities bor- g,site designated to remain. Pro- uding, but not limited to, valve and related appurtenances. Repair ility, due to work under contract, utility concerned. of buildings designated for demoli- ting concrete or asphaltic pavement become property of Contractor or specified and shall be site. nches resulting from demolition and surface. Rock and materials from on may be used in backfilling up to a low ground surface if sufficient fine d therewith to fill voids. Use dirt fill, free from trash, wood, pipe and D. Contractor (after1clearing): Perform rough grading necessary to provide complete run-off of surface water. E. Demolish masonry walls in small sections. Remove structural steel. F. Wet down masonry thoroughly during demolition to pre- vent spread of du6t. G. Leave parcel site in safe and clean condition, free from rubbish, debris, materials, and equipment. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02100-3 95014 H. When Contractor starts building demolition, excluding interior striping of salvable items including plumbing and electrical fixtures, he is to continue work during normal working days suitable to operations until demo- lition and site clearance is completed, unless other- wise specifically authorized by Owner. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Erect temporary barricades and fencing required for preparation and construction operation. 3.04 PROTECTION OF LANDSCAPING MATERIALS A. Contractor is to protect existing landscaping material and when directed by Owner, remove and relocate this material to a place designated by owner. Cost for this work is not included in landscaping allowance. 3.05 UTILITIES A. Protect and preserve in operating condition, active utility services that traverse or border site, and repair damages that occur to these services due to work performed during Contract period. Remove utility lines that are to be abandoned from building area. 3.06 OBSTRUCTIONS A. Remove existing obstructions from area to be occupied by Work under this Contract unless otherwise specified herein, or specifically directed by Architect to remain. 3.07 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS AND CLEANING A. Remove and legally dispose of rubbish and debris found on demolition area at start of the Work that resulting from demolition activities or deposited on site by others during the duration of contract. Keep project area and public right-of-way reasonably clear at all times. Upon completion of work remove temporary con- struction, equipment, salvaged materials, trash and debris leaving entire project area in neat condition. END OF SECTION 02100 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02100-4 95014 SECTION102200 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Earthwork for this project includes but is not necessarily* limited to: 1. Layout of buillding and site improvements. 2. Excavating fck foundations and other below grade work. 3. Filling and Ikckfi1ling. 4. Rough and firiish grading of the site. 5. Granular drainage fill. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Site preparajion: Section 02100 1.02. SUMMARY A. Perform excavation regardless of type, nature or condition of materials encountered. B. All excavation under this Section is unclassified and no allowances will be made for nature of material encountered. Contiractor shall make soil, investigations as he considers necessary for his own determination of types of materials existing at the site. Refer to Section 00220 for information concerning Geotechnical Investigation. C. There will be no extra compensation for dewatering. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Dust Control: .Control dust on and near the Work if dust is caused byIContractor's operations during per- formance of the Work or if resulting from condition in which Contractor leaves the site. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department, Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, 1993. 1. AHTD Section 303 - Aggregate Base Course. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02-200-1 95014 I - '• B. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race St. Philadelphia, PA 19103. ' 1. ASTM D698 - Test for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 in. Drop. 2. ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in ' Place by the Sand -Cone Method. 3. ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures, '• Using 10 lb. Rammer and 18 in. Drop. 4. ASTM D2216 - Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures. 5. ASTM D2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). ' 6. ASTM D3017 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1..05 DEFINITIONS A. Relative Compaction: The ratio, in percent, of the as - compacted field dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by the Standard Proctor Test, ASTM D698, or as determined by the Modified Proctor Test, ASTM D1557, as applicable. Corrections for oversize material may be applied to either the as - compacted field dry density or the maximum dry density, ' as determined by the Architect. B. Optimum Moisture Content: Moisture content of the ' material for which the maximum dry density is obtained as determined by ASTM D698 or D1557. Field moisture contents shall be determined on the basis of the fraction passing the 3/4" sieve. C. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for the next layer or the next phase of construction. ' 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following: 1. Samples of all imported material. 2. Samples of all on -site material to be used as ' fill. 3. Certification that imported materials conform to the specification requirements along with copies ' of the test results from a qualified commercial testing laboratory. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02200-2 95014 II 4. Proctor approved B. All fill material PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL on fill material as prepared by tory. approval prior to placement. A. Free -from roots, organic matter, trash and debris with maximum particle size of 1-1/2 inches. B. Imported fill is tl consist of clayey sand (SC), sandy clad+ (CL) or clayey gravel (GC) . C. Altdrnate materialL having a liquid limit not greater than 45 and approv ed by the Architect. D. It is intended tha fill be obtained from the site to the maximum extentllpossible. 2.02 IMPORTED GRANULAR A. Imported granular artificial mixtur well graded from B. Conform to the A Class 3, Class 4 soil conditions. 2.03 TOPSOIL A. Selected topsoil protected, free f stones which will opening. B. Provide imported to accomplish the 1. Natural, f in the vici drained are free from 3 grass (cypr and toxic s free from t diameter, a TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II ill is to consist of a natural or of gravel and soil mortar, uniformly arse to fine. • Section 303 classifications for Class 7 as required by existing the site, properly stored and roots, sticks, hard clay and pass through a 2 in. square of equal quality if required ile, friable soil, possessing cs of representative productive soils ty. Obtain from naturally well - without admixture of subsoil and ason grass (sorgam halepense), nut rotundus), and objectionable weeds stances. Topsoil furnished shall be sh, brush, and stones over 1 inch in related extraneous material. 02200-3 95014 ' 2.04 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT A. Provide compaction equipment of suitable type and ' adequate to obtain the densities specified. B. Operate compaction equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ' C. Maintain equipment in such condition that it will deliver the manufacturer's rated compactive effort. D. Hand operated equipment shall be capable of achieving the specified densities. 2.05 MOISTURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment for applying water of a type and ' quality adequate for the work; it shall not leak and shall be equipped with a distributor bar or other approved device to assure uniform application. ' B. Provide equipment for mixing and drying out material consisting of blades, discs or other approved equipment. 2.06 WATER REMOVAL EQUIPMENT A. Provide and operate equipment adequate to keep excavation and trenches free of water. 2.07 IMPORTED MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE A. Additional tests required at the borrow area: 1. Standard Proctor. 2. Remolded permeability. 3. Atterberg limits. 2.08 SELECTED MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE IA. Provide samples for testing representative of the actual material to be installed in the work. Take samples from material stockpiled. Depending on the uniformity of the material, Architect may request additional samples. B. Forward test results to Architect at least 10 days before the material is required for use. If tests indicate that the material does not meet specification requirements, the material shall not be installed in ' the work. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02200-4 95014 I I C. Material which isIplaced in the work but does not conform to the specification requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 2.09 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials not specifically described but required for prop r completion of work of this Section, selected by Contractor subject to Architect approval. PART 3--- EXECUTION 3.01_ CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Complete clearing and grubbing work as specified in -' Section 02100 prior to beginning work in this section. 3.02 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION A. Excavate subsoil required for building foundations, construction operAtions and other work. Excavate for structures to the lines and grades shown or as required to accomplish the construction. B. The method of exc vation used is optional; however, no equipment shall boperated within 5 feet of existing structures or newly completed construction. C. Excavation that cennot be accomplished without endangering presexit or new structures shall be done with hand tools. D. Machine slope banks to angle of repose or less until shored. Do not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. E. Excavate to the depths and widths required. F. Allow for forms, dorking space, granular base and finish topsoil. G. Do not carry excavation for footings and slabs deeper • than the elevation shown. Fill over excavations under footings with concrete of equal strength to that of the footing. , H. Replace excavation carried below the grade lines shown or established bylthe Architect with the same fill Material as specified for the overlying fill or backfill, compact as required for such overlying fill or backfill. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02200-5 95014 ' I. Where the overlying area is not to receive fill or backfill, replace the over excavated material and compact to a density not less than that of the ' underlying ground. J. Correct cuts below grade by similarly cutting adjoining areas and creating a smooth transition. K. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. ' L. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders and rock. M. Correct over excavated areas and unauthorized ' excavation at the Contractor's expense. N. Fill over excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces in accordance with direction by Architect. O. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess subsoil not being reused from site. ' 3.03 EXCAVATION SAFETY A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making the excavation in a safe manner. B. Provide appropriate measures to retain excavation sideslopes to ensure that men working in or near the excavation are protected. 3.04 DEWATERING EXCAVATION A. Remove water during periods when concrete is being deposited, pipe is being laid and placing of backfill unless water settling is required and at such other times as required for efficient and safe execution of the work. B. Accomplish removal of groundwater in a manner that will preserve the strength of the foundation soils, will not cause instability of the excavation slopes and will not result in damage to existing structures. C. Where necessary to these purposes, lower water level in advance of excavation, utilizing wells, wellpoints or similar methods. D. Maintain the water level in the gravel stratum as measured in piezometers, a minimum of 3 feet below the prevailing excavation. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 0220C-6 95014 II E. Open pumping,. sump and ditches: If these methods result in boils, loss of fines, softening of the ground or instability of slopes, they will not be permitted. F. Install wells and lellpoints with suitable screens and ' filters so that continuous pumping of fines does not occur. I G. Operate well points continuously so as to prevent boils 0 and loss of consolidation. H. Arrange discharge o facilitate collection of samples by Architect. - - I. Avoid settlement orI damage to adjacent property. J. Dispose of water ix a manner that will not damage adjacent property, as approved by Architect. 3.05 UNDERCUTTING A. Undercut areas on the site that do not meet the permeability requirements to such depth as to allow placement of sufficient impervious material as determined by permeability testing at borrow area as • stated in Part 2 of this section. B. Prior to placement of fill in the undercut area, compact the areas as outlined in the following articles. 3.06 FOUNDATION PREPARATION A. After completion o excavation and prior to foundation or fill construction, proofroll the excavation surface with a loaded tand&m-axle dump truck or similar heavy wheeled vehicle to detect soft or loose zones. B. Conduct proofrollingin the presence of Architect. C. If soft or loose zones are found, excavate the material to a depth accepted by Architect, then fill and compact as specified for the overlying fills. D. Prior to placement�of overlying fill or concrete,_ compact the foundation subgrade to at least 95 percent relative compaction (Standard Proctor). 3.07 PREPARATIONS FOR PLACING BACKFILL A. Remove form materikls and trash from excavation before placing backfill. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02200-7 9501-4 B. Do not overate earth moving equipment within 5 feet of walls of concrete structures for the purpose of depositing or compacting backfill material. C. Compact backfill adjacent to concrete walls with hand operated tampers or similar equipment that will not damage the structure. D. Backfill water holding basins only after satisfactory leakage tests have been conducted. 3.08 FILL MATERIAL UNDER FACILITIES A. Place fill material within the influence area beneath all piping, slabs, walks, curbs, structures, roads, parking areas, facilities and other areas as shown. B. Do not exceed loose lifts of 6 inches. C. Compact each lift to not less than 95 percent Modified Proctor Density. D. Place and compact a 6 inch layer of granular fill to at least 95 percent Modified Proctor density immediately beneath spread footings, slabs on grade or other concrete structures. E. Moisten material as required to aid compaction (+ or - 2 percent optimum moisture content). F. Place material in horizontal lifts and in a manner which avoids segregation. G. Correct and repair subsequent damage to slabs, piping, concrete structures, facilities or other structures caused by settlement of fill material. 3.09 BACKFILL AROUND STRUCTURES A. Place earth fill in areas not designated to be structural fill or granular fill. B. Deposit material in maximum 6 inch loose lifts and compact each lift to not less than 95 percent Standard Proctor. 3.10 FILL NOT UNDER STRUCTURES OR FACILITIES A. Place earth fill to the lines and grades shown. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02200-8 95014 B. Place fill material in maximum 6 inch loose lifts and compact each lift to not less than 95 percent Standard Proctor. C. Make proper allowances for topsoil where required. 3.11 MOISTURE CONTROL A. During compacting operations, maintain optimum practicable moisture content required for compaction purposes in each lift of fill. B. Maintain moisture content uniform throughout the lift. C. Add water to the material at the site. of excavation. Supplement, if required, by sprinkling the fill. D. At the time of compaction, maintain the water content of the material at optimum moisture content, plus or minus 2 percent, except as otherwise specified for embankments. E. Do not attempt to compact fill material that contains excessive moisture. F. Aerate material by blading, discing, harrowing or other methods to hasten the drying process., 3.12 FIELD DENSITY TESTS A. Test Methods: ASTN D2922, D1556, D2216 and D3017. B. Cooperate with testing work by leveling small test areas designated by the Architect. C. Backfill test areas. D. Field density testl shall be performed for every 50 cubic yards of fi]Il material placed. -- E. Architect may ordsr testing of any lift of fill at any time, location or elevation. 3.13 FINISH SITE GRADING AND TOPSOIL PLACEMENT. A. Perform earthwork to lines and grades as -shown with proper allowance for topsoil. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II .02200-9 95014 II J B. Provide a minimum 41' depth of topsoil in all areas within the limits of construction that are disturbed during the course of this work except areas shown to receive paving paterial. Seed with hulled Common Bermuda at a minimum rate of 25 lbs. per acre and as required for complete germination. C. Shape, trim and finish slopes to conform with the lines, grades and cross sections shown. D. Make slopes free of loose exposed roots and stones exceeding 3 inches in diameter. E. Round tops of banks to circular curbs, in general, not less than a 6 foot radius. F. Neatly and smoothly trim rounded surfaces; over excavating and backfilling to the proper grade are not acceptable. G. Finish site grading will be reviewed by Architect. 3.14 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATION A. Dispose of excess excavated materials, not required or suitable for use as backfill or fill, outside of the area of work. B. Compact excess material as specified for fill, dress the completed disposal area to slopes no greater than 4:1 (horizontal;vertical) and slope to drain. 3.15 SETTLEMENT A. Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over the backfill or fill, which may occur within the 1 -year guarantee period in the General Conditions will be considered to be caused by improper compaction methods. B. Restore structures damaged by settlement to original condition. END OF SECTION 02200 95014 SECTION 02282 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION Work Included: Perform foundation and under floor termite control treatment in accordance with the Arkan- sas Pest Control Law and to qualify construction under this Contract for continuous guaranteed protection specified. B. Applicable Regulations: 1. Standard Building Code, Section 1702. 2. Arkansas Pest Control Law. 3. Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act, (PublicLaw 92-516 of Oct. 21, 1972 as - amended by Pihblic Law 94-140, Nov. 28, 1975). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TERMITE CONTROL CHEM A. Use chemicals apps Board and of type tion specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. From investigat or otherwise oh Agent, Soil Con authorities, if B. Remove wood and earth sub -grade 3.02 TREATMENT A. tved by the Arkansas State Plant required to give guaranteed protec- at the site determine soil texture this information from the County ation Service or other approved already known. llulose- containing materials from fore chemical is applied. Perform foundatiorfi and under floor termite control treatment at buildings to be constructed under this Contract. Use type chemical approved by the Arkansas State Plant Boardland currently known to give guaran- teed protection fd•r the soil and fill used at this Project. Apply chemical using applicator licensed by the Arkansas State Plant Board. Apply in sufficient quantity under and around the structures, to qualify building and contents for continuous guaranteed protec- tion against dama4e by subterranean termites. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02282-1 95014 , I II ' B. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or construction activities fol- lowing application. ' 3.03 GUARANTEE A. As part of termite control work, issue for delivery to Owner, termite damage guarantee with performance guar- anteed by applicator. ' B. Furnish damage guarantee with service and re -service for any subterranean termite infestation without cost to Owner. Write Damage Guaranty Contract additionally to cover any and all subterranean termite damage to the structures and contents in amount of $10,000.00. Such damage to be repaired, replaced or corrected at Contra- ctor's expense. ' C. Furnish damage guarantee effective for 5 year period after completion of initial treatment without payment '• of additional fees or premiums by Owner. Upon expira- tion of 5 -year period, Owner has option of extending damage guarantee contract at an annual fee mutually ' agreed upon by Owner and applicator. Owner reserves the right to cancel as of any anniversary date. Ser- vice, re -service, and Damage Guaranty provisions of the extended damage contract are noncancellable by applica- ' tor. Annual fee subject to revision by giving advance written notice to Owner. D. Upon completion of the Work, issue damage guarantee in triplicate, one copy for General Contractor, one for Architect and one for Owner. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Unless treated surfaces are to be immediately covered, take means necessary to prevent disturbance of treated areas by human or animal contact. END OF SECTION 02282 I TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1 02282-2 I SECTION 02380 -!DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide drilled concrete piers complete. Extent of piers is indicated on drawings, including location, diameters of shafts, diameters of bells, estimated bottom elevations, top elevations per detail and details of construction. B. Related Work Desbrtbed Elsewhere: 1. Site preparation: Section 02100 2. Location of Eicisting Utilities: Section 02200 3. Concrete Procedures and Materials: Section 03300 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawii specified in sect: B. Submit at the end each pier recordii elevation of rock. at top, variation performed, actual: depth of socket (. seepage of water, flood), elevation in place, any unu; dimensions from o: excavation, inspei concrete (include of construction ji 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with prov Specifications f Drilled Piers provisions of st regulations in e will govern, but requirements. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Subsurface condi Investigation. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II mix designs and reports as 03300. f each days drilling, a report for actual elevation at bottom and top, if any), final centerline -location f shaft from plumb, results of tests llowable bearing capacity of bottom, applicable), levelness of bottom, till water level (if allowed to f bottom and top of any casing left al conditions, variation of bell ginal design, dates of starting ion, testing, and placement of ny delays in concreting and location nts in shafts). ons of ACI 336.1 "Standard the Construction of End Bearing as herein specified. Where and conflict with building ct for project, building regulations ly to establish minimum j refer to Soil and Foundation 02380-1 95014 B. Data indicated on subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of continuity of such conditions. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data are made available for convenience of Contractor and are not guaranteed to represent conditions that may be encountered. C. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. 1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Employ at Contractor's expense, geotechnical engineers acceptable to Architect and Owner to monitor installation and perform inspection and testing of drilled piers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide concrete materials, reinforcing and related materials as specified in Sections 03200 and 03300. B. Comply with requirements of Section 03300 for concrete mix design, concrete strength, sampling and testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. General: 1. Excavate holes for drilled piers to required bearing strata or elevation indicated. 2. Pier design dimensions shown are minimums. The design of piers are based on assumed strata bearing capacity. If bearing strata is not capable of maintaining bearing capacity assumed, foundation system will be revised as directed by Architect. Revisions will be paid for in accordance with contract conditions relative to changes in work and according to unit prices. 3. Provide belled bases of diameter and shape indicated. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02380-2 95014 B. Tolerances: 1. Locate cente line of piers to be on centerline of bearing construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not exceed following tolerances. a. Maximum permissible variation of location not more than 1/24 of shaft diameter or 3", whichever is less. b. Shafts out of plumb, not more than 1.5% of length xkor exceeding 12.5% of shaft diameter or 15", whichever is less. c. Concrete cut-off elevation, plus 1" to minus ' 3" 2. If above tolerances are exceeded, provide ' additional or corrective construction to compensate for excessive eccentricity. Submit proposed corrective construction methods to Architect for review before proceeding. C. Temporary Shaft Protection: When required, provide full-length watertight steel casings of sufficient thickness to withstand compressive, displacement and withdrawal stresses and to maintain the shaft wall. Temporary casings may be left in place or withdrawn as the concrete is p aced, at Contractor's option. D. Shoring: Provide 4horing in bells as required in unstable soil conditions to preclude cave-in during hand excavation and inspection operation. E. Obstructions: ' 11 Provide demo ition and removal of rock, boulders, concrete, masonry and other subsurface obstructions which are indicated by contract documents, or by available subsurface exploration data. Such work will not be considered a change in the work. 2. If rock, bou ders or other unforeseen obstructions are encountezled which cannot be removed by standard drilled pier excavation methods, and if such obstrucdions are not indicated by available subsurface data, removal of such obstructions will be paid for in accordance with the terms of the Contract relative to changes in the work.. 1 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02380-3 95014 II L '• F. Dewatering: Provide and maintain pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water before placing concrete. If excessive water is encountered and drilling ' operations must be halted, consult with Architect before using alternate methods of construction. Conduct water to general site run-off ditches and disposal ' areas with discharge lines. Provide additional ditching as required to connect water to site drainage facilities. G. Bells: Excavate shafts to provide shape of belled -out portions, thickness of base of bells and angle of slope for conical portion of bells as indicated. H. Inspection: ' 1. Each drilled pier must be inspected and be acceptable to the geotechnical engineers and Architect before placing any concrete. ' 2. Provide facilities as required, including temporary casings, to assist in the inspection of excavations. Cooperate with inspecting personnel Ito expedite the work. 3. Notify the Architect at least 24 hours prior to the time excavations will be ready for inspection. I. Depth of Bearing Strata: If indicated depth of shaft excavation is reached without developing required ' strata bearing capacity, immediately suspend excavation operations and inform Architect. Architect will determine procedures to be followed in each instance. ' Where changes in indicated depth or dimensions are required, or additional soil borings are required, proceed with such work when directed in writing by Architect. ' J. Over excavation: No payment will be made for extra length, when drilled pier shafts are excavated to a ' greater depth than required or authorized by the Architect, due to over drilling by Contractor. Complete drilled pier and fill extra depth with concrete, if ' other conditions are satisfactory. Over excavated shafts will be measured and paid for to the original design or authorized depth. •' K. Excavated Material: Remove excavated material and dispose of offsite. I I1 TERMINAL EXP_ PHASE II 02380-4 95014 3.02 REINFORCING A. Fabricate and erec continuous unit us reinforcement accu of hole and hold s placement. B. Accurately place with column rein C. Protect exposed e and exposure to t 3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place concrete im approval by geote sheets (cut out t openings, extendi B. Place concrete without seqreq of C. Place. concrete by or flexible drop tremie. Use chute where a drop of m concrete into pla reinforcing cages for piers as one g inner ring resteel. Place tely and symmetrically about axis urely in position during concrete els into columns and secure to lap ing. of dowels from mechanical --damage weather. diately after inspection and nical engineer. Use protection receive concrete) over excavation at least 12" beyond edge. inuously and in a smooth flow Provide mechanical vibration for least top 5' of each shaft. eans of a bottom discharge bucket, ute, elephant trunk hopper or or tremies for placing concrete e than 25' is required or pump D. Place concrete in -the -dry unless otherwise accepted by Architect. E. Maintain a su reduction of prevent extra concrete. Coo with concrete of concrete a F. Stop concrete pla screed level, and cut-off elevation section above gra elevation. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II nt head of concrete to prevent diameter by earth pressure and to material from mixing with fresh e withdrawal of temporary casings ment operations to maintain a head mately 5' above casing bottom. ent at cut-off elevation shown, ply a scoured, rough finish. Where above ground elevation, form top and extend shaft to required 02380-5 95014 ' I II C ' 3.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Basis of Bids: Bids shall be based on the number of ' drilled piers, design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft (extended through bell) and the diameter of the shaft and bell, as indicated. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for drilled piers will be made on the actual net volume of drilled piers in place and accepted. The actual length, shaft diameter and bell diameter may vary to coincide with the elevation where satisfactory bearing strata is encountered, and with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by testing services, and with stability and characteristics of soil strata. I Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shaft and bells. There will be no additional compensation for excavation, concrete fill, reinforcing, casing or other costs due to unauthorized over excavating of shafts or bells. No payment will be made for rejected drilled piers. 3. Prices quoted include full compensation for labor, materials, tools, equipment and other necessary items for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete and other items required for complete installation. C. Unit Prices: Unit prices shall apply in the event additions to or deductions from the Work are required and authorized by Architect. Quote linear foot prices for complete drilled concrete piers, including soil excavation, rock excavation, drilling, reinforcing and concrete. END OF SECTION 02380 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 95014 I- II SECTION 02510 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Prepare pavement in accordance with this specification where indicated on the drawings. B.- Secure permits an& inspections, post necessary bonds and pay necessary fees. 1.02 - RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02100 - S to Preparation 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Associat on of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 444 North Capitol Street, North West, Suite 225, Washington, DC 20001. 1. AASHTO M14 - Anionic Emulsified Asphalt 2. AASHTO M81 - Cut Back Asphalt Concrete (Rapid Curing Type) • 3. AASHTO M82 - Cut Back Asphalt Concrete (Medium • Curing Type) 4. AASHTO M208 - Cationic Emulsified Asphalt B. American Society of Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103. 1. ASTM C207 - Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 2. ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture Density • Relations oflSoils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 in. Drop. 3. ASTM D946 - specification for Penetration Graded Asphalt Cemeit for Use in Pavement Construction. 4. ASTM D977 - Specification for Emulsified Asphalt. C. Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department, P.O. Box 2262, Little Rock, Arkansas 72203. • 1. AHTD 303 - 4gregate Base Course. 2. AHTD 304 - Aggregate Surface Course. 3. AHTD 305 - Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix Stabilized Base Course. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02510 - 1 95014 • ' I PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 ASPHALT PAVING MATERIALS A. Base Course: Crushed stone conforming to AHTD Standard Specifications for Highway Construction Section 303, Class 7. B. Prime Coat: Medium curing cut back asphalt; MC -30 or MC070; AASHTO M82; heated and applied within the temperature range of 80-1/2 to 150-1/2 degrees F. C'. Hot -mix surfacing material shall meet the following requirements: 1. Asphaltic Cement: ASTM D946 for penetration grade applicable to season when used, coarse aggregate (crushed stone), fine aggregate (sand or stone screening), mineral filler (limestone dust or other approved material dust passing No.200 sieve). a. Total mineral aggregate shall consist of a blend of well graded coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and mineral filler which shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Percent Passing 1/2 inch 100 No. 4 60 to 80 No. 10 45 to 60 No. 40 15 to 35 No. 200 4 to 8 b. Asphaltic concrete paving mixture shall consist of 91 to 94 percent total mineral aggregate of 6 to 9 percent bitumen. 2. Testing: Tests of asphalt mixtures and minerals will be made by commercial testing laboratory approved by Architect. Submit test reports to Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade for asphalt paving improvements shall have all organic silty and clayey topsoils and other unsuitable material removed and replaced with approved material. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02510 - 2 95014 B. Fill and tamp trades of utility trenches. C. Scarify and recomact subgrade; proof roll with dump truck. D. Replace soft spot as needed. 3.02 BASE COURSE FOR ASPHALTIC PAVING J A. Place material on prepared subgrade for a total compacted thickne s of 6 inches. Spread course(s) and compact the same day the material is hauled. The material shall be thoroughly mixed, either by repeated handling with.a b ade grader or by harrowing - sufficiently to secure a uniform. mixture of coarse and fine particles. Compact base course by systematically rolling and watering as required to obtain a firm, uniform, smooth surface as specified in Part 300 of AHTD Standard Specifications for Highway Construction-. Set blue tops prior to final finishing of base course. B. Minimum density shall be 95 percent Standard Proctor (ASTM D698). C. Prime coat shall not be put down until base course is compacted. 3.03 PRIME COAT A. After acceptance !f completed base course, a prime coat shall be uniformly distributed over the preparedbase at the rate of 0.3 gallons per square yard. B. Remove any surplud asphalt material. C. Construct and maintain barricades to keep traffic off the primed surface until it is thoroughly cured and ready for asphalt pavement (3 days minimum). - 3.04 HOT -MIX SURFACING FOR A. Plant Mixing and and temperature 1 materials shall b of Part 400 of All Construction. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II IC -PAVING ansporting: Mixing, transportation itations for hot -mix surfacecourse in accordance with the requirements Standard Specifications for Highway 02510 - 3 95014 B. Placing: Surface course material shall be delivered to the job hot, in vehicles commonly used for that purpose. Material shall be laid on an approved base and only when weather conditions are suitable. After spreading to a uniform thickness to obtain a 2 inch thickness required after compaction, the paving material shall be rolled with an approved, self propelled roller until thoroughly compacted and no roller marks appear. Finished surface shall be smooth and true to established grade and crown. Any depressions or defective places shall immediately be corrected. Finish tolerance shall be plus or minus 0.05 feet at any point from line and grade shown on drawings. END OF SECTION 02510 ' TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II ips,t..! 95014 H SECTION 02514 - PART 1 - GENERAL lulu AS A. Construction of 1.02 REFERENCES CURBS AND SIDEWALKS e curbs and sidewalks. A. American Concrete Institute, 22400 W: Seven Mile Road, Detroit, Michigan 48219. 1. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. B. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1961 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103. 1. ASTM C94 - Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 2. ASTM C309 - Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 3. ASTM D698 - 'lest Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures, Using -5.5 lb. Rammer and 12 in. Drop. 4. ASTM D994 pecification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete Architect for r requirements of PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 CURB FORMS A. 2 -inch dressed strength, free appearance of subject to app B. Short Radius F C. Curb Face: No than 7 inches D. Stakes and Bra hold forms sec TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II ormation regarding concrete mix to w in accordance with the M C94, Alternate 2. sion lumber or metal -of equal defects that would impair ural quality of completed curb, of Architect. 1 -inch dressed lumber.or plywood. zontal joints in form material closer top of curb. Materials: Provide as required to y in place. 2514 - 1 95014 fl 2.02 SIDEWALK FORMS A. 2 -inch dressed lumber, straight and free from defects, or standard metal forms. B. Short Radius Forms: 1 -inch dressed lumber or plywood. C. Stakes and Bracing Materials: Provide as required to hold forms securely in place. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER A. 1/2 inch thick preformed asphalt -impregnated expansion joint material conforming to ASTM D994. 2.04 CONCRETE A. Ready mixed conforming to ASTM C94, Alternate 2. B. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi at 28 days. C. Maximum Size of Aggregate: 1-1/2 inch. D. Slump: 2 to 4 inches. E. Air Entrainment: Comply with AFPC V2 Tables 1603A and 1603C. 2.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Wire Fabric: "Specifications for Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A-185. 2.06 CURING COMPOUND A. Liquid membrane forming, clear or translucent, suitable for spray application. B. Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1. 2.07 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS A. All materials shall be subject to inspection for suitability, as the Architect may elect, prior to or during incorporation into the work. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02514 - 2 95014 II PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. Bring the areas on which curbs and sidewalks are to be ' constructed to recuired grade on undisturbed ground and compact by sprinkling and rolling or mechanical tamping. B. As depressions occur, refill with suitable material and recompact until the surface is at the proper grade. •C. Compact subgrade In fill to 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content as.determined by ASTM D698. 3.02 SETTING FORMS A. Construct forms to the shape, lines, grades and dimensions called for on the Drawings. B. Stake wood or metal forms securely in place, true to line and grade. C. Brace forms to prevent change of shape•or movement in any direction resuflting from the weight of the concrete during placement. D. Construct short radius curved forms to exact radius. E. Tops of forms shall not depart from grade line more than 1/8 inch when checked with a 10 foot straightedge. F. Alignment of straight sections shall not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.03 CURB CONSTRUCTION A. Construct curbs to line and grade shown or established by the Architect and conform to the details shown. B. Place, process, finish andcure concrete in conformance with this section and the applicable requirements of ACI 614. Wherever requirements differ, the more stringent shall govern. C. Placement of Preformed Asphalt Impregnated Expansion Joints: ' 1. At intervals of not more than 40 feet. 2. Beginning and end of curved portions of the curb. 3. Connections to existing curbs. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02514 - 3 - 95014 1 D. Contraction joints: 1. Place at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. 2. Open type joint. 3. Provide by inserting thin, oiled steel sheet vertically in fresh concrete to force coarse aggregate away from joint. 4. Steel sheet shall be inserted the full depth of the curb. 5. After initial set has occurred in the concrete and prior to removing the front curb form, steel sheet shall be removed with a sawing motion. ' E. As soon as concrete has set sufficiently to support its own weight, remove the front form and finish all exposed surfaces. 1. Finish top of curb with a steel trowel. 2. Finish edges with a steel edging tool. 3. Rub formed faces with burlap sack or similar device to produce a uniformly textured surface, free from form marks, honeycomb and other defects. F. Backfilling Curb: Upon completion of curing period, but not before 7 days has elapsed since pouring the concrete, backfill the curb. G. Adjusting: 1. Finished curb shall present a uniform appearance ' for both grade and alignment. 2. Remove curb sections showing abrupt changes in alignment or grade or which are more than 1/4 inch ' away from locatidn as staked or which are defective for any reason. 3. Construct new curb at Contractor's expense. 3.04 SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION A. Thickness of sidewalks shall be as shown on the ' drawings. B. Place, process, finish and cure concrete in conformance ' with this section and the applicable requirements of ACI 614. where the requirements differ, the more stringent shall govern. 1 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02514 - 4 95014 C D E. Placement of Preformed Asphalt Expansion Joints. 1. Where sidewalk ends. 2. Around posts poles or other objects protruding through the sidewalk. 3. At maximum intervals of 20 feet. Contraction Joints: 1. Provide transversely to the walks. 2. 3/16 inch by 1 inch weakened plane joints shall be straight and at right angles to the surface of the walk. Finish: 1. Broom finish with fine hair broom at right angles to length of walk and tool at all edges, joints and markings. 2. Mark walks transversely at intervals shown on drawings witli a jointing tool. END OF SECTION 02514 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 102514 - 5 95014 I SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Providing portland cement concrete paving except sidewalks. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Site Grading. B. Section 02510 - Asphalt Concrete Paving: Subgrade preparation. C. Section 02514 - Sidewalks. D. Section 03100 .- Concrete Work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 150 - Specification for Portland Cement. B. ASTM C 94 - Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. C. ASTM A 615 - Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM C-1018 Standard Test Method for Flexural Toughness and First Strength of Fiber Reinforced Concrete (Using Beam with Third Point Loading). E. ASTM D 1751 - Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non -Extruded and Resilient Bituminous Types). 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection and testing of concrete shall be performed by a firm appointed by Owner and paid for by Contractor from testing allowance. B. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cubic yards placed each day. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, and be cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. One slump test shall be taken for each set of test cylinders taker.. ITERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02520 - 1 95014 I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: for concrete pavin for Section 03100. B. Fine and Coarse Ag C. Water: Clean and alkali, organic ma D. No fly ash. D. Fly Ash: Type C types). Not to cold weather con 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Wire Fabric: Concrete Reinfo 2.03 FORMWORK A. Formwork: Mat stiffened to s deflection det concrete. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS TM C 150; Normal -Type I. Materials shall conform to the requirements regates: ASTM C 33. ree from injurious amounts of oil, ter, or other deleterious material. e F (do -not combine the two 20% of total mix. Do not use in below 60 degrees F. ications for Wire Fabric for t", ASTM A-185. tight fitting and adequately weight of concrete without al to tolerances and appearance of A. Curing Compound: translucent, suitable to ASTM C309, Type (Liquid membrane forming, clear or for spray application. Conform 1. B. Provide expansion joints with non -tracking joint sealer at not more than 20 terminate at steps' feet apart, and also where walks or abuts other work. C. Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 07900. D. Joint Filler: Minimum impregnated fiberkfoard 1/2 -inch thick asphaltic conforming to ASTM D 1751. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. - Mix and proportion 03100. 1 concrete as specified in Section TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 102520-- 2 95014 B. Concrete shall have minimum 4000 psi compressive strength at 28 days with maximum slump of 3 inches and 4 to 6 percent air entrainment. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures shall not relax cold weather placement requirements. Do not use calcium chloride. D. Use set -retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Ensure rough grading has brought subgrade to required elevations. B. Prepare subgrade in same manner as specified for asphalt concrete paving. 3.02 FORMING A. Form vertical surfaces to full depth and securely position to required line and levels. Ensure form ties are not placed so as to pass through concrete. B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit easy dismantling and stripping, and to prevent damage to concrete during formwork removal. 3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Lap welded wire fabric minimum of 12" in structural slabs. Lap minimum of 6" in slabs on ground. Support mesh in final position in slabs above grade. Lifting of mesh into final position is permitted for slabs on grade. 3.04 FORMING EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Place construction joints and expansion joints as shown on Drawings. B. Fit longitudinal and cross joints with filler of required profiles. Recess joint filler 1/4 -inch below finished concrete surface to allow for placement of sealant. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 02520 - 3 95014 3.05 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete con inuously between predetermined construction joints. B. Screed and wood float surfaces to uniform finish, free to open texturing and exposed aggregate. C. Avoid working mortir to surface. D. Round edges, including edges of expansion and construction joints, with 1/4 -inch radius edging tool. 3.06 FINISHING A. Flat surfaces: 1. Finish exposed concrete paved vehicular surfaces with wood float finish except where light broom finish is spe cified. 2. Ensure finished surfaces do not vary from true lines, levels, or grade, by more than 1/4 -inch in 10 feet in any direction when measured with straight edge. B. Install specified joint sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Joints that exceed 1/4" per foot slope must be primed in accordance with manufacturers recolinmendations. C. DO NOT ALLOW ANY TIRAFFIC OR LOADS OF ANY KIND ON CONCRETE FOR A PERIOD OF 14 DAYS MINIMUM. DO NOT ALLOW ANY HEAVY TRUCKS OR MACHINERY ON CONCRETE FOR A PERIOD OF 28 DAYS. MINIMUM. END OF SECTION 02520 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 102520 - 4 95014 SECTION 027,00 - STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Drainage work under this Contract includes pipes and' fittings. 1.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. American Society f r Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. D 1785, "PVC. Plastic. Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120". 2. D 2241, "PVC Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAIN PIPE A. Schedule 40 PVC p astic pipe conforming to ASTM D 1785, or SDR Standard PAC pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Pipe Joint Materials: Furnish pipe joint materials required for proper installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LAYING PIPE A. Carefully prepare bedding so pipe after installation will be true to line and grade. END OF SECTION 02700 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 102700-1 95014 SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 ALLOWANCE A. Contractor to allow in Base Bid the sum of $1,800.00 for "Design -Build" landscaping services. This includes landscape design, drawings, specifications, planting list, purchase price, taxes, delivery charges, instal- lation and warranties of all landscaping material to be selected after award of contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 02900 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II C2900-1 95014 SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Form cast -in -place concrete required and subsequently remove forms except as otherwise specified. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Concrete Reinforcement: Section 03200 B. Cast -in -place Concrete: Section 03300 D. Membrane Under Slabs on Grade: Section 07100 (Damp - proofing) 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen: Provide foreman at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, thoroughly familiar with type materials being installed, referenced standards, and requirements of this work, and who shall direct work performed under this Section. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03100-1 95014 B. Codes and 1. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in p'Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", publication ACI 347 of the American Concrete Institute. 2. Where provi conflict wi - stringent p PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Form Lumber: Pr exposed concrete for re -use of fo combination ther Architect: 1. "Plyform", American P1 2. Southern Pin' seasoned, su. B. Form Sealers: Pr' proved equal. 2.02 TIES AND SPREADERS A. Type: Type which concrete and whic every hole. B. Design: Metal no completion of con 2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS. A. Non -extruding, pr ASTM D 1751 or D material used to ns of pertinent codes and standards requirements of this Section more isions govern. de form lumber in contact with ing new material except as allowed Provide form lumber as follows, a or an equal approved in advance by ss I or II, bearing label of the od Association. or Douglas Fir, number 2 grade, aced 4 sides.' "React S" by Conspec, or ap- oes not leave an open hole through permits neat and solid patching at less than one -inch from surface at ete work. - moulded filler strips conforming to 52 and compatible with sealant al joints. 2.04 CONTROL JOINTS A. Non -staining materlIials; of wood, plastic, or metals, formed to be remoded without spalling concrete. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03100-2 - 95014 I Ii I II I I 2.05 KEYED JOINTS A. "Keyed Kold" joint form by Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc., or approved equal. Top of stakes set 3/811 below slab surface so when joint form is placed on stakes, painted portion of joint is finished elevation. Finish concrete to top of joint and burn in with hand trowel. 2.06 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for completion of concrete formwork as selected by Contractor subject to advance approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS A. General: Construct substantial, sufficiently tight forms to prevent fins and leakage of mortar, and able to withstand deflection when filled with wet concrete. B. Layout: 1. Form cast -in -place concrete to shapes, sizes, lines, and dimensions required. 2. Exercise particular care in form layout to avoid necessity for cutting of concrete after placement. 3. Make proper provision for inserts, sleeves, pipes, openings, offsets, recesses, anchorage, blocking, and related features as required. 4. If proposed layout of control joints differs from layout shown on drawings, Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of alternate layout plan to Ar- chitect for review. Do not proceed with alternate layout of control joints without written approval from Architect. 3.02 EARTH FORMING A. Forms for footings and related below grade concrete may be omitted when soil and workmanship permit accurate excavation to size and where omission is approved by Architect. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03100-3 95014 A 3.03 SCREED JOINTS A. Provide mechanical in placing concret with manufacturer' 3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS II "Keyed Kold" joint screed forms used slabs on grade installed to comply specifications. A. Where joint is made, thoroughly clean concrete surface and remove all lai'ance. In addition, thoroughly wet and slush verticall joints with a coat of neat cement grout immediately before placing new concrete. 3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Time for removing tions after concr manner to insure place building ma enough to carry t decide when to re bility for their orms is subject to weather condi- e is poured. Remove form work in mplete safety of structure. Do not rials on slabs until they are strong imposed load. Contractor shall ve forms and accept full responsi- 3.06 CHAMFERED CORNERS A. Chamfer corners of rectangular concrete members formed with wood forms except. where flush with adjacent -con- crete or masonry, or where covered with other materi- als. 3.07 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not run reinfo related fixed met concrete continuo filler strips for grade and all joi cal surfaces. Co depth of slab, un TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II ment, corner protection angles, or items, embedded in or bonded into through expansion joints. Provide pansion joints between slabs on . between slabs on grade and verti- ruct joints 1/2 -inch thick and full s otherwise noted. SECTION 03100 03100-4 95014 ' I II I El I II Ii SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish and install reinforcement and associated items required for cast -in -place concrete. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Placement of Embedded Items: Section 03100/03300 ' B. Reinforcement in Concrete Unit Masonry: Section 04200 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE I 1J I ■ II CC F I I A. Qualifications of Workmen: Provide foreman at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, thoroughly familiar with type materials being installed, referenced standards, and requirements of this work, and who shall direct work performed under this Section. B. Codes and Standards: 1. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", publi- cation ACI 315 of the American Concrete Institute. 2. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with requirements of this Section more stringent provisions govern. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Shop Drawings for review by Architect, on reinforcing steel including special details, bending diagrams, schedules, bar -lists, placing diagrams, and accessories. In addition to provisions in General Conditions, submit reinforcing Shop Drawings prepared by or under supervision of registered professional engineer. Reproduction (in any form) of Contract Drawings are not to be used for Shop Drawings. Furnish two prints and one sepia reproducible of Shop Drawings to Architect for review. Submit related shop drawings together. Partial submittals will not be accepted. ' TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03200-1 95014 PART 2 -'PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete Reinforcement Materials: New, free from rust, and complying with following reference standards: 1. Bars for Rein orcement: "Specifications for De- formed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforce- ment", ASTM AU615, grade 60 unless otherwise • shown. • 2. Wire Fabric: "Specifications for Wire Fabric for Concrete Rein orcement". ASTM A-185. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide metal acce sories, including spacers, chairs, ties, and devices necessary for properly assembling, placing, spacing, nd supporting reinforcement (includ- ing welded wire fabric at 2" from top of slab) in place. Provide mak.erials, not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation of concrete reinforce\ent, as selected by Contractor subject to approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Carefully in and verify w installation 2. Verify that installed to lations, app. design. B. Discrepancies: 1. In.event of tect; t installed work of other trades is complete to point where this properly commence. rete reinforcement may be ply with pertinent codes and regu- d Shop Drawings, and original screpancy, immediately notify Archi- 2. Do not procee$ with installation in areas of dis- crepancy until discrepancies have been fully re- solved. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II - 03200-2 95014 3.02 BENDING A. General: 1. Fabricate reinforcement to comply with approved Shop Drawings. 2. Do not use bars with kinks and bends not shown on Drawings or on approved Shop Drawings. 3. Do not bend and straighten steel in manner that will injure material. B. Assembly: Tack -welding not acceptable for assembly of reinforcement without specific approval of the Struc- tural Engineer. When permitted by Engineer all welding shall conform to reinforcing steel welding code (AWS D.12.1) of the American Welding Society. 3.03 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT A. Placing: 1. Support and wire together reinforcing bars to prevent displacement by construction loads and placing of concrete. On ground and where neces- sary, supporting concrete blocks may be used. Provide at flat formwork, metal or plastic coated bar chairs and spacers. Provide galvanized, stainless steel or plastic coated accessories where concrete surface will be exposed to weather in finished structure and where rust would impair architectural finishes. 2. Lap welded wire fabric minimum of 12" in structur- al slabs. Lap minimum of 6" in slabs on ground. Support mesh in final position in slabs above grade. Lifting of mesh into final position is permitted for slabs on grade. 3. Do not bend bars after embedded in concrete. B. Cleaning Reinforcement: Remove loose, flaky rust, mill scale, mud, oil, and related coatings that will destroy and reduce bond during concrete placement. C. Splices: Splice where shown on Drawings or approved Shop Drawings. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03200-3 95014 C D. Concrete Reinforcement Protection: If not detailed otherwise, where concrete is deposited against ground, reinforcement shall have minimum of 3" concrete between it and the ground. If concrete surfaces after removal of forms are to be in contact with ground or exposed to weather, protect r inforcing with minimum of 2" of concrete for bars larger than No. 5 and 1-1/2" for No. 5 bars and smallerl. Provide minimum 3/4" concrete covering for reinfbrcing in slabs and 1-1/2" minimum cover in beams at 6urfaces not exposed directly to ground or weather. END OF SECTION 03200 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II X03200-4 95014 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Cast -in -place, required. Provisions of this site improvement work as well at building. Provide grout fc columns and concrete fill for block where required. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS reinforced concrete Section are applicable to as to structural concrete it setting base plates for filling voids in concrete A. Concrete Formwork: Section 03100 B. Concrete Reinforcement: Section 03200 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen: 1. Provide foreman at all times during execution of this portion of the Work, thoroughly trained and experienced in placing type concrete specified and who shall direct work performed under this Sec- tion. 2. Finishing of Exposed Surfaces of Concrete: Use thoroughly trained and experienced journeyman concrete finishers. B. Codes and Standards: 1. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with pertinent recommendations of "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete", publication ACI 318 of latest issue of the American Concrete Institute. ' 2. where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with requirements of this Section more ' stringent provisions govern. 1.04 LABORATORY TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS '• A. All required testing will be performed by testing laboratory selected by Owner. Cost for laboratory services for concrete tests and mix designs paid by Contractor. Material for tests furnished by Contrac- tor. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03300-1 95014 L L • B. Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of certified laboratory test reports to Architect for review. • Testing procedures as follows: 1. Material Testing: Laboratory to re -check at plant materials as often as necessary to produce con- • crete of specified strength and consistency in- cluding: • (a) Fine agg egate. (b) Coarse aggregate.` - (c) Cast -in -place concrete. 2. Concrete Slump: 4" with allowable variation of plus or minus11 inch. 3. Quality Control: As work progresses testing labo- ratory personnel shall.conduct tests of concrete in accordance with following procedures: (a) Secure composite samples from the same batch complying with ASTM C 172. (b) Perform 1 slump test for each set of strength test cylinders complying with ASTM C 143.: (c) Make 1 strength test (4 specimens) for each 40 cubic yards and at least 1 set for each day's pour. (d) Mold 4 strength test specimens from each sample complying with ASTM C 31 and protect and curelunder standard moisture and tempera- ture conitions in accordance with Section 7 of aboveIASTM method. (e) Test 2 specimens at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days Complying with ASTM C 39. Average strength of 2 specimens from each group test- ed at 28 days is basis for acceptance of - - concrete If test result strength falls below strength specified, Architect shall have right to order removal and replacement of defective concrete at Contractor's expense. If Contractor wishes to obtain test cores from in -place concrete, cost of coring - and testing paid by Contractor. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03300-2 95014 ' I II II II PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM "Standard Specifica- tions for Portland Cement", C150, Type I. Use one brand of cement. IB. Aggregates: Conform to ASTM "Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates", C33. Provide aggregate of ' natural sand and gravel or prepared from stone or gravel, free from adherent coatings.. Maximum size of pieces 1", except for footings and foundation walls I. which may be 1-1/2" maximum size. Use pea gravel aggregate for concrete mix used for filling voids in concrete block walls where required. Aggregate for topping slabs not larger than 1/2" with 30% to 50% 'passing a 3/8" sieve. C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, ' acids, alkalis, organic materials, and deleterious substances. ' 2.02 CONCRETE STRENGTHS A. Cast -in -place Concrete: Designed to develop 3,000 p.s.i. minimum compressive strength at 28 days, includ- ' ing fill placed in voids of concrete block walls. Refer to Division 2, SITE WORK for strengths required for various concrete site improvements. ' 2.03 GROUT A. Non -shrink Grout (For setting of column base plates): Conspec "100", Euclid "Firmix", Master Builders "Em- beco", L & M "Ferrogrout", or approved equal. ' 2.04 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER A. Furnish and apply to concrete surfaces shown on finish ' schedule as "Sealed Concrete", polyurethane concrete sealer "Ura Seal" by Conspec, "Sonothane" by Sonneborn Building Products, "Durathane" by L & M, or approved ' equal. Apply per manufacturers recommendations. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS '• A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation of cast - in -place concrete, selected by Contractor subject to approval of Architect. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03300-3 95014 L PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MIXING AND PLACING A. Preparation: Clea crete. Remove del occupied by concre material from hart concrete is added. B. Mixing: Ready - accordance with 94. equipment for transporting con- s, water, and ice from places to be Remove laitance and unsound ed concrete before additional concrete, mixed and delivered in wing requirements only of ASTM C 1. Tolerances ml Slump, 2. Measuring Mat rials, 3. Batching Plant, 4. Mixers and Agitators, 5. Mixing and Delivery, 6. Use of Non -Agitating Equipment 7. Inspection. C. Conveying: Convey concrete from mixer to place of deposit by methods that prevent separation and loss of materials. D. Placing: 1. Deposit as nearly as practicable in final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling.. and flow- ing. Place atE rate to assure concrete -is plastic and flows readily -into spaces between bars. Do not use concrete contaminated by foreign material or retemperediconcrete. 2. When placing is started, carry a continuous opera- tion until placement of panel or section is com- pleted. E. Hot Weather Concreting: Place, handle, and cure con- crete complying with ACI 305. F. Cold Weather Concreting: Provide adequate equipment for handling concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing and near freezing weather. Concrete materials, reinforcements, forms, and ground in contact with concrete to be free of frost, snow, and ice. Details of approved procedures are available in ACI 306. Contractor to keep accurate thermometer on job where the work is proceeding. 1 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03300-4 - 95014 II E L F F I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.02 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT SURFACES A. Contractor responsible for any work soiled and stained by dripping cement, water, or concrete. Protect same with tarpaulin or similar devices while pouring con- crete. 3.03 CONSOLIDATION A. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading, rodding, or forking. Work around reinforcement, embedded items and into corner of forms. Over -vibrating and use of vibra- tors to transport concrete within forms not allowed. When consolidating by vibration, keep spare vibrator on job site during concrete placing. Use vibrators of length to extend within 6 inches of bottom of freshly poured concrete, vibrator being raised with each succeeding pour. 3.04 CONCRETE CURING AND FINISHING A. Curing Period: Cure concrete for minimum period of 7 days at a temperature above 500 F. by one of approved methods listed below. Protect fresh concrete from heavy rain, flowing water, mechanical injury and from injurious action of sun. B. Water Curing: If cured with water, keep concrete wet by mechanical sprinklers or by any approved method which will keep surface continuously wet. C. Saturated Sand Curing: Cover finished surfaces with minimum 1" thickness of sand, uniformly distributed and continuously water saturated during entire curing period. D. No chemical curing compounds allowed. E. Waterproofing Paper or Opaque Polyethylene Film: Conform to ASTM C 171. Cover concrete immediately following final finishing operation. Anchor securely, seal edges or apply in manner to prevent moisture escaping from concrete. F. Concrete Patching: Immediately after stripping forms, examine surfaces. Patch honeycombing, defective joints, voids, tie -holes, and defects before concrete is thoroughly dry. However, make no attempt to correct or fill any honeycomb spots, or any other defects until they have been examined by Architect and approval obtained as to correction to be employed. Finish of patch to match adjoining surface. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03300-5 G. Slab Finishes, In ping slabs, to be dense surface, ex Rough float finis floors during con H. Slab Finishes, Ex broomed finish fa 3.05 SEALING OF EXPANSION A. Seal with hot-pou ASTM D 1190. rior: Floor slabs, including top- mooth and steel troweled to hard pt where required to be depressed. depressed surface. Protect concrete ruction period. rior: Pads and slabs to have non -slip surface. type joint sealer conforming to END OF SECTION 03300 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 103300-6 95014 II SECTION 03500 - CEMENTITIOUS DECKS PART 1 - GENERAL u['F:14eic I:b?1 A. Work Included: Furnish and install cementitious type roof decks specified. B. Provide composite roof insulation system of lightweight insulating concrete placed over galvanized metal decking. C. Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. Section Section Section 05300 06100 07411 Metal Decking Rough Carpentry Metal Roofing 4. Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. The following are required by Architect for review of proposed system: 1. Manufacturer's product data for each product required along with application instructions. 2. Laboratory test results for Thermal Resistance Values based on ASTM specification C-177 or C-158. 3. Test reports showing compliance with Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories. 4. Shop drawings indicating slopes and specific details. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. ' TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 33500-1 95014 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specification�.s and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor tions, if equivalent 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11 warrant that proposed substitu- pted, will provide performance the materials specified herein. A. Applicator must be approved in writing by system manufacturer. B. System must be tes ed, approved and listed in Factory Mutual Approved Gu(de for Class 1, I-60.and I-90 Windstorm ConstrucFion. C., System must be tes ed, approved and listed in Under- writers Laboratories "Building Materials Directory" for Class 90 Wind Uplift Resistance. D. Pre -roofing Conference will be conducted prior to installation of the roof system with representatives from all related Hades in attendance. E. Upon completion of roof deck work, aggregate manufac- turer or processin distributor to furnish Architect certificate signed( by an authorized representative stating that applicator is approved and that insulating concrete was prepared and applied in compliance with specifications of vermiculite aggregate manufacturer in effect at time ins:allation was made. F. Take minimum of four 3" x 6" samples during each day's pour (prepared according to ASTM C 495) and submit with field reports on daily wet density checks to indicate ultimate physical qualities of the concrete. Perform sampling and testing -by aggregate manufacturer's representative or trained, approved, applicator's superintendent. G. Comply with Americ A122.1, "Vermiculi Grade", latest iss 1.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND A. Deliver materials acceptable bulk c B. Store packaged elements and p National Standard Institute (ANSI) Concrete Roofs and Slabs on manufacturer's original package or is to. protect them from the damage. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 103500-2 95014 ' I II C. Do not use cement which shows indications of moisture damage, caking or other signs of deterioration. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Use normal placement 400 F. or above are after placement. B. When temperatures at F., use hot water in point of placement. procedure when air temperatures of predicted for the first 72 hours time of placement are below 400 the range of 900 F. to 1100 at the C. Do not place system on surfaces with standing water present. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Cementitious deck system consists of light weight insulating concrete as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co., or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stabilized vermiculite aggregate will conform to ASTM C-332, Group 1. Deliver material to job site with clear identification as to manufacturer and type of material and with Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories approval label. B. Portland cement will conform to ASTM C-150, Type I, II or III. C. Calcium chloride or any admixture containing chloride salts will not be allowed. ■ D. Reinforcing mesh may be required in some fire rated assemblies. Provide "Keydeck" style 2160-2-1619 I galvanized mesh or approved equal. E. Use only potable, clean water free from deleterious amounts of acid, alkali and organic materials. 11 I ' TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 03500-3 95014 2.03 DESIGN MIX A. Conform to the properties: 1. Cement to 2. Minimum co 3. Density at 4. Oven dry d PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Applicator is res of the substrate. used. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Place the system sufficient time t that will screed B. The in -place syst ±5% of the volume C. Fill the metal de insulating concre the. corrugat ions. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Check the cast de ment. specifications for physical regate ratio 1:6 cf essive.strength 125 PSI acement 44-60 pcf ity 22-28 pcf ible for inspection and approval suitability for the system being th approved equipment. Mix for a provide a consistent, thorough mix a smooth surface. will have a volume equal to 100% f aggregate used. corrugation with a slurry of to a level 1/8" above the top of ity hourly at the point of place - B. Retain material specimens at least four times for each day's pour. The specimen, 3" x 6" cylinders, shall be protected from damage and temperature extremes and tested in accordance with ASTM C-495. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not expose the -'system to the elements for a pro- longed period of time. Do not use the system as a temporary working surface without adequate surface protection. This system will not be considered as a temporary dry -in. END OF SECTION 03500 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 103500-4 95014 , I II 04100 - MORTAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: M mortar for use in masonry construct 1.02 CLASSIFICATION OF re, batch, and mix specified type icated locations and types of as specified. A. Classification by Volume Measurements: Unless other- wise approved by Architect, conform to ASTM C 270 - 89 (or latest versionh, Table 1, for Cement -lime Mortar. B. Classification by Vest: 1. Strength test prepared in 1 Owner, using portions prop curing of mor ASTM Specific tory tests, i 3. Minimum Compr Not less than (or latest ve Mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS if required, determined with mortar boratory selected by Architect or epresentative materials and in pro- sed for use. Preparation of and ar and test cubes shall conform to tion C 270 of latest issue. Labora- required, paid for by Contractor. ssive Strength at End of 28 Days: that prescribed in ASTM C 270 - 89 sion), Table 2, for Cement -lime A. Basic Requirements l: Conform to ASTM C 270 for materi- als, aggregate, and water and for storage, measurement, and mixing. Weights per cubic foot of materials in mortar are considered as follows: MATERIAL 1. Portland C 2. Sand: damp 3. Hydrated Lime B. Portland Cement: WEIGHT PER CUBIC FOOT 94 lb. loose 1 Cu. ft. contains 80 lbs. dry sand 40 lb. I or II conforming to ASTM C150 C. Sand: Clean sharp granules, free from loam, acids, alkalies, soluble �alts, clay, or organic matter, conforming to ASTM C 144. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 04100-1 95014 D. Quicklime for Lime Putty: Conform to ASTM C 5 with lime slaked and putty prepared in accordance with ASTM C 270. If hydrated lime is used conform to ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Mortar for Laying Exterior Masonry: Waterproofed with Sonneborn "Hydrocide", Horn "Hydratite Liquid", Lambert "Mortartite", or approved equal, measured and mixed into mortar complying with manufacturer's directions. 2.02 MORTAR FOR STONE WORK I II II II II C I I I 1 E A. Composed of'1 part non -staining cement to 3 parts sand with 1/5 part hydrated lime, based on volume of cement used. Pointing mortar composed of 1 part non -staining cement to not more than 2 parts white sand having sufficient hydrated lime added to make as stiff a mixture as can be worked. Grout for stonework composed of 1 part non -staining cement to not more than 1-1/2 parts fine white sand, mixed in small quantities of as thick a consistency as can be worked into the joints. Stir grout vigorously until used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MORTAR MIXING A. Mix complying with manufacturer's instructions. Mix in batches for work immediately on hand. Measure by known capacity volume using barrow, buggy, manufacturer's packages, or related containers or by using approved batching device so specified proportions are consis- tently maintained. Do not use material that has par- tially set, been retempered, or used, frozen, caked, or become lumpy. Mix mortar with proper water amount for minimum of 3 minutes to desired consistency in batch mixer. No anti -freeze compound admixtures permitted. Use mortar of as wet a consistency as can conveniently be handled. Do not use mortar which has greatly stiff- ened and in which cementing material has started to set. Do not retemper mortar. 3.02 MORTAR USES A. Use Type "M" mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth. B. Use Type "N" mortar for general masonry above grade. END OF SECTION 04100 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 04100-2 95014 SECTION 041501 - MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish and install specified joint reinforcement, anchors, ties, control joints, and related masonry accessories. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for omparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality s�andards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after. the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting t4hnical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accapted, will provide performance equivalent tolthe materials specified herein. 1.02 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Protect masonry accessory materials be- fore, during, and after installation. Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Replacements: In event of damage, immediately make replacements necessary to approval of Architect and at - Contractor's expense. PART 2 --PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL 'ACCESSORIES A. Stone Anchors: Dur-O-Wal for ar Class 82 finish. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II products by Hohman & Barnard or I of stone facing with ASTM A153 04150-1 II 95014 ' I II PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Install masonry accessories at proper stages of masonry construction specified in Section 04200, "Unit Mason- ry", and as required for performance of proper masonry workmanship. END OF SECTION 04150 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 04150-2 95014 U SECTION 0 200 - UNIT MASONRY ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish labor, tools, scaffolding, and , required equipment, and materials for masonry construc- • tion specified andi required to provide high quality masonry workmanship. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein, establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products.I Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product: Products proposed as equivalent MUST be • submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Akchitect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded.DO NOT request approval of products priok to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting tecbhnical data, samples, published ' specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Mortar: Section 04100 B. Masonry Accessories: Section 04150 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen: 1. For actual cutlting and placing of masonry units, use skilled journeyman masons thoroughly experi- enced with materials and methods specified and thoroughly familiar with design requirements. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 04200-1 95014 II 2. Have one skilled journeyman mason present at all times during execution of work of this Section who shall personally direct and execute this portion of the Work. B. Erect on site one sample panel, 4' long by 2' high, using masonry facing material required. Use full size units to show color range, texture, bond, profile of joints, and workmanship. After approval, panel will be standard for minimum workmanship requirements. Do not remove panel until authorized by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIELD STONE A. Provide dark natural colored, weathered field stone to match existing. Furnish stone of assorted sizes, approximate thickness for veneer wall to match existing. Stone face dimension requirements are to match existing. Provide samples for approval by Architect prior to delivery. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FREEZING WEATHER A. Do not lay masonry when outside air temperature is below 40 degrees F., unless suitable means are provided to heat masonry materials and to protect completed work from freezing for at least 48 hours. 3.02 CLEANING PREMISES A. Mason Contractor: Remove rubbish and building materi- als left over from operations under his charge, whenev- ' er directed by General Constructor. Premises must be left clear and clean. When buildings are completed, completely remove mortar droppings. ' 3.03 POINTING AND CLEANING A. Cut out defective mortar joints. Refill solidly with ' mortar and tool to match adjacent work. B. On completion clean exposed masonry, removing foreign material, excess mortar and stains. Apply cleaning ' solution to sample area of approximately 20 square feet at an inconspicuous location approved by Architect. Use cleaning solution specially manufactured for this ' purpose, applying in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Drench masonry with clean water before TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 04200-2 95014 I I applying solution, and after cleaning, rinse with clean ' water to remove all traces of solution. Protect mate- rials adjacent tomasonry from contact with cleaning . solution. C. High Pressure Wate will not be allowe by architect and m water is to be use cleaning takes pla cleaning solution is complete. Allo seven (7) days bef cleaning. After c turer for cleaning panel of all the m Apply water at a p to exceed 800 psi) between 3 and 6 ga type, stainless st spray. Do not use cation of acidic c pressure system wi sealer until mason been reviewed by A 3.04 LAYING FIELD STONE A. Lay field stone fa random sizes with joints out 3/4" to stone facing to ha foot of facing are apart around perim using galvanized " wire ties made for 3.05 CLEANING STONE WORK A. Clean exposed fac again after compl brushes and soap vigorously and th water. For surfa related abrasives the finish of the END TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II Cleaning: This method of cleaning • on masonry surfaces unless approved sonry manufacturer. High pressure to saturate the masonry before e and may be used to rinse away nd foreign particles after cleaning mortar to cure for a minimum of re subjecting it to high pressure nsulting with Architect and-manufac- recommendations, test clean a sample terials selected for the work. essure ranging from 300-500 psi (not Provide a flow rate of water ions per minute through a "Fan" el tip dispersing a 25° to 50° fan less than 15° fan spray tip. .Appli- eaning compounds through the high 1 not be allowed. Do not apply y is completely dry and cleaning has chitect. ing and solid walls uncoursed in ull mortar joints. Rake mortar 1" deep from face to stone. Anchor king. using one tie for each square , with ties spaced not more than 16" ter of openings. Provide metal ties " wire ties or galvanized adjustable tying stone to backing. of stone work as stone is set and on.' Clean stone with stiff fiber der solution, rubbing surface rinsing thoroughly with clean stains, use of sand and brushes or 11 only be permissible insofar as one is not changed. SECTION 04200 04200-3 95014 , I SECTION 05100 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: framing, column steel shapes and 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Metal Joists: B. Metal Decking: C. Miscellaneous Me 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standard pertinent codes an 1. AISC "Specifi and Erection Latest Editio 2. AISC "Code of 3. AISC "Specifi - Allowable S Latest Editio ish and erect specified steel s, lintels and related structural essories. Section 05200 Section 0530-0 Section 05500 In addition to.. complying with regulations, comply with: ation for the Design, Fabrication, E Structural Steel for Buildings", Standard Practice", Latest Edition. ation for Structural Steel Buildings ress Design and Plastic Design", 4. AISC "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specifica- tion for Structural Steel Buildings", Latest Edi- tion. 5. "Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society. 6. "Specificatioks for Architecturally Exposed Struc- tural Steel" bf the American Institute of Steel Construction. 7. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Paint- ing Manual, Vol. 1, Good Painting Practice. Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specifica- tions. 8. Conform to AS+M A 6, "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling And Bars for Structural- Use". TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 05100-1 95014 II B. Conflicting Requirements: in event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations and requirements of referenced standards or these specifications, provi- sions of more stringent govern. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Furnish Shop Drawings, for review by Architect, on structural steel showing necessary fabrication details, fittings, fastenings, anchorage and erection details. In addition to provisions of the General Conditions, prepare structural steel Shop Drawings by or under the supervision of a registered professional engineer. Do I L1 I I I Drawings for Shop Drawings. Furnish two prints and one sepia reproducible of Shop Drawings submitted to Archi- tect for review. Submit related shop drawings togeth- er; partial submittals will not be accepted. Furnish mill certificates on foreign steel proposed for use and not produced within the continental USA. Include with mill certificates certified copies of mill test reports giving names and locations of mills and shops, and chemical analysis and physical properties of steel required for this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Steel Shapes and Plates: Provide structural steel shapes and plates, not otherwise indicated on Struc- tural Drawings using high -strength steel, 36,000 p.s.i. min. yield point, conforming to ASTM Designation A 36. Furnish structural steel for this Project manufactured within continental limits of the United States of America unless mill certificates are submitted to and approved by Structural Engineer. B. Pipe Columns: Meet ASTM A 53, seamless grade B. C. Rectangular Tubing: Meet ASTM A 500 Grade B or have equal yield, ultimate, and weldability properties. 2.02 BOLTS AND NUTS A. High Strength Bolts: 1. Meet ASTM A 325 for high strength bolts. 2. Use high strength friction bolts for bolted connections unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3. Make bolt holes 1/16" larger than bolt. diameter. 4. Exclude threads from shear plane of bolts. ' B. Machine Bolts and Anchor Bolts: Meet ASTM A 307. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II C5100-2 95014 2.03 PAINT A. For surface prepa painting of struc "Steel Structures the Steel Structu B. Shop Paint: Lead Series, Southern approved equal me P-86, Type I, and with no blisterin or rust creepage. 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS A. For materials, no for complete and steel, use new ma of their respecti Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND DIMENS A. Contractor to veri site. Bring any c and dimensions sho condition which wi of steel work as d soon as they are d for errors of Shop fitting, and align or field splices i not acceptable unl 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Fabricate and eri for the Design F; Steel for Build!: tice" as adopted Construction. 3.03 WELDING A. Shop and field wel are acceptable on not more than 2 ye All others must ha complying with AWS TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II on, shop painting and touch-up 1 steel shapes, conform to the nting Manual", Volumes 1 and 2, of Painting Council. ee, alkyd primer; Tnemec 10-99 tings Enviro-Guard 1-2900, or ng performance requirements of TT- ssing ASTM B 117 after 500 hours cracking, softening, delamination scribe.and rusting at edges. specifically described but required oper installation of structural rial, free from rust, first quality kinds, and subject to approval of y measurements and dimensions at job nflict between actual measurements n on the Drawings and any existing 1 prevent fabrication and erection tailed t'o attention of Architect as scovered. Contractor responsible Drawings, fabrication, correct ent of the structural members. Shop standard 'structural rolled shapes ss shown on Contract Drawings. to comply with the "Specifications ication, and Erection of Structural and the "Code of Standard Prac- the American Institute of Steel ers continuously employed as welders asis of satisfactory reports dated rs prior to award of this Contract. e been requalified in past 6 months D 1.0, Appendix. 05100-3 95014 I 1 11 11 L I I I I 1 I I II I I I 3.04 LINTELS A. Furnish and place structural steel lintels required for openings unless concrete lintels or reinforced concrete block lintels are shown on Drawings. Build structural members size marked on Drawings or if not shown as determined by the Structural Engineer.. Weld members together with exterior weld being a continuous bead to prevent water from running between the members. Bear on walls 8 inches at each end for openings up to 6'-0" wide and 10 inches for wider openings where not other- wise shown. 3.05 HIGH -STRENGTH BOLTING A. Comply with the "Specification of Structural Joints" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation using calibrated -wrench tightening or turn -of -nut tightening methods. By either method, use of a calibrating device to check tools and equipment and to provide means of reliable inspection. When turn -of -nut method tighten- ing is used to provide bolt tension complying to ASTM A 325, match -mark outer face of nut with the protruding bolt point before final tightening for visual means of noting actual nut rotation. Above marks may be made by wrench operator with crayon or daub of paint, after bolts have been brought to "snug tight" condition. 3.06 INSPECTION A. Owner will pay for cost of inspection of welded fabri- cation and erection of steel using an independent inspecting agency selected by Architect. Representa- tives of inspecting agency shall have access at any and all times to areas on Project site where steel work is being performed for close visual inspection of the Work. Correct as directed welded and high strength bolted connections found to be unsatisfactory by the inspecting service, at Contractor's expense and to satisfaction of the inspecting agency. Two principal methods for making nondestructive tests on weldments by the inspection laboratory service are radiographic and magnetic particle testing. At discretion of the in- spection service, ultrasonic testing may be substituted for either magnetic particle or radiographic testing. 3.07 ERECTION A. Use Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings of A_SC except as otherwise specified. B. Sequence: Contractor responsible For erection method and sequence. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 05100-4 95014 I C. Progress: As erection progresses, secure the work to take care of deadIloads, wind, and erection stresses. Where structural Steel is being erected, completely connect the in -place work in the tier below. D. Alignment: After erection, accurately align and adjust the various membe s forming parts of a completed frame and structure before being made secure. E. Tolerances: AISCICode of Standard Practice apply except as otherwise specified. F. Erection Shims: Sufficient shims may be installed to maintain structure within tolerances. Maximum shim thickness at any one joint no greater. .than 1/2 -inch. G. Field Assembly: Provide even bearing at field erected column splices and related compression joints which depend upon contact bearing upon completion with re- spect to the centIoid of the contact area. Provide at least 65 percent of the entire contact area in full bearing and the separation of any remaining portion not to exceed 0.02 inches, except locally at toes of flang- es where a 50 percent greater separation is permissi- ble; otherwise perform corrective measures. H. Anchors: Locate aid install anchor bolts -and anchors, preset by templates, into connecting work. Provide bearing plates under ends of primary structural members resting on masonry and set in full beds of non -shrink grout. I. Base Plates: Support and align column base plates on steel leveling devLaces. After support members have been plumbed and pkoperly positioned and anchor nuts tightened, pack sottidly entire bearing area under plate with non -shrink grout specified in "Concrete" Division of these Specifica6ions. Leave leveling devices in place and cut off flush with edge of column base plates. I END OF SECTION 05100 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 105100-'5 95014 SECTION 05200 - METAL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish, erect, and brace open web steel joists specified. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A.- Structural Steel: Section 05100 B. Metal Decking: Section 05300 C. Miscellaneous Metal: Section 05500 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply to following specifications and code, with modifications specified: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction and the Steel Joist Institute Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists. 2. American Welding Society D1.0 Code for Welding in Building Construction. B. Joist designation requirements denotes joist depth, series and chord size. C. Perform steel joist design and manufacture by an SJI member to comply with AISC-SJI Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists for the series required. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS ■ A. Submit Shop Drawings for review. Steel joists deliv- ered to site before Shop Drawings have been reviewed '• are subject to rejection. Furnish one print and one sepia reproducible of all Shop Drawings for Architect review. Submit related shop drawings together; partial submittals will not be accepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.01 OPEN -WEB STEEL JOISTS A. Conform to the "Standard Specifications and Load Ta- •' bles" of the Steel Joist Institute. Fabricate by member of the Steel Joist Institute. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 05200-1 95014 I 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials required for comp joists, of new, f of their respecti Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP COAT A. Paint joists and coat using type s ing to requiremen Paint joists and coat using type t the finish coat. spray method and practicable, do n welding. If pain steel for minimum of surface to be are steel surface welding. After e and touch up weld same paint as sho, B. Shop Paint: Lead Series, Southern C approved equal mee P-86, Type I, and with no blistering or rust creepage a 3.02 ERECTION A. Fasten joists -in receiving any con connections by we use connections s extensions where system. not specifically described but to and proper installation of steel e from rust, first quality material kinds, subject to approval of cessories with protective paint shop ndard with manufacturer and conform - of the Steel Joist Institute. cessories exposed to view with shop t will not bleed through or affect pply shop coat by dip, brush or oroughly work into joints. Where paint surfaces subject to erection d, remove paint to expose clean .istance of 2 inches on either side lded.• Included in this requirement to which joists are attached by ction, wire brush field connections corroded or abraded areas with coat. ree, alkyd primer; Tnemec 10-99 atings Enviro-Guard 1-2900, or ing performance requirements of TT- assing ASTM B 117 after 500 hours cracking, softening, delamination scribe and rusting at edges. ce and install bridging prior to uction loads. Join steel to steel ng. Where joists bear on masonry into the masonry. Provide joists uired for attachment of ceiling B. Erection Welding: (Comply with AWS D1.0, Code for Welding in Building Construction. C. Accessories: Furnish special fitting for openings, overhangs and ceiling extenders where required and not otherwise detailed or specified. END OF SECTION 05200 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 05200-2 95014 SECTION C53C0 - METAL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish and erect steel decking speci- fied. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Following items are described in the indicated Sections of these specifica- tions. Cooperate with all trades to ensure proper interface of metal decking with work of those trades: 1. Structural Steel: Section 05100 2. Metal Joist: Section 05200 3. Miscellaneous Metal: Section 05500 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Following specifications and codes govern with modifi- cations specified herein: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute: Light Gauge Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual. • 2. Steel Deck Institute: Code of Recommended Stan- dard Practice and Basic Design Specifications. 3. American Welding Society: Code for Welding in Building Construction. B. Conflicting Requirements: In event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations, referenced standards requirements and these specifications, provisions of the more stringent govern. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Before metal decking is delivered to job site, submit Shop Drawings to Architect for review. Submit related shop drawings together; partial submittals will not be accepted. 2. Show sizes, locations, marking of decking units, sizes of holes to be cut in the shop, end closures types and fittings, and methods of securing, an- choring, and attaching to structural members. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II C5300-1 95014 3. Show verification that members used are adequate to carry live and dead loads involved. 4. Show welds, both shop and field, by currently recommended symbols of the American Welding Soci- ety. 5. - Furnish one rirint and one sepia reproducible of Shop Drawings for Architect review. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of (products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted th4,ough the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of - products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting telchnical data, samples, published • specifications and -the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor sh 11 warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. PART 2.- PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL CENTERING A. Slotted Steel Cen "Tensilvent 50" b, proved equal.manu. Institute. FurnL galvanized finish 1/2 percent open high -strength, fu. Grade E, with sta; design thickness :ring for Concrete Forming: Provide Wheeling Corrugating Co., or ap- ,ctured by member of the Steel Deck i centering with ASTM A5.25, Class G60 .nd slot pattern to allow minimum 1 - ea per square foot of roof. Provide -hard steel conforming to ASTM A446, Lard 9/16 inch rib depth and minimum 0.0149 inches. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 05300-2 95014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal decking to comply with final Shop Drawings and the referenced standards. 3.02 ERECTION A. General: Erect metal decking to comply with the Draw- ings and final Shop Drawings, aligning straight, plumb, and level. B. Provide sump plates or pans, cant strips, vent clips, and rubber closures required for complete and proper installation. C. Cut decking to provide openings required by structural design Drawings and holes required for work of other trades. Form penetrations where decking is to receive concrete prior to concrete placement. Cut decking only after concrete has attained 75s of its design strength. D. Touch-up field welds and burned and abraded spots in shop finish using material equivalent to shop finish. END OF SECTION 05300 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 05300-3 95C14 SECTION 05500; - MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Finnish and install miscellaneous metal items required and' specified. Provide miscellaneous bolts, anchors, suports, braces, and connections necessary for competion of Work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Welders: Use certified welders°and the shielded arc process for welding performed in connection with work of this Section. B. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with pertinent codes ana regulations, comply with: 1. "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and ' Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" of the American Institute of Steel Construction. 2. "Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society. C. Conflicting Requirements: In event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations, requirements of the referenced standards, and these specifications, provi- sions of more stringent govern. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Products specified herein establish a quality standard i for comparison by anufacturers of similar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the substitution of products that do -not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for review by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of prod- ucts prior to the awarding of the contract. B. Supporting technicll data, samples, published specifi- cations and the like must be submitted for comparison. C. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitutions, • if accepted, will provide performance equivalent to the materials specified herein. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 05500-1 95014 II PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ANCHORS AND FASTENINGS A. Furnish anchors, fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts and washers, toggle bolts, wire ties, powered drives, partition anchors, and slots required for proper fas- tening of all components of Work. 2.02 SOFFIT VENTS A. Aluminum Soffit Vent Strips: Provide Superior Metal Trim "SRV Series", depth as required for proper instal- lation based on EIFS thickness, extruded aluminum chan- nels, perforated for ventilation, as manufactured by Delta Star, Inc, 3550 Mayflower Dr., Lynchburg, VA 24506-0429, Ph. 1-800-368-3017, or approved equal. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS A. Provide Balco-Metalines Type 75FPE at floors and Type 75FVPE-1 at wall/floor conditions, or approved equal. Provide units in mill finish aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP I I l L II A. Clean metal free from mill scale, flake rust, and pitting. Weld or bolt permanent connections. Drill or punch holes for bolts and screws producing clean true lines and surfaces. Weld continuous along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is called for. Grind smooth exposed welds. Provide smooth surface for in place, exposed work except for non -slip finishes. Where tight fits are required, mill to a close fit. Cope or miter corner joints, well forming to produce true alinement. Use concealed fastenings where possible. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water. Accurately set work to establish lines and elevations and securely fasten in place. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II END OF SECTION 05500 05500-2 95014 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Includes: Provide rough carpentry, and installa- tion of items specified in other Sections, normally installed by carpenters. In general, this work in- cludes the following: 1. Concealed framing, studs, blocking, backing, and furring. 2. Braces, stripping, cants, grounds, and nailers necessary to install millwork, toilet room acces- sories, and to receive or back work of other trades. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS F I I I C J A. Form Lumber: Section 03100 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material Grading: Identify hardboard, particleboard, lumber, and plywood by affixing grademark, stamp, or related identifying marks indicating material grades, rules or standards under which they are produced, and complying with rule or standard under which the materi- al is produced. Use certified inspection agency certi- fied by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade lumber species. Apply association grademark for moldings and millwork to each bundle in bundled stock. In lieu of piece grademarking, a cer- tificate of inspection from an agency certified by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee may be furnished for precut lumber. Applicable grading rules are as follows: 1. Douglas Fir, White Fir, and Cedar: "Standard Grading and Dressing Rules for West Coast Lumber" as published by the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. Ponderosa and Western White Pine: "Grading Rules for Western Lumber", published by the Western Wood Products Association. 3. Southern Yellow Pine: "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber" as published by the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 06100-1 95014 I B. Wood Preservative Treatment: Label each piece of pressure treated lumber and plywood with the quality control mark of the American Wood Preservers Bureau showing compliance with appropriate standard. C. Plywood: Conform by the National B each standard siz panel. When used formance standard Standard PS 1 for al identified as approved agency -o appropriate affix in addition to ab wood for permanen cations. D. Qualifications of 1. Provide suffi .foreman prese this portion • type construc niques specif 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: o U. S. Product Standard PS 1 issued eau of Standards. Stamp or brand panel to show type and grade of structurally, plywood to meet per - for its type as described in Product iouglas Fir plywood. Furnish materi- species, grade, and glue type by an independent testing laboratory with grade -marks on each -panel. Provide -e requirements, exterior type ply - .y exposed plywood in outdoor appli- ient skilled workmen and carpenter t at all times during execution of f the Work, thoroughly familiar with ion involved, materials and tech - 1. Store materials to ensure proper ventilation and drainage. ..Protect against damage and weather. 2. Deliver materials to job site and store, in safe area, out of the way of traffic, and shored off ground surface. 3. Identify framing lumber as to grades and store grades separately. 4. Protect metal products with adequate weatherproof outer wraooin•s. 5. Use extreme care in off-loading lumber to prevent damage, splitt,�ing, and breaking..materials. B. Replacements: In repairs and repla Architect at Cont TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II of damage, immediately make s necessary to approval of Is expense. 06100-2 95014 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER A. Provide lumber for structural carpentry using following species provided grade for each is not lower than minimum shown: Cedar, Western Red, & Incense - WCLIB Rules Standard Fir, Douglas - WCLIB Rules Standard Fir, White - WCLIB Rules Standard Pine, Western White* - WWPA Rules Standard Pine, Southern Yellow - SPIB Rules (KD)' No. 2 Common Redwood - RIS Rules Construction Heart * Includes Idaho, Lodgepole, Ponderosa, and Sugar Pine. B. Lumber (except where otherwise noted): Surfaced 4 sides unless, in addition to being dressed, it has been notched, shiplapped, or patterned. C. Lumber Dimensions: Are nominal. 2.02 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT F I A. Pressure treat concealed wood including lumber, grounds, nailers, blocking, backing, rough framing, and lumber in contact with the ground, in contact with concrete or masonry within 24" of the ground, installed on or above roof deck, and required as "treated", complying with published Standards of the American Wood Preserver's Association and as follows: 1. Pressure treat with water -borne preservatives complying with AWPB-LP-2 in a closed cylinder using vacuum -pressure process to a net dry reten- tion of 0.35 lbs. per Cu. ft. 2. Use paintable type preservative formulated for treating lumber to be painted or lumber which will come in contact with finish materials. ' 3. Dry to 19% maximum moisture content after treat- ment. Brush two coats of same preservative used in treatment, to end cuts, holes, notches and splits. Dry all lumber. 4. Kiln dry lumber used for trim and millwork to range of 8% to :2% moisture content. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 06100-3 iI 95014 L 2.03 PLYWOOD A. Plywood: DouglaslFir Plywood, Standard Grade with exterior glue, meeting U.S. Product Standard PS 1. Furnish plywood for underlayment using Underlayment Grade with exterior glue. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Provide rough hardware required for proper installation of carpentry work Furnish hot -dipped galvanized, nails, spikes, screws, bolts, and similar items using proper types and ample sizesto fasten and hold the various members securely in place. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials required for a co new material, sui ject to approval PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. Carpentry: Produ nailed. Lay out, ring, stripping, encountered. B. All Work: Plumb, nails, spikes, at attachment and ri C. Any piece of work that prevent it f satisfactorily, i, otherwise defecti of grade specific acceptable piece. 3.02 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary related openings i weather and advers good repair and re door and window fr END not specifically described but plete and proper installation using able for the intended use, and sub - f Architect.. _ joints true, tight, and well stall and fit. wood framing, fur - blocking as required by conditions evel, and brace with sufficient bolts required to ensure secure dity. • carpentry material with defects i serving its intended purpose uding crooked, warped, bowed, or material, even if within the limits will be rejected. Replace with an PROTECTION closures at door, window, and exterior wall's, as necessitated by conditions. Maintain enclosures in ve when no longer needed. Protect SECTION 06100 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 106100-4 95014 ' I I SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish and install millwork, trim, hardware and accessories specified. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 B. Painting: Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) are referenced in this specifica- tion, however, where more stringent requirements are specified, the more stringent shall govern. Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy in this specification is as defined in latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards" and as modified in this specification. 2. Provide Custom grade for any item not given a specific quality grade as defined in latest edi- tion of the AWI "Quality Standards." I I I I I J B. Competence: Approved woodwork manufacturer, regularly engaged and well experienced in manufacture of fixtures and wood trim and finish of monumental building type, having reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and successfully completing comparable work. Architect reserves the right to approve woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish woodwork. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared architectural woodwork Shop Drawings for review by Architect prior to start of fabrication. Do not duplicate Architect's construction drawings. Indicate on shop drawings, dimensions, species, matching of panels, profiles of moldings, assembly details, applied finish, surfacing, built-in hardware, and necessary connections to other trades. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 06400-1 95014 B. Brochures: Submit manufacturer's descriptive litera- ture on specialtylitems not manufactured by the archi- tectural woodworker, as requested by Architect. C. Samples: 1. Submit samples of each wood species to receive transparent finish at job site, as requested by Architect. I 2. Submit finished samples of each finish to be ap- plied at factory. D. Substitutions: 1. Products spe standard for lar products be substitut "Approved Eq stitution of the quality product. Pr submitted th view by the struction is products pri 2. comparison. 3. Contractor tions, if ivalent to 1.05 FIELD DIMENSIONS ied herein establish a quality mparison by manufacturers of simi- Products of other manufacturers may for those specified herein on an " basis. DO NOT propose the sub- oducts.that do not meet or exceed ndards established by the specified ct.s proposed as equivalent MUST be gh the General Contractor for re- hitect after the Contract for Con- arded.- DO NOT request approval of to the awarding of the contract. nical data, samples, published and the like must be submitted for 1 warrant that proposed substitu- ted, will provide performance equ- materials specified herein. A. Woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions. Show on Shop Drawings all required field measurements beyond his control. General Contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall` cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Prot during, and after and materials of TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II architectural woodwork before, ' I tallation. Protect installed work r trades. 06400-2- II 95014 , I II B. Replacements: In event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to approval of Architect and at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK . A. Exposed Solid Wood for Stain Finish: Plain -sliced Red Oak. B. Semi -exposed Solid Wood: Mill option hardwood. C. Concealed Solid Wood: Douglas Fir or Southern Pine. D. Semi -exposed Plywood: Mill option hardwood. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) Core plywood, particle board or pressed wood core plywood will not be accepted. E. Concealed Plywood: Douglas Fir or Southern Pine. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) Core plywood, particle board or pressed wood core plywood will not be ac- cepted. F. Plywood For High Pressure Laminated Plastic Finish: All Hardwood veneer core plywood with each veneer layer bonded with exterior glue. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) Core plywood, particle board or pressed wood core plywood will not be accepted. 2.02 MILLWORK A. Fabricate according to AWI Quality Standards for "Custom" Grade, Flush Overlay type, for plastic laminated finish on exposed surfaces and painted finish on concealed surfaces. B. Hardware: Install cabinet hardware furnished under this Section of these Specifications. C. Finishing: Site finish or pre -finish cabinets to requirements stated in Section 09900 of these specifi- cations. ID. Edge Banding: Provide either solid wood or pressure applied tape as shown on drawings. IRONED ON TAPE EDGE BANDING WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. ' E. Drawer Construction: Drawers are to be four sided, solid wood, drawer box type. NO PANEL PRODUCTS WILL BE ' ALLOWED. Head screw from the inside of the drawer box and install pulls through the drawer box. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 06400-3 95014 I II F. Provide finish surfaces using products from one of the ' following high pressure plastic laminate manufacturers, or an equal-appro�ked by Architect, in colors and patterns selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line, in satin finish General Purpose grade: a. Nevamar Corporation, "Nevamar" solid colors. b. Formica Corporation, "Formica" solid colors. c. Ralph Wilson Plastics, "Wilsonart" sololdcolors. A. Adjustable Shelves: Millwork subcontractor to install KV255 standards and KV256 clips where shown on drawings. B. Provide TG series round, plastic grommets by Doug Mockett & Co., or approved equal, where shown on millwork drawings. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturers standard line. Exact locations to be verified by Architect before installation. 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials, required for comp] tectural woodwork, approval by Archit PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate mill comply with re standards. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install architect, level, and firmly use. B. Refer to Section requirements. 3.03 FINAL INSPECTION not specifically described but to and proper installation of archi- selected by Contractor subject -to ornamental wood, and countertops to • Shop Drawings and referenced woodwork true, square, plumb, ored for long life under heavy for additional installation A. General: Prior to final inspection and acceptance by Architect, complet ly check each installed item and adjust for proper �peration. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 06400-4 95014 B. Compliance: 1. Owner reserves right to request and pay for in- spection by representative of the Architectural Woodwork Institute to determine that work of this Section has been performed to comply with refer- enced standards. 2. In event above inspection determines architectural woodwork, or any part of it does not comply with referenced standards, contractor pays all costs for initial inspection and all subsequently re- quired reinspections. Immediately remove non- complying items, and immediately replace them with items complying to referenced standards of these specifications, at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 06400 I Ii F I TERMINAL EXP ' PHASE II 06400-5 95014 I I I SECTION 07150 - DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish and apply dampproofing materi- als specified. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Applicators: Use only workmen thor- oughly trained and experienced in skills required, ' completely familiar with manufacturer's recommended methods of application, and completely familiar with requirements of this Section of specifications. ' B. Manufacturer's Directions: Carefully follow manufacturer's printed directions in application of ' dampproofing. Make available printed directions to Architect's Representative if requested. I IH TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07150-1 95014 I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR WALL WEATHER A. All new exterior waterproofed with sealer as manufac Kansas City, Kans approved equal, p oligomeric alkyl - carrier, producin tection against m reticence, leachin freeze/thaw spall B. The_weather sealer dance with the mar alter or dilute tl be applied as pack tion is with low b equipment or with in two wet -on -wet be completely dry, dust, oil or other rates should be at 2.02 WATERPROOFING FILM A. Provide moisture b slabs on grade, us ethylene film weig sq. ft. Lap film and turn up 4" at avoid perforations 2.03 FLEXIBLE FLASHING sonry walls of the building shall be SureKlean Weather Seal" siloxane red by ProSoCo, Inc., P.O. Box 1578, 55117 (Phone 913/281-2700); or an etrating water repellent based on koxy siloxane suspended in a solvent a chemical bond and providing pro- sture intrusion and resulting efflo- mildew, atmospheric staining -and shall be applied in strict accor- facturer's instructions. Do not material. The weather sealer shall ged. Preferred method of applica- essure (20 p.s.i.) airless spray heavily saturated brush or roller pplications. The wall surface shall clean and free from surface dirt, surface contaminants. Coverage roximately 60-80 s.f. per gallon. rrier under interior concrete floor rig full 6 mil thickness clear poly- ing not less than 0.02856 pounds per " in direction of concrete pouring dges. Place and protect film to A. Provide flexible in -wall and through -wall flashing as follows: B. "Nervastral Seal-Pruf Type H -D" flashing material by Rubber & Plastics Compound Co., Inc., or approved equal. Use masticlfor bonding flashing to structure and -for sealing joints using cold -setting cement or adhesive type recorfimended by flashing manufacturer. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07150-2 95014 ' I 11 I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Carefully inspect trades and verify that work is this installation may properly B. Discrepancies: Do not proceed areas of discrepancy until dis solved. installed work of other complete to point where commence. with application in Jrepancy are fully re - 3.02 APPLICATION OF DAMPPROOFING IN GENERAL A. Preparation: Prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing, strictly complying with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Application: Apply dampproofing complying with manu- facturer's recommendations, covering areas to prevent penetration of moisture. 3.03 INSTALLING FLEXIBLE FLASHING A. Lap material at joints minimum 6" and tightly seal with mastic. It is not necessary to embed flashing in full coat of mastic. Spot bonding of mastic equal to 25% of the flashing area applied at 12 inch intervals is acceptable. Apply mastic by trowel at rate of 50 square feet per gallon unless otherwise shown on the container. END OF SECTION 07150 F I I TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 0715C-3 I 95014 C SECTION 07200 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Fl perimeter insulat. other insulation B. Substitutions: 1. Products spe standard for lar products be substitut "Approved Eq stitution of the quality • product. Pr submitted th view by the struction is products pri 2. Supporting to specification comparison.. 3. Contractor tions, if ivalent to 1.02 PRODUCT HANDLING ish and install roof insulation, batt and blanket insulation, and related items specified. ied herein establish a quality mparison by manufacturers of simi- Products of other manufacturers may for those specified herein on an basis. DO NOT propose the sub- oducts that do not meet or exceed ndards established by the specified cts proposed as equivalent MUST be gh the General. Contractor for re- hitect after the Contract for Con- Parded. DO NOT request approval of to the awarding of the contract. nical data, samples, published and the, like must be submitted for 1 warrant that proposed substitu- ted, will provide performance equ- materials specified herein. A.. Protection: Deliver materials to job site and store in safe dry place with labels intact and legible at time of installation. protect building insulation materials before, during, and after installation. Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Replacements: In avent of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to approval of Architect and at Contractor's expense. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Concealed Installations: Flame Spread rating of not more than 75 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 450 when test d in accordance with ASTM E84. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07200-1 95014 I t B. Exposed Installations: Flame Spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.01 ROOF DECK INSULATION A. Provide Firestone ISO 95+, Atlas ACFoam II, or approved equal polyisocyanurate roof deck insulation, with black ' glass reinforced felt facers accepted by Factory Mutual for use in Class I Construction as described -in the current edition of the FMRC Approval Guide (tested to ' FM 4450 standard). Provide in largest board size practical to minimize joints. Product must have water vapor transmittance of less than 1.0 perm, density must be 2 pcf minimum, compressive strength must be 20 psi ' minimum with dimensional stability of 2% or less and maximum flame spread of 25 (core). ' 2.02 RIGID BOARD INSULATION A. Refer to drawings for locations. Provide "Styrofoam" ' extruded polystyrene insulation board by Dow Chemical, or approved equal and as follows: 1. Where indicated as "Perimeter Insulation": Type "SM" in thickness noted on drawings. 2. Provide vinyl "J" Channel edge protector strip at ' perimeter insulation as manufactured by Retro-Tek Accessories and distributed by Darragh Sales, 1-800-489-2112, or approved equal. 2.03 BATT INSULATION A. Material: Glass or mineral fiber type bearing the U.L. ' Classification marking as to fire resistance conforming to Federal Specification HH-I-521F, and ASTM C-665 for Kraft Faced, Type II, Class C material. B. Features: Provide insulation material with face flanges wide enough to lap onto framing at each edge ' avoiding air borne water vapor leakage. Material must be moisture repellent and resistant to vermin and decay. Manufacture material to guard against delamina- tion or separation from membrane facings and to resist ' damage during handling and installation. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07200-2 95014 2.04 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Over ceiling panels in suspended ceiling systems, provide unfaced Owens-Corning "Sonobats", or approved equal. Provide.311/2" batts having flame spread rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed hot more than 50 when tested complying with ASTM E 84. Also conform to ASTM C 665 andIASTM E 136. B. In rated partitio: "Firecore-60", or 665, Type I. In n Owens-Corning "So approved equal co ASTM-E 136. For b not exceed 25 and when tested compl 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS , provide. unfaced Owens-Corning pproved equal complying with ASTM C -rated partitions, provide unfaced d Attenuation Batt Insulation", or lying with ASTM C 665, Type I and h types, flame spread rating shall moke developed shall not exceed 50 nq with ASTM E 84. A. Provide materials including fasteners and retainers, not specifically described but required for complete and proper installlation of building insulation, select- ed by Contractor subject to approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Care: trades and verify this installation B. Discrepancies: areas of disci resolved. 3.02 INSTALLING ROOF DECK inspect installed work of other work is complete to point where properly commence. not proceed with installation in y until discrepancies are fully ION A. Verify dimensions, drain heights, and drain locations in the field prior to roof insulation system installa- tion. B. Firmly adhere insulation to deck and between layers complying with. manufacturer's instructions. Lay no more insulation ina day than can be covered with roofing in the same day. C. Stagger transverse joints in lower layer of. insulation boards to break continuous cross joints at adjacent boards. Off -set joints in upper layer from joints in bottom layer board6. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07200-3 95014 II D. Cut insulation boards, do not score and brake, to obtain straight edges for butt joints. Dip cut edges in hot asphalt for moisture seal. Keep insulation dry, both while in storage and during roofing application. 3.03 INSTALLING BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION A. After piping and wiring is in place, install and sup- port blanket and batt insulation in position required, and coordinate with framing. B. Remove insulation torn, displaced, water soaked, and damaged. Replace with new material. 3.04 INSTALLING OTHER INSULATION A. Install materials not specifically set forth above in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 07200 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07200-4 95014 SECTION 07240 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide exterior ing accessories B. Gypsum Sheathing 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS ulation and finish system, includ- ired for proper completion of work. cified in Section 09260. 1. Application bf system by applicator approved by system manufacturer. 2. Follow manufacturer's latest printed application instructions! B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Have system approved by localbuilding codes and agencies:having jurisdiction. "Subject system to full scale fire test such as Building Oorner Test. Provide system listed by UL and FM testing) as acceptable system for use on non- combustible construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Erect at Project 4'-0" x 4'-0" sample panels installed on exterior gradeagypsum sheathing showing proposed texture and color,. Prepare samples using same tools and techniques proposed for actual installation. See Article 2.10, COLORS, under Part 2 of this Section. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing wall layout, details, connections, expansion joints and installation sequInce. C. Reports, Calculations and Certificates: 1. Submit, when requested, copies of selected test reports by i4dependent laboratories verifying system performance. 2. Submit, when requested, engineering calculations verifying sy tem structural performance designed for this Project. 3. Submit copy df applicator's current approval cer- tificate by system manufacturer. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07240-1 95014 ' I D. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Store products in cool, dry place out of direct sun- light, protected from elements and damage. Maintain storage area temperature at minimum 40°F. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Requirements: Apply system in ambient temperatures above 40°F, and on unfrozen surfaces. For installation in temperatures less than 40°F, provide and maintain supplementary heat during installation and for 24 hours minimum after installation. ' B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage during application. 2. Protect finished work when stopping for day and when completing an area, from water penetration. ' 1.06 MAINTENANCE KIT ' A. Furnish maintenance kit and store where directed by Owner. Furnish unopened system liquid containers. Include in maintenance kit sufficient material to repair 20 square feet of system, finish. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07240-2 95014 1 B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate ble after 2. Install fla stallation 3. Seal joints system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The system spe Dryvit System, match existing 2.02 PORTLAND CEMENT A. Portland Cement: and free from lu 2.03 ADHESIVE A: Provide manufa both in bond s specific rigid which it is ad 2.04 SHEATHING: See Sect 2.05 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE A. Expanded Polysty Class A. work outlined as soon as possi- ion of system. ngs as soon as possible after in - system. tely after installation of ed below is based on products by with finish color and texture to cco. Conform to ASTM C150, Type I, fresh s. Use potable water. 's standard adhesive compatible, h and chemical structure, with ation used and with stratum to 09260, Gypsum Sheathing. ULATION BOARD . Meet Fed Spec HH-I-524b, Type I, B. Provide in 1 p.c.f. density, thickness required and with sufficient skiear modulus to serve as buffer be- tween wall structures and exterior finishes. Thermal and structural moV,ements in wall structures and thermal contraction of insulation shall not -produce excessive shear stresses in reinforced coatings. C. Fire Hazard Class3Jlfication: Meet or exceed requirements of ASTM E 84. 2.06 PLASTIC VENEER BASE - A. Hard, breathing mastic type mat bonding layer, especially prepared approved by system manufacturer. I TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1 07240-3 95014 Ii I I El 2.07 REINFORCING MESH A. Dryvit-Hi-Standard Reinforcing Fabric: Twisted muiti- end strands, specifically treated for compatibility with components of system and conforming to MIL -Y-1140. Provide heavy-duty reinforcing ("Panzer Mesh, or ap- proved equal) where indicated on drawings and where finish is subject to traffic or impact loads. Substi- tution requests must be accompanied by pertinent test data. 2.08 PLASTIC VENEER FINISH A. Plastic Veneer Finish: Hardening, air cured mastic type material, forming breathing type coating fully bondable and compatible with plastic veneer base. Factory mix finish veneer with integral color matching approved samples. 2.09 COLORS A. Match existing Stucco Architect for review. 2.10 SEALANT SYSTEMS Submit 12" x 12" sample to A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and with requirements of Section 07900 of this Project Manual. 2.11 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials, not specifically described, but re- quired for complete and proper installation, selected by Contractor subject to approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this ' Section will be performed. Correct conditions detri- mental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are cor- ' rected. B. Provide proper remedy for: ' 1. Substrata contrary to recommendations of manufac- turer of system. ' 2. Defects in and coatings on substrata that ad- versely affects execution and quality of system. 3. Hot spots, residue, and releasing agents including silicones and ails. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07240-4 95014 4. Planar irregularities greater than 1/4" 3.02 MIXING A. If Dryvit system is approved for this Work, use follow- ing procedures. Modify procedures in event other system is approved by Architect. B. Adhesive: 1. For mixing and preparing adhesive: (a) Use clean containel', free from foreign sub- stance, (b) Do not se container used for petroleum prod- uct, or which has been cleaned with petroleum product. (c) Immediately after mixing, clean containers and mixiing equipment. 2. Use mixer similar to "Goldblatt Jiffler Mixer Number 15311H7,° powered by -1/2" drill at 400 to 500 rpm. 3. Stir adhesive prior to adding portland cement. 4. Mix specified portland cement with specified adhe- sive in ratio of one part portland cement to one part adhesive. (a) Measure portland cement and adhesive quanti- ties separately prior to mixing. (b) Add cement to adhesive in small increments while thoroughly mixing each increment. (c) Add water only as needed to adjust workabili- ty. 5. Do not add rapid binders, anti -freeze, accelera- tors, or materials except those specifically ap- proved by Architect and -by manufacturer of ap- proved system. 6. Keep containe s closed when not in use. C. Finish: 1. Using high speed mixer, thoroughly mix factory - prepared finibh material until a uniformly work- able consistency is attained. 2. Add water onll as needed to adjust workability. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07240-5 95014 3.03 APPLICATION A. Insulation Board: 1. For application to vertical surfaces, begin at the base from firm, permanent or temporary support. 2. Apply board horizontally in running bond. 3. Precut board to fit openings and projections, staggering vertical joints at corners. 4. With a trowel, apply bead of mixed adhesive 2" wide by 3/8" thick on entire perimeter of board. (a) Also apply dabs of mixed adhesive 3/8" thick by 4" in diameter, approximately 8" on cen- ters in interior area. (b) Provide minimum adhesive area of 25% of the panel area. (c) As an alternative, Contractor may use 3/8" notched trowel and apply mixed adhesive to entire surface. 5. Apply pressure over entire board surface board to achieve uniform contact and high initial grab. (a) Butt joints tightly, and achieve overall flush level surface. (b) Where irregularities exist, use rasp and make surface flush within tolerance of 1/16". 6. Install expansion joints and required items com- pletely embedded in mixed adhesive. B. Coating and Reinforcing Fabric: 1. Using stainless steel trowel, apply mixed adhesive to entire insulation board surface to uniform thickness of approximately 1/16". 2. Immediately thereafter, place reinforcing fabric against coating and, by troweling from center to edges, embed fabric into coating. (a) Make reinforcing fabric continuous at cor- ners, and lap minimum 2-1/2" at fabric edges. (b) Permit no fabric wrinkles. (c) Completely embed fabric into coating. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II C724C-6 95O4 3. Where addit reinforcing above Droce C. Finish: impact layers of adhesive and c are shown on drawings, repeat after preceding layer has set up. 1. Do not commence finish application until coating and reinforcilng fabric layers are completely dry and hard. 2. Using clean stainless steel trowel, apply a tight coat of finisi material directly to reinforced coating. (a) Apply and level during same operation, achie- ving minimum thickness obtainable consistent with uniform coverage. (b) Apply and texture in continuous operation over wall surface. (c) Work to corners and joints, and do not allow. finish material to set up within a distinct wallor panel area. (d) Use suffLcient staging and personnel to ac- complish uniform appearance. 3. Make final to ture after finish has gelled to where it does not stick to trowel. (a) Achieve &pproved texture by allowing trowel to roll bn the round aggregate, using variety of motions with trowels or floats to match approved sample. (b) Provide, final thickness not greater than diameter of largest aggregate of finish mate- rial .• END SECTION 07240 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II -7 95014 II I I I I F I I I I SECTION 07270 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work of this section. B. Coordinate work of this Section with the work of the following Sections to properly execute the work in order to maintain the hourly ratings of the walls and floors. 1. Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 2. Section 07900 Sealants 3. Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing firestopping for fire -rated construction. This includes: 1. All openings in fire -rated floors and wall assemblies, both blank (empty) and those accommodating penetrating items such as cables, conduits, pipes, ducts, etc. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Firestopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by local building code and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 fire tests. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating, when required by code authority, shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on the penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column. B. Firestopping material shall be asbestos free and free of any PCBs. C. Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal. D. Do not use Firestop Products which after curing, dissolve in water. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07270-1 95014 iE II E. Firestopping s or approved by 1.04 SUBMITTALS be performed by a contractor trained I stop Manufacturer. A. Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of Firestop material to be installed. Literature shall indicate product cbharacteristics, typical uses, performance and limitation criteria, and test data. II II B. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit MSDS for each ' I firestop products C. Shop Drawings: Show typical installation details for methods of installation. Indicate .which -firestop materials will be used where and thickness for different hourly x tings. D. Submit manufacturer's installation procedures for each type of product. E. Installer Documentation: Submit document from Firestop Manufacturer wherein Manufacturer recognizes, i.e. approves installer for said Manufacturer's Firestop products. F. Prepare job mock-up of the material proposed for use in the project as directed by Architect. Approved mock- ups may be left in place as part of the finished project and will constitute the standard for remaining work, including aesthetics. G. Substitutions: 1. Products spec standard for lar products. be substitute "Approved Equ stitution of the quality s product. Pro submitted thr view by the A struction is products prio 2. Supporting to specification comparison. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II fied herein establish a quality omparison by manufacturers of simi- Products of other manufacturers may for those specified herein on an 1" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- roducts that do not meet or exceed andards established by the specified ucts proposed as equivalent MUST be ugh the General Contractor for re- chitect after the Contract for Con - warded. DO NOT request approval of to the awarding of the -contract. nical data, samples, published and the like must be submitted for 07270-2 95014 ' I II I 3. Contractor shall warrant tions, if accepted, will ivalent to the materials that proposed substitu- provide performance equ- specified herein. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDING A. Deliver material in the manufacturers' original, unopened containers or packages with manufacturer's name, product identification, lot numbers, UL -labels, and mixing and installation instructions, as applicable. B. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions recommended by manufacturers. C. All Firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conform to Manufacturer's printed instructions for installation and when applicable, curing in accordance with temperature and humidity. Conform to ventilation and safety requirements. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Firestop Contractor shall warranty that firestopping systems used meet firestopping requirements as herein specified. 1.08 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate this work as required with work of other trades. B. Firestopping shall precede gypsum board finishing. 1.09 PROTECTION A. Where firestopping is installed at locations which will remain exposed in the completed work, provide ' protection as necessary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finishes, and protect as necessary against damage from other construction activities. • B. Protect all openings in accordance with Article 702.1.2 • of the Standard Building Code, latest accepted edition. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II C7270-3 95014 I iI PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Firestopping shall meet the specified requirements. B. Architect must ap4rove in writing any alternates to products herein specified. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bio Fireshield, Inc. (whose products are listed a standard) - 2. Dow Corning Corp 3. 3M B. .Firestop Mortars: 1. Novasit K-10 Firestop Mortar. 2. K-2 Firestop Mortar. C. Firestop Sealants and Caulks: 1. Bio Fireshield Biotherm 100 and Biotherm 200 Firestop Sealants. 2. Bio Fireshield Biostop 500 Intumescent Firestop Caulk. 3. Dow Corning Flirestop Sealant No. 2000 or SL2003 (self levelin ) 4. 3M CP-25WB CaLik. D. Firestop Putty: 1. 3M MPS -2 Moldable Putty Stix. 2. 3M MPP-4S Moldable Putty Pads. E. Firestop Collars: 1. Bio Fireshield Firestop Sleeve. F. Firestop Pillows: 1. Bio Fireshielh Firestop Pillows. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07270-4 95 G. Wrap Strips: 1. 3M FS -195 Wrap Strip. H. Fire Barrier: 1. 3M CS -195 Composite Sheet. I. When approved by Architect, 3M Firedam 150 caulk may be used at certain penetrations. J. Accessories: 1. Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type recommended by manufacturer. 2. Primer, Sealant and Solvent Cleaner: As recommended by manufacturer. K. Fire Stop Foam: 1. Dow Corning 2001. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION IA. Examine the areas and conditions where Firestops are to be installed and notify the architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the ' work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the contractor in a manner acceptable to the architect. ' B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of Firestop product(s). 3.02 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING A. General: ' 1. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and, if ' indicated, whether such material is designated as insulation, safing, or otherwise. 2. Insulation types specified in other Sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping material specified herein. 1 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE I; 07270-5 95C14 II I C. Interior Walls 1. Where a wall structural f vertical sha remain open edge of the firestopping Partitions: or partition is continuous past a oor, such as at stairwells and ts, and a space would otherwise etween the wall face and perimeter djoining structural floor, provide 2. Provide firestopping whether or not there are any clips, angles, plates, or other members bridging or interconnecting the wall and floor systems, and whether or ndt-such itemsarecontinuous. 3. Where the partition type metal that would provide ft Penetrations: 1. Penetrations duct, or othe both outer su or partition. 2. Except for fl occurs throug space would c surfaces of t adjoining str firestopping with ASTM E 8 edge of a fire -rated wall or ts and is.at right angle to fluted- cking, and theconstruction is such herwise leave the flute spaces open, toppinq. I I I I I chide conduit, cable, wire, pipe., elements which pass through one or aces of a fire rated floor, wall, ors on grade, where a penetration a structural floor or roof and a herwise remain open between the e penetration and the edge of the ctural floor -or roof, provide o fill such spaces in accordance 4. 3. Where penetrations occur at fire -rated walls or partitions of( solid -type construction, provide firestopping to completely fill spaces aroundthe penetration, In accordance: with ASTM E 814. - 4. Where penetrations occur at fire -rated walls or partitions oflhollow-type construction, provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around the penetration, bn each side of the wall or partition, inaccordance with ASTM E 814. - 5. These requirethents for penetrations shall apply whether or not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not penetrations are to. be equipped with escutcheons or other trim. If penetrations are sleeved, tirestop annular space - if any - between sleeve and wall of opening. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II .07270-6 95014 LI I I I I I E. Provide firestopping to openings in fire -rated essentially the same as 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: fill miscellaneous voids and construction in a manner specified herein before. Installation of Firestops shall be performed by applicator/installers qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures. 2. Apply Firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinates with plumbing, mechanical, electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire related construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of Firestops, schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other construction which would conceal penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of Firestops. B. Darn Construction; Install dams when required to properly contain Firestopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Incombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the Firestop system. C. Field Quality Control: Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets. Finish surfaces of firestopping which is to remain exposed in the completed work to a uniform and level condition. ' TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07270-7 95014 4. All areas of inspection b 5. Correct unac additional i this specifi 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove spilled firestopping wi B. Leave finished evidence of soi ork must be accessible until the applicable Code authorities. ptable firestops and provide pection to verify compliance with tion at no additional cost. excess materials adjacent to t damaging adjacent, surfaces. in neat, clean condition with no ers or damage to adja'tent surfaces. END OF SECTION 07270 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 107270-8 95014 SECTION C7411 - METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this sec- tion. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of metal roofing is shown on the drawings and indicated by provisions of this section. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer must have minimum of three years successful experience with installation of metal roofing of type and scope equivalent to work of this section. B. Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with applicable recommendations and details of "Architectur- al Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. Conform to dimen- sions and profiles shown. Manufacturer to provide trained metal craftsmen to supervise installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit metal manufacturer's and fabricator's specifica- tions, installation instructions and general recommen- dations for roofing applications. Include certifica- tion or other data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. B. Submit 18 inch square samples of specified metal to be used as roofing with specified finishes applied. C. Submit shop drawings showing manner of forming, joining and securing metal roofing and pattern of seams. Show expansion joint details and waterproof connections to adjoining work and at obstructions and penetrations. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for materials and finishes. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07411-1 95C14 B. Furnish written teeing the insta and free from le completion date. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: and after in materials of antee signed by installer guaran- ion of the roofing to remain intact for two years following substantial t roofing materials before, during, ion. Protect installed work and trades. B. Replacements: InIevent of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to approval of Architect and at dontractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRE -FINISHED A. Furnish Merchant Rib" metal roof ice damns and sn downspouts, flas metal roofing sy "Kynar 500" 70s Custom color to finish, subject aluminum or stai PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Seperate dissimilL each metal surf ac coating, or by ap] ment to each meta, as recommended by B. Fabricate sheets, ridges, :edge trea components of met drainage arrangem' thermal expansion joints as shown a; tion. Shop fabri' possible. C. Joint Sealant: Whe embed hooked flang inch into sealant. sealant, When ambi Evans, Inc., 1-800-257-6215, "Zip - tern and related components including guards, copings, fascia, gutters, g and sheet metal to match existing m. Factory finish with oven cured mulation, 1 mil minimum thickness. ch existing weathered "Bronze" approval of Architect. Provide ss steel concealed fasteners. metals from each other by painting in area of contact with a bituminous ying adhesive polyethlene underlay - surface,. or by permanent seperation anufacturer. eams, strips, cleats, valleys, ents, integral flashings and other roofing to profiles, patterns and is shown or required. Provide for nd contraction of the work. Seal as required for leakproof construc- te materials to greatest extent sealant filled joints are used, of joint members not less than 1 Form joints to completely conceal t temperature is moderate at time TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1.07411-2 - 95014 of installation (40 deg.F to 70 deg.F), set joint members for 50% movement either direction. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at tempera- tures above 70 deg.F. D. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks. Provide uniform, neat seams. Unless otherwise shown, fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges. E. Conceal fasteners and expansionprovisions where possi- ble in exposed work and locate so as to minimize possi- bility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and an- chors as required for a tight installation. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Remove any protective film from exposed surfaces of metal roofing with care to avoid damage to finish. B. Provide final protection in a manner acceptable to installer that will insure metal roofing being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial comple- tion. END OF SECTION 07411 TERMINAL EX?. PHASE II 07411-3 95014 SECTION 07600 1.01 DESCRIPTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL A. Work Included: Fikrnish and install metal flashing, flexible flashing and sheet metal work specified and required to preve t water penetration through roof and exterior walls oflbuilding. B. Substitutions: '1. Products spe standard for lar products be substitut "Approved Eq stitution of the quality. product. Pr submitted th view by the struction is products pri 2. Supporting specificati comparison. 3. Contractor tions, if ivalent to 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Preformed Metal 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ified herein establish a quality comparison by manufacturers of simi- Products of other manufacturers may d for those specified herein on an al" basis. DO NOT propose the sub - products that do not meet or exceed tandards established by the specified ducts proposed as equivalent MUST be ough the General Contractor for re- rchitect after the Contract for Con - awarded. DO NOT request approval of r to the awarding of the contract. nical data, samples, published and the like must be submitted for 1 warrant that proposed substitu- ted, will provide performance equ- materials specified herein. ing: Section 07411 A. Job Supervision: Applicator of work in this Section to furnish competent, qualified foreman present and in charge at all 'times work is performed. B. Applicable Standard: Refer to The "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", latest revision, of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning dontractors National Association, Inc. Use as applicable standard for method and quality of work under this Section where not specifically other- wise shown on Cont1ract Drawings. Manufacturer to pro- vide trained metallcraftsmen to supervise installation. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II X07600-1 95014 I C. Guaranty: Guaranty sheet metal work installed under this Section against leakage or defects for 2 years after substantial completion date. Make good at Con- tractor expense leakage or defects occurring within this period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING A. Sheet Metal: 1. Aluminum Sheet: Provide 3003-0 alloy for flash- ings. For all other sheet metal work furnish 3003-14 alloy. Use 0.032" thickness for flashing and 0.040" thickness for all other unless other- wise called for in SMACNA Manual. Factory finish with oven cured "Kynar 500" 70% resin formulation. Custom color to match existing weathered "Bronze" finish, subject to approval of Architect. 2. Copper Sheet: Cold -rolled, conforming to ASTM B 370. Use 16 oz. weight unless otherwise shown on Contract Drawings. 3. Soft Temper Sheet Metal: Lead sheet, F.S. QQ-L- 201, Grade B, 4 lb. per sq. ft. B. Fasteners: All metal counter flashing and parapet cap flashing shall be attached to parapet framing with galvanized screws with neoprene washers. Nails, screws and rivets used at other locations are to be the appropriate type for the purpose as described in the SMACNA Design Manual. C. Solder for Lead: ASTM B 32, 50% tin and 50% lead used with rosin flux. D. Roofing Cement: F.S. SS -C-153, Type I, Class A (summer grade) or Class B (winter grade) as applicable. • E. Bitumastic Coating: F.S. TT -C-494, MIL -C-18480, or SSPC - Paint 12, cold applied solvent type bitumastic ' coating for application in dry film thickness of 15 mils per coat. ' 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal flashings, counterflashings, trim and re;.ated items to comply with profiles and sizes re- '• quired. Fabricate to comply with "SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", metal manufacturer's recommenda- tions, and recognized industry practices. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07600-2 95014 1 B. For continuous running work, fabricate with expansion joints in flashings, spaced sufficiently close to prevent flashing damage and failure in resistance to water penetration) Form flashing to fit substrate in each application.I C. Where sheet metallis required and no material or gauge is indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install highest quality arkd gauge commensurate with the refer- enced applicable tandard, (SMACNA Manual). 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials required for comp ing and sheet met their respective Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Prio', inspect installed is complete to po erly commence. B. Discrepancies: Di stallation in are, are resolved. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP not specifically described but to and proper installation of flash- , of new materials, first quality of nds, and subject to approval of to work of this Section, carefully ork of other trades and verify work t where this installation may prop - not proceed with sheet metal in - of discrepancy until discrepancies A. General: Form sheet metal accurately to dimensions and shapes required, viatertight and weathertight, with angles and broken surfaces true, sharp, and in straight lines.- Where intercepting other members, cope to an accurate fit and solder securely. Produce flat surfac- es free from waves! and buckles. B. Expansion: Form, fabricate, •and install sheet metal to adequately provide for expansion and contraction in finished work. Provide joint covers in copings, cap flashing, and fascjias not more than 12 feet o.c. 3.03 SOLDERING A. General: 1. Thoroughly clean and tin joint materials prior to soldering. l TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II I 07600-3 95014 T 7 IT: 2. Perform soldering slowly with well heated copper in order to heat seams thoroughly and to com- pletely fill them with solder. 3. Make exposed soldering neat, full flowing, and smooth. Do not use solder where dependence upon its strength is a factor. B. Cleaning: After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux with soda solution. 3.04 DISSIMILAR CONTACTS A. Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, and masonry materials with an alkali -resistant coating. Use heavy -bodied bituminous paint or approved equal. 3.05 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Provide accessories for complete installation including end pieces, caps, elbows, outlet tubes, and basket type strainers. B. Slope gutters to drain 1" in 20 feet. C. Lap gutter joints 1" in direction of flow. Seal watertight, and secure with 1/8" rivets, or join sections with flat locked soldered seams. D. Make leaders (downspouts) with 1-1/2" telescoped joints or full length without joints. Set leaders plumb, clear of walls. Secure with straps not over 6 feet apart and space so one is near top and another near bottom. END CF SECTION 07600 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07600-4 95014 SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS is C U C.e_. 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish labor, materials, tools, and equipment required to completely close (with caulking compound or sealant) all joints to give a finished appearance. Items to be caulked or sealed include but are not limited to the following: 1. Hollow metal (frames. 2. Exterior doors, louvers, windows and any other openings in exterior walls. 3. Interior fixed glass. 4. Penetrations bf floors and walls by piping and other services and equipment. 5. Plumbing fixtures. 6. Millwork. 7. Flooring, paving and sidewalk joints. 8. Dissimilar finishes. 9. Joints shown on drawings or specified to be caulked or sealed. B. Substitutions: _. 1. Product's spe standard for lar products be substitut "Approved Eq stitution of the quality product. Pr • submitted th view by the struction is products pri 2. Supporting t specificatio comparison. 3. Contractor s tions, if ac ivalent to t TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II ied herein establish a quality mparison by manufacturers of simi- Products of other manufacturers may for those specified herein on an " basis. DO NOT propose the sub- oducts that do not meet or exceed ndards established by the specified cts proposed as equivalent MUST be gh the General Contractor for re- hitect after the Contract for Con- arded. DO NOT request approval of to the awarding of the contract. nical data, samples, published and the like must be submitted for 1 warrant that proposed substitu- ted, will provide performance equ- materials specified herein. 07900-1 95014 ' I II 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Applicators: Use workmen thoroughly t skilled and specially trained in techniques of caulk- ing, and completely familiar with manufacturer's pub- lished recommendations for caulking material used. B. Rejection of Installed Caulking: Lack of skill by caulking installers is sufficient ground for Architect to reject installed caulking and to require its removal and complete recaulking at Contractor's expense. C. Guarantee: Guarantee exterior caulking materials and workmanship, in writing, against leakage for 2 years after substantial completion date. Make good at Con- tractors expense leakage developing within guarantee period. ■ D. At General Contractor's option, caulking and water- proofing work may be performed by a waterproofing subcontractor with guarantee furnished by that subcon- tractor, or General Contractor may enter into subcon- tract agreements for caulking and waterproofing wherein responsibility is delegated to the related subcontract work. In case of divided responsibility, General Contractor responsible for furnishing the guarantee. In either case, perform the work in accordance with this Section of specifications. E. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and color ' selection information for every brand and type of sealant, caulk and accessory item proposed for use on this project. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Protect caulking materials before, during, and after installation. Protect installed work and materials of other trades. In event of damage, immedi- ately make repairs and replacements necessary at Con- ' tractor's expense. B. Storage; Store caulking materials and equipment under ' conditions recommended by manufacturer. Do not use materials stored for period of time exceeding maximum recommended material shelf -life. ' 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Carefully inspect installed work of trades ' and verify work is complete to point where this instal- lation may properly commence. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07900-2 95014 iii B. Discrepancies: DI not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until discrepancies are fully resolved. C. Do not install se lants under adverse weather condi- tions, or when temperatures are not within manu- facturer's recommended limitations for installation. Install sealants only when forecasted weather condi- tions are favorable for proper care and development of high early bond strength. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.01 MATERIALS FOR CAULKING AND SEALING A. Select caulking materials for specific locations com- plying with manufacturers recommendations. Provide caulking, sealant and accessory items in color(s) selected to match adjacent materials or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. B. Silicone Sealant:) Single component, non -sag, gun grade product meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 1. Silicone Se 2. Sonolastic- 3. Approved eq C. Mildew -Resistant non -sag, gun gra Grade NS, Class 1. Silicone S 2. Sanitary 1 3. Approved e 790/791/795 by Dow -Corning Corp. us by Sonneborn. - licone Sealant: Single component, product meeting ASTM C92O, Type S, nt 786 by Dow -Corning Corp. by G.E. D. Polyurethane Sealant (for vertical surfaces): Single component, non -sag, gun grade product meetingASTM C920, Type S. Grad NS;, Class 25. 1. NP -1 by Sonneborn'. 2. Vulkem 921 by�Mameco. 3. Dynatrol I by Pecora. 4. Dymonic by Trimco. 5. QSC-102 by Quaker. - 6. Approved equal. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1.07900-3 95014 ' I II E. Polyurethane Sealant (for horizontal surfaces): Single component, non -priming, self leveling, pourable grade product meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25. 1. SL -1 by Sonneborn. 2. Vulkem 45 by Mameco. 3. NR -201 by Pecora. 4. THC-901 by Tremco. 5. QSC-131 by Quaker. 6. Approved equal. F. Acrylic Latex Caulk (interior only): General purpose, gun grade, nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834. 1. Sonolac by Sonnoborn. 2. AC -20 + Silicone by Pecora. 3. Acrylic Latex by Tremco. 4. Approved equal. G. Acoustical Sealant: General purpose, gun grade, nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834. 1. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant by U.S. Gypsum 2. AC -20 FTR by Pecora 3. Approved equal. 2.02 SEALANT BACKER RODS A. Sealant Backer Rod for general use except at floor and deck joints: 1. Sonofoam-OC by Sonnoborn, or approved equal open cell type as recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant. B. Sealant Backer Rod for use at floor and deck joints: 1. Sonofoam-CC by Sonnoborn, or approve equal closed cell type as recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant. C. Provide rod sealant pla joint, form and provide possibility pressed. sized and shaped to control joint depth for ".ement, break bond of sealant at bottom of optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, a highly compressible backer to minimize of sealant extrusion when joint is com- TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07900-4 95014 II 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Cleaner Com0ound: Use type recommended by seal- ant and caulking compound manufacturer for joint sur- faces to be cleaned. B. Joint Primer/Sealer: Use type recommended by. sealant manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed C. Bond Breaker Tape: Use polyethylene tape or plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. Apply to sealant -contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape .wherever possible and applicable. D. Bituminous Joint Filler: Provide resilient and non - extruding type premolded bituminous composition of organic fiber or granulated cork, between 2 bituminous felt liners, complying with ASTM D 944 or D 1751, AASHTO M 33 or M X13, and (if fiber type) FS HH-F-341, Type III, 2.04 GENERAL APPLICATION GUIDE A. Interior caulking, except joints with ceramic tile, metal, glass and luminum: Acrylic Latex Caulk. B. Sound rated walls, partitions and ceilings: Acoustical Sealant. C. Interior and Exterior joints with metal, glass and I aluminum: Silicone sealant. D. Joints with ceramic tile and plumbing fixtures: Mildew resistant Silicon sealant. E. Horizontal building and paving joints: Polyurethane sealant. -- F. Vertical building joints: Polyurethane sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CHOICE OF CAULKING M A. Use sealant and installation and manufacturer. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II lking materials best suited to the commended by caulking material 07900-5 95014 u II II 7 II II II II II II 11 11 II 11 I 3.02 INSPECTION A. Installer must examine substrates, (joint surfaces) and ' conditions under which joint sealer work is to be performed. Do not proceed with joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. ' 3.03 JOINT PREPARATION A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of ' gaskets, sealants and caulking compounds. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and substrates which could interfere with gasket seal and bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces when recommended by sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces recommended ' by sealant manufacturer. B. Prime or seal joint surfaces where required, and when recommended by sealant manufacturer. Confine prim- ' er/sealer to areas of sealant bond. Do not allow spillage and migration onto adjoining surfaces. ' 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions except ' when more stringent requirements are specified, and except when manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. '• B. Set joint filler units at depth and position in joint as required to coordinate with other work, including installation of bond breakers, backer rods and seal- ants. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint filler units. C. Install sealant backer rod except when required to be ' omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manu- facturer for application required. D. Install bond breaker tape when required by manufac- turer's recommendations to ensure liquid -applied seal- ants will perform as intended. ' E. Employ proven installation techniques, which ensure sealants are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbon t without gaps or air pockets, and with complete "wet- ting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise required, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints occur TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 07900-6 95014 Li between a horizon joint to form a s moisture and dirt F. Install liquid-ap as recommended by following general thin section of b lapped joint): surface and vertical surface, fill t cove, so joint will not trap lied sealant to depths required and sealant manufacturer but within the limitations, (measured at center, ads; (not applicable to sealants in 1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints subject to pedestrian traffic and related abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to depth equal to 75%1of joint width, but never more than 5/8" deep no less than 3/8" deep. I LJ I U 2. For normal moving joints not subject to traffic, fill joints ro depth equal to 50% of joint width, but never more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep. I _ G. Spillage: Do not allow sealants and compounds to overflow from joint confines or to spill onto adjoining work, or to migrate into voids of exposed finished. Clean adjoining surfaces to eliminate evidence of spillage without damaging adjoining surfaces. H. Recess edges of exposed joint fillers slightly behind adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise required, so compressed units will not protrude from joints. I. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of, ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 3.05 CURE AND PROTECTION A. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Cure and protect Isealants in manner, which will minimize increases in modules of elasticity and accelerated aging effects. END OF SECTION 07900 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II I 07900-7 - 95014 I SECTION 08100 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide metal doors and metal door frames. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Hardware; Section 08700 B. Painting: Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of work of this Section. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Manufacture labeled doors in strict accordance with specifications and procedures of Under- writers' Laboratories, Inc. Labels must be af- fixed to rated assemblies. 2. In guarantee and Shop Drawings, apply and use definitions and nomenclature established in Ameri- can National Standards Institute publication A 123.1 "Nomenclature for Steel Doors and Steel Door Frames." 3. Prepare doors and frames for hardware in accor- dance with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards A 115-1 through A 115-13. 4. Install labeled doors and frames conforming to the Standard Building Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals before fabrication of doors and frames. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating fabri- cation and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each door and frame type, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of connections to related work. Show anchorage and acces- sory items. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08100-1 95014 C. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same refer- ence numbers for uetails and openings as those on Contract Drawings D. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality Standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor sh 11 warrant that proposed substitu- tions; if accpted, will provide performance equ- ivalent_to the materials specified herein. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Deliver, store, and handle metal doors and frames to prevent damage and deterioration. 2. Provide packaging of cardboard or containers, separators, banding, spreaders, and paper wrap- pings to completely protect metal doors and frames during transportation and storage. 3. Store doors upright, in protected dry area, at least one inch off ground and with at least 1/4" air space between individual pieces. Protect primed and haldware surfaces. 4. Protect installed work and materials of other trades. 5. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could cleate humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immedi- ately: .Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote aif circulation. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II- 108100-2 95014 1 I ii I U B. Replacements: Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided finish items are equal in all respects to new work, otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.01 GENERAL IA. Fabricate hollow metal items rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. B. Provide clean cut, straight and true molded members with well -formed and aligned miters. C. Dress exposed weld joints smooth. ' D. Door Clearances: Maximum 1/8" at jambs and heads, 1/4" at meeting edges of pairs of doors, and 3/4" at bottom ' from finished floorline. E. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors flush. Seal against water penetration with flush steel channel 'fillers. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Provide metal doors and frames by Amweld Building Products, Inc., The Ceco Corp., Curries Mfg. Co., Mesker Industries, Inc., Republic Builders Prod. Corp., 'Steelcraft, Trussbilt, Inc., or approved equal. 2.03 FACTORY PREPARATION A. Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware scheduled for hollow metal door and frame location in "Hardware" ' Section of these specifications and in accordance with ANSI Standards A 115-1 through A 115-17. ' B. Cut, mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and frames at factory, except drill and tap for surface applied hardware at job when hardware is applied. IC. Prepare door frames for silencers. Provide rubber silencers with frames. ' 2.04 SHOP PRIME COAT A. Clean, treat, and prime exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE 1I 08100-3 95014 B. Clean steel surfaces free of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and foreign materials before applying paint. C. Apply shop coat of rust -inhibitive prime paint of even consistency to provide uniformly finished surface ready to receive finishIoaint. 2.05 FLUSH TYPE DOORS A. Form flush type hollow metal doors with outer sheets of 16 gauge cold rolled steel (except where heavier gauge is required) at e,4terior doors and 18 gauge cold rolled steel (except whexje heavier gauge is required) at interior doors and with no exposed face seams. Conform to ASTM Designation A 366. B. Reinforce doors internally to resist impact and to insure flatness of finished surfaces with steel members welded in place. Apply sound deadening material to metal reinforcing on interior of door to eliminate metallic sound in ident to normal door operation. C: Core material is to be either water-resistant honeycomb insulation core glkxed in place, rigid insulation core glued in place or rigid insulation core foamed in place as follows: - 1. Honeycomb I strength of lamination surface she 2. Rigid Insul insulation, cubic foot. 3. Rigid Insula ing type hay strength of to steel bon strength of ble within p exposure to to 200° F., direction, a pounds per c D. Provide doors corn quired. Glass is TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II lation Core' (Glued) : Crushing t less than 4,000 p.s.f., and with withstand not less than 1,500 p.s.f Core (Glued): Solid mineral ty not less than 20 pound per on Core (Foamed -in -Place): Nonburn- g compressive strength and shear t less than 20 p.s.i., an insulation ng strength at least equal to the e insulation, be dimensionally sta- s or minus St volume after 24 -hour mperatures ranging from minus 15° F. ve no voids exceeding 1/2" in any have density.of not less than 1.8 is foot. with glazed panels where re- fied in Section 08800 - Glazing. 08100-4 95014 I I E. Louvers: Not less than 20 gauge, with inverted V- or Y-shaped blades, set into 18 gauge frame. Provide fusible link, overlapping, operable blades on fire- ' rated doors. F. Astragals: Provide standard Z or T astragal for pairs of exterior doors and fire -rated doors. ' 2.06 FIRE DOORS IA. At fire rated openings, furnish doors bearing Underwriters' Laboratories or Warnok-Hersey label for fire rating required. Furnish overlapping metal ' astragal on pairs of fire doors except where equipped with approved rim type exit hardware and provided with a removable mullion. ' 2.07 WELDED DOOR FRAMES A. Form pressed steel frames using cold rolled steel ' conforming to ASTM Designation A 366. Form exterior frames using 14 gauge metal unless specifically required to be heavier. Form interior frames using 16 ' gauge metal unless specifically required to be heavier. B. Secure headers and jambs at corners by external welding of faces. Grind smooth to provide invisible joints. ' C. Provide frames with minimum of 3 anchors per jamb for adjoining wall construction and floor anchors for ' attachment at floor. Construct anchors using minimum 18 gauge steel. D. Anchors: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved for type installation required. E. At fire rated openings, furnish frames bearing Under- ' writers' Laboratories or Warkok-Hersey label for fire rating required with anchors approved for type installation required. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine areas and conditions for work of this Section. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatis- factory conditions are corrected. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 0800-5 95014 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Metal Doors and Fames: Install metal doors and frames in strict accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Placing Frames: Set frames accurately, plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored. C. Finish Hardware: Install finish hardware in strict accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Elimi- nate hinge -bound conditions, making items operate smoothly with secure locking and latching. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN •A. Prime Coat Touch- Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted and damaged prime coat. Apply compatible touch-up air -drying primer. B. Final Adjustments: Check and adjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undam • aged and in proper operating condition. • 3.04 RELOCATED ITEMS A. Carefully remove a isting steel doors, frames, and • hardware to be relocated under this Contract. Securely reinstalling in nelocations, plumb, in true align- - ment, with doors aid hardware working properly. END OF SECTION 08100 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08100-6 95014 I I SECTION 08210 - PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide plastic faced wood doors, complete. Refer to Door Schedule for types and sizes. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Metal Doors and Frames: Section 08100 B. Hardware: Section 08700 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NWMA Industry Standard I.S.1 and Archi- tectural Woodwork Institute Specifications for type doors specified. B. Markings: Furnish door with stamp, brand, or identifying mark indicating door quality and construc- t tion. Identifying mark or separate certification to include inspection organization name, identification of standard for door construction, and identity of plant to which stamp was issued. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08210-1 95014 L C 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials: (ASTM) E 152, "Fire Tests of Door Assemblies". B. National Woodwork Manufacturers Association, Inc.: "Industry Standard 1 -Wood Doors", latest revision, and Commercial Standaid CS17. aall..SSo%M A. Warranty: Submit facturer's standa contractor, and i place defective d twist) or which s below in face ven AWI tolerance lim lifetime of insta B. Limitation and 1. Improper 2. Warp not cons inch in the r distortion in to relationsh includes bow, door is measu suspected con zontally, vex installed pos twist is made bottom of stx 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING •itten agreement using door manu- form, signed by manufacturer, aller, agreeing to repair or re - s which have warped (bow, cup or photographing of construction s, or do not conform to NWMA and tions. Warranty period is for tion. usions: is considered a defect. dered a defect unless it exceeds 1/4 ane of the door itself._ Warp is the door itself and does not refer p of door to frame, Term "warp" cup and twist. Amount of warp in ed by placing a straight -edge on the ave face of door at any angle (hori- ically, diagonally), with door in Lion. Measurement of bow, cup, and at point of maximum distance between ight-edge and face of door. A. Protect doors during transit, storage and installation to prevent damage,�soiling and deterioration. Comply with the "On -Site: are" recommendations of NWMA and with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protection: Store lated area. Prote ture and humidity. I I I I I I I I L 1l I doors in fully covered, well venti- t from extreme changes in tempera - C. Replace damaged doors at contractor's expense. t TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08210-2 I 95014 ' fl I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide "Perma-Clad" doors by V.T. Industries, Inc., Holstein, Iowa, 1-800-827-1615, or approved equal. B. Types of Doors: 1. Non -Rated: Perma-Clad No.404 2. 20 Min. Rated: Perma-Clad No.404-20 (special adhesives) 2.02 MATERIALS A. Door Standards: CS -171 B. Plastic Laminate: .050 inch, color and pattern to match existing. C. Rails: Mill option softwood, 2-7/8 in. minimum width. D. Stiles: One or two piece, minimum width 1-3/8 in., covered with plastic laminate to match face. E. Core: Particleboard solid core, 28-30 pcf density. F. Adhesive: Type II. G. Cross Bands: Rotary Cut, single ply, clear grade wood, 1/16 in. before sanding. H. Water Repellent Preservative: CS 262 or NWMA 1.5.4. I. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral solid core, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., 20 Minute Label, edge bands of kiln -dried hardwood treated with fire retardant treatment. J. Provide steel astragals as required by Code for U.L. rated doors and double egress smoke doors. K. Provide metal edges at all concealed vertical rod devices and at fire rated doors. Provide matching laminated edges at all nonrated doors. L. Provide glazing beads to match door facing at vision panels in nonrated doors and in sound rated doors. Provide metal glazing beads at rated doors with vision panels. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08210-3 95014 2.03 FABRICATION A. Moisture Content: I 12% maximum at time of fabrication for all wood material. B. Bond stiles and rails to particleboard core. C. Bond stiles, rails and face panels to mineral core. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors cSplying with Contradt Drawings, with this Section and )ith the referenced standards for types specified. B. Prefit doors at factory with following clearances: 1/8" on top and hinge side 1/8" on lock edge of single doors 1/16" per lea on pair meeting edges Bevel both edges of door (1/8" in 2"): Specific clear- ances to be shown bn door schedule. Field trimming of fire doors will noL be allowed. C. Pre -machine doors Schedule in Bid D, ware supplier to for all hardware metal frame sched exact location an door machining to mounted hardware. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Examine door ft and have been i sponding doors. B. Do not proceed wi conditions have b Architect. or hardware as required by Hardware uments. Hardware Schedule by hard - furnished complete with templates quiring door preparation. Hollow e to be furnished and to include size of hardware preparation. No e required for any totally surface - and verify framesarecorrect type led for proper hanging of corre- installation until unsatisfactory corrected in manner acceptable to C. Install doors only after completion of other work which would raise moisture content of doors or damage surface of doors. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 108210-4 95014 , I II 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Fit, hang, and trim doors by openings. B. Bevel lock edge of doors at rate of 1/8" in 2". C. Seal cuts made on job immediately after cutting, using clear water-resistant varnish or sealer. END OF SECTION 08210 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08210-5 95014 SECTION 084O0 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide all 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFI A. Glass -Quality and 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMING framing and hardware complete. IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 08800 A. Fabricate exterior frame units to withstand the wind pressure loading �hown or, or if not shown, 20 lbs. per sq. ft. on the gross area of the frames, panels and glass, acting inward and also outward. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: S tion and installa ated components. scale, and half s composite member. sion provisions, hardware. B. Submit samples of C. Warranty: 1. Submit a wanx contractor, 1 num framing and workmanst acceptance. shall include operation of infiltration, of panels, de excess of not sories, wean the work. mit shop drawings for the fabrica- on of aluminum framing and associ- nclude wall elevations at 1/2" e detail sections of every typical Show anchors, joint system, expan- azing and sealing details, and for Architect's verification. my signed by the manufacturer, staller, agreeing to replace alumi- d glazing which fall in materials p within 2 years of the date of ailure of materials or workmanship but not be limited to, failure in indows, excessive leakage of air excessive deflections, delamination erioration of finish or metal in al weathering, and defect in acces- rstripping, and other components of 2. Submit 5 year warranty by manufacturer of fluoro- carbon coating. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08400-1 95014 D. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.05 ADJUSTMENT A. After installation, make adjustments as necessary to insure proper operation of all hardware items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING A. Provide standard shapes "Nucore" glazed framing Finish to be Kynar 500 formulation in color to Architect's approval. 2.02 ALUMINUM SUB -SILL FLASHING and moldings of Kawneer system, or approved equal. fluorocarbon coating, 70% resin match existing and subject to A. Aluminum window and framing supplier is to provide aluminum sub -sill flashing "pans" of same aluminum alloy as frames and of minimum .050" thickness. Form pans by turning up ends and interior side 1/2". Lap end splices minimum of 2". Apply sealant to lap and rivet at 211 o.c. maximum. Provide in maximum length possible to minimize number of splices. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces in contact with dissimilar metal, concrete or mortar. Set sub -sill in continuous bed of sealant and seal around all anchors penetrating sub -sill. Do not anchor window sill through sub -sill. Finish to match aluminum frame. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08400-2 95014 I 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide all other but required for installation -of f by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION I aterials, not specifically described complete, weathertight, and proper ming systems, subject to acceptance I 3.01 INSTALLATION: Install in compliance with manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and accepted shop drawings. A. Set units plumb, or rack of framin to structure with anchors, fastener erection so as no surfaces. Where with steel, concr paint the aluminu bituminous paint. B. Seal frames with to match frames, Refer to Section that section. C. Protection: Afte masking, light me covering all expc from damage by gY by plaster, lime, stances. D. Cleaning: After vicinity of the a vaseline and/or o work, and thoroug soap and plain wa white gasoline, k abrasive cleaning TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 3ve1. and true to line, without warp. . Anchor securely in place. Secure non-staining,.non-corrosive shims, ,.spacers, and fillers. Use care in to mar, abrade, or stain finished luminum is to be placed in contact to and other dissimilar surface, back before erection with an acceptable a Silicone approved sealant in color m king.a neat fully weatherproof job. 07900, and comply with requirements of r erection, adequately protect by tot oil, vaseline or other acceptable sed parts of the work and the finish ihding and polishing machines and/or cement, acid or other harmful sub- letion of all other work in the num framing, remove all masking, covering used to protect the clean the aluminum surfaces with or a petroleum product such as ene, or distillate. Do not use nts. .SECTION 08400 08400-3 95014 ' II SECTION 08700 - HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: 1. "Hardware groups" have been assigned to doors required for project as indicated by door symbols on the drawings. The hardware groups are de- scribed in detail in this Section of specifica- tions as a guide for type and quality required. 2. Furnish finish hardware described in Hardware Schedule. Finish hardware not described but re- quired for complete and operable facility to be type and quality matching specified hardware. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Installation on hollow metal doors: Section 08100 2. Installation on wood doors: Section 08210 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Supplier: Have in his employ AHC member of the American Society of Hardware Consultants. Make AHC member available for consultation during course of construction at Contractor's expense. B. Review by AHC: Provide AHC at completion of the Work to check installation of finish hardware, make minor adjustments required, supervise hardware replacements required, and report to Architect on completeness of installation. C. All fire door hardware shall conform to requirements of NFPA 80 [AFPC V2 703.4.1]. 1.03 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee materials furnished are free from defects, blemishes, and workmanship, and perform satisfactorily for period of 1 year after Contract substantial comple- tion date. Replace defective finish hardware within guarantee period at Contractor's expense. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08700-1 95014 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule approval complete this work, giving ber for each item for type, operati( ble for furnishing supply 5 copies o: record. Architec reject any schedu: quality of produc? specifications. ] at Architect's rei Samples will be hi then returned to B. Manufacturers' personnel coml regarding inst C. Substitutions: 1. Products spe standard for lar products be substitut "Approved Eq stitution of the quality product. Pr submitted th view by the struction is products pri 2. Supporting t specificatio comparison. 3. Contractor tions, if ivalent to 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Packaging: Furnish fini marked and n Schedule. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II and Samples: Submit to Architect for list of finish hardware proposed for manufacturer's name and catalog num- Approval of hardware schedule is n, and finish. Contractor responsi- necessary hardware. After approval, hardware schedule to Architect for retains the authority to approve or e. Approval based upon general s submitted and compliance with ardware supplier to furnish samples uest, of proposed substitute items. id until completion of Project and upplier. mmendations: Deliver to installing recommendations from manufacturers ion methods. ified herein establish a quality comparison by manufacturers of-simi- Products of other manufacturers may d for those specified herein on an al" basis. DO NOT propose the sub - products that do not meet or exceed tandards established by the specified ducts proposed as equivalent MUST be ough the General Contractor for re- rchitect after the Contract for Con - awarded. DO NOT request approval of r to the awarding of the contract. nical data, samples, published and the like must be submitted for 1 warrant that proposed substitu- ted, will provide performance equ- materials specified herein. hardware with each unit clearly ered to comply with Hardware 08700-2 95014 ' I II I II 2. Pack each item complete with necessary pieces and fasteners. 3. Properly wrap and cushion each item to prevent scratches during delivery and storage. B. Delivery: Deliver finish hardware to ensure orderly progress of the Work. 1.06 ADJUSTMENT A. After installation make adjustments as necessary to insure proper operation of all hardware items. B. Door Opening Force: In accordance with the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA), adjust all door hardware so that the maximum force required for pushing or pulling open a door shall be as follows: 1. Fire doors shall have the minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative au- thority. 2. Exterior hinged doors: 8.5 lbf (SBS) 3. Interior hinged doors: 5.0 lbf These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that may hold the door in a closed position. C. Door Closers: If door is equipped with a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 700, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FASTENINGS A. General: 1. Furnish finish hardware with necessary screws, bolts, and fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor hardware in position. ' 2. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts, sex bolts, and anchors approved by Architect, according to material which ' hardware is applied and manufacturer recommenda- tions. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08700-3 95014 3. Install blocking in walls to receive wall mounted door bumpers.( 2.02 KEYING A. Coordinate lock k B. Construction Keyi final keying syst struction. C. Final Keying Syst 1. Stamp keys " 2: Masterkey lo Consult with Key groups a differently. 3. Deliver 2 k keyed alike D. All keys necess means of egress both touch and 809.75. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS ing with Architect and Owner. Provide method independent of for securing building during con - NOT DUPLICATE". in one group with 6 master keys. chitect for keying requirements. certain individual locksets for each lock plus 4 keys for each for unlocking doors installed in X11 be individually identified by it in accordance with AFPC V1 A. Catalog numbers ml Hardware Schedule were taken from indicated manufact,rers. Furnish finish hardware specifically described or approved equal product that meets the specifications of the selected product. 2.04 FINISHES A. Finish: Refer to schedule of Hardware Sets. 2.05 TEMPLATES A. Forward template information and physical hardware, if required, to related trades requiring information for preparation of their products to fit finish hardware. Make template submission complying with latest recom- mended standards pi.kblished by the Door and Hardware Institute. If physical hardware is required, ship via prepaid freight insufficient time to prevent delay in execution of the Work. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 108700-4 95014 ' 11 I 2.06 DETAILS A. Check details of items for which hardware is furnished, ' and where finished shape or size of members receiving hardware will prevent or make unsuitable use of exact type specified, immediately notify Architect. 2.07 EXCLUSIONS A. Self adhesive type door/frame weatherstripping will not be allowed. Install the specified weatherstripping at head and jambs of all exterior doors. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide to comply with following schedule. Hardware schedule is guide only for type, quality, and location of hardware. Prepare complete schedule. Contractor ' responsible for necessary quantities to complete the Work. ' 3.02 MANUFACTURERS INDEX G GLYNN- JOHNSON N NATIONAL GUARD ' R ROCKWOOD S STANLEY SA SARGENT ' 3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE ' HW SET NO.]. EACH TO HAVE: ALL HARDWARE IS EXISTING AND TO BE REUSED. HW SET NO.2 ' EACH TO HAVE: S 4 EA HINGES FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 x NRP x US26D ' SA 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 8813 ET x US26D SA 1 EA CLOSER EN -1251-P9 N 1 EA THRESHOLD 424 x DW N 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 200N x DW ' N 1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 160 x SIZE REQUIRED TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08700-5 95014 HW SET NO.3 EACH TO HAVE: S 4 EA SA 1 EA SA 1 EA R 1 EA G 4 EA HW SET NO.4 EACH TO HAVE: 5- 4 EA SA 1 EA R 1 EA G 4 EA HINGES FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 x US26D LOCK 28-1OG05 LL x US26D CLOSER EN -1231-U x SNB WALL STOP 409 x US26D SILENCERS GJ-64 HINGES FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 x US26D LOCK 28-1OG05 LL x US26D WALL STOP 409 x US26D SILENCERS GJ-64 HW SET NO.5 EACH TO HAVE: S 4 EA HINGES FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 x US26D SA 1 EA LOCK 28-10G05 LL x US26D R 1 EA FLOOR STOP 442 x US26D G 4 EA SILENCERS GJ-64 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II END OF SECTION 08700 08700-6 95014 I I SECTION 08800 - GLAZING ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included:. Furnish and install glass specified. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of Simi- ' lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- ' stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- ' view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for ' comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Provide at least one person thoroughly trained and experienced in skills ' required, completely familiar with referenced standards and requirements of this work and to personally direct installation performed under this Section. ' B. Applicable Standards For Glass and Glazing Work: Conform to the "Manual of Glazing" of the Flat Glass Marketing Association, requirements of Federal Specifi- ' cation DD -G -451c and Safety Standard 16 CFR 1201 of the U.S. Consumer Products Safety Commission. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Protect glass and glazing materials be- fore, during, and after installation. Protect in- stalled work and materials of other trades. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08800-1 95014 B. Replacements: Inevent of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary and at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS TYPES A. Furnish glass bea conforming with p Specification DD ness required and 1. Clear Anneal otherwise sh g label of its manufacturer and inent requirements of Federal 51c. Provide type glass and thick - follows: .. Float Glass: 1/4" thick unless 2. Tinted Heat and Glare Reducing Annealed Float Glass: 1/4"I thick, Pittsburgh Plate Glass "Solar Bronze" to match existing. 2.02 HERMETICALLY SEALED INSULATING GLASS ASSEMBLIES A. The following are assemblies comprised of the compo- nents listed above. 1. Tinted/Annealled Assembly: 1" thick panels con- sisting -of 1/4" clear annealed float glass on interior and 1/4" thick tinted heat and glare reducing annealed float glass on exterior with 1/2" air space. 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Provide glazing accessories required to complete glazing work that re compatible with various compo- nents of the glazi g system(s), and subject to approval of Architect. B. Glazing Sealants: Provide Tremco "Proglaze", Bostik "Chem -Calk 2000", Pecora "836"; Sonneborn "Omniglaze", or approved equal. Color to match existing. C. Glazing Tapes: Provide Tremco "Pre -shimmed 440", . Bostik "Chem Tape G0", Pecora "Shim -Seal", or approved equal. Color to match existing. D. Setting Blocks: NLoprene or other resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A d{irometer hardness, adhesive backed on one face only and bested for compatibility with specified glazing sealants. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08800-2 95014 - II II I J E. Spacers: Neoprene or other resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness and tested for compati- bility with specified glazing sealants. F. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed -cell or waterproof jacketed foam of polyethylene, butyl rubber, neoprene, polyurethane or vinyl, tested for compatibility with specified glazing sealants, of 5 to 10 psi compression strength (25% deflection), recommended by sealant manufacturer for use in glazing channel to prevent sealant exudation from the channel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GLASS SIZES A. Measure sizes for glass from actual frames, doors and windows. Contract requires glass to be set in place, and Contractor assumes responsibility for correct sizes. Use sizes shown on Drawings for estimating only as approximate dimensions. 3.02 GLAZING SURFACES A. Glaze only dry surfaces, free from dust or ice. Clean dirty surfaces with cloth saturated with turpentine or mineral spirits before glazing. Remove loose dirt particles and mortar from recesses prior to installa- tion of glass and glazing materials. 3.03 SETTING GLASS A. Set glass to provide equal bearing for entire width of each pane. Contractor responsible for broken glass due to improper setting. Set using glazing stops furnished by door or fixed framing manufacturer unless otherwise shown or specified. Accurately set glass to fit frame, with all edges smooth. Sharp ragged edges are not acceptable. Cushion glass in fixed interior view windows with felt strips around entire perimeter. 3.04 CLEANING GLASS A. Clean glass on both sides after Project painting opera- tions are complete and dry. Do not use acid solutions or water containing caustic soaps. Glass and glazing material to be clean, whole, and in perfect condition at completion of Work. END OF SECTION G8800 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 08800-3 95014 I I I I SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 - GENERAL 1:01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide metal supports and fastenings, gypsum board, and related accessories specified. Acoustical and thermal insulation is specified in Section 07200 of. Division 7. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Insulation: Section 07200 B. Joint treatment; Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Use only skilled and experienced gypsum drywall installers. Fully supervise at all times helpers and apprentices used for drywall work with thoroughly skilled gypsum drywall installers. ■ B. Manufacturers' Recommendations: Manufacturers' recom- mended use of materials, fastenings, and methods of installation is basis for acceptance or rejection of drywall work where not specifically otherwise shown or detailed. C. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an ' "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified ' product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of ' products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published ' specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-1 95014 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to tkie materials specified herein. 1.04 STANDARDS A. ASTM E580, Seismic RE Systems in Areas Requiring B. "Standard Building Code" requirements. C. ASTM C 36, Backing". D. Gypsum Assoc 1. GA -202, "Spe Finishing of 2. GA -800, "Mat 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING Wallboard", and ASTM C 442, "Gypsum publications: cations for the Application and sum Board". is Handling Manual". A. Protection:• Protect gypsum drywall materials before, during, and after installation. Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Replacements: In repairs and replac expense. 1.06 FIRE RESISTANCE A. Where gypsum dryw ratings are indic governing regulat installation meth which have been t authorities, incl Warnok-Hersey and of damage, immediately make s necessary and at Contractor's 3 AND IDENTIFICATION 1 systems with fire resistance ed or are required to comply with ns, provide materials and s identical to applicable assemblies ted and listed by recognized ing Underwriters Laboratories, actors Mutual. B. All joints in fire rated gypsum board construction are required to be tap*d and floated. This includes all joints in concealed and exposed partitions, ceilings and other applications where gypsum board is utilized as a fire barrier.1 C. All rated partitions are to extend to the underside of the roof or floor beck above and are to be sealed at the point of interbection with the deck in accordance with requirements bf Section 07270, Firestopping. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-2 - 95014 11 I I -1 L L D. Corridor partitions, smokestop partitions, horizontal exit partitions, exit enclosures, and fire walls shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Such identification shall be above any decorative ceiling and in concealed spaces. Suggested wording shall be approved by the authority having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use products and materials by Dierks Forests Div. of Weyerhaeuser Co., United States Gypsum, National Gypsum Company, Manville Corp., Celotex Corp., Flintkote Co., or Georgia-Pacific Company, or approved equal. 1. Gypsum Wallboard: Conform to ASTM C 36, have tapered edges and furnished in largest practical sheet size to minimize number of joints. Provide thickness indicated on Drawings: 2. Vinyl Wrapped Gypsum Board:Provide vinyl wrapped gypsum board wall panels to match existing thickness and material covering. Install wall panels beginning at a corner and proceeding around the room, lapping the panels at corners to conceal all cut edges. At the final corner, score the gypboard and break it out leaving a minimum 4" of vinyl fabric to wrap the cut edge and securely attach to the back of the gypsum board. Align vertical wall panel joints with acoustic ceiling grid as much as possible. 3. WR Gypsum Board: Provide 5/8" paintable type, water resistant gypsum board manufactured for use in high moisture areas conforming to ASTM C 630- 4. Fire Retardant Gypsum Board: 5/8" fire retardant gypsum board conforming to U.L. Design Numbers listed on drawings for type and manufacturer. 5. Wall/Partition Framing: a. Metal studs shall be formed of 25 gage electro-galvanized steel unless manu- facturer's design tables indicate heavier gage for any height shown or where heavier gage is called for on the drawings. The heavier than 25 gage framing members shall be formed of ASTM A570 or A611 galvanized steel. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-3 95014 b. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud mahiufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work. 6. Metal Furrin t Members: a. Channelh: 16 gauge, 7/8" deep cold rolled steel channels painted black and weighing not less th4n 475 lbs. per 1,000 l.f. b. "Hat" ah,d "Cee": ASTM C645; 25 -gage. 7. Direct Ceiling Suspension Systems: a. Manufacf-urer's:standard zinc -coated or painted steel system of furring runners, furring tees, and accessories designed for concealed support of gypsum drywall ceilings; of proper type for use intended. b. Main Runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold -rolled. c. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641, soft, Class I galvanised.. d. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel with zinc or equably rust inhibitive coating for rods and zinc or rust inhibitive paint finish for flats. ' e. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, cast -in -place concrete inserts or other devices applicable to the indicated method oIf structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction practices or by certified test data. Size devices for 3 x calculated load supported except size direct pull-out concrete inserts for 5 x calculated loads. 8. Fasteners: a. Drywall crews: Self -drilling type, 1" long. for.singhe layer application of gypsum board to metal( studs and furring channels and of longer length for multiple layer installation. 1 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-4 95014 b. Furring Anchorages: 16 -gage galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire -type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with C754. 9. Accessories: ' a. Casing Bead: "Goldbond" No.500 galvanized steel by National Gypsum Co., or approved ' equal. Furnish and install metal reveal strips where shown and detailed. b. Corner Beads: 27 ga. hot dip galvanized steel with 1" flanges with 1/16" radius nose with large openings in flange similar to 5/8" diameter holes 7/8" on center. c. Control and Expansion Joints: "Sheetrock" zinc control joint No.093 by USG, or approved equal. Provide sating and/or acoustical insulation behind control joints as required for adjacent partition construction. Use fire rated control joints in partitions requiring a fire rating. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation of gypsum drywall, selected by Contractor subject to approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Comply with specified requirements, manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and referenced stan- dards. B. In cold weather, heat building to provide uniform temperature of 50° to 700 and provide ventilation to eliminate excess moisture. C. Deliver materials to job in original unopened contain- ers or bundles and store protected from damage and exposure to the elements. D. Provide casing beads where edges of gypsum board meet dissimilar materials. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-5 95014 E. Cooperate with ca blocking required accessories. F. Make cut-outs in openings. Make not fracture wal holes with accur cover edges. G. Seal cut edges, -hi ing is broken, wi enters in placing of backing and or millwork, fixtures, fittings, and els for pipes, fixtures and small s and cut-outs by method that will rd core or tear covering. Cut so plates, escutcheons and trim s, and areas, where wallboard cover - resistant sealer. H. Install trim in stkict accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. .IInstall.trim.plumb, level, and true to line with firm Ittachment to supporting members. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL 'SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system, frame both sides of joints with furring and other support as indicated. B. Ceiling Support 1. Secure hang directly to connect to vices or fa 2. Space main 4'-0'! o.c. shown. 3. Level main r 0", measured transversely 4. Wire -.tie or and to other System: to structural support by connecting ucture where possible, otherwise rts, clips or other. anchorage de- ers as indicated. s 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers runners, except as otherwise to a tolerance of 1/4" in 1' - lengthwise on each runner and en parallel runners. furring members to main runners ctural supports as indicated. 5. Direct Hung Metal Support System: Attach perime- ter wall track or angle wherever support system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically joint sup- port members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall. tract. 6. Space furring member 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1 109250-6 95014 ii II Ii Ii fl I L I I I 7. Install auxiliary framing at termination of dry- wall work, and at openings for light fixtures and similar work, as required for support of both the drywall construction and other work indicated for support thereon. C. Wall/Partition Support System 1. Install supplementary framing, blocking and brac- ing to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported on gypsum board along. 2. Isolate stud system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and vertical- ly. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. 3. Do not attach stud system to ductwork, piping, conduit, etc. 4. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceiling and structural -walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other work, except as otherwise indicated. 5. Extend partition stud system through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere as indicated to the struc- tural support and substrate above the ceiling as indicated. Install angle bracing at 4'0" on cen- ter from ceiling runner to structure above. 6. Space studs 24" o.c., except as otherwise indicat- ed. Screw fasten to top and bottom runners. 7. Frame door openings with vertical studs securely attached by screws at each jamb either directly to frames or to jamb anchor slips on door frame; install runner track sections (for jack studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. Install angle bracing above ceiling to structural in each direc- tion at strike side of door. Double studs at all door openings. 8. Provide runner tracks of same gage as jamb studs. Space jack studs same as partition studs. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-7 95014 J L 9. Frame openings other than door openings in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of. openings to match framing required abov door heads. Opening for ductwork, piping must allow clearance for insulation, damp- ers, etc. Provide double 20 gauge studs at both sides of door openings less than 4'-0" wide and triple 20 gauge studs at door openings greater than 4'-0" wiFie. 10. Space all furLing members 24" o.c., except as otherwise indlicated. g11. Erect thermal insulation vertically and hold in place. with A -furring members. spaced 24 inches on center. Except at exterior -corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails or power -drive fasteners spaced 24" o.c. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of fuming members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard width insula- tion panel and continue in regular manner. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches front corner -and cut insulation to fit. Until gypsum board is installed hold insulation in place with 1Olinch staples fabricated from 18 gage tie wire and inserted through slot in web of mem- ber, or by an equally acceptable method. 12. Install suppl mentary framing, runners, furring, blocking and )Sacking at opening and termination in the work, andlat locations required to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, fur- nishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported directly on gypsum board along. 13. Install wall/ artition support system to•maximum tolerances of 1/8" in 12'-0" measured horizontally and verticaill. a14. At rated partitions, provide "5 sided" gypsum board enclosures where items (i.e. toilet accesso- ries, electrical items, fire extinguisher cabi- nets, etc.) penetrate the surface of the wall, in order to main4ain fire resistive integrity of the wall. Provide necessary related blocking. "5 sided" enclosures may be omitted where metal L 11 I I I L I I I L L H Li TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-8 95014 ' ' electrical backboxes not exceeding 16 square inches occur at one side only of a wall within a single stud cavity. ' 15. Provide "5 sided" enclosures similar to those described in 14 above at all penetrations into "sound" partitions and insulated exterior walls. 3.03 GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS '• A. Pre -Installation Conference: Meet at the project site with the installers of related work and review the coordination and sequencing of work to ensure that everything to be concealed by gypsum drywall has been accomplished, and that chases, access panels, openings, supplementary framing and blocking and similar provi- sions have been completed. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 1'-0" in alternate course of board. D. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner • which will minimize the number of end -butt joints, and • which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 1'-0". E. Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end - butt joints wherever possible. At stairwells and ' similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. Do not butt boards to concrete floor. Maintain a minimum 1/4" to a maximum 3/8" space between bottom of board and concrete. ' F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt ' boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. I I I C G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field cu. ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-9 95014 I H. Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional supbort at openings and cutouts. Space between recessed boxes and cut edges shall not exceed 1/8 inches. I. Form control joints and expansion joints with space between edges of.bbards, prepared to receive trim accessories described below in article entitled "INSTALLATION OF DkYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES". J. Cover both faces o steel stud partition forming with gypsum board in co%cealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.1 except in chase wall which are braced internally. K. Space fasteners inLgypsum boards in accordance with referenced standar s and manufacturer's recommenda- tions, except as otherwise indicated. 3.04 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARp APPLICATION A. Single Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard; 1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partitions board application to the greatest extend possible. 2. On partitions walls use maximum -length sheets practical to Minimize end joints. 3. At "wet" areal, install water resistant gypsum backing board t Apply with un-cut long edge at bottom of work, and space 1/4" above fixture lips.. Seal ends, cu$ -edges and penetrations of each piece with water resistant compound before installation. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: --Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accesscbry flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to they supports. Otherwise, fasten flang- es to comply with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install metal drywall work. beads at external corners of TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-10 95014 C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where semi -finishing type is indicated. Install L -type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work, and in- stall special kerf-type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L -type trim. Install U -type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant - filled (including expansion joints). D. Install J -type semi -finishing trim where indicated, and where exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by ' applied moldings. E. Install metal control joints where indicated on drawings. If not indicated on drawings, install in accordance with the following: 1. Interior Partitions: Maximum Single Dimension not Ito exceed 30 feet. Maximum Single Area is unlimited. 2. Interior Ceiling With Perimeter Relief: Maximum ' Single Dimension not to exceed 50 feet. Maximum Single Area not to exceed 2,500 Sq.Ft. ' 3. Interior Ceiling Without Perimeter Relief: Maximum Single Dimension not to exceed 30 feet. Maximum Single Area not to exceed 900 Sq.Ft. F. Install H -molding in exterior gypsum drywall work where control joints are indicated. 3.06 CHASE WALL CONSTRUCTION A. Place double row of 1-5/8" runners parallel, accurately ' lined at required spacing and securely anchored maximum 24" o.c. Position double row of 1-5/8" metal studs vertically in runners and anchor by positive screw ' engagement to stud and runner flanges. Cut bracing between rows of studs from 5/8" thick gypsum board sections and attach with minimum of three screws per stud web. Use minimum of three braces per pair of ' studs. Apply wallboard to wall faces following re- quirements for other drywall partitions. II I TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09250-11 95014 L 3.07 CLEANING UP A. Do not allow accumulation of scraps and debris arising from work of this Section. Maintain premises in neat and orderly condition at all times. Immediately remove spilled or splashed compound material and all trace of residue from adjoining surfaces. 3.08 JOINT TREATMENT • A. General: Joint treatment for general gypsum board surfaces to be paiLted is specified in Section 09900 of this division and kay be performed under either the gypsum board or painting subcontract. B. Water Resistant G fasteners to comp joint compound ma: 1. In areas to b water resista edges in gyps compound, emb excess compou coat of water coat, being c and embed tap angle. END um Board: Treat joints and with directions of water resistant tiled treat fastener heads with t joint compound. Fill tapered m panels with water resistant joint d joint tape firmly and wipe off d; follow immediately with a second resistant joint compound over taping reful not to crown the joint. Fold in all interior angles to form true SECTION 09250 I II TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II b9250-12 95014 SECTION 09260 -GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Gypsum Board Terminology Standard: GA -505 by Gypsum Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for gypsum sheathing, including other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. B. Substitutions: I J J L I I 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver gypsum sheathing with factory identification of brand and grade. Protect from damage and direct exposure to severe weather. Store on leveled supports off the grcund. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09260-1 95014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Sheathing ag Masonry Backerboard: Provide gypsum board compl'ing with FS SS -L-30 requirements for Type II (sheathing), Class 2 (water-resistant surfaces), Form a lain back, and grade and style indicated below, and with ASTM C 79. 1. Grade W: Water' -resistant treated core. 2. Style:. V -tongue and groove long edges,. square butt ends. - 3. Thickness: i/P" 4. Size: 2'-0" x 8'-0" sheets. B. Gypsum Sheathing as E.I.F.S. Backerboard: Provide 4'- 0" x 8'-0" x 1/2" thick, "Dens -Glass Gold" as manufctured by Geo�gia Pacific Corporation, or approved equal. Fabricate sheathing with fiberglass mat facing on both sides and Conforming to ASTM C-1177 for core requirements. Provide sheathing classed as noncombustible whet tested by ASTM E136 with Flame Spread and Smoke Developed rating of 0 when tested by ASTM E84. C. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15) asphalt - saturated, roofing felt, unperforated. D. Fasteners: Except as otherwise indicated, provide 1", Type S-12, bugle -h ad cadmium plated steel or stainless steel gypsum boardlscrews for machine installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Except a otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions and industry standards for the installation of gypsum sheathing. B. Horizontal Installation: Install 2' wide panels horizontally with Ii -grooved edge down, and with end joints on supports land staggered 2 support spacings where possible, but not less than one support spacing or 12'. Fasten at each support with 4 screws (spaced approximately 8" oJc.) set back 3/8" minimum from edges. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 109260-2 95014 , I II C. Cut boards at penetrations, edges and other obstructions of the work; fit tight against abutting work, except provide 3/8" setback where non-loadbearirg work abuts structural elements at head and jambs. D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with gypsum sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements. E. Building Paper Application: Apply building paper horizontally with 211 overlay and 6" endlap; fasten with zinc -coated staples. Cut back felt 1/2" on each side of break in supporting members at control joint locations. END OF SECTION 09260 I F II I TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09260-3 95014 I SECTION 09310 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and gene General and Suppl Specification Sec 1.03 SUMMARY A. This section incl 1. Ceramic mosa 2. Paver tile. 3. Stone thresh B. RELATED SECTIONS: requirements that 1. Section 03300 2. Section 07600 3. Section 09250 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In C sh and install tile specified. provisions of Contract, including �tary Conditions and Division 1 �s, apply to this Section. s the following: tile. The following sections contain elate to this Section: Cast -In -Place Concrete Sealants Gypsum Drywall General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type ofproductspecified. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints Ji tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. 1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates bymeasuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect Engineer. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09310-1 95014 ' II D. Samples for initial selection and/or verification purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. E. Master grade certificates for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. F. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE F I El r I I A. Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 0931C-2 95C14 I L D. Before installing tile, erect mock-ups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample Isubmittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects las well as qualities of materials and execution. Buildknock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and size as directed by rchitect. 2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic ' effects and workmanship. 3. Obtain architect's acceptance of mock-ups before , start of finab. unit of Work. 4. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed uni of Work. When directed, demolish and remove mok-ups from Project site. E. Install ceramic tiLe in accordance with recommendations contained in "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of America, Inc., latest edition. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANDIHANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or freezing, foreign C. Handle tile with exposed surfaces contacting backs these precautions of tile, remove c setting tile. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS tamination to materials by water, ter, and other causes. porary protective coating on prevent coated surfaces from edges of other units. If despite ating does contact bonding surfaces ing from bonding surfaces before A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary tile work from TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II to exterior to prevent damage to dioxide buildup. 09310-3 95014 • , I II ' C. Maintain temperatures at S00F (10oC) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS ' A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described ' below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of ' full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FT C I Ti I I L C 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Dal Tile Corp. c. Mid -State Tile Co. d. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc. f. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Co. g. Approved Equal. 2. Mortars and Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Bostik Construction Products Div. c. C -Cure Chemical Co. d. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. e. L & M Mfg. Inc. f. Laticrete International Inc. g. Mapei Corp. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc. i. Approved Equal TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09310-4 95014 II 2.02 2.03 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for beramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard[ referenced with products and materials indicate for setting and grouting. C. Conform to ADA regtrirements for slip resistance by providing minimum coefficients of sliding friction of 0.6 COF for horizontal surfaces and 0.8 COF for ramps and other sloped surfaces. D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns and other appearance characteristics, pkovide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. Selections tc manufacturer' textures, and indicated. E. Factory blending: within the ranges blend tile in fact tile units taken f in colors as those approved samples. TILE PRODUCTS be made by Architect from full range of standard colors, patterns for products of type For tile exhibiting color variations elected during sample submittals, ry and package accordingly so that om one package show the same range taken from other packages and match A. UNGLAZED CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE: Provide factory -mounted flat tile complyin§ with the following requirements: 1. Composition: Porcelain with abrasive admixture. 2. Nominal Dimensions: 2 X 2. 3. Face: Match Existing. 4. Base: Glazed4 x 4 wall tile. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 109310-5 95014 , [1 II ' B. UNGLAZED PAVER TILE: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: n Ii II I n I I Ii I II 1. Composition: Match Existing. 2. Nominal Dimensions: S x 8. 3. Face: Match Existing. Polished and Matte Finish. 4. Base: 4" Rubber, Set -on Type. 5. For latex-pertland cement mortared and grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary protective coating. C. TRIM UNITS: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: 1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. External Corners: Bullnose shape with a radius of at least 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. b. Internal Corners: Field -butted square corners, except use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. c. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a reduction in thickness from 1/2 inch to 1/4 inch across nominal 4 inch dimension. •' 3. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and for abrasion resistance where ' exposed to foot traffic, a minimum hardness of 10 per ASTM C 241. a. Georgia Marble, "Solar Gray" with honed ' finish, or approved equal. 2.04 SETTING MATERIALS ' A. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. I TERMINAL EXP. PHASE TI 09310-6 F 95014 I B. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: 1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the manufacturer's standard dry polymer additive in the form of a re -emulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. 2.05 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Contractor to select from the following products to suit specific project requirements and in accordance' with TCA Handbook. Wall and Floor grouts to Match Existing. B. Dry -Set Grout: ANSI A118.6, Gray color. C. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, Gray color. 1. Prepackaged d grout mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry. polymer additive in the form of a re -emulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site.. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Edge Strips: l Zinc alloy or stainless steel terrazzo strips, 148 -inch wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formdlated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherdnce of mortar and grout, is compatible with tille and mortar/grout products, and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum par odorless, con a melting poi per ASTM D 87 C. Provide other required for selected by C' tect. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II fin wax, fully refined, tasteless, ining at least 0.5 percent oil with of 1200F (49°C) to 140oF (60oC) s, not specifically described but and proper tile installation, subject to approval of Archi- 09310-7 95014 , I III C ' 2.07 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of ' referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and ' other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with ' requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. Ii. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. ' 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind ' tile has been completed before installing tile. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION L H I I I I I A. Blending; For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09310-8 95014 B. TCA Installation G'idelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" • comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Extend tile work i to recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form in cutting and drilli surfaces. Careful trim, finish, or b joints. Fit tile piping, fixtures, plates, collars, o E. Jointing Pattern: grid pattern. Ali floor, base, walls tile work and cent each space or on e tile cutting. Pro otherwise shown. ersections and returns. Perform g of tile without marring visible y grind cut edges of tile abutting ilt-in items for straight aligned losely to electrical outlets, nd other penetrations so that covers overlap tile. Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in n joints when adjoining tiles on and trim are same size. Lay out r tile fields in both directions in ch wall area. Adjust to minimize •ide uniform joint widths unless 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. F. Expansion Joints: (Locate expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Provide expan§ion and control joints at not more than 15 feet b.c., at all expansion and control joints in thelconcrete subfloor and where otherwise rec•mmended by the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of America. 3. Seal all joints in accordance with requirements of Section 076001 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09310-9 - 95014 • G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry -set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.04 INSTALLATION METHODS ' A. Conform to TCA Handbook for installation on various substrates shown or. drawings, using materials listed in Part 2 of this Specification Section. ' B. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless otherwise indicated. I I [ IJ [ I r I I I 1. Set Thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent non -tile floor finish. C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating, if applied, by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 093.0-10 95014 L C La Finished Tile Work': Leave finished installation clean and free of cracker, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner -to completed the walls and floors. Protect installed the work with kraft paper or other heavy covezin§ during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot�and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least days after grouting is completed. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral dleaner from tile surfaces. ENDOF 09310 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09310-11 95014 1 11 C SECTION 0951C - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Furnish and install suspension systems, ceiling boards and accessories required for complete installation of acoustical ceilings specified. B. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on ar. "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con-• struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Insulation: Section 07200 B. Gypsum Board Ceilings: Section 09250 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS ' A. American Society for Testing and Materials: ' 1. ASTM C 635, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acousti- cal Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings". 2. ASTM C 636,"Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspen- ' sion Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Pan- els". '• 3. ASTM E 84, "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 1 TERMINAL EXP. PHASE 11 09510-1 95014 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Prot materials before, Protect installed B. Replacements: In repairs and repla expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS -2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Provide 15/16" " World Industries Interiors, or ap ceilings. suspended acoustical ceiling ing, and after installation. k and materials of other trades. of damage, immediately make necessary and at Contractor's lude" exposed tee grid by Armstrong Donn exposed tee grid by USG ved equal for installation of lay -in B. Suspension Membersl: Intermediate or heavy duty type of sufficient strength and rigidity to carry acoustical ceiling units in true and level plane without exceeding 1/32" deflection in any 2 feet of their spans. C. Fabrication: Fabricate suspension system components from cold -rolled sheet steel conforming to ASTM A 366. Protect from rust and corrosion with electrogalvanized coating or approved equal. D. Finish for ExposedMembers: Factory applied, low - gloss, baked -enamel finish to match existing. Suspend main suspension syatem runners from overhead construc- tion members with not less than 12 gauge galvanized steel wire conforming to Federal Specification QQ-W- 461. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL CEILING BO iDS (NON -RATED) A. Provide 24" x 48" match existing. B. Furnish units rat Spread Index of F having factory ap 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS 24" x 24", Tegular Edge Units, to non-combustible under the Flame ral Specification SS -S -118b and ed washable white surface finish A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for compl to and proper installation of sus- pended acoustical and metal ceilings, selected by Contractor subject to approval of Architect. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II - 09510-2 95014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Examine surfaces and conditions affecting proper in- stallation of acoustical materials. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Do not start acoustical ceiling work until glazing is completed and exterior openings are enclosed. C. All wet work, including concrete and masonry work must be completed and dried out before work is started. D. Do not install acoustical materials unless uniform temperature in spaces where acoustical tile work is performed is at least 60O F. during and after instal- lation. 3.02 NON -RATED INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical ceilings, complete, including compo- nent parts necessary to suspend systems from structure. B. Install suspension systems to permit border units of greatest possible size where not full size. C. Following installation, clean soiled and discolored surfaces. Remove and replace units damaged or improp- erly installed. END OF SECTION 09510 IT] I L IT] TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09510-3 IF 95014 I SECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION - RESILIENT FLOORING A. Work Included: Fu±nish and install resilient flooring and base specified Clean and protect resilient floor areas after instal ation. Apply wax to surfaces where wax maintenance is recommended by flooring manufactur- er. - 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the followi g in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for e4ch type of product specified. 1. Certification by flooring manufacturer that products supplied for installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). C. Samples for selection and/or verification purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual flooring showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient flooring indicated. D. Maintenance data fbr resilient flooring, to be included in Operating and Maintenance Manual. E. Substitutions: 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products.) Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prioF to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 1.09650-1 95014 ' I F F I II I I I CE F C J I I 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain each type, color, and pattern of flooring from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Qualifications of Installers: Use only skilled and experienced resilient flooring installers for prepara- tion of substrate and installation of flooring. Super- vise helpers and apprentices at all times with thor- oughly skilled resilient flooring installers. C. Manufacturers' Recommendations: Manufacturers' recom- mended methods of installation and the referenced applicable standards is basis for installation methods used on this work. D. Applicable Standards: 1 9 0 TERMINAL EXP Federal Specifications: (a) SS -T -312B Tile, Floor Vinyl -Composition. (b) SS -W -40A Wall Base: tic. Resilient Tile _institute: Asphalt, Rubber, Rubber and Vinyl Plas- (a) Recommended Installation Specifications for Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring and Asphalt Tile Flooring. Rubber Manufacturer's Association: (a) Manual for the the :nstallati Flooring. (b) Specifications (c) Specifications (d) Specifications Preparation of Subfloors for on of Solid Vinyl and Rubber for Flexible Vinyl Cove Base. for Rubber Cover Base. for Solid Vinyl Flooring. Conform to ADA requirements for slip resistance by providing minimum coefficients of sliding friction of 0.6 COF for horizontal surfaces and 0.8 COF for ramps and other sloped surfaces. PHASE. II 09650-2 95014 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANDIHANDLING A. Deliver flooring and installation accessories to Project site in oraginal manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, kroject identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Store flooring mathrials on flat surfaces. Move flooring and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours 'in advance of installation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to recei a flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B. Do not install flooring until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to 1.06 SEQUENCING AND A. Install floor operations, i B. Do not install f slabs have cured adhesive as dete recommended bond 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS during installation. accessories after other finishing painting, have been completed. ng over concrete slabs until the are sufficiently dry -to bond with d by flooring manufacturer's moisture test. A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials, totalini 3t of the total installed-, matching products installedias described below, packaged with protective coverin for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09650-3 95014 II I, II I 1 I1 f I L L II I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. Furnish 12" x 12" x 1/811 size in color and pattern selected by Architect from Armstrong World Industries "Standard Excelon" line, or approved equal product meeting requirements of Federal Specification SS -T -312B (1), Type IV, Composition 1. Any VCT or adhesive installed under this Contract and later found to con- tain any form of Asbestos will be removed and replaced at Contractors expense. B. Use type adhesive for installation of resilient floor- ing recommended by manufacturer for the specific type flooring, including location and conditions of flooring installation. 2.02 RUBBER BASE A. Furnish homogeneous 4" high, 1/8" thick, set -on type cove base, in color selected by Architect and meeting requirements of Federal Specification SS -W -40A. Use "Pre -moulded" corner units only at returns of 3" or less. At all other locations, use "Wrapped" corners. 2.03 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. Provide materials for filling cracks and leveling floor depressions by Flintcote Underlayment, Floorstone, Stonehard Resurfacer, or approved equal. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit resilient flooring products and substrate conditions indicated. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. E. Furnish beveled edge strips 1-1/8" wide where resilient flooring adjoins other floor finish of lower level. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE 11 C9650-4 95014 H L_ 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide materials, ly described but r installation of re by manufacturer of subject to approva PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION including adhesives, not specifical- �quired for complete and proper ;ilient flooring only as recommended material to which it is applied and L of Architect. A. Examine areas where installation of flooring will occur, with Instal er present-, to verify that substrates and con itions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have bean corrected. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presenc would interfere with bonding of 'adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. 2. Finishes of s1bfloors"comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Placb Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flobrinq. 3. Subfloors arefree of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and fo,eign deposits of any kind. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manuf to prepare substr B. Use trowelable 1 manufacturer's d depressions in s er's installation specifications indicated to receive flooring. ing and patching compounds per tions to fill cracks, holes, and rates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzt or concretegrinder, a drum sander, or polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty brush. I I I L I I I I I E I I TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09650-5 - 95014 ' P II II r r I I [_ I I I I I D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.03 TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in same direction. D. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor, install tile before these items are installed. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Install 1-1/8" wide bullnose edging strips where edges of tile are exposed. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09650-6 95014 I LI I. Install tiles on ckpvers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similaritems occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity -of color and pattern with piece's of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. J. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing , open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. K. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with ti e manufacturer's directions including those fo trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. L. Hand roll tiles whkre required by tile manufacturer. I 3.04 CLEANING AND A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing _installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by flooring manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vaculm floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended bir resilient flooring manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop flooring to remove black marks and soil B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction-perioa. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to flooring surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemi hes. 2. Use commercia acrylic produ manufacturer. 3. Coordinate maintenance TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II available, metal, cross -linked acceptable to flooring tion of floor polish with Owner's ice. 09650-7 95014 , I II 4. Cover flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 5. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Clean flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean flooring using method recommended by manufacturer. 1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation prior to cleaning. 2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. END OF SECTION 09650 I I C I J TERMINAL EXP. PHASE 1 I 09650-8 95014 I - II SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 ALLOWANCE A. Carpet Type I: Cohtractor is to use the sum of $20.00 per square yard fok calculation of Base Bid. This is to include the pur hase, taxes, delivery and installation of al. carpet and accessories to be selected by Archit ct after the award of the Contract for Construction. B. Carpet Type II (pat of Alternate No.1): Contractor is to use the sum of $35.00 per square yard of 6 foot wide self adhesive roll goods for calculation of Alternate Price. This is to include the purchase, taxes and delivery of all carpet and accessories to be selected by Architect after the award of the Contract for Construction. Installation of this carpet is to be calculated by Cont actor and included in Alternate Pricing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET, PAD AND A. To be selected by architect. PART 3'- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Detailed installation specifications will be issued after the award ofla contract. i TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II SECTION 09680 D9680-1 I II I II II II II II II II Ii II I1 LI II 95014 I II F F I I I 1J I I I F F I SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide specified painting and finish- ing of interior and exterior items. 1. Provide required painting of exposed steel and iron work and of primed metal surfaces. Paint exposed -to -view prefinished metal surfaces of items if required. 2. Provide touch-up of prefinished items to match original finish. 3. Do not paint waterproof coatings, water repellent coating, acoustical ceilings, toilet partitions, aluminum with factory applied finish, or pre -fin- ished items, except as noted above. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Prefinishing: Shop priming and factory prefinishing required on some, but not all, shop or factory manufac- tured or fabricated items described in other Sections of Project Manual. B. Water Repellent Coating: Section 07150 C. Caulking: Section 07900 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Term "paint", as used herein, includes enamels, paints, sealers, fillers, emulsions, varnishes, stains, and other coatings whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Painters: Use only qualified jour- neyman painters for mixing and application of paint. In acceptance or rejection of painting, no allowance made for lack of skill on part of painters. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09900-1 95014 U 1.05 COLORS AND SAMPLES A. Paint colors and wood finishes selected by Architect. Submit to ArchitecALL color chips in complete color range of materials to be used for preparation of color schedule. Secure color schedule from Architect and submit sample panejis of natural finish for approval. Prepare samples in duplicate using same type wood on which finish is applied. One sample returned for use on job and other rlhtained by Architect. B. Approximately 20% bf paintedsurfaces for this project are accent colors. _ 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver paint materials to job site in original unopened ontainers with labels intact and legible at time of use. B. Protection: 1. Store only approved materials at job site and store only in suitable and designated area re- stricted to storage of paint materials and related equipment. 2. Ensure safe storage and use of paint materials and prompt and safe disposal of waste. 3. Protect paint materials before, during, and after application and protect installed. work and materi- als of other Lrades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Prbvide paints, enamels, stains: var- nishes, and admixtilires of first line quality by Sherwin Williams. Sherwin Williams products specified herein establish minimum cftuality standards. Products of Pratt and Lambert, Glidden, Benjamin Moore, Pittsburgh, Devoe or Stebbins & Roberts may be substituted for those specified herein o$$ an "Approved Equal" basis. B. Compatibility: Paint materials and equipment to be compatible. Finish coats compatible with prime coats, prime coats compatible with surface.to'be coated, and tools and equipment compatible with coating applied. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II ,09900-2 95014 C. Thinners (when used): Use thinners recommended for that purpose by manufacturer of material thinned. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify work is complete to point where paint- ing work may properly commence. 2. Verify paint finishes may be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions and requirements of these Specifications. B. Discrepancies: Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until discrepancies are fully resolved. 3.02 PREPARATION CF SURFACES I I J J I I Ti I A. Protection: Completely mask, remove, and adequately protect hardware, accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in contact with painted surfaces not scheduled to receive paint. B. Priming: Use primer recommended by manufacturer of coating system. Spot prime exposed nails and metals to be painted with emulsion paints. C. Cleaning: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces receiving paint. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and contam- inants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Clean ferrous metals free of dust, grease and grime. Sand smooth rust spots, mars, and abrasions in surfac- es. Touch up bare metal with zinc chromate primer. E. Gypsum Board: Treat and conceal joints, screwheads, and depressions in gypsum board surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Painted surfaces must be completely clean and continu- ously smooth. Treat internal and exterior corners and angles formed by intersection of wallboard surfaces and TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09900-3 95014 L wallboard edges accordance with specifications w have metal trim. F. Wood: Clean wood eign substances w sandpaper. Sandp view, and then re ing job painting Prime edges, ends this wood. Scrap and apply thin co recommended knot coat.. After prim finish surfaces w Sandpaper smooth G. Primed Ferrous M coats which have solvent clean, a coat. H. Galvanized Metal surface contamin based solvent. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Evenly spread and •or sagging. Appl knots before prim B. Putty woodwork nai coat of paint or finished woodwork. C. Surfaces to which clean. th joint reinforcements system in nufacturer's standard installation re intersections and edges do not surfaces free of dirt, oil, or for- th scrapers, mineral spirits, and per smooth those surfaces exposed to ove dust. Prime or seal wood requir- mmediately upon delivery to job. faces, undersides, and backsides of and clean small, dry seasoned knots, t of white shellac or manufacturer's ealer, before application of priming ng, fill holes and imperfections in th putty of plastic wood -filler. hen dried. ls: Touch-up shop -applied prime mage or bare areas. Wire -brush, touch up with same primer as shop aces: Clean free -of oil and with acceptable non -petroleum • up with galvanized metal primer moothly apply materials without runs thin coat of shellac to sap wood and holes and imperfections after first in. Putty shall match color of is applied shall be dry and D. Do not perform outside painting in extremely cold, frosty, or damp weather. Do not paint in dusty rooms. If required, sprinkle floors, to lay dust. Do not apply coats of paint on either wet -or damp surfaces and in no case unless preceding coat is dry and hard. E. Clean surfaces bef grease, rust, scal sandpaper, steel s sary. After wood sanding, finish up same as door faces TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II re priming. Remove dirt, oil, and foreign matter. Clean with raper, or wire brushes where neces- oors are fitted and ready for final er and lower edges of wood doors 09900-4 95014 C L I I I I I L F. Specified coats are to cover completed painting and finishing work. Where color, stain, or underccats show through final coat, install additional coats until uniform coverage is obtained. G. Vary tints of undercoats slightly for identification of succeeding coats. Ample time of drying required to secure best possible resu..ts. H. Coats specified are in addition to shop or mill priming required under other Sections of these specifications. I. All cabinet devices that require finish painting are to be painted with doors in the open position and shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 24 hours in the open position. DO NOT PAINT DOORS CLOSED AND TRIM AFTER DRYING. This includes, but is not limited to, wall and ceiling access doors, fire extinguisher cabinets, electrical panel boxes, etc. 3.04 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Give back side of interior wood trim in contact with masonry units one application of water repellent pre- servative. 3.05 PAINT SCHEDULE ' A. Finish surfaces as follows: I I I n I I ri L SURFACE TREATMENT 1. Exterior Ferrous Metals: 2. Interior Ferrous Metals: 3. Int. Gypsum Board - Painted: TERMINAL EXP. PHASE _- 1st Coat - SW Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50W1 White or B50N2 Base (Touch up only on primed surfaces) 2nd & 3rd Coats - SW DTM Acrylic Coating B66W200 Series 1st Coat - SW Kern Kromik Primer (Touch- up only on primed surfaces) 2nd & 3rd Coats - SW Pro Mar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss 1st Coat - SW Pro Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer 2nd & 3rd Coats - SW Pro Mar 200 Latex Eg-Shel or Semi -Gloss Enamel as directed 09900-5 95014 L II 4. Woodwork (Painted): 5. Woodwork (Stained): 6. Pavement Marking: 3.06 PAINTING OF MECHANICAL AND A. Painting of pipe and du in inaccessible pipe.an spaces above ceiling no B. Metal Work in Mechanica ished equipment and tou final coat. Clean expo outlet boxes, hangers a neous pipe line devices Clean prime painted or cal and electrical equi coats of enamel to matc Finish remaining expose enamel. 1st Coat - coated 2nd & 3rd Semi -Gloss 1st Coat - 2nd Coat - SW Pro Mar 200 Enamel Under - Coats - SW Pro Mar 200 Latex Enamel SW Paste Wood Filler/Stain SW Satin Varnish II II II Sherwin-Williams, Promar Traffic Mark- ing, Series No.B29, colors as selected by Architect. Paint shall be applied in 2 coats to a clean dry surface using template or a stripping machine. Stripes shall be a uniform width of 4 inches wide. Other markings shall be as shown on drawings. CAL WORK insulation and uncoated ferrous metal duct chases, in plumbing chases, and in required. Room (finish as follows): Clean prefin- up with enamel to match manufacturer's d pipe, exposed conduit and electric brackets, valve handles, and miscella- nd give two coats of medium gray enamel. finished items of manufactured'mechani- ent, then prime and finish with two other finished items of equipment. metal items with two coats of light grey C. Paint exposed interior metal work, including ferrous and non- ferrous piping, for heating ventilating, plumbing and electrical ,equipment, electric cabi ets, ventilating grilles, metal access panels. Give exposed metal items one coat of enamel undercoater and one coat of enamel in addition to priming coat. D. Give pipe and duct insulation exposed to view one coat glue size and two coats enamel. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II p9900-6 95014 3.07 REPAINTING AND REFINISHING A. Thoroughly clean existing surfaces in present building to be repainted and give one or more new coats of same type of paint originally used. Clean existing natural finish surfaces, sand and give new coat of varnish or finish originally used. Treat patched and repaired surfaces as new surfaces. For bidding purposes figure two coats of paint as average requirement. Scrape surfaces to be repainted, sand by hand or machine, and prepare to receive new coats. 3.08 EXTENT OF REPAINTING A. Do not paint rooms and areas in existing building where no cutting, patching, or remodeling work occurs under this Contract. Paint rooms and areas in existing building where cutting and patching occurs under this Contract. Paint after cutting, patching, and remodeling in rooms and areas is completed. Where cutting and patching is required on only one wall or surface, paint the entire room or area. END OF SECTION 09900 I I C I TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 09900-7 il 95014 I SECTION 10400 - IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 ALLOWANCE A. Contractor allow the sum of $1,000.00 in Base Bid for purchase, taxes, delivery and installation of building signage to be selected by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING SIGNAGE A. To be selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Detailed installation specifications will be issued after the award of a contract. END OF SECTION 10400 TERMINAL EXPANSION 10400-I 94022 SECTION 10520 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: portable fire e vide quantity r the drawings or B. Substitutions: 1. Products spec standard for lar products. be substitute "Approved Equ stitution of the quality s product. Prc submitted thr view by the P struction is products pric 2. Supporting to specification comparison. 3. Contractor tions, if ivalent to 1.02 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Prot during, and after and materials of B. Replacements: In repairs and repla expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PROTECTION SPECIALTIES ighting devices consist of hand- ishers and metal cabinets. Pro- d to meet Code whether shown on ied herein establish a quality mparison by manufacturers of simi- Products of other manufacturers may for those specified herein on an " basis. DO NOT propose the sub- oducts that do not meet or exceed ndards established by the specified._ cts proposed as equivalent MUST be gh the General Contractor for re.- hitect after the Contract for Con- arded. DO NOT request approval of to the awarding of the contract. nical data, samples, published and the like must be submitted for 11 warrant that proposed substitu- pted, will provide performance equ- materials specified herein. firefighting devices before, tallation. Protect installed work r trades. of damage, immediately make s necessary at Contractor's A. Provide multi -purpose, Model MP -5 dry chemical type for ' Class A, B, and C £'fires with U.L. rating of 2A-10B:C manufactured by Laxjsen's Mfg. Co., or approved equal. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 110520-1 95014 ' I II 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Construct cabinets from 18 gauge, or heavier, steel with white baked enamel interior finish and zinc chro- mate primed exterior. Provide Larsen's Mfg. Co., "Architectural Series" No. 2409-5R, or approved equal, with full glass doors and square edge trim. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate with other trades to ensure proper and adequate provision in framing and wall covering for installation of recessed cabinets. B. Inspection: 1. Prior to installation, inspect cabinet recesses, and verify that necessary provisions have been made. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of dis- crepancy until discrepancies have been fully re- solved. 3.02 INSTALLATION I I I I Li E A. Install firefighting devices in full accordance with pertinent regulations and manufacturer's recommenda- tions. Set top of cabinet at height above finished floor to meet A.D.A. requirements and anchor components firmly in place. 3.03 SERVICE A. Determine approximate completion date of Work. In- spect, charge, and tag fire extinguishers at date not more than ten days before or less than one day before actual completion date of the Work. ' TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II END OF SECTION 10520 10520-2 95014 L SECTION 10800 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: F called for in Toi AND BATH ACCESSORIES sh and install metal accessories Accessory Schedule on drawings. B. Substitutions: 1. Products spe ified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of simi- lar products. Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is warded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting technical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shall warrant that proposed substitu- tions, if accepted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to the materials- specified _ herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use personnel skilled in work required, completely familiar with manufacturers' recommended methods of installation, and hhoroughly familiar with requirements of this work. - 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Protect toilet and bath accessories be- fore, during, and after installation. Protect installed work and materials of other trades. B. Replacements: In event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary at Contractor's expense. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II 10800-1 95014' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FASTENINGS A. Furnish accessories complete with required fastenings, and with fastenings harmonizing with finish of item being installed. 2.02 METAL TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Accessory numbers listed in Accessory Schedule are Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co., listed to indicate type and quality of items. Approved equal accessories by other manufacturers may be furnished. 2.03 PLUMBING PIPE WRAP A. At all exposed lavatory piping, provide "Trap Wrap" insulated lavatory safety kit as distributed by C.A. Riner Co., Inc., 7620 Hardin Drive, North Little Rock, Arkansas, or approved equal. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color line. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Coordinate with other trades to ensure proper and adequate provision in framing and wall finish for installation of selected accessories. ■ B. Prior to installation, inspect location of accessories and verify that necessary provisions have been made. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepan- cy until discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, anchoring components firmly in place. END OF SECTION 10800 C I 'TERMINAL EXP. PHASE :: 10800-2 95014 L SECTION 10950 - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide mi 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish at least thoroughly famil each item, to pe 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide color available from Architect. B. Guarantees: Deliv tees, warranties, nance instructions C. Substitutions: ISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES specialties specified. person, present at all times, with installation requirements of ally supervise installation. representing full range of colors facturer, for color selection by to Architect one copy of guaran- rating instructions, and mainte- 1. Products specified herein establish a quality standard for comparison by manufacturers of_simi- lar products.) Products of other manufacturers may be substituted for those specified herein on an "Approved Equal" basis. DO NOT propose the sub- stitution of products that do not meet or exceed the quality standards established by the specified product. Products proposed as equivalent MUST be submitted through the General Contractor for re- view by the Architect after the Contract for Con- struction is awarded. DO NOT request approval of products prior to the awarding of the contract. 2. Supporting teLhnical data, samples, published specifications and the like must be submitted for comparison. 3. Contractor shill warrant that proposed -substitu- tions, if acc�pted, will provide performance equ- ivalent to th, materials specified herein. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Protect miscellaneous specialty items before, during, anc after installation. Protect in- stalled work and materials of other trades. TERMINAL EXP. PHASE II :10950-1 95014 B. Replacements: In event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RECESSED FLOOR MAT A. Furnish and install recessed floor mat Model No.536 and recessed aluminum angle frame Model No.548 by Reese Enterprises, Inc., P.O. Box 459, Rosemount, MN 55068, 1-800-328-0953, or approved equal. Fabricate mat frame from extruded aluminum 6063-T52. Carpet and frame colors to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color lines. 2.C2 CORNER GUARDS A. Provide Institutional Products Corporation (1-800-222- 5556) Model No. 8118, 1-1/8" clear polycarbonate, 8 foot length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to installation, verify items may be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION IA. Install miscellaneous specialties in strict accordance with manufacturers' current recommendations and in- structions. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Verify that trim is in place and adjust components. ' B. Remove labels from equipment and remove packing materi- als from job site. END OF SECTION 1095C I tT ERMINAI, EXP. PHASE II 0950-2 95014 I DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS These specifications conformlto the="CSI Masterformat", Document MP -2-1-88, dated October 6, 1988, of The Construction Specifica- tions Institute, 601 Madison Street, Alexandria, Virginia 22314. No work which would be specified as a part of this division is included in this contract. I GENERAL MECHANICAL SECTION 15010 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Comply with the ConditorIs of the Contract, General and Supplementary Conditions, and any other applicable requirements contained herein or issued under separate cover. B. Perform other work related to or necessary for the mechanical installation in accordance with the applica Ile Specification Division or Section contained herein. C. In Mechanical Specification Sections, items under "RELATED WORK' are listed for convenience only and are not guaranteed to be a complete listing of all applicable work 1.02 CODES, REGULATIONS AND A. Comply with the latest 1. Standard Building G 2. Arkansas State Plun 3. Arkansas State Gas 4. Life Safety Code (NI 5. National Electrical C 6. Arkansas State Fire 7. Arkansas Gas Pioeli B. Comply with applicable 1. Arkansas State Depai 2. 1979 Arkansas Rules New Building Constru 3. Arkansas Department 4. Occupational Safety ec 5. Utility Company Regu 6. Other State and Fede 7. Local Ordinances C. Furnish products and perr Standards published by the 1. Underwriter's 2. National :Fire of applicable codes including the blowing: .101) (1vrFA (u) wention Code Code as amended, including the following: it of Health Regulations Regulations for Energy Efficiency Standards for Labor Regulations Health Act (OSHA) ins and Requirements Laws and Regulations installation conforming to the latest accepted wing organizations: ies, Inc. (UL) i Association (NFPA) 15010-1 L I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) • 4. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) • 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) ' 7. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 8. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) '• 9. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 10. American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 11. American Gas Association (AGA) 12. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 13. Midwest Insulation Contractors Association (MICA) ' 14. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contactor's National Association (SMACNA) 15. Insurance Service Office (ISO) ' 16. Factory Insurance Association (FIA) 17. Factory Mutual (FM) 18. Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (IBR) 19. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) ' 20. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) 21. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE) '22. Plumbing and Drainage Institution (PDI) 23. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) ID. In case of discrepancy or conflict between Codes, Regulations, Standards, Drawings and/or Specifications, the requirement yielding the higher(est) quality of work shall govern. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE FEES: IA Obtain and maintain all necessary licenses, permits and inspections and pay all fees including taxes and penalties, if any, required by the Administrative Authority. Refundable deposits will be paid by the Owner. I 1.04 PRE -CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS: ' A Submit for approval, Manufacturer's technical data sheets including performance specifications for all equipment and air devices shown on the schedules. Also provide data on all system accessories and all materials. Include all piping, ductwork and insulation materials. Accessories to be submitted on shall include valves and all piping accessories, and all duct accessories including extractors, ' turning vanes, control dampers and balancing dampers. B. Submit for approval, Contractor's original Shop Drawings of all assemblies of ' manufactured items including control diagrams. Submit all items called out in individual sections. in addition to those called for in this section. 15010-2 1 C. Indicate all pertinent coordination of the it D. Provide complete electrical E. Make Submittals on all except by special peril F. Bind Submittals in durable properly indexed with index G. Obtain approval on product submittals. H. Each Mechanical Section convenience. I. Submit for approval a sche Shop Drawings on special J. Provide performance data scheduled. Include all soL Iiiib.10114►19 A It is intended that the C system including all inc operation or customarily indicated. B. The Drawings indicate the c piping, ductwork, etc. Final I all measurements verified at C. It is intended that the rr easily maintained with is on scale drawings necessary for clarity and or between trades. and wiring diagrams. contained in Division 15, Mechanical at one time with contents conveniently organized and not specifically named prior to making a listing of required Submittals only for of nameplates and manufacturer's data sheets and ports and seals. substituted items to demonstrate equality to those 'el, rpm, velocity and other data as it is applicable. r provide a complete and operating mechanical items, and connections necessary for proper i even though each and every item may not be ral layout requirements for equipment, fixtures, d will be governed by actual field conditions with site. installation be safe, reliable energy, efficient, and provisions allowed for access to equipment. D. It is intended that the mechanical system operate quietly with noise levels below the criteria recommended for the application by ASHRAE. Provide corrective action as required to reduce objectional noise or vibration. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: A Furnish only new standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of said products. 0-3 B. Support all products by service organizations with adequate spare parts inventory and personnel located reasonably dose to the site. C. Where multiple units of the same type or class of products are required, provide all units of the same manufacturer. n I I L I 2.03 PRODUCT HANDLING: A Store products in the original containers and shelter in a suitable environment at an approved location. Make readily accessible for inspections and inventory accounting. PRODUCT SUBSIITUT1ONS: A For products specified by generic reference standard, select any product meeting such standard. B. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, select any named. Submit request, in writing, for substitution of any product or manufacturer not specifically named and obtain approval at least five working days prior to bid date. C. Provide all information required to support claim of "equality' of product proposed for substitution. Substitutions will be considered only if equivalent in quality, efficiency, performance, size, weight, reliability, appearance, and ease of maintenance to the specified product or manufacturer. D. Where approved product substitutions alter the design, space requirements, electrical requirements, connections, or etc., include all work necessary to provide a complete installation of quality equal to or better than that which would have been achieved with products or manufacturers as specified. 2.04 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION: A Identify each major component as number, serial number, and pertinent component in a conspicuous place. o manufacturer's name, address, model ratings on a durable plate attached to the B. Identify each major component as it is named on the Drawings or referred to herein with engraved nameplates made from laminated plastic sheets. Furnish with white letters on black background except for other color coded requirements. 2. Provide appropriate size nameplates with information easily readable. 15010-4 3. Submit for approval, component. 4. Attach nameplates surfaces only. Atta all other surfaces. C. For hydronic systems only: 1. Identify each valve, filled coded numbers with brass jack chai Frame under glass a the following informs a. Fluid conveye b. Function of vs c. Normal positic d. Emergency in e. Location of th' schedule of nameplates to be affixed to each major th approved adhesive on factory baked enameled nameplates with proper screws on field painted and ept obvious equipment isolation vales, with black graved on 1-112" diameter brass nametag attached Provide typewritten =legend of numbered valves. mount on the wall where directed. Include at least i in the legend: valve where appropriate 2. Identify each pipe or duct exposed in equipment rooms or accessible above lay -in ceilings or behind access doors with permanent markers as manufactured by Seton or Brady. Indicate fluid conveyed and direction of flow. Install on each bipe or duct where it enters or leaves a wall or floor and at other intervalsinot to exceed 20 feet. D. Identify outdoor undergrount lines with continuous strip of plastic utility market tape as manufactured by Setbn stating at regular intervals "CAUTION (state utility) PIPE BELOW." Install one foot directly above pipe before back filling to grade. 2.05 ANCHORS: A Size anchors for minimum corrosion resistant mateft B. In new concrete, use C. In exsting concrete or solid n Elcen self drilling expansion loads and with specific apprc D. In hollow masonry, use E. On structural steel, use F. - In wood, use wood screws of two times recommended load. Use only iron inserts set prior to pouring concrete. use Phillips "Redhead" expansion shields or Use power driven fasteners only for light toggle bolts. beam damps or direct weld. lag screws or through bolt with nuts and washers. --�YLIn1 G. In sheet metal, use self tapping sheet metal screws or machine bolts with washers and nuts. H. In bar joists, use hanger rod between bottom angles secured with washers and nuts. 2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Generally, support piping in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and support ducts in accordance with SMACNA duct construction standards. B. Support horizontal steel and copper pipe as follows: 1. For pipe sizes 2" and smaller, use adjustable wrought steel ring or devis hanger spaced at 5 feet on center with 3/8" steel hanger rod. 2. For pipe sizes 2-1/2" through 4", use adjustable wrought steel devis spaced at 10 feet on center with 5/8" steel hanger rod. 3. Support high tmpeature pipe with pipe roller hangers to allow for expansion. C. Support cast iron soil pipe 4" and smaller with adjustable wrought steel ring or devis hanger spaced at 5 feet on center with 5/8" steel hanger rod. D. Support PVC pipe with approved hangers at 4 feet on center. E. Provide trapeze hangers consisting of steel angles or channels with spacers and steel hanger rods for multiple piping or dud runs. F. Provide copper plated hangers if in contact with copper piping. G. Provide 18 gauge galvanized saddles for insulated pipe and size hanger to accomodate pipe and insulation. ■ H. Use steel riser damps for vertical piping support through floors. Provide steel bracket and wrought steel damp for support from walls. ' I. Support ducts with steel bands, steel angles, or steel channels near each ' transverse joint. J. Support piping on roof with 4"x4"x2' redwood blocks with wooden saddle formed Ito fit pipe and nailed to block. Loosely damp pipe to saddle with steel straps. 2.07 CONCRETE BASES: ' 15010-6 A Provide concrete bases for floor mounted equipment indicated on the Drawings and all exterior equipment mounted on grade. Use proper cement —sand mix to achieve strength of 3000 psI after 28 days. B. Provide steel reinforcing bars as required and provide proper ties and support during pouring. C. Establish sizes of bases rec, bases extend 3" larger than D. Provide properly sized ar bolts cannot be held in sleeves. E. Prior to pouring, set steel r anchorage of base. Install 24 inches. F. Trowel finish and rub G. Grout bases for pumps and 2.08 SLEEVES: A For pipes or round ducts sleeves with 18 gauge ga fire rated dry wall constru to accommodate equipment. Generally, make bolts held in position with templates. Where anchor dent alignment, provide adjustable bolts in pipe dowels in holes drilled in existing slab for proper each comer and at other intervals not to exceed Form edges with 314" chan tfer. vibrating equipment with non -shrink grout. igh dry floors above grade or interior walls, form 'ed sheet metal. Sleeves are not required in non nor slab on grade. B. For pipes through outside walls, firewalls, concrete beams, footings or potentially wet floors, provide schedule X40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves. Provide integral waterstop in outside wall sle (eves. C. For rectangular ducts through walls or floors, form sleeves with steel angles or channels or galvanized sheet metal. D. Extend sleeves through I drilled penetrations in ex in lieu of sleeves. Make E. Size sleeves to allow for insulation run continuous F. Where pipes or ducts pass or approved fire barrier mat sides of wall sleeves as fol one inch above floor and seal watertight. For core floors, provide one inch angle rings set in sealant sleeves flush with wall. ant due to expansion and to provide for pipe sleeves. i sleeves, completely fill space with insulation Provide tight fitting escutcheon plates on both 1. Galvanized sheet metal caps for ducts. - 0-7 II U I I I J I L I I I 2. Galvanized or cad plated plates for pipes in mechanical spaces or unfinished areas. 3. Chrome plated brass for pipes in finished areas. 2.09 FLASHING AND SEALS: A Where piping penetrates roof membrane, provide 30 inch square sheet of 5 lb/sq. ft. lead or 18 gauge copper. Extend flashing into top of open vent pipes one inch or provide flashing assembly or pitch pan as recommended by roofing manufacturer. B. Flash floor drains, except in slab on grade, with copper sheet flashing. Extend flashing under tile or floor finish to 6 inches up wall in showers or 2 feet from floor drain. Clamp flashing to auxilliary drain collar on floor drain. C. Provide curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Make curbs minimum of 4 inches above flood level of roof. Flash and counter flash with galvanized sheet metal, soldered and properly waterproofed. D. Where piping penetrates outside walls, make watertight with oakum and sealant or provide modular rubber seal designed for the purpose. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURERS DIRECTIONS: A Handle, install, connect, test, and operate all products, assemblies, and systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. In case of conflicting requirements between the manufacturer's directions and the Contract Documents, obtain instructions before proceeding with the work. 3.02 INSPECTIONS: A Arrange with the Administrative Authority for inspections of all work required and obtain approval prior to concealing or proceeding with the work. B. Give adequate notice before concealing any work for inspections by the Architect or Owner's representatives. Obtain instructions to proceed before concealing the work. 3.03 CLEANING: A Keep the premises clean and free from debris, dirt, etc. B. Upon completion of the work, dean and polish all fixtures, equipment, etc. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP: A Perform all work in accordar5ce with the best practices of the trade and provide a "neat" installation by mechanics skilled in their respective trades and properly licensed. B. Accurately install piping, ductwork, and other equipment, plumb, level, and true to line with runs parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Make bends or offsets uniform. C. Carefully perform all duttin , drilling, digging, etc., and patch or refinish the disturbed"area to the condition of adjoining or similar surfaces in an approved manner. Do not cut any stn.ctural member without specific approval. Do not cut any electrical or mechanical lines that may be concealed. D. Conceal piping, ductwork, Sc. in chases, furrings, or above ceilings unless indicated otherwise. Flush mount equipment required in finished walls where possible. 3.05 3.06 FLAME AND SMOKE A In ducts or other endosi return air plenums above composite classifications developed ratings. This r finishes, etc. B. Completely seal penetrn or other barriers for the to preserve the fire/sn used :for transporting environmental air, including igs, use only products conforming to NFPA and UL exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke rement applies to all materials including adhesives, igh fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, floors, if piping, ductwork, etc. with a UL listed material of the barrier. C. Provide approved fire dampers in air ducts penetrating fire barriers requiring a fire construction rating greater than one hour. Maintain access to fire dampers fusible link COORDINATION: A Coordinate the mechanical work with the work of related trades to avoid interferences. Determine the xact route of piping and ductwork prior to fabrication and the exact locaion of each bullet and equipment connection prior to installation. B. Study the Architectural, StnUctural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings, and Specifications including ShoplDrawings and manufacturer's technical data sheets, and compare to actual site 6 nditions and constraints. In case of conflicts or interference, obtain darificatibn or instructions before performing any work. W I I] I I I C. Piping or equipment requiring slope or specific mounting elevations will generally have right of way over products whose elevations can be changed. D. Carefully plan the sequence of work as required to minimize disruptions and installation time. 3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A Make all required utility connections to each item of equipment shown or specified including equipment furnished by Owner, and make operational. B. Connect overflows, relief discharges, blowdowns, drain valves, etc. with approved piping and extend to floor drains or other approved discharge points. C. Make all electrical connections to equipment including power supply and control wiring in accordance with Division 16, Electrical. 3.08 PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS: A Locate existing utility lines and adequately identify and protect during the execution of the work. B. Protect public and private property against damage. IC. Protect all work including building finishes against damage due to dirt, water, chemicals, frost, heat, handling, theft, etc. Keep openings in piping and ductwork and equipment dosed with suitable plugs or caps during installation. D. Provide necessary warning devices, baricades, or coverings required for safety around moving parts, sharp objects or high temperature surfaces. 3.09 CHASES AND OPENINGS: A Provide templates or details for chases and other openings required through floors, walls, ceilings, etc. to accommodate piping or ductwork. I 3.10 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING: A Excavate bottoms of trenches to required depth and grade for proper slope with uniform and solid bearing for piping. Do not lay pipe on mud, rocks, or unstable soil. Remove unsuitable bearing material and backfill to proper depth with sand ' or other approved material. B. After piping has been satisfactorily leak tested and approved, backfill trench to a I depth of one foot above top of pipe with sand or fine pea gravel. Install continous strip of plastic "CAUTION" tape over pipe and sand. Use suitable material for remaining backfill to finished grade, tamped to 95% compaction. 15010-10 I 3.11 PIPING INSTALLATION: A Erect piping without headroom. B. Provide for expansion and approved expansion coupl! or springing and allow for proper clearance and with piped loops, changes in direction, or C. Install all piping in a manner to prevent freezing. If necessay to install water piping in unheated spaces or outdoors above the frost line, provide electric heat tracing around pipe prior to insulating. 3.12 PAINTING: A Paint ductwork,: piping, adjacent surfaces as d through grilles or other i B. Paint all exposed piping , appearance or identification C. Paint ferrous piping, i rusting, with one coat paint. D. Paint roof mounted and or adjacent surfaces as E. Paint plywood backboards 3.13 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND ant, etc. exposed in finished areas to match Paint items flat black or as directed if visible equipment in mechanical spaces for uniform directed. ;nt, hangers, etc. exposed outdoors or subject to and two coats of approved exterior enamel based outdoor equipment to uniformly match background for mounting equipment. NG: A After systems are completed nd fully operational, perform Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) in accordance with procedures recommended in ASHRAE Systems volume,- AABC Standards, and NEBB Standards on the following systems: 1. Supply Air System 2. Return Air System' 3. Exhaust Air System 4. Outside Air System B. Furnish all test equipment, tdols and instrumentation required for TAB. Submit proof of calibration when req 1 ired. C. Before beginning TAB, submit forms to be used to the Engineer for approval 0-11 I D. Adjust fan speeds, dampers, valves, and other controls to achieve design ratings. ' Balance each air device or valve to within plus or minus 10 percent of indicated flow rates. Perform TAB for each possible mode of operation. E. Notify Engineer 24 hours prior to taking final readings and arrange for Engineer to be present for final readings. F. Obtain and record all measurements required for final TAB report. Include at least the following data: ' 1. Running amperes and voltage at each motor 3/4 horsepower or larger. Indicate rpm and direction of rotation. 2. Air flow rates (cfm) at each suply air outlet, return and outside air intake. ' 3. Dry bulb air temperatures in each conditioned space and at entrance and exit of all coils with corresponding outside air temperature. Record refrigerant pressures at the same time. 4. Static pressures in each control zone relative to outdoors and across each fan, air filter, major component, and major duct run. ' G. TAB shall be performed by a qualified TAB specialist approved by the Engineer. 3.14 POST CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS: A Deliver special tools, lubricants, and other products necessary for proper operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems. B. Deliver spare parts as called for under other Mechanical Sections contained herein ' or on the Drawings. C. Submit Project Record Documents indicating all changes from the Contract Documents made during constuction. ID. Submit Certificates of Final Inspections from the Administrative Authority. E. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals covering all phases of equipment and systems provided. Include complete spare parts data with current prices and sources of supply. Include copy of manufacturing data sheets and shop drawings required in pre -construction submittals. ' F. Submit extended warranties in excess of the standard one year warranty where required by other Mechanical Sections contained herein or on the Drawings. G. Submit TAB report on approved record forms. ' 15010-12 3.15 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER A Provide competent insti maintenance of all rre manufacturers technical END OF SECTION to Owners personnel covering operation and systems. Provide specialized instruction by intatives when required. -13 'I I VIBRATION ISOLATION SECTION 15240 17_1;4rMEC30ki1•:7_1� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Vibration isolators 1.02 RELATED 1MORK A Section 15510 Hydronic Piping System B. Section 15860 Fans 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A Provide and install mechanical equipment so that Average Noise Criteria Curves, as outlined in ASHRAE Guide, are not exceeded. 1.04 SHOP DRAIMNGS: A Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010. B. Vibration isolation shop drawings shall show isolator locations, load on each isolator, inertia slab dimensions, and include installation instructions. 1.05 INSPECTION: A Provide inspection services by vibration isolation equipment and materials manufacturer's representative for final installation is in accordance with specifications and manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A Manufacturer and Type: Mason Industries. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Related Equipment Manufacturers. C. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with Section 15000. 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS: 15243-1 A Double deflection neopre of 0.35". Al metal surfa and have friction pads t the floor. Bolt holes st required. On equipment steel rails shall be use overhang. Mountings st by Mason Industries, In B. Spring type isolators sha' housing and complete wi the baseplate and the su must be rigidly bolted to I than 0.8 of the compress have a minimum additic deflection. Submittals compressed spring heigh SLF as manufactured by C. Vibration hangers shall a element in series. The isolation bushing that pa and hanger box lower hole rod to swing through a circuiting the spring. Sprii equal to 50% of the rat, drawing of the hanger st 30N as manufactured by PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Install vibration isolators B. Provide spring hangers follows: up to 4 inches inches diameter, first 4p 6 points of support. Sta of isolated equipment. mounting shall have a minimum static deflection s shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion i top and bottom so they need not be bolted to be provided for these areas where bolting is ch as small vent sets and dose coupled pumps, above the mountings to compensate for the be type ND or rails type DNR as manufactured be free standing and laterally stable without any 1.1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between - port. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that - ie equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less 1 height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall ial travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated shall include spring diameters, deflections, and solid spring height. Mountings shall be type Mason Industries, Inc. ntain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene neoprene element shall be molded with a rod ses through the hanger box. Spring diameters sizes shall be large enough to penmt the hanger 30° arc before contacting the hole and short igs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid d deflection. Subnttals shall include a scale Dwing the 30" capability. Hangers shall be type Mason Industries, Inc. mechanical motor driven equipment. n piping connected to isolated equipment as ameter, first 3 points of support; 5 inches to 8 its of support; 10 inches diameter and over, first deflection of first point shall be twice deflection MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Above ground domestic w B. Underground domestic hot C. Interior air duct accoustical D. Exterior duct wrap insulatic E. Hydronic Piping Insulation F. Cooling condensate drain i piping insulation er piping insulation rmal liner A Section 15010 General Mebhanical Requirements B. Section 15412 Domestic Vthter Piping System C. Section 15890 Low Pressure Ductwork and Accessories 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturer's Data 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A Perform installation in Standards. B. Follow manufacturer's PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A Glass fiber type equal to greater thickness. 1. K -factor no greater th, 2. Jacket permeance no 3. Self sealing laps on Ic 4. J -M "Zeston" PVC fit fittings. Provide 25/5( B. Flexible elastomeric pipe thickness. on each type of insulation to be used. with MICA, Commercial and Industrial Insulation on adhesive application, fastener spacing, etc. Fiberglass 23ASJ\SSL for 1/2" and 0.24 eater than 0.02 perir s. itudinal and transverse joints of all servicejacket. 1 covers over Fiberglass inserts for valves and ame/smoke rating when used in air plenums. equal to Armstrong "Armaflex" for 1/2" and less -1 ' 1. Use proper adhesive. ' 2. Use sheets cut and molded around valves and fittings. 3. Do not use in air plenums unless 25/50 flametsmoke rated. '• C. Acoustical Fiberglass interior duct liner with 1-1/2 lb. density and coated face. Meet UL 181 on erosion tests and NFPA 90A on flame/smoke rating. ' D. Flexible Fiberglass exterior duct wrap equal to FRK-25. 1. K -factor no greater than 0.3. ' 2. 3/4 lb. density. 3. Foil reinforced kraft (FRK) vapor barrier. ' E. Foamlvinyl safety covers for drains & supply lines equal to Plumberex "Handy - Shield." 1. White vinyl cover over insulating foam liner. 2. Locking strap with recloseable sealing strips and weep seam. 3. Meet Federal Std. 4.19.4 GSA and ANSI A117-1-1980. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Successfully perform all leak tests prior to applying insulation. B. Provide aluminum sheet metal jacket over insulation exposed outdoors above grade. Use rivets and seal joints watertight. C. Provide approved coating of mastic over piping insulation jackets installed underground and make waterproof and puncture resistant. D. Insure surfaces are clean and dry prior to installing insulation. E. Neatly finish insulation at hangers or other protrusion. Seal vapor barrier joints in duct wrap with FRK duct tape. 3.02 INSULATION SCHEDULE: See Plans END OF SECTION I1,253-2 SANITARY DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15411 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Underground drain and vent! piping B. Above ground drain, waste, and vent piping C. Sanitary sewer service piping D. Condensation drip and overflow piping E. Geanouts F. Floor Drains G. Manholes 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 15010 General Medhanical Requirements B. Section 15440 Plumbing Fb tures and Trim 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A . Submit manufacturer's data Sheets on cleanouts and floor drains. B. Submit list of piping prods manufacturers, classes or C. Submit record drawings in D. Submit Shop Drawings on steel requirements, etc. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING: to be used for the listed services and state their s, and other applicable data. actual location and routing of installed piping. les indicating manufactured items, reinforcing A Underground drain and vent pping inside building and to five feet outside building: 1. Service Weight (SV) cast iron hub and spigot pipe and fittings, coated inside and outside with coal tar varnish, and joints made with compression type molded neoprene gaskets. B. Above ground drain and vent piping: 1. Service Weight (SV) cast iron "No -Hub" pipe and fittings, and joints made with standard weight stainless steel/neoprene couplings. C. Waste arms for lavatories, sinks, and urinals: I 1. DMV cooper pipe with cast brass adapters and wrought copper fittings and joints made with 50-50 solder. 2. Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with screwed fittings (optional). D. Underground sewer piping outside building to sewer main: 1. Service Weight (SV) cast iron hub and spigot pipe and fittings, coated inside and outside with coal tar varnish, and joints made with compression type molded neoprene gaskets. 2. Vitrified slat glaze day hub and spigot pipe fittings and joints made with compression type molded neoprene gaskets. (Optional) E. Condensation drip and overflow piping: See Plans 2.02 CLEANOUfS: A Provide deanouts compatible with type of drain piping to which it is connected. Provide covers compatible with type of floor or wall finish with consideration given to traffic conditions. Make deanouts same size as pipe through 4 inches. B. Floor Cleanout (FCO): Cast iron with tapered brass plug, threaded adjustable housing, and round nickel bronze scoriated top. Wade Series W-6000 or equal. C. Grade Cleanout (GCO): Same as FCO except with heavy duty cast iron scoriated top. Set GCO in 18 inch diameter concrete base 4 inches thick and flush with finished grade. D. Wall Cleanout (WCO): Cast iron with tapered brass plug and stainless steel access cover. Wade W-8450 or equal. E. Stack deanout (SCO): Formed with deanout tee or other approved fitting of cast iron with brass plug and stainless steel access cover. Wade W-460 or equal. 2.03 FLOOR DRAINS: A Standard Floor Drain (FD): Laquered cast iron body with flange. damping collar with seepage openings, and adjustable round satin bronze strainer. Floor drains are 2 inches unless shown otherwise. B. Safe Waste Drain (SW)): Same As FD except provide funnel of same material as strainer. 15411-2 UI C. Drain with Backwater Valve BVW): Same as FD except furnish with integral BVW , Wade No. 31 or equal. Provide for all drains installed below grade or where drain flooding may occur. D. Garbage Can Wash Drain: hinged grate. Wade W1 2.04 TRAPS: A Provide water seal trap fo Provide deep seal traps ft varnish coated inside and o connected. Provide Wade' required. B. Provide traps enameled on C. Provide chrome plated 2.05 MANHOLES: A Provide heavy duty cast iron 4 traffic. PART 3- EXECU11ON 3.01 PREPARATION: A Swab pipes and dean connections. Use proper 3.02 INSTALLATION: A Unless indicated otherwise in accordance with the folli Size 3" and smaller 4" and larger B. Slope condensation drip and to approved discharge point. C. Bury all uhderground outside st iron with flange, sediment bucket, and heavy duty or equal. all connections to drain, waste, and vent system. all floor drains. Floor drain traps to be cast iron, t and compatible with type of drain pipe to which it is P2400 trap primer valve with vacuum breaker where for janitor's sinks. traps for plumbing fixtures in finished spaces. with mounting ring suitable for supporting truck and fittings inside and out prior to making nts on compression gaskets. the Drawings, slope horizontal drain and vent piping Minimum Slope 1/4" per foot 1/8" per foot piping a minimum of 1/16" per foot. Extend pipe a minimum of 2 feet from finished grade. 11-3 I D. On condensate drain for each cooling coil, provide deep seal trap of same material as drip piping. Make trap water seal 2' greater than rated static pressure of fan associated with cooling coil but no less than 3deep. E. Form manholes with steel reinforced concrete to required depths. Provide one inch steel ladder rungs 12 inches on center firmly set in concrete. Provide heavy cast iron cover in mounting ring formed in concrete with steel re -bar around ring. F. Make floor drains and cleanouts free from leaks. Lubricate cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil and do not overtighten. G. Arrange with local utility for sewer tap and pay all costs to establish sewer service. 3.03 TESTING: A Before concealing, test drain, waste, and vent system and prove leak free: 1. Water test - Subject system to at least 10 feet of hydrostatic head for 30 minutes. 2. Air test - Subject system to at least 5 psig air pressure for 30 minutes. (Optional) l: 1i101SM0ji[s] i 15411-4 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15412 PART I - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Water Service Piping B. Hot and Cold Water Piping C. Temperature and Pressure &P) Relief Piping D. Valves E. Shock Suppressors 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 15010 General M&bhanical Requirements B. Section 15250 Mechanical insulation C. Section 15440 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim D. Section 15450 Plumbing Equipment 9.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit manufacturer's data heets on valves and shock suppressors. B. Submit list of piping products to be used and state their manufacturers, Basses or types, and other applicable data. C. Submit Shop Drawings of shock suppressors layout proposed. D. Submit record drawings indicating actual location and routing of installed piping. E. Submit certificate of completion of chlorination. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING: A For underground water servi piping outside building to water meter. 1. ASTM B88 type as indicated on drawings hard copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and joirits made with 95-5 solder. 2. Thickness Class 50, Invent lined, seal coated, hub and spigot type ductile iron with joints made with rubber compression rings manufactured for the purpose. (Optional) -1 ' B. For underground water piping inside building and to five feet outside building: ' 1. 1" and smaller - ASTM B88 typeas indicated ob drawings soft copper tubing with no fittings or joints permitted under slab. Make connections above slab using wrought copper fittings and 95-5 solder. 2. 1-1/4" and larger - ASTM B88 type as indicated on drawings hard copper tubing with rought copper fittings and joints make with Sil-Fos Solder (15% silver content). ' C. For exposed piping in toilet rooms and other finished areas, use chrome plated brass pipe with threaded fittings. D. For above ground water and T&P relief piping inside building, use ASTM B88 type as indicated on drawings hard copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and joints ' made with 95-5 solder. E. Solder containing lead shall not be used on potable water systems. ' 2.02 VALVES: IA Provide valves with suitable materials including discs, plugs, balls, gaskets, linings, and lubricants for the service, temperature, and pressure to which they will be exposed. Furnish with solder or screwed connections. ' B. Gate Valves: Bronze, non -rising stem, inside screw, double wedge. C. Globe or Angle Valves: Bronze, rising stem, inside screw, renewable composition disc. ' D. Check Valves: Bronze with swing disc. E. Standard Hose Bibbs (HB): Bronze, replaceable disc, hose thread outlet with ' vacuum breaker. F. Freeze Proof Hose Bibbs (FPHB): 3/4" anti -siphon non -freeze type with bronze casing and box with loose key handle. Furnish for proper wall thickness. G. Garbage Can Wash Valve (GCVW): 3/4" non -freeze mixing type with hot and cold ' water connections, bronze casing and deep box with loose key handle. Provide vacuum breaker and furnish for proper wall thickness. Wade W -8606 -HC. H. Pressure Reducing Valves (PEW): Bronze with 125 psig inlet pressure and 50 psig adjustable outlet pressure. Furnish same size as pipe. ' I. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve (T&P): Bronze with test lever. Size to handle BTU/hr. rating of water heater. ' 154;2-2 2.03 SHOCK SUPPRESSORS: A Provide Wade bellows and F PDI-W1-1201. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A Ream pipes and tubing connecting. 3.02 INSTALLATION: of all stainless steel construction with welded nested ith nitrogen. Size and locate in accordance with thoroughly dean inside and outside prior to A Slope water piping minimum of 1 inch in 40 feet and arrange to drain at all low points. B. Bury all underground outside piping a minimum of 3 feet below finished grade. C. Use electrically insulating ty connections for joining disimilar metals such as brass valves or adapters or insulating couplings. D. Use proper adapters for screwed valves to copper piping. E. Use teflon tape or other approved joint compound to connect threaded pipe. F. Conned to T&P relief valve and extend full size to approved discharge point. G. Where pipe passes through fnished wall, ceiling, or floor, provide chrome plated escutcheon plate securely anchored to pipe. Install pipe so that no threads show. H. Arrange with local utility for kater tap and meter installation. Pay all costs to establish water services. I. Install gate valve to isolate or shut-off equipment or branch lines. Use globe valves where adjustable flowlor throttling is required. J. Install hose bibbs centerline, 2 feet above floor or grade. Install garbage can wash valve 4 feet above floor or draain. K Provide PRV to limit maximum static pressure at plumbing fixtures to 70 psig. Submit pressure data taken at! different times as approved or install PRV at service connection or in building. Provide PRV at other separate fixtures when shown on Drawings. 12-3 I L. Nlake provisions necessary to prevent cross connections with sanitary drainage system or other non -potable sources. Provide reduced pressure type backflow preventers when required. 3.03 TESTING: A Before concealing or insulating, test domestic water piping and prove leak free. Subject system to minimum hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig and hold for one hour. 3.04 STERILIZATION: A After tests have been successfully completed, thoroughly flush and sterilize the completed domestic water system in accordance with AMA O601. B. Flush entire system after sterilization until residual chlorine content is no greater than 0.2 parts per million. C. Chlorinate only when the building is unoccupied. END OF SECTION 15412-4 I PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM SECTION 15440 J_1:4aQe3:i+1::7_1I 1.01 WDRK INCLUDED: A Plumbing fixtures, trim, and 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 15010 General P B. Section 15411 Sanitary I C. Section 15412 Domestic 1.03 SUBMITTALS: I1 nical Requirements Waste, -and Vent Piping System r Piping System A Submit Manufacturer's Data Sheets including rough -in requirements and installation t I instructions for all fixtures and accessories. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES: A Provide only new fixtures other flaws. B. Provide fixtures and trim accessories and incidental PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A Verify rough -in arrangement B. Provide sturdy support for all Provide additional wood blc 3.02 INSTALLATION: trim free from blemishes, scratches, discoloration or sduled on the Drawings. Include all mounting for a complete installation. dean mounting surfaces prior to installation. ?S and proper anchors for rough -in connections. as required for adequate support. A Install each fixture with proper water seal trap. Furnish water closets and urinals with integral traps. Provide chrome plated brass traps, waste arms, tailpieces, and wall escutcheon plates, for all other fixtures set above floor level. 5440-1 II I Ii I LJ I I B. Provide each fixture with an accessible chrome plated brass supply with screw driver or loose key stop, reducer, and escutcheon. C. Furnish wall hung lavatories, drinking fountains, urinals, water closets, and other wall mounted fixtures with heavy duty approved wall carriers designed for the purpose and compatible with wall construction and thickness. D. Install fixtures at the following mounting heights above finished floor unless indicated otherwise: See Plans E. Where fixtures come in contact with wall, counter, or other mounting surface, caulk with fine dental plaster or approved material for dean waterproof joint. 3.03 FIXTURE ROUGH -IN SCHEDULE: A Provide rough -in piping connections of the following minimum sizes or as required for particular fixtures. See Plans B. Where lavatories are supplied with cold water only, connect cold water supply to both hot and cold connections of lavatory fitting. 3.04 ADJUSTING: A Adjust each flush valve for minimum water usage to obtain specified performance and for minimum noise. END OF SECTION ' .5440-2 U HYDRONIC SYSTEM SECTION 15510 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 VIRORK INCLUDED: A Chilled and hot water heating system piping B. All associated fittings and other accessories C. Valves 1.02 RELATED WJRK A Section 15250 Mechanical I sulation B. Section 15950 Controls 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A Welding materials and labor to conform to ASME Code and applicable state Labor Regulations. B. Use welders fully qualified a d licensed by state authorities. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS: A Submit actual performance data on all equipment and accessories contained within this section. B. Prepare submittals acoor l ance with Section 15010 — General Mechanical .in Requirements. C. Provide shop drawings drawn to scale and showing sizes and location of all piping, equipment and accessories. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A Pumps and System Accesso es: e ' 1. Amtrol 2. Bell & Gossett 3. Armstrong 4. Aurora B. Valves: o-i I I r I I 1. Nibco - 2. Crane 3. Milwaukee 4. Jenkins 5. Nordstrom 2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS: A Piping: Service Material Hot water heating to Steel Schedule 40, •' 250°F. black, Type "U' hard Condenser Water, copper (Ref. Para. Chilled Water 3.03 this Section) Equipment Drains Steel, Schedule 40, PVC and Overflows Galvanized, Type "U' Hard Copper I. B. Fittings: Service Materiar Joint ' Hot Water Heat- Malleable iron Threaded ing to 250°F. 150 psi banded (2-1/2" & ' Chilled Water Steel, same thick- Smaller) Condenser Water ness as pipe Welded (3" & Wrought Copper Larger) 95-5 ' Solder Use factory fabricated butt weld fittings for welded steel pipes. Use long radius ' elbows for steel and cast iron water piping. 2.03 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS: ' A Size 2-1/2 inch and under. 150 psi malleable iron, bronze to iron ground joint unions for threaded ferrous piping air tested for gas service, all bronze for copper ' piping. t - B. Size 3 inch and over. 150 psi forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping, 150 ' psi bronze flanges for copper piping. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick performed synthetic rubber bonded asbestos. C. Use grooved mechanical couplings to engage and lock grooved or shouldered pipe ends and to allow for some angular deflection, contraction and expansion. ' 15510-2 J �� Couplings consist of m gasket and steel bolts. 2.04 STRAINERS: A Size 2-1/2 inch and under steel perforated screen. B. Size 3 inch to 4 inch: Flat perforated screen. C. Size 5 inch and larger. Flan 'steel perforated screen. D. Screen free area minimum th hose connection off strainer 2.05 EXPANSION TANK A Usepressurized, bladder 2.06 AIR SEPARATORS: A Centrifugal type for 125 p galvanized steel perforated drain connection. B. Provide on suction side of elimination valve. 2.07 MANUAL AIR VENTS: iron housing -damps, C -shaped composition sealing galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. A Construct manual air vents frr 1/4" copper tube. B. Connect pet cock to all high p copper tubing to outlet of pet 2.08 RELIEF VALVES: '' A ASME. rated direct spring loac discharge pressure. B. Provide relief valves on pres heating converters, and expa iron body, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless iron body, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless times area of inlet pipe. Provide valved drain and equal to AMTROL Model AX. . ating pressure, with steel tank, 3116 inch , perforated stainless steel air collector, -and circulation pump with AMTROL #720 air 1/4" Crane #702 pet cock and a 2 foot length of in piping system. Connect 2 foot length of 1/4" and coil above ceiling. type, lever operated, non-adjustable factory set tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, tanks. I II I I J C. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. 2.09 PUMPS: A Primary system pumps shall be equipped with mechanical seals, open drip -proof motor with maximum speed of 1750 rpm. Pumps shall be centrifugal, single stage, with cast iron casing, steel shaft, bronze fitted, and furnished with auxiliary pan. 2.10 VALVE CONNECTIONS: A Provide valves suitable to conned to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size valves. B. Thread pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller. C. Range pipe sizes 3 inches and larger. D. Solder or screw to solder adaptors for copper tubing. 2.11 GATE VALVES: A Bronze, rising stem, inside screw, solid wedge, solder or screwed ends. Crane 431 -or Crane 1334. B. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS. & Y., solid wedge, flanged ends. Crane 465-1/2. 2.12 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES: A Bronze, rising stern, inside screw, renewable disc, solder or screwed ends. Globe: Crane 1 or Crane 1310. Angle: Crane 2. B. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, O.S. & Y., renewable composition disc, flanged ends. Globe: Crane 351. Angle: Crane 353. 1 2.13 CHECK VALVES: 1 t°A I C. I I Bronze, swing disc, solder or screwed ends. Crane 37 or Crane 1342. Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. Crane 373. Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composition disc, flanged ends. Nibco #F-910 or W-910. 15510-4 fJ 2.14 BUTTERFLY VALVES I N WATER A Body shall be lug type, not B. The valves shall have bronze bearings. C. Seat shall be EPDM material 2.15 BOILER DRAIN VALVES: A Bronze compression stop wi. 2.16 PRESSURE RATINGS: A Unless otherwise indicated, t 450°F and 200 psig and 2501 2.17 VALVE OPERATORS: A Provide suitable handwheels bibbs. B. Provide one plug cockwrenct minimum of one. Provide e< wrench, with set screw. C. Provide valves located more chain operated sheaves. Ed dips arranged to dear walkir 2.18 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR A Provide a backflow preventor system fill station. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: '' A Install all items in accordance -3.02 PREPARATION: A Ream pipes and tubes. CIi assembly. Remove welding ONLY: fifer type. discs with one piece 316SS stem witih three stem shall be cartridge type with built-in "O" type seal. hose thread. Nibco #73. valves suitable for 125 minimum psig VP and for gate, globe and drain valves, and inside hose for every ten plug cocks sized 2 inches and smaller, ch plug cock sized 1-1/2 inches and larger with a an 7 feet from floor in equipment room areas with id chains to about 5 feet above floor and hook to aisles. to line size Febco Model 825Y at the hydronic with Manufacturer's recommendations. off scale and dirt, inside and outside, .before or other foreign material from piping, 5 I- 3.03 CONNECTION: I 7 L Ii II F. II I I I J I L C Ti A Screw joint steel piping up to and including 2-1/2 inch. Weld piping 3 inch and larger, induding branch connections. B. Make screwed joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other approved non-toxic joint compound applied to make threads only. C. Use main sized saddle type branch connections for directly connecting branch lines to mains in steel piping if main is at least one pipe size larger than the branch for up to 6 inch mains and if main is at least two pipe sizes larger than branch for 8 inch and larger mains. Do not project branch pipes inside the main pipe. D. Provide non -conducting type connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems. Brass adaptors and valves are acceptable. 3.04 UNDERGROUND PIPE PROTECTION: A All underground black steel pipes shall be factory coated with scotch coat or bitumastic and wrapped with plasticfbitumastic tape. B. Al pipe joints and fittings shall be field coated with bitumastic to the same thickness as the pipe coating and wrapped with plastictbitumastic tape. C. Al underground black steel pipes shall be protected by ten (10) pound magnesium anodes. Provide one anode at each point where pipe enters or leaves the ground and at 100 foot intervals or as shown on plans. Anode lead wires shall be #12 TW copper attached to the pipe by thenno-weld or Cadweld process. Anodes shall be buried a minimum of two (2) feet below pipe or five (5) feet below finished grade, whichever is greater. D. On exterior wall of building at service entrance, provide a test station mounted eighteen (18) inches above finished grade per detail on plans. 1. : a1111�G\i;I9IC7M&ID W A Route piping in orderly manner and maintain proper grades. Install to conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with use of space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. Install concealed pipes dose to building structure to keep furring to a minimum B. Slope water piping 1 inch in 40 feet and arrange to drain at low points. C. On dosed systems, equip low points with 3/4 inch drain valves and hose nipples. Provide, at high points, collecting chambers and manual air vents. 15510-6 D. Make reductions in piping with eccentric reducing fittings installed to provide drainage and venting. E. Install piping to allow for ekpansion and contraction without stressing pipe or equipment connected. F. Provide clearance for install tion of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drains and unions. 3.06 AIR VENTS: A Where large air quantities accumulate, provide 1/2" Crane #801 and faucet, •n and 1/2" copper tubing in lieu of 1/4" pet cock and tubing. B. For float type air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain. 3.07 RELIEF VALVES: A Pipe relief valve outlet to n rest floor drain. B. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent areas. 3.08 VALVES:- A Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Install gate valves for shut-offand isolating service, to isolate equipment, part of systems or vertical risers. C. Install globe valves for throttliing service and control device or meter by-pass. D. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of heating, chilled, and condenser water pumps. E. Provide drain valves at main hut -off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. 3.09 PUMPS: A Provide drains for bases and stuffing boxes piping to and discharging into floor drains. B. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. C. Provide gate valve and line sited suction diffuser with strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve) globe valve, and gate valve on discharge. A triple II I U I I I I I L I1 I C I duty valve along with a gate or butterfly valve for isolation is also approved on discharge. D. If suction diffuser with strainer is used, a separate strainer is not required. Provide a fine start-up strainer, and replace it with final strainer after 24 hours of system operation. E. Decrease from line size, with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carded on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. F. Ensure pumps operate at specified systernfluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25% of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. G. Qualified millwright to check, align, and certify base mounted pumps prior to start-up. 3.10 TESTING: A Test all chilled, hot water, chilled -hot water, and condenser water piping systems to assure their being absolutely tight. In the case of pipes which are to be insulated, tests shall be completed and the piping system proved to be absolutely tight before any insulation is applied. Wherever pipes are placed so that they will ultimately be concealed, these tests shall be conducted and the absolute tightness of each piping system shall be demonstrated before that system is concealed so as to be inaccessible. B. Test Method: Impose on piping system a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psig for a period no less than eight hours. During this test period, all pipe, fittings, and accessories in the particular piping shall be carefully inspected and any leaks shall be stopped. C. Wherever conditions pemvt, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than twenty-four hours. During that period, it shall be kept under the careful observation of the contractor. ID. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. The satisfactory completion of any test or series of tests shall not relieve the contractor of any responsibility with ' regard to the ultimate proper and satisfactory operation of such piping systems and their accessories. I E. Cleaning of HVAC piping system I15510-8 I 1. After. completion of th'e water circulating systems, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale, grease and other foreign matter with solutions as directed by a water treatment (consultant employed by the contractor. 2. The cleaning of the and draining until 3 3. The cleaning solutic and water, concentn for this duty. This s rate as to remove operation twice. At water in system {I neutralize with apprc be used for pumpir replaced after the d circuits shall consist of alternate filling, circulating, nations of foreign matter disappear. shall be trisodiumphosphate or suitable alternative )n as recommended by the chemical manufacturers !lion shall be pumped through the piping at such a , mill scale, etc.; discard and drain. Repeat this ie end of the second flushing period, check PH of nus paper) and if not neutral, repeat flushing or iate chemical. Building circulating water pumps may the cleaning solution if the mechanical seals are ping operation. F. In case of defects, they hall be made good to the satisfaction of the engineer/architect and the work retested without delay. Such work shall be done without additional charge. G. Give engineer two days' notice before tests are made. Do not draw water off the pipe or cover pipes until examined by engineer or architect's representative. Acceptance of tests does nth imply the acceptance of piping layout or practices contrary to the plans and specifications. - 3.11 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER A. The contractor shall manner. BALANCE: the water systems for balancing in the following 1. Open all valves to full !open position. Close coil bypass stop valves. Set mixing valve to full coif, flow. 2. Remove and dean all 3. Examine water in system and determine if water has been treated and cleaned. I 4. Check pump rotation. 5. Check expansion tanks to determine they are not air bound and the system is completely full of waer. 6. Check all air vents at Nigh points of water systems and determine all are installed and ooeratino freely. -9 7. Set all temperature controls so all coils are calling for full cooling. This should dose all automatic bypass valves at coil and chillers. Same procedure when balancing hot water coils, set on full call for heating. ' 8. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 9. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers and chillers to design requirements. 10. Complete air balance must have been accomplished before actual water balance begins. B. Test and Balance Procedure - Phase Two: 1 1. Set chilled water, hot water, and condenser water pumps to proper gallons per minute delivery. ' 2. Adjust water flow of chilled water through chillers. Adjust water flow of condenser water through condensers and towers. 3. Adjust water flow of hot water through boilers (if required). ' 4. Check leaving water temperatures and return water temperatures through chillers and convertors. Reset to correct design temperatures. ' 5. Check water temperatures at inlet side of cooling and heating coils. Note rise or drop of temperatures from source. ' 6. Proceed to balance each chilled water coil and hot water coil. ' 7. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record data. ' C. Test and Balance Procedure - Phase Three: Upon completion of Phase 1 & 2, the Contractor shall proceed with Phase 3 as follows: II. After adjustments to coils are made, recheck settings at the pumps, chillers, boilers, and towers and readjust if required ' 2. Install pressure gauges on coil. Read pressure drop through coil at set flow rates on call for full cooling and on full heating. Set pressure drop across bypass valve to match coil full flow pressure drop. This prevents ' unbalanced flow conditions when coils are on full bypass. 3. Same procedure on chillers to adjust chiller bypass valves. Same procedure on cooling towers to adjust spray nozzles. ' 15510-10 4. Record and check ft 5. Inlet water temperal 6. Leaving water temp 7. Pressure drop of ea 8. Pressure drop acrd: 9. Pump operating suc 10. List all mechanical 11. Rated and actual ru 12. Water metering dev Upon completion of Phase' all items required by specil report. All sheets shall be END OF SECTION C items at each cooling and heating element. coil. ypass valve. i and discharge pressure and final T.D.H. ifications of pumps. mg amperage of pump motor. readings. :e, all information shall be inserted on a sheet listing ions and be included in complete test and balance qtly typed. -11 Blawer Coil Air Harding Unit SECTION 15854 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Air handling unit. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 15240 B. Section 15890 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Vibration Isolation Ductwork and Accessories A Provide fans bearing AMCA certified rating seal. B. Provide filter media with UL Class I or Class I rating, as required by local authorities. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010. B. Submit fan curves showing fan performance with system operating point plotted on curves. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and finishes of materials. E. Submit product data of filter sizes and quantities, filter performance, and filter frames. F. Submit sound power levels for air handling unit(s) at scheduled conditions. If unit exceeds sound power levels at scheduled conditions, manufacturer must provide sound attenuators. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. 15854 - 1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HAN A Deliver products to site undei 1. On a factory -installed B. Store and protect products. C. Store in dean dry place and carefully to avoid damage to 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMEI` A Do not operate units for any I dean, filters are in place, bes observation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A Trane Company B. Carver 2.02 GENERAL A Air handlers consist of hydr centrifugal fan with motor and i air delivery from a single unit. B. Drive location and coil conned location . C. Air handlers fare provided with allowing the unit to be susper 2.03 CASING: A Casings (structural componer insulated withone:inch, 1-1/211 to provide thermal and acoust B. Fan housing sides are directly strengthening the entire unit a rear mounting lugs. provisions of these specifications: 'high base rail or shipping skid. from weather and construction traffic. Handle )nents, enclosures, and finish. temporary or permanent, until ductwork is xicated, and fan has been test run under cooling and heating coils, drain pans and mounted in a common cabinet for independent are independent for the same or opposite side Iled external 188 -gauge mounting lugs, requiring the opening of any panels. are constructed of 18 -gauge galvanized steel, density fireproof and odorless glass fiber material it insulation. tached to the air handler top and bottom panels, embly. Internal coils are directly attached to the -2 C. Coil access panels are located on both sides of the air handier and allow easy removal of the internal coil and drain pan. Main access panels shall have optional camlock access doors to allow generous access to the fan, motor and drive from both sides of air handler. 2.04 WATER COILS: IA Internal coils shall be designed for chilled or hot water,. External coils are one or two -row, designed for heating only and in the preheat position. Al coils use highly efficient aluminum fins which are mechanically bonded to 1/2 inch OD seamless ' copper tubes. Al coils are specifically designed and circuited for water use. Al coils are factory tested at 400 psi. Sweat type connections are standard. ' 2.05 FAN: A Fans are forward curved, centrifugal blower type equipped with heavy-duty ' adjustable speed V -belt drive. The fan shaft is supported by heavy-duty permanently sealed ball bearing. Al fans are dynamically balanced. Al air handler have a single fan. ' 2.06 DRAIN PAN: IA Drain pans are integrally secured to the air handler casing and are complete with 314 inch internal threaded pipe connection at both ends. A steel p lug (3/4 inch external pipe thread) is factory installed into the drain pan pipe connection opposite ' the coil connection side and can be field relocated to the coil connection side. Al pans are galvanized for corrosion resistance and cover the entire coil length. ' 2.07 FILTERS: ' A Filters shall be as scheduled on plans. Air handlers have two filters except for Size 24, which requires only a single filter. 2.08 MOTORS: A Motors shall be as scheduled on plans. All motors have a plus or minus 10 percent ' voltage utilization range. Al standard motors are open-dripproof with permanently sealed ball bearing, internal overload protection, a minimum 1.15 servicefactor and size 56 resilient base frames. Motors are factory installed and wired to the air handler junction box and factory set to the sales order voltage. 2.09 MIXING BOX: A Mixing boxes are constructed of heavy -gauge galvanized steel, insulated with one - inch, 1-1/2 lbs density Tuf-skin glass fiber insulation. They are complete with two ' low -leak opposed blade dampers with al necessary components for left or right hand attachment onto 1/2 inch OD grooved and extendable drive rods. Damper I 15854 - 3 blades are extruded forms frame seals are PVC extruc with the blade seals a cot stable in the temperature n side access panels as components. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Install unit on vibration iso[ B. Install items in accordance 3.02 AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULI A Refer to Schedule on the d END OF SECTION ng interlocked PVC extruded edge seals. Damper form interlocked to the damper frame and provide ious edge seal to the blades. Damper seals are of -50 F to 230 F. Mixing boxes also indude two dard to provide access to the unit's internal manufacturer's instructions. 4 AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS SECTION 15855 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Air handling unit. 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 15240 B. Section 15890 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Vibration Isolation A Provide fans bearing AMCA certified rating seal. B. Provide filter media with UL Class I or Class I rating, as required by local authorities. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010. B. Submit fan curves showing fan performance with system operating point plotted on curves. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and finishes of materials. E. Submit product data of filter sizes and quantities, filter performance, and filter frames. F. Submit sound power levels for air handling unit(s) at scheduled conditions. If unit exceeds sound power levels at scheduled conditions, manufacturer must provide sound attenuators. .. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA B. Submit operation and maintenance data. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, nmotor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. 15855-1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Deliver products to site and&r provisions of these specifications: 1. On a factory -installed 6" high base rail or shipping skid. B. Store and protect products. C. Store in dean dry place and brotect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage td components, enclosures, and finish. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is dean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A Trane Company; Model: Modular Climate Changer _. B. McQuay; Model: Seasonma Iter C. Carrier, Model: 39 E 2.02 GENERAL A Any exceptions to the specifications must be dearly defined. The contractor shall be responsible for any additional expenses that may occur due to any exception made. I B. C. •c D. E. Fabricate draw-thru type air handling units suitable for the scheduled air pressure operation. Fabricate units with fan section, coil section(s), filter section(s), and access section(s) as indicated on the drawings. Provide access to both sides of all coils. Factory fabricate and test air handling units of sizes, capacities, and configuration as indicated and specified. Units shall be fully assembled on 6 inch base rail/housekeeping pad up to O radical shipping limitations. On units not shispped fully assembled, manufacturer shall tag each section to indicate location in direction of airflow to facilitate assembly at the job site. Base performance on sea level conditions. 15855-2 ' 2.03 CASING: - ' A Construct unit casing exterior panels of minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. Unit shall be designed and constructed such that all exterior panels are non -load bearing. Removal of all exterior panels shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Units with welds of exterior surfaces or welds that have burned through from interior welds shall receive a final shop coat of zinc -rich protective paint in ' manufacturer's standard color. B. Insulate all sections handling conditioned air with 1" thick 314 lb. per cubic ft. 'density matt faced fiberglass. Install insulation with adhesive. If edges of fiberglass insulation are exposed, the contractor shall be responsible for seaing exposed edges with mastic sealer to prevent erosion into the airstream. Insulation, adhesive, and mastic sealer (if required) shall conform to NFPA 90A C. As required for routine service access, unit shall be supplied with full height, ' galvanized, double wall, hinged, removable access doors. Access door shall have a full perimeter automotive type gasket to prevent air leakage, and Ventlock style handle that can be opened from unit interior. ' D. Units shall have internal motor and drives and shall be provided with a full size removable service door on the drive side of the fan(s). Doors shall be constructed ' per Section 2.03 C. If unit is provided with external motor, unit shall include a totally enclosed belt guard ofver drive components to prevent possible injury. Belt ' guard shal be provided with tachometer holes to facilitate RPM readings of the fan. E. On units provided with cooling coils, the drain pan shall extend under the complete ' coil section. Drain connections shall be provided on both sides of each drain pan provided. Ali drain pans shall be of sealed double wall galvanized construction with the manufacturer's standard insulation sandwiched between the pan layers. ' 2.04 FANS: IA Provide supply fan section(s) with FC double width, double inlet centrifugal fan designed and suitable for class of service indicated in the unit schedule. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Fan shafts shall be 'solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet design specifications. Fan ' wheel shall be properly secured to shaft to prevent slippage. B. Provide self -aligning, grease lubricated pillow -block ball bearings with lubrication ' fittings. Provide extended grease lines to drive side of unit casing, for all fan bearings, rigidly attached for easy service access. If extended grease lines are not provided, unit shall include an opposite drive side access door and service room ' must be allowed on the opposite side of the unit to perform regular maintenance. All beariangs shall perform to L-50 200,000 hour average life. 1585,5.3 1 C. Fan(s) shall be internally isolated with 1" springs. If unit requires external isolation, the contractor shall be responsible for isolating the entire unit including the duct work and piping at the manufacturer's specified load points. 2.05 MOTORS AND DRIVES A Fan motors to be mounted nd isolated on the same integral base as the fan. B. Fan Motors shall be heavy duty, .open drip -proof type, 2 speed, 2 winding 1800/1200 RPM. C. V Belt Drive shall be variable pitch rated at 1.5 times the motor nameplate. 2.06 COILS '. A Coils shall be manufacture by the same company as the supplier of the air handling unit. Coils shall be designed with aluminum plate fins and copper tubes. B. Fins shall have collars drawn belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expanstion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall be mounted in theunit casing to be accessible for service and can be removed from the unit either through the side or top. Capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. C. Provide factory installed_ext nded drain and vent connections for water coils. D. Water Cooling Coils 1. All coils shall be enclosed in an insulated coil section. Coil headers and U - bends shall not be exposed. 2. Waterflow shall be counter to airflow. 3. Coils shall be proof tested to 300 psig and leak rested to 200 psig air pressure under water. 4. Headers shall be round copper pipe or cast iron. Steel pipe headers are not acceptable. 5. Tubes shall be 1/2 inch OD, .016" thick E Water Heating Coils: 1. All coils shall be enclosed in a coil section. Coil headers and U -bends shall not be exposed. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.07 FILTERS: Waterflow shall be counter to airflow. Coils shall be a supply header to ensure distribution of hot water to each tube of coil. Coils shall be proof tested to 300 psig and leak tested to 200 psig, air pressure under water. Tubes shall be 1/2 inch OD, .016" thick. A Provide filters as shown below except where shown differently on the plans. B. Provide factory fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casing with filter guides and hinged, removable double wass access doors with automotive style gasket for minimum leakage for filter removal. Filter boxes shall be fabricated to flange to other unit components. Blockoffs shall be provided by the unit manufacturer as required to prevent air bypass around filters. C. Provide 2" flat filter section less filters in the pre -filter position. Filters shall be removable from one side of the filter section. 2.08 VIBRATION ISOLATORS: A Provide vicration isolators. B. Refer to Section 15240. 2.09 ACCESS SECTIONS: A Access sections shall be supplied as shown on the plans between unit coil sections. Access doors shall be provided on both sides of section(s). Doors shall be constructed per Section 2.03 C. PART 3- EXECU11ON 3.01 ASSEMBLY: A Assemble low pressure units by bolting sections together to make single unit. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A Install unit on vibration isolators. B. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 15855-5 LOW AND MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15891 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Sheet metal ductwork including plenums B. Flexible insulated ducts C. Air devices including louvers and dampers D. Other duct accessories 1.02 RELATED WORK: A Section 15010 General Mechanical Requirements B. Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturers Data Sheets on air devices, dampers, louvers, flexible dud, take -off fittings and other manufactured' items. B. Submit Shop Drawings of ductwork layouts, fittings and air devices prior to installation of ductwork. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A Fabricate ductwork in compliance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and NFPA 90A B. Provide kitchen grease ducts in compliance with NFPA 96. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL DUCTS: A Use galvanized steel iodc forming quality with 1.25 ounces per square foot zinc coating on each side. B. Use rivets or sheet metal screws for fasteners. C. Use proper water and fire resistant sealant. 15891-1 2.02 FLEXIBLE DUCTS: A Flexible spiral wound dL Owens -Coming Fiberglas I 1. Insulation 2. Vapor transmission 2.03 AIR DEVICES: with 1" insulation and vapor barrier equal to •25 or ATCO Series 900. at 75°F, no greater than 0.23 btu/hr. sf. deg. barrier no greater than 0.1 perms. A Furnish and install items as 6cheduled on the Drawings. B. Provide ceiling mounted C. Provide stormproof type paint as directed. D. Provide insulated low intakes as scheduled. 2.04 DUCTVIORKACCESS0RIES: • A Provide double thickness a Perforated, internally insulati B. Provide 16 gauge galvani adjustment rod and lock scn C. Fabricate splitter dampers of Provide exterior adjustment D. Where round duct takes off f and butterfly volume damper. 3/4" x 14" neoprene gasket, e E. Provide flexible connections into metal edging strips. A screws. compatible with ceiling type. with heavy gauge wire mesh on outside. Feld motorized shutter -dampers for large outdoor air ail type turning vanes at all rectangular elbows. blades shalt be used on duds 20" and wider. I steel balancing dampers with quadrants or where required for proper TAB. able thickness sheet metal with streamlined shape. I and lock screw. n rectangular duct, provide high efficiency take off ake off fitting shall be manufactured with 1" flange, entric adaptor with 45° transition on upstream side. neoprene coated flameproof fabric tightly crimped ch to ductwork and equipment with sheet metal F. Provide access doors at duct and at ceiling where required for maintenance and inspection. Fabricate of galvanized steel with gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. Provide double thickness insulated door in insulated ductwork. G. When indicated on Drawings, provide type B fire damper of the curtain type with fusible link with 90% free area of duct. Select fusible link for 160°F unless shown otherwise. Provide access doors at all fire dampers. 15891-2 2.05 MEDIUM PRESSURE PRIMARY AIR SYSTEMS: A Provide all ductwork materials and gauges in compliance with applicable SMACNA Standards for high velocity ductwork (Not snap lock) B. All primary air ductwork shall be round, except at fan discharge. C. All fittings shall be low pressure loss type. D. Use 45° conical wye fittings at all branch outlets. E. Make all size transitions concentric and smooth. F. All 90° elbows shall be smooth, one piece type with a centerline radius equal to 1.5 times the duct diameter. G. The primary air system shall perform equal to that shown on the plans, providing the minimum static pressure and air volume is scheduled at all outlets (mixing boxes), with the air handling unit fan external static pressure equal to that shown. H. All round ductwork shall be wrapped with insulation. Seal all joints air tight with tape. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION: A Provide proper duct reinforcing with angles or cross breaks per SMACNA Standard, insulate per Section 15250. B. Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. C. Make transitions gradually with divergence no greater than 30°. D_ Rigidly construct ducts with tight joints free from vibration, rattles, or air noise. Audible leaks shall be sealed with approved sealant. E. Construct plenums of galvanized panels suitably reinforced and diagonally braced. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A Use flexible duct (5 feet or less) for final connection to supply air devices only in lay -in ceilings. Connect with strap or damp. Do not use on return ducts. B. Use flexible fabric connections at each fan and air handling device. 15891-3 C. Verify locations required of outlets and make adjustments to coordinate with architectural features, lighting fixtures, etc. D. Adjust air devices for properthrow distance and direction. E. Provide at least either two lint, rectangular elbows or 15 feet of lined, rectangular, straight duct at the supply and return connection of all forced air units. F. Seal all longitadinal and transverse joints with foil type duct tape. END OF SECTION 15891-4 FAN POWERED VAV BOX WITH HOT WATER HEAT SECTION 15933 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Fan Powered VAV boxes B. Unit controls and safety devices C. Accessories D. Hot water coils 1.02 RELATED W DRK: A Section 15010 General Mechanical Requirements B. Section 15891 Low and Medium Pressure Ductwork and Accessories 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturer's Data Sheets on each unit including all accessories. Clearly indicate optional features to be furnished. Include detailed instructions and dimensions. B. Submit extended warranties required herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Furnish units complying with ANSI Standards for safety and efficiency. B. Al units shall be UL listed. 1.05 EXTENDED WARRANTIES: A Provide one year unconditional warranty on parts and labor. 1.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A Acceptable manufacturers are Trane and Carrier. 15933-1 I L_ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A Casing shall be welded, 22 gauge galvanized steel. Leak rate is 1% of norrinal unit airflow at 0.50" wg. Rlte rack provided on plenum inlet. One piece aluminum backdrafkt damper provided on fan discharge. I I I B. Interior surface of unit casing shall be acoustically and thermally lined with 1/2", 1.9 Ib./cu. ft. density glass fiber with high density facing. ' C. Electric heater shall be factory provided and mounted, resistance open -type heater with disc -type automatic thermal primary safety device and a fusible link or manual reset thermal secondary aufout. Unit fan and heater stages shall be energized indMdually. Provide factory disconnect on panel door. PE switches are factory set. Provide safety air flow switch. D. Coils shall be factory mounted one row coils with 150 fins per foot. Provide full fin collars for accurate fin spacing and maximum tube -fin contact. 5/8" O.D. seamless copper tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Coils shall be leak tested at 300 psig air pressure under water. Provide female sweat -type water connections with right or left; hand connections as shown on plans. E. Fan shall be FC style, galva ized steel fan wheel. Fan housing is 22 gauge steel and fanboard is 18 gauge steel. Motors are permanently lubricated, three speed, direct drive, permanent split bapacitor type. Maximum motor temperature rise on all speeds of 50 degrees C. F. Parallel units shall have factory mounted fan on -off switch. Normally open electric switch provided to energize fan as independent stage of heat. G. Series units shall have fan. H. Access panel shall be valve and/or fan. Provide factory mounted or J. Provide plenum inlet sound K Provide electric air valve device with a factory pros mounted normal open air flow switch to energize mounted on bottom of unit to provide access to air installed throw away filters. m shall be a cylindrical die cast aluminumflowcontrol integral 24 VAC electric actuator. Valve inlet tapered 15933-2 I to fit standard round ductwork Leak rate less than 1% at 4" wg. inlet static pressure. Integral multiple point, averaging flow sensing ring to provide flow measurement within 5% of unit rated airflow with 1 112 diameters of straight duct upstram of unit. Integral flow taps and calibration chart provided on each unit. L. Provide pressure independent zone temperature proportional electronic control • circuit employing a dosed loop flow feedback circuit. Unit airflow is monitored by ' an integral, multiple point, averaging flow sensing ring and a transducer to maintain constant airflow to within 5% of rated cfm down to 25% of unit nominal cFm, ' independent of changes in system static pressure. Unit airflow is reset in response to an electronic thermostat located in the conditioned zone. Factory set, field adjustable settings are provided for unit minimum and maximum airflows. Integral ' flow taps and calibration chart provided on each unit. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Provide complete installation and connect ducts, electrical power, and control wiring. ' B. Provide factory start-up. END OF SECTION J I I I CONTROLS - SECTION 15975 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 V\C)RK INCLUDED: A Electronic control system for the WAC systems. B. Control valves and pneumatic operators. C. Programming of software. D. Owners instructions. 1.02 RELATED V ORK A Section 15010 General Mechanical Requirements 1.03 SUBMITTALS: _ A Provide manufacturers data sheets on thermostats, temperature sensors, control stations, and operators. B. Provide valve schedules which show sizes, dimensions, and arrangements. C. Provide complete operators ! nuals including detailed system schematic drawings with all control devices schedules along with complete detail wiring diagrams showing proper electrical interface to equipment furnished. Drawings must be coordinated with type equipment installed on the project (standards and/or typicals not acceptable). Sequence bf operations shall be written on the drawings. Data sheets for each piece of control equipment shall be incorporated in the operators manual. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Follow manufacturers direct ons in the installation, handling, and operation of all equipment. B. Perform all operating tests i all modes of operation and prove satisfactory. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: 15975-1 II I I A Provide complete system(s) of manual and automatic electric controls to achieve the intent of the sequences of operation described on the plans and herein. B. Provide all necessary coordination with equipment suppliers in the case of manufacturer supplied control systems or components. Controls contractor shall have final responsibility for all such systems. IC. The temperature controls system supplier shall provide complete working diagrams for the control system Diagrams will include wiring diagrams with numbered terminal identification for all field installed wiring and a description of operation. Control diagrams on the plans show the quality and function required for each sub -system Alternative control designs may be submitted for approval. All drawings shall be submitted to the Owner's representative for approval before work ' is commenced. One copy shall be framed under glass for the Owner after work is complete. After completion of the installation, the temperature control contractor shall adjust all thermostats, control devices, motors, and other equipment provided under the contract. He shall place them in complete operating condition subject to approval of the Owners representative. The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If, within ' twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance, any of the equipment herein described is found to be defective in workmanship or material, it shall be repaired or replaced without cost to the Owner. 2.02 MANUFACTURER AND MODEL: IA The manufacturer shall be Allerton Controls Corporation, Novar, Trane or Powers. B. Area representative for Alierton Controls Corporation is: ' Meredith Sales Company, Inc. P.O. Box 3156 'Fayetteville, Arkansas 72702 (501)4434210 2.03 CONTROL VALVES AND OPERATORS: A Controls contractor shall provide all control valves and pneumatic operators. Connect new control air to the control air lines at the mechanical room B. Reference details on plans for components. C. VAV air valve may be electric or pneumatic. Water valves shall be pneumatic ' actuated. I 15975-2 2.04 SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING:. A Controls contractor shall g sequence of operation on ti 2.05 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND I NTE A Provide interface with contn 3.03 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PE A After operating tests are suc Owner's personnel in all asj 4.01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS - END OF SECTION gram software to meet the requirements of the plans and to meet Owners requirements. system. fully completed, provide competent instruction to of operation and maintenance of controls. Plans 15975-3 n GENERAL ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A Comply with the Conditic Conditions, and any other under separate cover. B. Perform other work re! accordance with the appl C. In Electrical Specification convenience only and are work 1.02 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND A Comply with the latest 1. Standard Building 2. Life Safety Code 3. National Electrical 4. State Fire Preveni B. Comply with applicable 1. State Department of 2. Rules and Regulatio Construction 3. State and Federal D 4. Occupational Safety 5. Utility Company Reg 6. Other State and Fed 7. Local Ordinances C. Furnish products and perfo published by the following of the Contract, General and Supplementary licable requirements contained herein or issued to or necessary for the electrical installation in s Specification Division or Section contained herein. tions, items under "RELATED WJRK' are listed for guaranteed to be a complete listing of all applicable of applicable codes including the following: 'A 101) 1e NEC (NFPA 70) Code as amended, including the following: alth Regulations for Energy Efficiency Standards for New Building tment of Labor Regulations Health Act (OSHA) Dns and Requirements Laws and Regulations installation conforming the latest accepted Standards 1. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. American Society of resting Materials (ASTM) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) I L I I I C r 7 I I II C I L I 16010-1 ' 7. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) ' 8. Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CBM) 9. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) 10. Illuminating Engineer's Society (IES) Iii. Insurance Service Office (ISO) 12. Factory Insurance Association (FIA) 13. Factory Mutual (FM) ' 14. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) D. In case of discrepancy or conflict between Codes, Regulations, Standards, ' Drawings and/or Specifications, the requirement yielding the higher(est) quality of work shall govern. ' 1.03 PERMITS AND ADMINISTRATIVE FEES: IA Obtain and maintain all necessary licenses, permits and inspections and pay all fees including connection fees, taxes and penalties, if any, required by the Administrative Authority. Refundable deposits will be paid by the Owner. I 1.04 PRE-CONSTRUC11ON SUBMITTALS: A Refer to each Electrical Section for a listing of required Submittals under that Section. Refer to Section entitled Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for submittal procedure and requirements. ' B. Submit for approval, Manufacturer's technical data sheets including performance specifications for all equipnment, major materials, and other manufactured items. ' Obtain approval on product manufacturers not specifically named prior to making submittals. C. Submit for approval, Contractor's original Shop Drawings of all assemblies of manufactured items including complete wiring diagrams. Indicate all pertinent dimensions on scale drawings necessary for clarity and for coordination of the installation between trades. D. Submit for approval, a schedule of nameplates and test report fours. E. Bind Submittals in durable cover(s) with contents conveniently organized and properly indexed. F. Make Submittals on all work contained in Division 16, Electrical, at one time except by special permission. 1.05 INTENT: A It is intended that the Contractor provide a complete and operating electrical system including all incidental items and connections necessary for proper 15010-2. operation or customarily in uded even though each and every item may not be ' indicated. B. The Drawings indicate the general layout requirements for equipment, fixtures, ' conduit, devices, etc. Final layout will be governed by actual field conditions with all measurements verified aS the site. C. Conduit and wiring shown' on the Drawings are diagramatic unless noted ' otherwise, and are intended {o indicate switching and branch circuit arrangements, phase balance, and general wiring connection requirements. D. It is intended that the electrical installation be safe, reliable, energy efficient, and easily maintained with adeq uate provisions for access to equipment. E. It is intended that the electrical system operate quietly with noise levels below the criteria recorrrnended for the application by NEMA. Provide corrective action as required to reduce objectional hum or vibration. Acoustically insulate between outlet boxes in common wall serving different rooms. F. The Drawings indicate diagramatically the number and function of the conductors required for the conduit rou4ting as shown. The Contractor has the option of changing the routing or combining circuits' in one conduit run, providing the installation does not interfere with work of other trades, the system functions as intended, the ampacity of th6 conductors is derated in accordance with the NEC, and none of the loads require a dedicated circuit. Indicate actual conduit routing and conductor arrangement bn record drawings Indicate actual conduit routing and conductor arrangement on record drawings. G. Lighting and general purpose 20 ampere branch circuits may share a common neutral, providing each branch circuit is derived from a different phase leg. Isolated ground circuits and those served with ground fault circuit breakers must have their own neutral H. "Home runs" are indicated n the Drawings. with arrows from the branch circuit outlets pointing in the general direction of the panelboards to which they conned, complete with the panelboard and circuit designations. Continue "home runs" to the designated panelboards as though the conduit runs were shown in their entirety. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: A. Furnish only new standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of said products. 16010-3 B. Support all products by service organizations with adequate spare parts inventory and personnel located reasonably close to the site. C. Where multiple units of the same type or class of products are required, provide all units of the same manufacturer. 2.02 PRODUCT HANDLING: A Store products in the original containers and shelter in a suitable environment at an approved location. B. Make products readily accessible for inspections and inventory accounting. 2.03 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS: A For products specified by generic reference standard, select any product meeting such standard. ' B. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, select any named. Submit request for substitution of any product or manufacturer not specifically named and obtain approval prior to bidding. C. Provide all information required to support claim of "equality" of product proposed for substitution. Substitutions will be considered only if equivalent in quality, efficiency, performance, size, weight, reliability, appearance, and ease of maintenance to the specified product or manufacturer. D. Where approved product substitutions after the design, space requirements, electrical requirements, connections, cooling loads, or etc., include all work necessary to provide a complete installation of quality equal to or better than that which would have been achieved with products of manufacturers as specified. 2.04 PRODUCT APPLICATION: A Furnish products that are UL listed for their intended use and environment. For example, use only raintight products suitable for wet locations when installed outdoors or where indicated on the Drawings to be weatherproof (WP). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURERS DIRECTIONS: A Handle, install, connect, test, and operate all products, assemblies, and systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. In case of conflicting requirements between the manufacturer's directions and the contract Documents, obtain instructions before proceeding with the work. 16010-4 3.02 I NSPECIIONS: A. Arrange with the Admin obtain approval prior to B. Give adequate notice be representatives. Obtain 3.03 CLEANING: A Keep the premises dean B. Upon completion of the v 3.04 W RKMANSHIP: A No person shall perform E Arkansas State Master or Examiners Board. All el supervised by a Master or B. Perform all work in ac "neat" installation by licensed. Authority for inspections of all work required and ing or proceeding with the work concealing any work for inspections by the Owner's uctions to proceed before concealing the work free from debris, dirt, and etc. C II II 11 dean and polish all fixtures, equipment, and etc. ' ical work on the contract without possessing an eyman License from the Arkansas State Electrical al work and apprentice electricians. shall be neyman Electrician on a one to one ratio. with the best practices of the trade and provide a is skilled in their respective trades and properly C. Accurately install conduit, ad other equipment plumb, level, and true to line with runs parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Make bends or offsets uniform. D. Carefully perform all cutting, drilling, digging, and etc., and patch or refinish the disturbed area to the condition of adjoining or similar surfaces in an approved manner. Do not cut any structural member without specific approval. Do not cut any electrical or mechanical lines that may be concealed. E. Conceal conduit in chases, Flush mount equipment wt 3.05 FLAME AND SMOKE CONSIDEF or above ceilings unless indicated otherwise. vn in finished walls where possible. A In ducts or other enclosures used for transporting environmental air, including return air plenums above ceilings, use only products conforming to NFPA and UL composite classifications not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed ratings, or install in conduit or approved enclosure. This requirement applies to all materials including signal cable insulation jackets, finishes, and etc. 16010-5 II II I I I I I Li B. Completely seal penetrations made through fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, t floors, or other barriers for the passage of conduit with a UL listed material to preserve the fire/smoke rating of the barrier. ' 3.06 COORDINATION: A Coordinate the electrical work with the work of related trades to avoid ' interferences. Determine the exact route of conduit prior to fabrication and the exact location of each outlet and equipment enclosure prior to installation. B. Study the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings, and Specifications including Shop Drawings and manufacturer's technical data sheets, and compare to actual site conditions and constraints. In case of conflicts or interference, obtain clarification or instructions before performing any work. C. Piping or equipment requiring slope or specific mounting elevations will generally have right of way over conduit and other products whose elevations can be changed. D. Carefully plan the sequence of work as required to minimize disruptions and installation time. 3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A Make all required electrical connections to each item of equipment shown or specified including equipment furnished by Owner, and make operational. ' 3.08 PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS: A Locate existing utility lines and adequately identify and protect during the execution of the work. B. Protect public and private property against damage. C. Protect all work including building finishes against damage due to dirt, water, chemicals, frost, heat, handling, theft, and etc. Keep openings in conduit and equipment dosed with suitable plugs or caps during installation. D. Provide necessary warning devices, barricades, or coverings required for safety around exposed "live" parts or high temperature surfaces. 3.09 CHASES AND OPENINGS: A Provide templates or details for chases and other openings required through floors, walls, ceilings, and etc. to accommodate conduit. 16010-6 B. Provide any necessary refinish as directed. 3.10 PAI NT1 NG: A Paint conduit, equipment, surfaces as directed. or drilling for required openings, and patch and etc. exposed in finished areas to match adjacent B. Paint conduit flat black, or a directed, if visible through grilles or other openings. C. Paint all exposed conduit a equipment on outside of building or in equipment rooms for uniform appearance or identification as directed. - D. Paint plywood backboards used for mounting equipment prior to installing equipment. E. Touch-up scratches in the surface. 3.11 TESTING AND ADJUSTING: A Test the completed electric connections, and improper finished surfaces with an approved paint to match systems and prove free from short circuits, poor B. Maintain on the premises al first Bass voltmeter, ammeter, milli-ohrrrneter, and meggar insulation tester in proper calibration and provide test measurements as required. 1. Meggar all 600 volt dated wiring at 1000 volts minimum before applying power. Prove resistance in excess of 10 megohms. 2. Test metal conduit acid grounds for continuity and prove resistance less than one ohm to farthest outlet from system ground. 3: Test system ground to earth per the NEC. C. Align, adjust, calibrate, and test all systems to assure safe and proper operation D. Verify proper taps on motors and transformers for rated performance. 3.12 POST CONSTRUCTION A Deliver special tools, and maintenance of the electric B. Deliver spare parts as or:on the Drawings. her products necessary for proper operation and systems. for under other Electrical Sections contained herein 16010-7 I1 I C. Submit Project Record Documents indicating all changes from the Contract Documents made during construction. D. Submit Certificates of Final Inspections from the Administrative Authority. E. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals covering all phases of equipment and systems provided. Include complete spare parts data with current prices and sources of supply. Include copy of manufacturing data sheets and shop drawings required in pre -construction submittals. IF. Submit extended warranties in excess of the standard one year warranty where required by other Electrical Sections contained herein or on the Drawings. 3.13 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER A Provide competent instruction to Owner's personnel covering operation and maintenance of all electrical systems. Provide specialized instruction by manufacturers technical representatives when required. ' 3.14 GENERAL WARRANTY: IA Warrant the electrical installation against defects in products and/or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. ' B. Provide all labor, replacement parts, services, transportation, and incidental costs necessary for the proper operation of all electrical systems during the warranty period, C. Make good any damage to the building or grounds or other equipment resulting from defects in products and/or workmanship during the warranty period. END OF SECTION 16013--8 RACEWAYS SECTION 16110 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 VIORK INCLUDED: A Conduit and fittings B. Wreways C. Sleeves D. Seals 1.02 RELATED V1ORK A Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements B. Section 16120 Wres. and Cables C. Section 16190 Supporting Devices D. Section 16195 Electrical Identification E. Section 16450 Grounding 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturers data sheets on each manufactured assembly such as special fittings, modular sea s, fire -stop material; and etc. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A Use only materials that are JL listed for the application and that bear the UL label. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS: A Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): 1. Heavy wall steel pipe, hot dipped galvanized inside and out, and with ends factory threaded prior to galvanizing (except at terminations). 2. Use only steel or mat eable iron fittings. 16110-1 3. Use box connectors with "biting" type locknuts. Use insulated bushings where wire is larger than #8 AWS. Provide approved watertight hubs in wet locations. 4. Use threaded couplings or approved unions. 5. Use factory elbows, long sweep where possible. Provide watertight "LB" fittings with gasketed covers where required. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Intermediate thickness steel wall pipe, hot dipped galvanized inside and out, and with ends factory threaded prior to galvanizing (except at terminations). 2. Use only steel or malleable iron fittings. 3. Use box connectors with "biting" type locknuts. Use insulated bushings where wire is larger than #8 AW . Provide approved watertight hubs in wet locations. 4. Use threaded couplings or approved unions. 5. Use factory elbows, long sweep where possible. Provide watertight "LB" fittings with gasketed covers where required. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) (the term "conduit" also applies to EMT): 1. Zinc electroplated inside and out, and with threadless ends. 2. Use set screw type fittings where concealed in walls, ceilings, etc., and use watertight and concrete tight gland and ring compression fittings where exposed or in concrete. 3. Use box connectors with "biting" type locknuts. Use insulated bushings where wire is larger than #8 AWG. D. Non-metallic Conduit (NMC): 1. Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) electrical conduit with smooth straight ends. 2. Use couplings and connectors of same material as conduit, and joined with solvent -cement specifically manufactured for the purpose. 3. Use only RMC or IMC elbows with PVC-NMC adapters. PVC-NMC elbows are not acceptable unless specifically allowed on the Drawings. 4. Use PVC-NMC box connectors only where allowed, such as for floor boxes. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): 1. Electroplated steel tubing with extruded PVC jacket equal to "sealtight." 2. Use steel or malleable iron LFMC box connectors with insulated throats and a threaded grounding cone. F. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): 16110-2 1. Electroplated steel tubing equal to "Greenfield." 2. Use steel or malleable iron FMC box connectors with insulated throats and of type that threads into conduit convolutions. 2.02 WIREWAYS: A Provide wireways properly the Drawings. B. Provide wireways of code necessary hardware and a, 2.03 SLEEVES: A Provide Schedule 40 outside dimension of B. ' Provide integral waterstop 2.04 SEALS: A Where conduit penetrates as recommended by roofF B. Where conduit penetrates or provide modular rubber C. Use conduit sealing com sealing fittings to seal betti warm to cold spaces, as D. Use 3M "Fire Barrier" or sleeve through fire/smoke PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS: to accommodate the conductors or as shown on steel with baked enamel finish. Furnish all steel pipe sleeves sized to aocorrnnodate the on sleeves in outside walls. Af membrane, provide flashing assembly or pitch pan manufacturer. ;ide walls, make watertight with oakum and sealant al designed for the purpose. id equal to "Ductseal" or use approved modular conductors and conduit where conduit passes from as from the outside. grout to seal between the conduit and A Use RMC or IMC for the following applications: 1. Above grade and exposed outdoors 2. Wet locations 3. Risers from under slab or underground, including underground elbows 4. Locations subject to mechanical injury. B. Use EMT for above ground, inside, dry locations not subject to mechanical injury. 16110-3 C. Use NMC for underground or under slab only. D. Use LFMC for the final connection to motors, transformers and other adjustable or vibrating equipment exposed in finished areas or installed in wet or damp locations. E. Use FMC for the final connection to adjustable or vibrating equipment in dry, unfinished locations and to lighting fixtures and any other equipment in lay -in ceilings. I«'YY10S�f I•_,II[s] ; A Size raceways for the number, AWG, and type of conductors to be installed therein in accordance with the NEC. but no smaller than 3/4". B. Install conduit in standard 10 foot lengths except where a shorter section is required. Make required field cuts square and ream until all burrs are removed. Field cut threads required for RMC and IMC shall be coated with a high zinc dust content galvanizing repair compound with high electrical conductivity. C. Make field bends in EMT with an approved bending machine or device, and make free from kinks, dents, or flattened surfaces. Feld bends in RMC or IMC are not allowed. Do not exceed 90° in any individual bend nor exceed 360° of total bends or elbows in any one conduit run. D. Maintain at least 6 inches clearance between conduit and hot piping or equipment. E. Where conduit crosses a building expansion joint, provide a junction box on each side of the joint and connect with a slack section of FMC, or provide approved expansion fitting with integral ground jumper. F. The diameter of conduit installed in structural slabs shall not exceed 20% of the thickness of the slab, and shall be installed as dose to the center plane of the slab as possible. G. Provide sleeves for conduit through masonry or concrete walls, foundation walls, or concrete beams prior to laying up or pouring. Make wall sleeves flush with wall. H. Provide sleeves for conduit through structural slabs above grade prior to pouring. Make floor sleeves extend one inch above floor and seal watertight. For core drilled penetrations in existing floors, provide one inch angle rings or escutcheons set in sealant in lieu of floor sleeves. Where outlets serving different rooms are mounted back-to-back or side -by -side in the same wall, sound insulate the boxes from each other with batt insulation. If the boxes are connected to each other through conduit, seal the conduit (after wiring) with "Ductseal." 16110-4 J. The Drawings indicate dial conduit runs to acconma 3.03 EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS: A Where indicated on the C herein for future installatic B. Leave fish wire or rope in END OF SECTION atically branch circuits and feeders required. Install the wiring requirements. , provide empty conduit of types as specified or caoie. with proper labels attached. 16110-5 WIRES AND CABLES SECTION 16120 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Power wiring and connectors, 600 volts or less B. Control and signal wiring and connectors C. Miscellaneous materials 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 16010 B. Section 16110 C. Section 16190 D. Section 16195 E. Section 16450 1.03 SUBMITTALS: General Electrical Requirements Raceways Supporting Devices Electrical Identification Grounding A Submit Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of wiring connector proposed for use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER WIRING AND CONNECTORS: A Use single conductor annealed copper with 600 volt code type THHN or dual rated THHN/THWN insulation unless noted otherwise. Use type XHHW stranded copper wire for isolated power systems when indicated. B. Minimum wire size is #12 AWG. Mere developed distance from panelboard to first outlet exceeds 65 feet, increase minimum size to #10 AWG. C. #12 and #10 AWG wire used for lighting, receptacles, and other non -vibrating equipment may be solid conductor. Al other wiring including wiring connecting to motors, transformers, and special grounding systems shall be stranded conductor. D. Make splices required in #12 and #10 AWG solid conductor wire with insulated "Scotchlok" connectors. 16120-1 E. Make splices in all wire req ired to be stranded with approved gimp -on or bolted pressure connectors with s $ap-on or bolt -on insulated caps. F. The voltage and temperature ratings of the connector insulator shall be at least equal to that required of the conductor insulation. G. Furnish wire with color codif�g conforming to the following: Conductor 250V or Less Phase A Black Phase..B Red Phase.C Blue Neutral White Ground Green Color coding may be solid or' striped -colored insulation. Colored plastic tape may be used at terminations on #8 AWG and larger conductors with• black insulation. 2.02 CONTROL AND SIGNAL WIRINGIAND CONNECTORS: A Use stranded annealed copper conductors with insulation suitable for the purpose. B. For applications; 50 volts and greater, use #14 AWG minimum size conductorwith 600 volt insulation and approved for the application. C. For power limited wiring and less than 50 volts, use #18 AWG minimum size conductor except for multi -conductor cable recommended or required by the system manufacturer. D. For power limited wiring in it plenums, use type CLP, CMP or FPLR if not in conduit for signal, communication, or fire alarm, respectively. E. For power limited wiring not in air plenums and used for fire alarm and detection systems, use type FPL. F. Make splices required in #1 through #10 AWG wire with insulated "Scotchlok" connectors. G. Make slices required in #16 AWG and smaller wire with insulated crimp -on terminals screw connected to numbered terminal strips, or use approved cable connectors. I H. Provide RG-58U coax cable with type "F' connectors for TV cable where shown. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 16120-2 I A Where required, use wire lubricating compound suitable for the wire insulation and conduit and that does not harden nor become adhesive. Do not use on wiring for isolated power systems. B. Use plastic tape that is flame retardant and cold and weather resistant equal to Scotch #33. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Thoroughly dean conduit prior to pulling -in wires. Do not install wire until the ' raceway can be maintained in a dry condition. B. Use non-metallic pulling ropes attached to the conductors by means of woven basket grips or pulling eyes. Pull all conductors for a conduit run in together in such a manner as to avoid damage to the conductors, insulation, or conduit. ' C. Neatly train and nest multiple conductors and cables in boxes and enclosures and hold in place with 'tie -wraps." Where conductors terminate in panelboards, arrange conductors to be perpendicular or parallel to circuit breaker line-up. D. Make splices and terminations mechanically and electrically secure. Splices shall only be made in a suitable accessible junction box. E. Where multiple paralleled conductor make -ups are indicated on the Drawings for large feeders, the conductors shall be identical in length, gauge, code type, and etc., and shall be terminated exactly alike. END OF SECTION 16120-3 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 16130 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 VMDRK INCLUDED: A Junction and pull boxes B. Outlet boxes C. Enclosures 1.02 RELATED VVORK A Section 16010 Gener B. Section 16110 Racevi C. Section 16140 Wring D. Section 16190 Suppo E. Section 16195 Electril F. Section 16450 Groun 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturer's dat PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: A In dry locations, provide k enamel finish and with bol B. , In damp or wet locations, r gasketed covers. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES: A In dry locations, provide c concealed outlet boxes so Electrical Requirements g Devices Identification sheets on special enclosures. Kes of code gauge steel with galvanized or baked J or screw attached covers. )vide cast metal type FS or FD boxes with watertight boxes of code gauge galvanized steel. Install work is flush with finished surfaces with no gaps. 16130-1 B. In unplastered masonry walls, use 3 1/2" deep solid or sectional type boxes with square comers. C. For empty conduit system outlets, provide 4" square boxes with single gang adapter ring unless noted otherwise. D. For surface mounted lighting fixtures and equipment, provide 4" octagonal boxes with rings except where smaller boxes are required for fixtures or equipment. E. Provide Hubbell #8-2529 boxes for floor outlets. Furnish with flush bronze cover with flip lids or concentric plugs as applicable. Provide type of cover compatible with floor finish. F. Provide galvanized extension rings, plaster rings, fixture studs, and etc. as required by conditions. G. In damp or wet locations, provide cast metal type FS or FD boxes with gasketed covers and watertight flip lids as required by device. ' 2.03 ENCLOSURES: IA Provide code gauge steel enclosures with baked enamel finish as manufactured by Hoffman to facilitate the installation of multiple components such as small motor starters, contactors, equipment controls, and etc. B. Furnish with hinged door and captive fasteners. I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Properly size boxes in accordance with the NEC to accommodate the number and size of conductors and conduits entering the boxes. B. Size enclosures to adequately accomodate the equipment with space for wiring and maintenance. C. Provide junction or pull boxes to facilitate pulling or splicing of conductors so that no one conduit run will exceed the allowable bends of 360°. D. Outlet boxes installed in structural slabs shall be of the proper depth to avoid bends in conduit from the center plane of the slab. 16130-2 E. Al boxes shall be accessiblat all times. Provide approved access panels where required to maintain accessibility. F. Close any unused knockout or openings in boxes or enclosures with suitable caps or covers. END OF SECTION 16130-3 WRING DEVICES SECTION 16140 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Wall switches B. Receptacles C. Cover plates D. Power poles E. Lighting controls 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements B. Section 16130 Boxes and Enclosures C. Section 16190 Supporting Devices D. Section 16195 Electrical Identification 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturer's data sheets on each type of device proposed for use. PART 2- PRODUCTS: 2.01 WALL SIMTCHES: A Provide single pole, double pole, three way, four way, pilot light, and etc., toggle or key operated as indicated on the Drawings. B. Furnish switches of the mechanically silent type rated for 1201277 volts, 20 amperes, with fluorescent or incandescent loads. Use high capacity silver alloy for switch contacts. C. Furnish switches with ivory handles unless shown otherwise. Furnish emergency lighting switches with red handles. D. Furnish Hubbell Specification Grade Series HBL 1220 switches with screw terminals and an approved grounding device. 16140-1 2.02 i% IF RECEPTACLES: A For general use equal to Hubbell B. For ground fault circuit in side wired with test and Furnish device equal to C. Where hospital grade rec terminals and a steel ce grade receptacles with a Arrowhart Series 8300. receptacles, use NEMA 5-15R back and side wire, Grade Series 5252 for duplex and 5251 for simplex •(GFCI) receptacles, use NEMA 5-158, back and ishbuttons. Set trip point at 5 ma fault current. specification Grade Series GF 5252. les are indicated, use NEMA5-20R, with back wired support plate across the face. Identify all hospital n dot on the face and UL labeled as such. Provide D. Where safety type receptacles are indicated, use NEMA 5-158, with back wired terminals and a mechanical interlock device to prevent inserting object into only one ter mnal. Furnish device equal to Hubbell Series SG62. E. Where isolated ground receptacles are indicated, use NEMA 5-15R with ground terminal isolated from mounting plate. Identify isolated ground receptacles with an orange dot on the face and LJL labeled as such. Furnish device equal to Hubbell Series IG 5262. I F. Where dock hanger outlets re indicated, use NEMA 5-15R Specification Grade equal to Hubbell Series No. 5235. G. For special purpose recer type compatible with plug or better. H. Furnish receptacles with emergency power recept COVER PLATES: A Furnish cover plates equal unless shown otherwise. t switches. B. Gang groups of switches one continuous cover. 2.04 POWER POLES: A Where interior power poles aluminum power pole with for appliances or other equipment, provide NEMA iration of appliance. Furnish Specification Grade ( face plates unless shown otherwise. Furnish with red face plates. Sierra Series "P" plastic of color to match device face s ivory cover plates for red handle emergency lighting receptacles installed in multi -gang boxes under indicated, provide Hubbell type PPX-1 putty painted Series 5252 duplex pre -wired receptacles (unless 16140-2 special receptacle types are required) and separate low voltage section. Furnish all necessary accessories for the floor and ceiling types as applicable. 2.05 LIGHTING CONTROLS: A Where photo electric switches are indicated on the Drawings, provide Tork Specification Grade Series 2100 photo electric (PE) control with the following: 1. Adjustable light level control ranging from 2 footcandles (fc) to 50 fc. 2. 2000 watt rated at 120V or 277V. 3.5 year warranty. B. Where timers are indicated on the Drawings, provide Tork Model 0100 digital single circuit seven-day time control with reserve power, 120 volt operation with DPDT, 15 amp switching. C. Where incandescent wall dimmers are indicated, provide 120 volt rated solid state dimmers equal to the following Lutron Model Numbers for the stated capacities: 1. Single pole (one location) applications: a. NT 600 for 600 watts or less b. NT 1000 for 1000 watts or less c. NT 1500 for 1500 watts or less d. N 2000 for 2000 watts or less 2. Three-way (two locations) applications: a. NAB 600 for 600 watts or less b. NAB 1000 for 1000 watts or less c. NAB 1500 for 1500 watts or less d. NAB 2000 for 2000 watts or less PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Adjust switches and receptacles to mount flush and plumb. B. Provide cover plates that fit the devices securely and completely cover wall openings. Property fill and patch oversized wall openings. IC. Properly identify red emergency power receptacles with plastic nameplates or directly engraved in the red cover plate. Identify with the letters "EMERGENCY" and the "panelboard and circuit number" supplying them. 16140-3 D. For outlets of empty cc terminals, and etc., provii to be installed. Provide E. Adjust PE controls and directed. END OF SECTION systems such as telephone, television, computer er plates compatible with outlet and cabletconnector cover plates on all unused outlets. im timers to conform to Owner's use schedule as 16140-4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16170 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Fused and non -fused disconnect switches A Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements B. Section 16190 Supporting Devices C. Section 16195 Electrical Identification D. Section 16450 Grounding E. Section 16476 Fuses ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturer's data sheets on each type of disconnect switch proposed for ■ use. ait a ;ti�lfiZ 2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A For applications requiring 30-1200 amperes rating or for any two or three pole application, provide NEMA type "HD" (heavy duty) horsepower rated disconnects with enclosures suitable for the applications, such as NEMA 3R for outdoor installations. 1. Provide interlock to prevent door operating with switch in "ON" position. 2. Furnish with grounding block. 3. Provide for padlocking switch in "OFF' position. 4. Furnish with terminals UL listed for 75°C. wires. 5. Provide Class R, J, or L fuse provisions as applicable for fusible switches. Provide feature to reject Class H fuses. 6. Furnish with factory baked enamel finish. 16170- 1 B. For fractional horsepower 120 volt motors with integral overload protection, as well as other 120 volt equipment protected at 20 amperes or less, use specification grade single pole switch in outlet box with minimum ratings as follows: 1. Horsepower rated foi one horsepower 2. 120/277 AC volts 3. 20 amperes PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Provide disconnect switch for each fixed appliance or motor load indicated on the Drawings or required by the NEC. Install switch in sight of and within 50 feet rnaximum of equipment it serves. B. Generally, install 30 ampere or more rated switches with the top 5 feet above floor or grade. C. Install 20 ampere rated switches with center 4 feet above floor. END OF SECTION .16170-2 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16190 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Anchors B. Hangers and supports C. Plywood backboards D. Concrete bases 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements B. Section 16110 Raceways C. Section 16130 Boxes and Enclosures 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit for approval Contractors shop drawings indicating shape and dimensions of plywood backboards and concrete bases when necessary for clarity and coordination with other trades. PART 2- PRODUCTS: 2.01 ANCHORS: A Size anchors for minimum safety factor of two times recommended load. Use only corrosion resistant materials. B. In new concrete, use malleable iron inserts set prior to pouring concrete. C. In existing concrete or solid masonry, use Phillips "Redhead" expansion shields or Elcen self drilling expansion shields. Use power driven fasteners only for light loads and with specific approval. D. In hollow masonry, use steel toggle bolts. E. On structural steel, use approved beam damps or direct weld. F. In wood, use wood screws or lag screws or through -bolt with nuts and washers. 16190-1 G. In sheet metal, use self and nuts. H. In bar joists, use washers and nuts. 2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: sheet metal screws or machine bolts with washers hanger rod between bottom angles secured with A. For multiple conduit runs, use trapeze hangers consisting of P-1000 "Unistrut" channels with pipe damps I and steel hanger rods where suspended. Anchor "UnistruV' to wall where multiple runs are wall mounted. B. Support individual conduits with malleable iron one -hole conduit damps, steel two -hole pipe straps, or split ring steel conduit damps. Wire, perforated iron strap, or steel one -hole damps wi I not be acceptable. C. For free standing boxes and enclosures, provide steel angle frame constructed to prevent any strain on cond ,its entering box. D. Support conduit through E. Support conduit on flat roof damped to conduit, or a manufacturer. F. Support outlet boxes -oc damped to ceiling grid to with steel riser damps. 4"x4"x2' redwood blocks with steel straps loosely supporting assembly approved by the roofing in lay -in ceilings with approved bar hangers any weight from bearing on ceiling tile. G. Where hospital grade receptacles or multi -gang outlet boxes occur in metal stud walls, provide "caddy bar" Banger spanned between studs with each outlet box securely bolted to bar handler. Single outlet boxes (except for hospital grade receptacles) may be attached to the steel stud with approved spring steel brackets. H. Support lighting fixtures gauge galvanized steel Support conductors in supports. Support r "tie -wraps." 2.03 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS: A. Use softwood plywood for the intended applic other equipment located in lay -in ceilings with #12 rr wire attached to opposite comers of fixtures. .. raceways with approved split -wedge type cable conductors with approved cable damps and rming to PS -1 of the American Plywood Association Generally, provide 3/4" thickness for backboards. 16190-2 Ii 2.04 CONCRETE BASES: I A Provide concrete bases for floor mounted equipment indicated on the Drawings and all exterior equipment mounted on grade. Use proper cement/sand mix to achieve strength of 3000 psi after 28 days. B. Provide steel reinforcing bars as required and provide proper ties and support during pouring. C. Provide properly sized anchor bolts held in position with templates. Where anchor bolts cannot be held in sufficient alignment, provide adjustable bolts in pipe sleeves. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations but sized to accommodate at least twice the actual load. Oversized holes that may weaken the installation will not be acceptable. I B. Support all boxes and equipment enclosures directly by the building structure independently of the conduit. IC. Support conduit independently by the building structure at intervals complying with the NEC. Do not support conduit from piping, ductwork, or suspended ceiling hangers. D. Support conduit without sagging to provide drainage of condensation. I E. Permanently and securely support conduit, boxes, and enclosures before installing any wring. IF. Provide plywood backboards for all equipment mounted to masonry or concrete walls. Provide backboards for any type wall for installation of multiple enclosures or products such as contactors, timers, motor starters, automatic controls, ' telephone equipment, and etc. Generally, size backboards to accommodate the equipment plus a 3" border on all sides. ' G. Establish sizes of concrete bases required to accommodate equipment. Generally, make bases extend 3" larger than equipment on all sides. Prior to pouring on ' existing slab, set steel re -bar dowels in holes drilled in existing slab for proper anchorage of base. Install near each comer and at other intervals not to exceed 24 inches. Trowel finish and rub smooth. Form edges with 3/4" chamfer. END OF SECTION I 16190-3 I ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16195 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Equipment nameplates B. Name tags C. Circuit directories D. Utility marker tape E. Self -adhering labels F. Wire markers 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 16010 Gener 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit for approval, Manul device. B. Submit for approval, a sch 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A Approved manufacturers a PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES: A Identify each major compor on the Drawings with engr equal to Seton Style 2060. 1. Furnish with white le requirements. Electrical Requirements data sheets on each manufactured identifying of nameplates to be affixed to each item Seton and Brady. and controller (except light switches) as it is named J nameplates made from laminated plastic sheets on black background except for other color coded 16195-1 I 2. Provide appropriate size nameplates with information easily readable. Generally, furnish 3/4" high nameplates with 3/8" letters for major equipment such as switchboards, panelboards, transformers; and 1/2" high nameplates with 1/4" letters for minor equipment such as disconnect switches, ' contactors, starters, emergency power receptacles and etc. B. Identify entry location of each underground utility by providing an engraved brass ' nameplate equal to Seton Style EBS permanently attached on the outside wall directly above conduit where it enters building. •' 1. Furnish 1" high nameplate of .025" or greater thickness. 2. Indicate the type of utility such as "electric service entrance" or "telephone ' service entrance." 2.02 NAMETAGS: A Identify each outlet box of empty conduit system by affixing a write -on vinyl nametag equal to Seton Style PTOB to each end of pull wire installed in each ' conduit. Indicate purpose of empty outlet box such as "telephone" with location of pull wire termination such as "main terminal board." ' B. Identify conductors terminated in junction box or outlet box intended for future connection. Provide write -on vinyl nametags indicating panelboard and circuit number or location of source. I 2.03 CIRCUIT DIRECTORIES: A Fill out circuit directory cards for cardholder slots inside panelboard doors. Provide typewritten directory indicating function and location served for each circuit used. ' B. Identify undesignated spare circuit breakers by writing the word "spare" in soft pencil in the blank for that circuit number. Leave blank the description line for uninstalled circuit breakers (spaces). ' C. Identify circuits feeding battery backup emergency or exit lighting fixtures. ' 2.04 UTILITY MARKER TAPE: A For all conduit or direct burial cable installed underground and outside of building, ' provide continuous plastic tape directly above underground services. B. Provide orange or red tape with contrasting letters at regular intervals equal to Seton No. 210 Series. C. For multiple underground conduit runs, provide two strips of marking tape: one over each outside conduit. 1 16195-2 2.05 LABELS: A Identify each junction box and conduit exposed in equipment rooms or accessible above lay -in ceilings or behi Ind access doors with permanent self -adhering orange labels equal to Seton "Opti-Code.". B. Indicate voltage Bass such as "120/208 volts" or the type of signal cable installed therein such as "telephone. j C. 0 SI Provide permanent self or other equipment enc wire markers on each conductor in panelboards Indicate the circuit number or terminal number to which the wire is connected. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLA11ON: A Attach nameplates with a enameled surfaces only. surfaces. B. Where shown, identify er number supplying them C. Install nameplates identi D. Attach nametags to pull method. E. Install typewritten circuit F. Install continuous strip of ut it is identifying. Do not ba G. Install identifying labels on other intervals not to excel H.- Install wire markers so that END OF SECTION adhesive on plastic surfaces and factory baked nameplates with proper screws on all other system receptacles as to panelboard and circuit utility service entrance 6" above finished grade. or conductors with nylon cord or other approved tories in appropriate card slots. r marker tape 12" above conduit or direct burial cable ill to grade until tape installation is approved. nduit where it enters or leaves a wall or floor and at 20 feet. 16195-3 is easily visible. II GROUNDING SECTION 16450 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Equipment grounding and bonding B. System grounding C. Transformer secondary grounding 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements B. Section 16110 Raceways C. Section 16120 Wires and Cables D. Section 16130 Boxes and Enclosures 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit certified test report of grounding electrode resistance. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: A Provide 518 inch x 10 feet "copperweld" ground rods and accessories as required to achieve proper system ground. 2.02 GROUNDING WIRES: A Provide insulated grounding conductors and jumpers sized in accordance with the NEC but no smaller than #12 AM. Identify with continuous green insulation or with green tape at each terrrrination. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Bond the entire metal raceway system including conduit, boxes, enclosures, equipment frames, motor housings, and etc. System to be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout installation. B. Bond grounding conductor to conduit at the entrance and exit from that conduit containing only the grounding conductor. GROUNDING 16450-1 I C. Install grounding jumper from connector bushings to equipment grounding bars. Bond grounding bars and hugs gs to housing, except where an isolated ground is indicated. D. Install separate grounding conductor nductor in all raceway systems. , E. Bond the grounding wires to each box and enclosure through which they pass, except where an isolated ground is indicated. F Where an isolated grounding (IG) system is indicated, maintain electrical isolation between the grounding conductors and the metal raceway system from the grounding terminals of IG receptacles back to the system grounding point. G. Install grounding electrode in accordance with the NEC. Prior to connecting to ' system, measure ground resistance under "normal dry weather" conditions. If the electrode to ground resistance is not less than 25 ohms, install additional grounding electrodes as required by the NEC to achieve specified minimum resistance. H. Establish the system ground (grounding bar) at the service entrance. Bond this bar to all of the following: 1. Metal raceway system. 2. Grounding conductors, including those for isolated grounding systems. ' 3. The service entrancelneutral conductor. Keep neutral conductors isolated from ground throughddut electrical system except at the system ground. 4. The grounding electrode. 5. Domestic water service pipe. Provide grounding jumper across water meter connections. 6. The building steel including steel reinforcing in concrete foundations and I steel frames as appli$able. I. Ground neutrals derived from dry -type transformers to building steel or domestic cold water pipe in accorda p ce with the NEC, and bond to the metal raceway system Keep neutral conductors isolated from ground throughout the transformer's secondary distribution system except at the derived source. ' END OF SECTION 1 I ROUNDING 16450-2 CIRCUIT BREAKER LIGHTING PANELBOARDS, 240 VAC MAX. SECTION 16471 PART I - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A. Branch circuit panelboards rated 400 amperes or less B. Circuit breakers and accessories 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 16010 Electrical Requirements B. Section 16190 Supporting Devices C. Section 16195 Electrical Identification D. Section 16450 Grounding 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturer's data sheets for each panelboard and each type of circuit breaker proposed for use. Submit schedule of engraved name plates and panelboard circuit directories. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A Approved Manufacturer's are Square D, I.T.E., GE, Challenger and Cutler -Ham rler for comparable and competitive product lines as applicable. Additions to existing panelboards shall be made with circuit breakers and accessories from the same manufacturer as the existing panelboard. I PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS: A Furnish with distributed phase sequence type bussing with approved plating. Provide plug -on or bolt -on circuit breaker connections as scheduled on the Drawings. B. Furnish with wiring terminals UL listed for 75°C and for copper wire. C. Enclose bus assembly in galvanized steel cabinet of required gauge and gutter sizes. Paint the outside of surface mounted cabinets to match the fronts. D. Provide "dead front" construction of code gauge steel with flush doors, concealed hinges, and flush cylinder tumbler -type locks. Key all panelboard locks in the building alike and also key like any existing panelboards where possible. CIRCUIT BREAKERS UGHTING PANELBOARDS 16471-1 E. For surface mounted cabin recessed cabinets, provide F. Provide solid neutral ti for a service entrance G. Provide a grounding I an isolated grounded H. Furnish panelboards with e scheduled on the Drawing: I. Provide molded case circuit type with trip indication an( on multi -pole breakers will r special breakers: 1. UL labeled "SWD" 2. UL Class A ground protection is requir provide fronts of same size as the cabinets. For rsized fronts to completely cover wall openings. block that is isolated from the cabinet unless used block that is bonded to the cabinet unless used for a main breaker (MB) or main lugs only (MLO) as 'reakers of quick -make, quick -break, thermal -magnetic common trip on all multi -pole breakers. Handle ties rt be accepted. Where required, provide the following duty) on breakers used for switching. circuit interrupter (GFCI) types where ground fault 3. Current limiting types with test button and interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS syrrvnetrical for use as main breaker for series connected rating applications. J. Rate each panelboard in equipment short circuit ratin MB or MLO is provided, ea' capacity (AIC). At the Contr be provided with lower rate combinations of the serie integrated equipment short xordance with UL Standard 67 for the integrated indicated on the panel schedules. Where a Standard i branch breaker shall have the required interrupting tor's option, a current limiting type main breaker may AIC branch breakers as long as the UL recognized connected interrupting ratings meet the required ircuit rating indicated on the panel schedules. K Panelboards shall be equal) to Square D type NQOD with circuit breaker types being Q0, Q1, Q2, Q4, IF, IlK, or II as applicable. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: I A. Mount panelboards with the top 6 feet above finished floor. B. Support and identify as sp : fled in "Related Work", Paragraph 1.02 contained herein. END OF SECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 116471-2 MOTOR STARTERS, FULL VOLTAGE SECTION 16481 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 N4ORK INCLUDED: IA Magnetic starters B. Manual starters ' 1.02 RELATED WORK A Section 16110 General Electrical Requirements B. Section 16130 Boxes and Enclosures C. Section 16190 Supporting Devices D. Section 16195 Electrical Identification E. Section 16450 Grounding ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A Submit Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of motor starter proposed for use. ' B. Submit complete wiring diagrams of each type of magnetic motor starter. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC STARTERS: A Provide full voltage AC magnetic starter equal to Square D aass 8536 for each integral horsepower motor, polyphase motor, or motor started by a remote or automatic device. With each starter, furnish the following: 1. 120 volt holding coil with fused control transformer. 2. Grounding lug. 3. "HAND -OFF -AUTO" (HOA) switch and pilot light. Provide remote START -STOP push buttons where shown. 4. Melting alloy overload heaters for each phase leg. Provide ambient compensated overload heaters when installed outdoors or other untenipered areas where required. 5. A minimum of one normally open (N.O.) and one normally dosed (N.C.) auxiliary contacts. 6. Enclosure suitable for the environment. When more than one starter is located together, provide one enclosure for the group of starters. ' B. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide AC combination starters equal to Square D Class 8538. Wth each combination starter, furnish all accessories called out in A.1 A.5 above, plus the following: 16481-1 I 1. Disconnect switch 2. Fuse dips 3. Enclosure suitable for the environment C. Where indicated on the Dra Lngs, provide AC two speed magnetic starters equal to Square D Class 8810 with form R3 decelerating relay/timer. With each two speed starter, furnish all items called out in Al through A6 above except furnish overload heaters for each seed. 2.02 MANUAL STARTERS: A For fractional horsepower, single phase, manually started motors, provide manual starter equal to Square D Gass 2510 with pilot light and melting alloy thermal unit. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A Size starters for nameplate for horsepower. B. Size overload heaters for r4ning overload protection based on nameplate amps, . motor service factor and ambient temperature. END OF SECTION 16481-2 LIGHTING FIXTURES SECTION 16510 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A Work under this section includes furnishing and installing lighting fixtures, lamps, and accessories. The terrn'fxtures" in this section shall pertain to lighting fixtures. 1.02 RELATED WORK: IA Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements B. Section 16190 Supporting Devices 1.03 SUBMITTALS: IA Submit manufacturer's data sheets complete with dimensions, mounting accessories, and photometric data for each type of fixture and lamp combination proposed for use. Include total connected fixture watts and power factor. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES: A Fixture housings shall be constructed in a manner to prevent sagging or warping. Housing, trim, and lens frame shall be true, straight, and parallel as designed. Interior light reflective finishes shall be white baked enamel with a minimum reflectance of 85%. Hinged doors on ceiling mounted fixtures shall operate smoothly without binding, and latches shall function easily without the use of tools. All fixtures shall be sealed or gasketed to prevent light leaks. Lenses shall be formed from 100% virgin acrylic with prismatic pattern unless noted otherwise. Lenses and louvers shall exactly fit the frame, and shall exhibit no signs of warping or sagging. B. Ballasts shall be certified by El Land carry the CBM label, and shall be high power factor with UL listing. Ballasts shall be sound rated "A". Provide single ballast for 1, 2,3, or 4 lamp fixtures and two ballasts for 4 lamp fixtures with dual level switching. Provide high efficiency low interference electronic ballasts unless shown otherwise. Ballasts shall operate reliably in ambient temperatures from 50-100°F and shall contain automatic reset thermal protection. Ballasts located in unheated spaces or outside shall operate reliably down to 0°F. Power factor shall be no less than 90%. LIGH11NG FIXTURES 16510 -1 ii C. Lamps shall be Sylvania, G.E., or Westinghouse. Fluorescent lamps shall be high efficiency,T8, color corrected, rapid start, unless noted otherwise. All lamps shall meet efficiency standards set forth in the National Energy Policy Act of 1992. D. Wring within the fixture sha I have insulation suitable for the voltage, current, and temperature to which the Conductors will be subjected. Lamp sockets shall conform to the applicable r �quirements of UL 542. E. Surface mounted fixtures all be UL listed for mounting directly to low density ceilings. Fixtures shall be furnished with hangers, stems, or spacers as required or as noted on the Drawing. All fixtures installed in damp or wet locations shall be approved and listed as Such. 2.02 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES: A Fixture construction, inclu and the NEC. All reoes; thermal protection device fixtures installed where it listed as type "I.C.". Re approved for through w accessories, trim rings; e installed in damp or wet li B. Incandescent lamps shall l: Reflector lamps shall have t installed in a manner that furnished with extended SE available. All lamps shall IT Energy Policy Act of 1992. 2.03 H.I.D. FIXTURES: 1 wiring, shall be in accordance with UL Standards fixtures shall be provided with an automatic reset I shall be UL listed as type "NON-I.C.". Recessed ition is within three inches of housing shall be UL sed fixtures shall be pre -wired to a junction box i and shall indude any bar hangers, mounting required to complete the installation. All fixtures ions shall be approved and listed as such. suitable for the fixtures in which they are installed. 3m patterns as scheduled on the Drawings. Fixtures All make lamp replacement inconvenient shall be ice lamps or lamps with the longest projected life at the efficiency standards set forth in the National A Fixture construction, indudifhg wiring, shall be in accordance with UL Standards and the NEC. All outdoor fixtures shall be listed as suitable for wet locations and shall indude all mounting accessories, poles, anchor bolts, brackets, and concrete bases for pole mounted fixtitires where indicated or required. B. Ballasts shall be CWA have a power factor of PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: apable of reliable starting down to -20°F and shall greater. ING FIXTURES 16510-2 I C 11 II II U L I U I A The Contractor shall study the finished conditions and shall furnish fixtures compatible with the type of ceiling in which they are to be installed including all required mounting accessories. The Contractor shall relocate any fixture which, after installation, is found to interfere with other equipment or is otherwise located to conflict with proper performance as intended. B. Final wiring connections to fixtures located in lay -in ceilings shall be through Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). Lay -in fluorescent fixtures shall be supported at all four comers directly from the structure above with #12 AWG galvanized steel hanger wire. Hanger wires may be attached to the fixture or to the ceiling T -bar grid system at the fixture comers. Where hanger wires are attached to the 1 -bar grid, provide approved dips to attach fixture to the grid. Recessed incandescent fixtures installed in lay -in ceilings shall be provided with bar hangers attached to the T -bar grid and supported with a minimum of two #12 AM galvanized steel hanger wires and shall support fixture with no force on the ceiling panels. Trim rings shall completely cover openings in ceiling panels. Exposed sides of surface mounted fixtures shall have no visible knock -out indentations. 3.02 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING: A Upon completion of the work, thoroughly dean and polish all fixtures inside and out, and dean all lamps. Adjustable fixtures shall be carefully aimed and positioned in the presence of the Architect. END OF SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES 16510-3